FANUC ROBODRILL α-T14iCe FANUC ROBODRILL α-T14iCLe FANUC ROBODRILL α-T14iCSe FANUC ROBODRILL α-T21iCe FANUC ROBODRILL α-T21iCLe

FANUC ROBODRILL α-T21iCSe OPERATOR’S MANUAL

B–85014EN/01

The model covered by this manual, and its abbreviation is :
Product Name FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14iCe (CLe, CSe) FANUC ROBODRILL α–T21iCe (CLe, CSe) Controller : A04B–0079–B241 A04B–0079–B251 FANUC Series 18i–MB Mechanical Unit : A04B–0079–B111 A04B–0079–B112 A04B–0079–B113 A04B–0079–B114 Abbreviation α–T14iCe (CLe, CSe) α–T21iCe (CLe, CSe)

S No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. S All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as “impossible”.

B–85014EN/01

PREFACE

PREFACE

1. INTENDED USE OF THE PRODUCT The FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe series are vertical drilling machine that operates under control of a CNC (computer numerical control unit). It can be used for drilling, tapping, and light milling. It should not be used for any other purposes. 2. DEFINITION OF USERS 2.1 Operator In this document, the term operator refers to a person who operates a machine. The operator must read this manual to understand the contents of the manual. If the operator uses the machine without understanding the contents of the manual, the operator or people around the operator may be in serious danger. The operator is not allowed to carry out any maintenance that involves : (1) Any work that becomes possible only after a cover whose removal requires a tool (fixed cover) is removed. (2) Installing the machine or moving it from one place to another 2.2 Person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance This person should have completed an advanced course at the FANUC Robomachine School or have the equivalent knowledge and should also be qualified by the company or organization to which that person belongs. The person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance must observe the cautions described below :
Cautions that Person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance must observe during maintenance
1. Before starting to remove a cover whose removal requires use of a tool (fixed cover), switch off the power to the machine. 2. Before switching on the power to the machine with its cover removed, make sure that nobody is beside the machine. 3. Before starting to run the machine with its cover removed, make sure that anything extraneous, like a tool, is not left in the machine. 4. When adjusting the machine electrically with is cover removed, be careful for shock hazards. Be sure to use electrically insulated tools (such as a plastic screwdriver). 5. The person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance shall not be engaged in replacement of any electrical components other than fuses and memory backup batteries. Only the maintenance engineer is allowed to replace such electrical components.

p–1

PREFACE

B–85014EN/01

2.3 Maintenance Engineer This person should have sufficient mechanical or electrical knowledge to be capable of maintenance and have also completed a maintenance course at the FANUC FA School or FANUC Robomachine School. Alternatively, the person should have the equivalent knowledge and should also be qualified by the company or organization to which that person belongs. Maintenance engineer are allowed to be engaged in : (1) Installing the machine and moving it from one place to another (2) Repairing the machine (such as replacing mechanical components, and electrical components requiring setting or adjustment after replacement) The maintenance engineer must also observe the cautions described above. Experienced maintenance engineer especially are alerted to accidents that may occur from negligence or carelessness. 3. ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL The model covered by this manual, and its abbreviation is :
Product Name FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14iCe (CLe, CSe) FANUC ROBODRILL α–T21iCe (CLe, CSe) Controller : A04B–0079–B241 A04B–0079–B251 FANUC Series 18i–MB Mechanical Unit : A04B–0079–B111 A04B–0079–B112 A04B–0079–B113 A04B–0079–B114 Abbreviation α–T14iCe (CLe, CSe) α–T21iCe (CLe, CSe)

The following manuals are related to this machine : (1) FANUC ROBODRILL a-T14iCe/T21iCe OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B–85014EN) : This manual. Describes how to operate and maintain this machine. (2) FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is–MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B–63534EN) : Describes how to operate numerical control (NC) units and how to prepare programs. (3) FANUC ROBODRILL a-T14iCe/T21iCe MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–85015EN) : Describes alarms, troubleshooting, and replacement of parts. (4) FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is– MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–63525EN): Describes troubleshooting and adjustment of NC units. Before using this machine, be sure to read the necessary part of manual (1). For daily handling or for reference, use manuals (1) and (2). Use manuals (3) and (4) for troubleshooting, replacement of parts, and adjustment of the machine. The NC unit used for this machine is an exclusive controller used for α–T14iCe/T21iCe.
p–2

B–85014EN/01

PREFACE

For the basic specification and the optional specification to which the NC unit is applicable, refer to the principal specification attached to this manual and the copy of the order specification. The description of manuals (1) and (3) has priority over that of manuals (2) and (4). When there are differences between the description of the manuals, the description in manuals (1) and (3) applies. This manual has the following contents : SAFETY PRECAUTIONS: I OUTLINE : Explains safety precautions, cautions, and warning labels of the machine. Description of what can be done with this machine. The names of the parts and the description of the equipment and devices used with this machine are given. II ROUTINE The flow of operation for machining is OPERATIONS : described. III DETAILED Each of the machining operations that can be OPERATIONS : done with this machine is described in detail. IV INSTALLATION : Instructions for initially installing or moving this machine are given. V MAINTENANCE : Routine inspection to be done daily before starting machining, periodic inspection, and replacement of the expendable parts are described. APPENDIXES : The principal specification, various figures and tables, and other useful information are compiled. Before using this machine for the first time, read Chapters I and II. If the machine has been installed yet, read Chapter IV. Also, before moving this machine, be sure to read Chapter V. Prepare a schedule for inspection and maintenance. Individual operation on this machine is described in Chapter III. For NC operation, however, refer to manual (2). In this manual the soft keys, the keys on the MDI operator’s panel, and the keys on the machine operator’s panel are indicated as shown below. (For details on each key, see Section 1–2). D Soft keys displayed on the bottom of the screen : Enclosed in [ ] (Example) [PARAMETER], [ALARM] D Keys on the operator’s panel (function keys, edit keys, and so forth) : Enclosed in < > (Example) <CANCEL>, <INPUT>

p–3

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B–85014EN/01

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Before using the machine, be sure to read this manual and understand the contents of the manual thoroughly. Using the machine with insufficient understanding can lead to an accident. First, read this chapter on safety (SAFETY PRECAUTIONS). After fully understanding the contents of this chapter, use the machine. 1. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE The ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe adopts a door interlock system that stops the machine when the door is open. This is to protect the operator from dangerous situations. The door interlock system consists of an electromagnetic lock switch, control circuit, and software. A light that lights the machining area can be installed inside the splash guard. The following provides an outline of the machine and the safety equipment.

s–1

B–85014EN/01

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Electromagnetic lock switch Fixed cover

Internal Light

Operator’s panel

Fixed cover

Window

Front door

Fixed cover

α–T14(21)iCe/iCLe

Electromagnetic lock switch Fixed cover

Internal Light

Operator’s panel Fixed cover

Window

Front door

Fixed cover

α–T14(21)iCSe

s–2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B–85014EN/01

(a) Electromagnetic lock switch The electromagnetic lock switch is installed in the upper part of the front door of the splash guard. When a door open operation is performed, the spindle and X–, Y–, and Z–axis operations stop. After the spindle and X–, Y–, and Z–axis operations have stopped, the door lock is released, allowing the operator to open the door. When the machine is delivered, a key to release the door lock is supplied with the machine. This key is used to open the door when the power supply is not connected to the machine. After installing the machine, keep the key in the maintenance section. Never hand this key to the operator, and never leave the key inserted in the machine. During machine operation, never open the door by using this key. (b) Fixed covers Fixed covers are installed around the movable part of the machine. 2. CAUTIONS When operating the machine, read specifications and other manuals on safety to ensure safety. a) Mechanical danger Handle workpieces with care. (1) Be careful with sharp edges and burrs of workpieces. A workpiece will have sharp edges and burrs especially after it is machined. Be careful not to get cuts when handling it. Wear a protector such as gloves for safety. (2) Fasten a workpiece onto a jig securely. When mounting a workpiece on a jig on the table, be sure to fix it to the securely. If not, the workpiece may come off the jig and fly away when it is machined. This is very dangerous. (3) Do not machine a flammable workpiece. Some workpiece are flammable. Do not process such workpieces on he cutting machine, or otherwise they may catch fire. (4) When mounting or dismounting a heavy workpiece, use a crane or the like. The crane or the like shall be used to lift anything that is apparently heavy (20 kg or more), cannot be held by hands, or you feel heavy when you try to lift it. Handle cutters with care. (1) When using or exchanging a cutter, be careful not to get cuts on its sharp edge. When handing a cutter, wear a protector such as gloves. (2) When disposing of cutters, observe any regulations and rules applicable to dangerous objects.

s–3

B–85014EN/01

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(3) A workpiece may be hot immediately after it is machined, and similarly a cutter may be hot immediately after it is used. If you touch such objects directly with your hand, you may get burned. This is true especially if no coolant is used when machining. Wear a protector such as heat–resistant gloves, as required. (4) Do not machine workpieces under such a machining condition that sparks are caused to fly. Check the machining condition, cutting fluid, material, and type beforehand. (5) Make sure that the cutter is fastened onto the securely. The cutter shall be neither worn out nor broken. (6) When mounting a tool on the turret, fasten it securely according to the applicable instructions. If a tool is mounted incorrectly, if may come off accidentally. Carefully handle cuttings. In handling cuttings, be careful not to hurt yourself. Wear protectors such as gloves. Be careful when operating the machine with the safety door (front door) open. The following manual operations are possible with the safety door open. D Movement along the X–, Y–, or Z–axis at 1.9 m/min or less D Additional axis movement at 600 degrees/min or less D Manual handle heed D Spindle rotation speed at 100 min–1 or less Do not get close to moving components such as table or turret when the safety door (front door) is open. Air blow operation can be turned on with the safety door open. When turning on air blow operation with the safety door open, wear safety goggles to protect the eyes from chips. Be careful not to slip on coolants or lubricants (grease or oil). (1) If a coolant or lubricant gets to your hand, immediately wipe it off with a rag. If the hand is dirty with a coolant or lubricant, it is very slippery. It is dangerous to operate the machine with such a slippery hand. (2) A floor with a coolant or a lubricant on it is very slippery. It can cause serious falls. It a coolant or lubricant spills over around the machine, immediately wipe it up. Make sure that metal chip are not accumulated at the coolant outlet on the rear of the machine or in the metal chip holder, so the coolant is not leaking.
s–4

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B–85014EN/01

b) Electrical danger When performing maintenance work, turn off the power. (1) Be sure to turn off the power whenever performing maintenance work. (2) After maintenance work, re–install all removed parts including screws. c) Thermal danger Always wear heat–resistant gloves when handling hot objects. A workpiece may be hot immediately after it is machined, and similarly a cutter may be hot immediately after it is used. If you touch such objects by hand, you may get burned. This is true especially if no coolant is used during machining. Some components of the machine can also get hot. Be careful not to touch them. When handling such hot objects, wear a protector such as heat–resistant gloves. The following machine components can get hot : (1) Servo motor of each axis (such as X–, Y–, Z–, and additional axes) (2) Spindle motor (3) Coolant motor (4) Power line (5) Heat generating sections (such as a transformer and heat sink) in the NC cabinet d) COOLANTS AND LUBRICANTS Do not inhale, or expose any part of the body to, coolants or lubricants (such as grease and oil). Coolants and lubricants are very bad for your health, if you inhale, or are exposed to, them. Take the following precautions. In case you should have inhaled or touched directly any coolant or lubricant, get the applicable treatment listed below.
Part of the body exposed Precaution Medical treatment

Respiratory organs Do not inhale vapor or mist. If you feel anything abnor(such as mouth and mal with your body, immedinose) ately see a doctor and receive medical treatment. Skin (especially Do not touch directly as If a coolant or lubricant gets one with a scratch much as possible. on your skin, wash it away or a wound) with tap water or soapy water. If you feel anything abnormal with your body, immediately see a doctor and receive medical treatment.

s–5

B–85014EN/01

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Part of the body exposed Mucous membrane (such as eyes)

Precaution

Medical treatment

Wear goggles to protect the If a coolant or lubricant gets eyes from any spattering in your eye, keep washing coolant or lubricant. the eye in sufficient running tap water for 15 minutes or longer. If you feel pain or anything abnormal with the eye, immediately see an ophthalmologist (eye doctor) and receive medical treatment. Be careful not to drink acci- If you have drunk a coolant dentally. or lubricant accidentally, do not try to vomit it up. Instead, see a doctor and receive medical treatment.

Digestive organs (such a mouth)

Handle coolants and lubricants (grease and oil) with care. (1) Do NOT use flammable coolants. Be careful that coolants and oil can catch fire even if they are not flammable. Pay sufficient attention to the condition and way that you use coolants and lubricants. (2) When storing coolants and lubricants, handle them in the same way as other petrochemical products. When disposing of them, observe any regulations and rules applicable to industrial wastes. (3) Coolants become very harmful, when they get rotten. Before a coolant gets rotten, exchange it with a new supply. If a coolant is rotten, stop using it immediately, and exchange it with a new supply. (4) When handling coolants and lubricants, observe the instructions from the manufacturers. NOTE With the ROBODRILL, nitrile rubber (NBR), hydrogenerated nitrile rubber (HNBR), and fluororubber are used as shielding and protection materials. Do not use a coolant that can swell nitrile rubber (NBR), hydrogenerated nitrile rubber (HNBR), and fluororubber. Do not use a strong coolant that can peel off coating.

s–6

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B–85014EN/01

Use recommended lubricant. The following lubricants are recommended:
Brand ALVANIA GREASE NO. 1 ALVANIA GREASE NO. 2 MULTEMP LRL NO. 3 MOLY HD GREASE MOLYSPEED GREASE NO. 1 ARCANOL L74V ANTIRUST P- 1000 ANTIRUST P- 3600 Super MULPUS 68 UNIWAY 68 Mobil Vactra Oil No.2 TETOLA OIL 68 Tonna Oil T68 FEBIS K68 Mobil Oil corp. SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. EXXON Nisseki Mitsubishi KYODO YUSHI SUMICO Manufacturer SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K. K. Component to be lubricated GUIDE RAIL TURRET GEAR SPINDLE NOSE GEAR BALL SCREW (X, Y, Z) SPINDLE TOOL CLAMP SPRINGS TURRET MECHANISM INSIDE SPINDLE BEARING GUIDE RAIL (X, Y, Z) TAPERED PORTION OF THE SPINDLE TABLE SURFACE GUIDE RAIL (X, Y, Z) BALL SCREW (X, Y, Z) When exchanging Tool clamp springs When overhauling Turret mechanism When exchanging Spindle bearings At the time of packing, transportation, and storage. Timing of application At the time of maintenance

SUMICO FAG Nisseki Mitsubishi

Replenish when the leavings in the pump becomes scarce.

s–7

B–85014EN/01

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Use recommended coolant. The following coolants are recommended:
Type Manufacturer Nisseki Mitsubishi IDEMITSU KOSAN CO. LTD. Oily SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. Mobil Oil Corp. NIPPON OIL COMPANY IDEMITSU KOSAN CO. LTD. Water–soluble SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. MOBIL OIL CORPORATION Yusiro Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Brand UNICUT TG20 DAPHNE CUT AS–25F SPEED SC22A Bakumaru 15J UNISOLUBLE HD–M UNISOLUBLE HD DAPHNE MILCOOL SD DROMUS OIL EPL MOBIL MET 150 MOBIL MET 150 Yusiroken EZ20

Even when recommended coolant is used, it may adversely affect machine parts or coating depending on how the coolant is used. Therefore, use coolant carefully. When using coolant other than recommended coolants, pay special attention to use conditions and a method. Some coolants may adversely affect the human body, machine, and/or environment. Be careful not to cause a fire. (1) Do not machine workpieces under such a machining condition that sparks can be caused to fly. The operator shall check the machining condition, cutting fluid, workpiece material, and cutter type beforehand. (2) Do not machine flammable workpieces. Some workpieces are mode of flammable materials. Before machining a workpiece, check its material. (3) Pay attention to coolants and oil. Do NOT use flammable coolants or oil. Be careful that coolants and oil can catch fire even if they are not flammable. Pay sufficient attention to the condition and way that you use a coolant or oil. (4) Keep combustible and flammable substances away from the machine. Do not place flammables (such as paint thinner or gasoline) around the machine. Moreover, do not use a spray around the machine. (5) Get a fire extinguisher on hand in the event of a fire. e) Danger due to unreasonable forms When installing the machine, provide service access clearances. When installing the machine, provide service access clearances. When ascending to a high place, secure a footing.
s–8

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B–85014EN/01

When mounting or dismounting a 20–kg or heavier workpiece or machine component, use a crane or the like. Use a crane or the like to lift anything that is apparently heavy, cannot be held by hands, or you feel heavy when you try to lift it. Do not work in an unnatural posture. It is dangerous to work in an unnatural posture, reaching out to mount or dismount a workpiece on the table when it is far away from you. When working with a workpiece on the table, bring the table sufficiently toward you beforehand so that you can work safety. When working in a high place, use a ladder, and secure a footing. When working in a high place, use a ladder, and secure a footing. f) CLOTHING Always wear safe clothing when working. Wear protective clothing. Always wear a cap when working. Long hair can be caught in machines. This is very dangerous. Besides, long hair narrows your field of vision. Always wear a cap when working. Always wear safety shoes when working. Wear safety shoes to protect the feet if anything drops on them. When handling a cutter, workpiece, or metal chips, wear gloves. A machined workpiece has sharp edges and burrs. Be careful not to get cuts when handling it. When using or exchanging a cutter, be careful not to get cuts on its sharp edge. When handling metal chips, be careful not to get cuts. g) Cautions on power supply, instability, and functional impairment Pay attention to the storage and packing methods. When storing or packing the machine, observe the following: (1) Secure the spindle top and table with fastening materials for transportation. (2) Apply rust resisting oil to portions that may rust.
s–9

B–85014EN/01

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(3) Secure the turret mechanism with nylon bands. For details, see the chapters on the storage and packing methods in this manual. When lifting the machine, pay attention to the capacity of the crane used. When lifting the machine, pay attention to the balance of the machine. Also, pay attention to the capacities of the crane and hook. Machine weight: α–T14/21iCe 2000 kg α–T14/21iCLe 2100 kg α–T14/21iCSe 1950 kg Do not handle the operator’s panel or display unit with your hands in gloves. If you handle the operator’s panel or display unit with your hands in gloves, you may press the wrong key or more than one key at a time, possibly causing the machine to run incorrectly or damaging the workpiece, cutter, or even the machine. When pressing the keys on the operator’s panel, do not wear gloves. Install the machine on a flat, secure floor. The floor on which the machine is to be installed shall: (1) Withstand a load of 2 t without raising a problem (such as deformation). (2) Be flat, with no projection or dent. (3) Be hard, without being deformed under a pressure of 1.5 Mpa (15 kgf/cm2). (4) Be smooth. (5) Not deteriorate with time. (6) Not deteriorate in an environment for everyday operation. If the machine is installed in a place not meeting any condition above, a failure can occur, possibly resulting in a dangerous situation. Besides, it is impossible to make the most of the machine. Perform inspections and maintenance to ensure safety. Inspections Perform the following inspections periodically: * Check that the cutter is attached to the arbor securely to allow normal machining. The cutter must be free from wear and breakage. * If the jig is defective, a workpiece may come off. Check that the jig is free from defects. * When a hydraulic or pneumatic device is installed in the jig, check whether appropriate pressure is supplied. If the pressure is too low, a proper clamping force cannot be applied, which allows the workpiece to come off the jig. If the pressure is too high, the hydraulic or pneumatic device is damaged, and so the jig does not work.
s–10

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B–85014EN/01

* Check that the leveling bolt is not floating from the mount. * Press the emergency stop button to check that the machine stops normally. * Check that when a tool change is performed at a position where no tool is present, an alarm is issued. * Check that the Z–axis brake functions normally. Check that the amount of the displacement on the Z–axis between before and after the emergency stop button is pressed is 0.1 mm or less. * Check that the door is locked. * Check that the bolts fastening the fixing covers are tightened securely. * Check that machine operation is not obstructed by accumulated cuttings. * Check that cuttings accumulated at the exit of the coolant in the rear part of the machine or in the receptacle of cuttings do not cause coolant to leak out. Maintenance Perform the following maintenance operations periodically: * Greasing the gear at the end of the spindle and turret gear: Every 200 operation hours * Greasing the LM guide block: Every 1000 operation hours * Greasing the ball screws: Every 1000 operation hours * Greasing the LM guide of the turret: Every 2000 operation hours * Replacing the coned disc spring: Every 1,000,000 times of tool change * Central lubricating device (optional): Add oil when the oil level in the pump is low. For details, see the chapter on maintenance in this manual. Before opening the safety door, make sure that the Z–axis dose not come down. The Z–axis (spindle head) comes down once in a while because of the defective Z–axis brake failing to work. Before opening the safety door, make sure that the Z–axis does not come down. When the safety door is open, be careful that the Z–axis may come down. While working underneath the Z–axis, place a wooden block between the table and spindle head so that the Z–axis will not come down even if the brake fails to work. Fix a tool on the turret securely. When fixing a tool on the turret, observe the applicable instructions to fasten it tightly. If a tool is fixed incorrectly, it may come off accidentally. Be careful when opening the safety door with the power switched off. When opening the safety door with the power switched off, observe the following :
s–11

for maintenance with the fixed cover removed. inside the cabinet. the Z–axis falls. If it is removed. Do not switch on the power with a fixed cover removed. When replacing maintenance parts. The operator shall not open the NC cabinet door. re–install all removed parts including screws. If the machine is provided with an automatic door option. hence shock hazards. exercise care. the safety door is disconnected from the drive unit. When replacing maintenance parts. for example.) s–12 . Before switching on the power after maintenance. switch of the power to the machine. the power must be off.B–85014EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (1) Make sure that the spindle is not rotating by inertia. the following may occur : D Danger of contacting with objects rotating or moving at high speed D Chance of a broken cutter or workpiece flying D Change of a cutting chips flying D Chance of a coolant spattering out of the machine D Chance of noise leaking Do not switch on the power to the machine when a fixed cover is removed. Before removing the fixed cover. be sure to fasten the spindle top and table securely with packing materials. attach the fixed cover. Be careful not to be caught with the automatic door when working. There are objects rotating or moving at high speed inside the fixed cover. the machine will not operate normally. maintenance engineers and servicepersons having accurate knowledge and competence for the applicable maintenance items should do this maintenance. if the Z–axis motor is removed without fastening the spindle top and table with packing materials. Before removing the Z–axis motor. (2) Make sure that the Z–axis (spindle head) does not come down. During replacement. There are high voltages. use a specified method to replace the parts properly. Therefore. If the power is switched off when the spindle is rotating. resulting in excess force being applied to it. The Z–axis motor has a built–in brake. Be careful not to be caught with an automatic door. If it is necessary to run the machine. it will keep rotating by inertia because it is no longer under control. (Should you be caught with the automatic door. If a replacement is not performed properly. After completing replacement. The operator shall not remove a fixed cover. the safety door is opened and closed automatically by program.

Avoid using the bowl in such an atmosphere that can deteriorate polycarbonate. for example. This warning label is on a door or other sections of the NC cabinet. This warning label is on the turret cover. the inside of the machine becomes full of mist. Be aware of a tool on the turret or spindle head. Do not use organic solvents or the like. apply a lubricant to the surfaces of the telescopic covers by spraying or a similar method. Any person other than the serviceperson shall not touch cables or metal parts around the label. When approaching the table to exchange a workpiece. This will assure rust prevention and smooth sliding. Keep all warning labels visible. Otherwise. Bowl of the regulator The bowl of the regulator is made of polycarbonate. pull the table towards you. Do not stain. Stay away from the turret. s–13 . WARNING LABELS Warning labels have been attached where special care is required during daily operation. There are hazards from electrical shocks. Top cover When using the cover to fully cover the entire machine. scratch.SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–85014EN/01 h) Other cautions Telescopic covers on the x and y axes When leaving the machine unused for a long period of time. During operation. 3. or remove a warning label. which results in a failure. always use a mist collector. the turret may suddenly rotate or the spindle may be lowered. The labels posted on the machine are described below. If it is intended for dry cutting (cutting without using any coolant).

Even when the power to the machine is switched off. if it is equipped with the automatic door (option). Do not go inside the machine. (JAPAN and export standard) Be careful not to get caught with the automatic door. * If a warning label is missing. This warning label is on the front surface of the machine. or the Z–axis may drop because of a defective brake.B–85014EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Before opening the safety door. The automatic door (option) may move suddenly by program. the spindle may be rotating by inertia. request one from a nearby FANUC service station or dealer. make sure that the machine is not running. s–14 . This warning label is on the front surface of the machine.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1. . . . . . .1 2. . . . . .4. . . . . . . . REMOVING THE EYEBOLTS FOR LIFTING THE MACHINE . . . . . .1 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1 I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 4 5 8 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 ENTERING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS . . 1. . . . . .2 Cabling and Phase Matching . . . . . JIGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 PREPARATION BEFORE TRANSPORTATION . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLATION 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MACHINE . . . . OPERATOR’S PANEL .2 Switching between the QUICK Screen and CNC Screen . . . . . . .2 1. . . . . . . CHECKING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS . . . . 14 19 20 20 20 4. . . . . . . . . .1 3. Setting of Input Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRANSPORTATION . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 INSTALLING LEVELING BOLTS AND BLOCKS . . . 9 10 12 13 3. . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . 24 31 32 II. .4. . . . Arrangement of the Letter Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIEW AND COMPONENTS OF THE OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 SCREEN SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BASIC OPERATIONS . . . . 42 43 44 45 46 46 50 c–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CNC Screen Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . . . . . TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . PART NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . USE OF THE MACHINE . . . . . .B–85014EN/01 Table of Contents PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE PACKING PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . .2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTING THE POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 38 39 41 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTROLLER RACK . . . . .1 22 22 5. . 7. . .1 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COOLANT SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROUTINE OPERATIONS 1. . . . . . . RESTARTING AUTOMATIC RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . .2 4. . . . . . .10 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 AIR SUPPLY SHUTOFF METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SWITCHING POWER OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. . . . . . . . . . . 65 67 68 69 3. . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .POWER SHUTOFF METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOUNTING TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOUNTING A Z–AXIS MOTOR AT MACHINE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PREPARING PROGRAMS [CNC OPERATION] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 4. .2 SWITCHING POWER ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE COOLANT UNIT . . . . . . . . . MOUNTING TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOOR WHEN THE POWER IS OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents B–85014EN/01 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 10. . . . . . . . . . 92 93 c–2 . . REMOVAL OF CORROSION PREVENTIVE GREASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IF THE SAFETY DOOR IS UNLOCKED DURING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATING POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRIAL RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 53 54 56 57 58 61 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 STARTING AUTOMATIC RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . PACKING . . . . . . . .1 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . .AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 CONNECTING THE COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . .9 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . Y–AXIS TELESCOPIC COVER (Y–COVER F) . . . . . . . . SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF . .7 3. . 62 III. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. . .5 3. . .6 LOCKING THE SAFETY DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOPPING AUTOMATIC RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . LEVEL ADJUSTING . . . . . 78 79 81 82 83 88 89 90 91 11. . . . . . . . . . . .8 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESTRICTIONS ON THE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE WITH THE SAFETY DOOR OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOUNTING JIGS AND WORKPIECES .6 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 5. . . . . . . . . . . SWITCHING OF SAFETY DOOR LOCK CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . Counter . . . . . Checking Program Nos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Soft Key–triggered Screen Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 133 133 133 134 137 138 139 2. . . .3 1. . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . Screen Switching Methods . . . . . . . .4 3. . . . . . . . . MENU OPERATION Key–triggered Screen Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . .5 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling a Program in Memory . . QUICK SCREEN .4 1.3 Screen Number and PAGE Key Triggered Screen Switching . . . . . . . . in Memory . 1. . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PMC Parameter . . 2. . . . . . . .2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Program . . . . . . .11 Menu Screen . . . . . . .3. . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 1. . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate/Tool Compensation . . . . Automatic Operation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . Pallet Setting Screen (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . MAINTENCE/SETTING . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 ELECTRIC POWER SUPPLY SHUTOFF METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data I/O Screen . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 128 129 132 132 132 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 EXPLANATION OF EACH SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 2. . . . . . . . . . . .1 2. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 CHANGING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1. . . . . . . .1 2. . 3. . . . . . . . . . . CONSTITUTION OF QUICK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGING WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 3.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 1. . . . . Sequence Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGING OFFSET DATA . .2. . . . . . . Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DETAILED OPERATIONS 1. . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 3. . . . . . . .2 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . .1 3. . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . DIAGNOSIS/ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle Speed Function (S Function) . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .B–85014EN/01 Table of Contents 11. .2 NC Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1. . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . .1 1. . . .2 1. . . . . . .5 Creating a Program . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . 94 IV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Function (M Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 EDITING A PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CREATING A PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 98 99 99 100 101 101 101 102 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 152 154 156 156 c–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 DISPLAYING PARAMETERS . . . . . . .2 PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle Orientation Function (M19 Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 PLAYBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 146 148 3. . . . . . . . . Tool Life Management Screen . .1 Custom Macro Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Function (T Function) . . . . . . . .3. . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . .3 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 2. . . . . . . . . Descriptions of Screen Displays . . . . . . . . . . .3 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rigid Tapping Cycle (Function M29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLES . . . . . . 103 103 104 106 110 112 115 117 118 120 124 126 2. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . Rapid Traverse Rate Override (TRVRS LOW.4. . . . . . .1 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings for Remote Running . . . . . .1 7. . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMMANDS WITH M CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Block (SINGL BLOCK) . . . . . . . . . Common to Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 4. . . . . . . . . . . .4.2. . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPINDLE ORIENTATION (M19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 4. . . . . . . . . .1 5. . . . . . . . . . .2 Alarm Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOOL CHANGE . . . . . . . .1.4 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . OPERATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restarting Automatic Running After Feed Hold or Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 189 190 8. . . . . . . . . . 162 5. “TOOL CHANGE” KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnose/Alarm Screen . . . . . . .1 5. . . .Table of Contents B–85014EN/01 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MANUAL OPERATION OF THE SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 185 186 187 8. . . . . . . . MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . .2 Setting and Displaying Common Variables . . . . . . . . . . 157 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Running Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Running Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 5. . . .2 170 170 170 5. . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Method Using the M Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . .4. . .1 5. DISPLAYING ALARM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Block Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle Rotation When the Safety Door is Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . M01 Stop (OPT STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 TOOL CHANGE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 REMOTE RUNNING (REMOT) . . .1. . .2 5. . . . . . . . .3 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MDI Running . . . . . .5 5. . MEASURES WHEN AN ERROR OCCURS DURING TOOL CHANGE . Operator Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 ROTATION OF THE SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. . . . . . . . . . 159 160 161 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 6. . . . . . . . . . . . MDI Command Execution During Automatic Running . . . . . . . . . . 176 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 167 168 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method Using the Spindle Key (Manual) on the Operator’s Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRVRS 25%. 8. . . .3 6. . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPINDLE MOTOR CHARACTERISTIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. .2 QUICK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . .1 CNC SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 7. . . . . . . . . . . . .4 7. . . . . . .2 191 191 191 c–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Running Execution During Automatic Running . . . 182 182 182 183 7. . . . . . . . . . . . Settings for Memory Running . . . . . . . . . . .8 172 172 173 173 173 174 174 175 175 6. . . . . 8. . . . . . . . AUTOMATIC DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPINDLE LOAD METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedrate Override Dial (FEEDRATE OVERRIDE) . . . . . .4 SETTINGS AND OPERATIONS OF AUTOMATIC RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 SPINDLE OVERRIDE . . . . . . 163 163 MEMORY RUNNING (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 178 179 180 7. . . . . . . . .2 MDI RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . AXIS MOVEMENT . . . . . . . . . .1 5.1 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . TRVRS 100%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . Other Operations . . . . . . . .4 209 209 210 211 211 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RELEASING OVERTRAVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 INPUT FUNCTION OF QUICK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 212 212 213 215 216 217 217 218 219 219 220 220 220 220 221 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 12. . . . . . . . .3. . . . .A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . .QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C. . . . Pre–Tool File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen Change and Program Selection after Editing . Deleting the Program . . . . . . . . . FEATURES AND NOTES OF QUICK EDITOR . . . . . . .7 12. . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Operation .1 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search for the Specified Word . . . . . . . . . . . .2 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 QUICK EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .QUICK EDITOR . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workpiece Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . .5. . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DETAILS OF THE RELATED PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cursor Jump . . . . . . . . . .10 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 12. . . . . . Entering a Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure for Displaying QUICK EDITOR Screen . . . . . . Selecting the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . Cutting Condition File .3 SETTING SEVERAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 EDITING FUNCTION OF QUICK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 9. . . . . . .4 12. . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 207 207 208 208 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting an Edit Function . . . . .3 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . .3. .P iM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting a Line . . . . .1 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 12. . . . .4. . . . . . . Simple Input of G and M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 OVERVIEW (SUPER C. Tool Geometry Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . .3 COMMON TO CNC SCREEN AND QUICK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 13. . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 206 206 206 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 13. . . . . 193 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple Input of Words by Input Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . .6 12. . . . . . .12 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Alphabetic Characters and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . 196 197 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 12. . . . . . . 195 11. . . Deleting a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering a Macro Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering the Program . . Selecting the Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy and Move (by Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RELEASING THE TOOL TRAPPING STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting of Inserting or Overwriting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 12. . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 224 224 225 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool File . Setting and Cancel of Continuous Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 228 229 231 234 236 237 c–5 . . . . . . . . . . .13 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Features of QUICK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . .1 12. . . . . . . . . . . Notes . .P iM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 OVERVIEW . . Notes . . . . CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B–85014EN/01 Table of Contents 8. . . Browse Mode and Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 13. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 NC STATEMENT OUTPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 13. . .8. MACHINING PROGRAM OPTIMIZATION . . .6 14. . .8. . SIGNAL OUTPUT . . Specifications . Optimal Process Editing Function (Manual Alteration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 304 306 307 313 EXTERNAL INTERFACE CONNECTION . . . . . . . .1 Detailled Description of Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . .3 Setting a Tool Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 261 261 269 13.AI TOOL MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . .EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . SUPPLEMENT TO PROGRAM COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering a Tool Length Compensation Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 MACHINING PROGRAM CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 CONFIRMING THE CURRENT STATUS AND CLEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 c–6 . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . 13. . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMERGENCY STOP . . . .1 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Outside dimensions . . . . . . . .1 15. . 302 15. . . . . . SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents B–85014EN/01 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 13. . . . . . . . .8 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . TOOL LIFE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . .2 Pin allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Optimal Process Editing Function (Automatic Alteration) . . . . . . .9. .7 13. . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . .2 13. . EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RELAY MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STANDARD DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . Connection . . . . .7 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14. . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. TOOL GROUP CREATION AND AUTOMATIC TOOL EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . .1 14. . . . . . . . . Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default File . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Internal connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 14. . . . . . 239 251 253 255 258 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 286 290 293 293 294 294 14. . . . . . . . .3 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS . . . . . . .2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 14. .8 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . Tool File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre–Tool File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 15. . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 333 334 335 335 335 335 336 336 336 337 337 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 13. . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC Statement Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimal Process Editing Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 274 274 DATA I/O . . . . . . . OUTPUT SIGNAL CHECK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM MESSAGES DISPLAYED BY THE AI TOOL MONITOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 297 300 301 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . 276 278 278 279 282 283 14. . . .4 Cutting Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Path Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . .2 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. .1 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . INDEX TABLE FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . .10. . . .10. . . . . . . . .10 RELAY TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE . . . .6 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BLOWER CONTROL FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 15. . . . . . . . . .STATUS LIGHTS (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . .1 23. . 366 21. . . . . . . . . .OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection . . . . . . . . . REMOVING AUXILIARY AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Outside dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 USER TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B–85014EN/01 Table of Contents 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11. . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . .3. . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Overview . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . SERVO PARAMETERS (STANDARD) . . . . .11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10. . 370 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AUTOMATIC POWER SUPPLY SHUT–OFF .9. . . . . . . .2 History of the Amounts of Estimated Thermal Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . .11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 338 339 340 340 340 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 23. . . . . . .COOLANT (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 23. . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Outside dimensions . . . 361 364 19. ENABLING THE Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION . . . . . 365 20. . . . 15. . . 372 23. . . . . . .1 16. . . . . OTHER RELATED PARAMETERS (STANDARD SETTING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . .1 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 18. .11. . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MACHINE CLEANING COOLANT CONTROL (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . .5 23. . . . . . 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Outside dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10. . . . . 15. .2 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . 358 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. .3 Overview . .11 RELAY TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE B . . . . . . . . . . . . .INTERNAL LIGHT (OPTION) . . . .Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . 347 347 347 350 350 350 16. . . . . . . . .1 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c–7 373 375 376 377 378 379 390 . . . . .2 COOLANT UNIT (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . .3. . . 341 341 341 346 346 346 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUSTING THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .10. . . . . . CALCULATING THE FLEXIBLE FEED GEAR (DETECTION MULTIPLY DMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . GRID SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 353 354 354 355 17. . . . 15. . . . . . . . . .1Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents B–85014EN/01 23. . . . . .7 COMMAND FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RELATED PARAMETERS (STANDARD SETTINGS) . . . DNC OPERATION USING THE DNC OPERATION MANAGEMENT PACKAGE . . . .HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) INTERFACE FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up FACTOLINK .8. MEASURING LIMIT . . . 434 435 435 438 439 26. . . .3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECT FUNCTION . Connectors .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM MESSAGES AND RELEASING METHOD . . .1 27. . . . . . . . . . . .5 26. . . . . . . . . . . PARAMETERS AND MACRO VARIABLES . . . . . . . .8. . . .2 27. . . . . . 446 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 ADDITIONAL AXIS CABLE FOR THE INDEX TABLE (JAPAN AND EXPORT STANDARD) . . . . . . . . .1 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 24. . . . . . . 396 396 397 398 24. . .3 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 NOTES . . . . . . . . MACRO PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Coolant . . . . .3 Spindle . . . . .6 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 27. . .5 24. . . 440 441 442 443 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 26. . . .1 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 c–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 412 413 414 415 416 421 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 447 447 448 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STARTING AND ENDING THE CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Axis Cable for the Index Table (4th axis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLOWCHART . . .1 26. . . . . . . . .1 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28. . .3 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . .3 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . .1 26. . . . . . . . . .3 25. . . . . . . .1. . . SWITCHING TO FACTOLINK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting NC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOGGING DATA FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 LOGGING DATA FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . .2 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 25. .2 449 449 449 28. . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 26. . . . . . . .2. 445 445 445 28. .5 OUTLINE OF THE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Setting Up Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. .2 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center–through Pump Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 427 428 429 431 26.3 APPEARANCE AND CONFIGURATION OF THE COOLANT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPENSATION METHOD BY USING AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING THE SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 25. . . . . . . . . . . . .FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Unit . . .CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) . . . . . .SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION) . .

. . . . . . .1 28. . . . . . .2 Appearance of the Coolant Unit . . . . . . . .3 471 471 471 471 471 472 473 474 475 475 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands in a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . 480 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . 28. . . . . . 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on Installation . . . . . . .4 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . Input/Output –Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 OVERVIEW . . . . . . .2 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 28. . . . . . . . . . . .2 466 466 466 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Maintenance Parts . . . . . . . .2 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 457 457 457 457 458 459 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INPUT SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . .3 460 460 460 460 28. . . . . . . . . Piping . . . . Parameters (PMC Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 28. . . . . . . . . Coolant Circuit Diagram of Center–through Coolant Unit . . .7 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 28. . . . . . . Input/Output–Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 30. . . .3 28. . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Line Filter . . . . CONNECTION .4 28.7 MAINTENANCE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 ELECTRIC CONTROL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF CENTER THROUGH COOLANT . . . . . . . . . .5 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands in a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACCELERATION AND SERVO DELAY COMPENSATION (TYPE A/B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 28. . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the #150 Suction Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.10. . .2 30. . ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMMAND . . . . .AI HIGH–PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION/MODELER CONTROL II FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 28. . . . . . . . . .10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M codes . . . . . .3 30. . . . . . . . . . . Compressed Air Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Operation After Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 461 461 461 463 464 465 465 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HIGH–SPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . .1 28. . . . . . . . . Alarm Operator Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 453 28. . . . . . . . . . 476 476 477 478 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 28. . .3 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DI/DO . 481 482 483 483 484 485 486 c–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 28. . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT AND COMPRESSED AIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 28. . Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . .5. . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Area . . . . . . . . . . . Names and Functions of the Parts . Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B–85014EN/01 Table of Contents 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . .5. . . .2 28. . . . Dry Run After Replacement of the Line Filter . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . Wiring . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . .9 CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . .1 30. . . . . . . . . . . . Other Maintenance . 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 30.2 468 469 470 28. . . . . Manual Operation . . . . . . Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . .5 28. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . SPINDLE ROTATION DISABLE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 32. . . . . .5 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MANUAL GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 36. . . . . 503 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . .3 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retreat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARAMETERS . . Cancellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTE . . . . . . . . . . .2 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 OVERVIEW . . . . 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 35. ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATION OF THE MANUAL GUIDE . . . . . 487 31. . . Positioning Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 35.Table of Contents B–85014EN/01 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 521 522 522 524 526 527 c–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rapid Traverse Overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CANNED CYCLES . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECIFICATION .4 Explanation of Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 505 506 509 35. . .4 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . EXAMPLE OF CYCLE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 499 500 501 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARMS . . . . . . . . 31. . . . . . . . . . . Return to Initial Point/Point R . . 494 495 496 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36. . . .7 Differences from Conventional G73 and G81 through G83 Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching Over to Manual Guide Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 489 492 493 493 493 493 493 493 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTERNAL INTERFACE SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection of NC Program . . . . . . . . . . .1 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 OVERVIEW . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . .TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 31. . . . . . . . . . .6 31. . . . . . . . CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single–Block Stop . .2 35. . . . . . . . . NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . .MACRO CALL USING G CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 35. . . . . . . . . . AUTOMATIC TURN–OFF OPERATION OF THE TOUCH PROBE . . .5 35. . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 34. . .3 35. . . . . .5 ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 36. . . . . . . .2 OVERVIEW . . . . . .3 36. . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting Each Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 36. . . . . . . . . .9 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 601 609 613 2. . . PARAMETER RESET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE . . .2 5. . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Output of Measurement Results to Custom Macro Variables . . . . . . .2Creating a Program . . . . . . . .1 5. . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Cut Scraps . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Replacement Method . . . . . . Fluorescent Lamp in the Inside Light Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 4. . . . . .3. . . . . . .1 LUBRICATING EACH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . .2 2. . 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2. . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. .8 36. . . 631 632 633 c–11 . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . .12 Creation of NC Program . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Check (Graphic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 2. . . . . . .3 616 616 MAINTENANCE OF AC SPINDLE MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 SPECIFIED BRANDS OF LUBRICANT . . . . . .B–85014EN/01 Table of Contents 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Function . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING PARAMETERS .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAINTENANCE 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1. . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replenishing the Tank with Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Drawing Function and NC Statement Conversion Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Measurement Cycle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION . . . . . 626 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle Run–in (for 15000min–1 Specification) . . . . . . . . . . . .2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1. 592 592 592 593 593 1. . . . . . . . . . . CHECK. . . . . . . . . . . .12. . .4 Cleaning . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 WORK AT CLOSING TIME . . . . . . Recommended Lubricants (Grease and Oil) . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting Cutters . . . . . . . . Inspecting Each Section . . . . . . 591 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2. . Convert to NC Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . Back Ground Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2.2. . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION . . 617 617 618 618 618 618 3. . . . . . . . .3 Greasing .3 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . .3 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 5. . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Greasing and Oiling Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto and MDI Operation . . . . . . . . . 2. .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodical Maintenance . . 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concentrated lubrication with Intermittent Oiling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 594 594 596 596 597 2. . . . . . . . REPLACING EXPENDABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . Measurement Cycle Function (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 36. . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12. . . . . . . . . . . .3 2. . . . . . . . . . . . AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS . . . . . .2 1. . . .1 2. . . . . . . . . .5 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . Copy and Deleting of NC Program . . . . . . . . Cleaning . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . .1 DAILY CHECK–UP .11 36. .2 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 557 560 563 568 571 574 576 576 577 586 586 586 V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 2. . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . .12. . . . . . . . . . . .2. .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775 776 776 776 778 779 c–12 . . . . . . . . . . FOCAS1/Ethernet Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMENSIONS OF THE END OF THE SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 ERROR CODE DISPLAYED ON LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 B. . . . . . . . . . 772 J.1 G. . . . . J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RIGID TAPPING RETURN FUNCTION . . .2. . . . . . . . . . DIMENSIONS OF THE INSIDE OF THE SPLASH GUARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SERVO AMPLIFIER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents B–85014EN/01 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 REGISTERING PARAMETERS . . . . . .1 J. . . . . . . . . 639 B. . . . .2 B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 6. . . . . DIAGNOS MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 F. . . . . DIMENSIONS OF THE SYSTEM AROUND THE COOLANT OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 FACTOLINK Function . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774 J. . . . . 666 F. . . . . . . . DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . OPERATOR MESSAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIST OF FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATION . . . .4 F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 727 727 732 F. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 B. . . . .1 F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DNC1/Ethernet Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 749 H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 APPENDIXES A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of Error Codes . . . . EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION . . . . . FTP File Transfer Function . . . . . . . .4 B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753 I. . . . . . . . . ERROR CODES . DIMENSIONS OF THE TABLE SURFACE AND T GROOVE (NOMINAL WIDTH: 14) . . . . . . . . SPINDLE AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 650 653 656 657 658 C. . . F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734 735 737 G. . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 B. . . . STATUS LIST . . .2 Alarms . . . . . . . . . MIST COLLECTOR MOUNTING HOLE DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . 668 F. . . . . . . . . . . 663 E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 EMBEDDED ETHERNET AND PCMCIA ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PMC PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 OPERATOR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . DIAGNOS MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 J. . . . . . . . . RECOMMENDED ATA CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . J.5 Configuring a large network . . . J.2 J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 J. . . . . . .8. . . . . .3 SETTING THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION . . .4 J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 GLOSSARY FOR ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B–85014EN/01 Table of Contents J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . .1. . . . .8 EMBEDDED ETHERNET ERROR MESSAGE SCREEN . .2. . . . . . . . . . J. . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. . . . . . . . .1. . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Notes on using the FACTOLINK function for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. .5. . . . . . . . . Parameter Setting of the FOCAS1/Ethernet Function . . . . . . .2 J. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 FTP file transfer parameter setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . .6 J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. .7 Host file search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMB_ETH FTP TRANSFER LOG Screen . . .8. J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. . . EMB_ETH FOCAS1/ETHER LOG Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 J. . . . . . . . . . Parameters . 810 812 812 813 813 816 816 817 818 819 826 J. . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . .5. Input/output of various types of data . . . . . . .2. . . . . .1 782 782 782 783 785 788 789 789 789 790 794 795 796 796 796 797 800 801 802 802 J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 FACTOLINK Function . . . . . . . . . . .5 J. .2. . . . .5 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network . . . . . . EMBEDDED ETHERNET MAINTENANCE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 J. . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 J. . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . .3 J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . .1 Host file list display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 J. . . . . . .4 Check Items Related to Connection with the HUB . . . J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . J. . . . . . . . . . .5 Functional Differences between the Embedded Ethernet Function and the Ethernet Function Based on the Option Board . . . . . . . .4 FACTOLINK parameter setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 J. . . . . . . . .3 J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . .4 841 841 841 842 842 J. .4 J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. . . . . . . . . . . . . 828 830 836 836 836 837 838 J. . EMB_ETH FACTOLINK LOG Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . .2. . . .3.5. . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the FACTOLINK function on a small network . . . . . . .5 Configuring a large network . . . Host file deletion .2. . . . . . . 843 c–13 . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . Parameter Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . .5 Configuring a large network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Notes on using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . .3. . . . EMB_ETH MASTER CTRL LOG Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 J. .4 FOCAS1/Ethernet parameter setting screen . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Setting of the FACTOLINK Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC program output . . . . Communication Parameter Input Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 J.2 J. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the Setting of Each Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Items Related to Connection with a Backbone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . .3. .2 J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 J. . .5. . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . NC program input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 J. . . . . .3. . . . . . Checking and changing of the connection host . FTP File Transfer Function . Using the FTP file transfer function on a small network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 J. . . . . . . . . . Using the DNC1/Ethernet function on a small network . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 J. . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

I. OUTLINE .

.

B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 1. 3 . OUTLINE 1 OUTLINE α–T14/21iCe series are vertical CNC drills capable of performing efficient simple milling in addition to drilling and rigid tapping.

This machine was manufactured in accordance with Appendix 1 of the 98/37/EC Machine Directive. (9) Quick operation function A quick operation function beyond the operability of the conventional CNC machine tools is provided as standard. It is not necessary to consider tool interference because the spindle goes down independently. Y–axis. This enables precision tapping in a short time. (2) High speed turret The turret permits short–cut random selection to enable high–speed tool changes. (7) Optimum spindle speed selection The spindle speed of the spindle motor can be changed over a wide range: 80 min–1 to 8. 4 . reliability has been sufficiently enhanced and easy maintenance is assured.1. So. (8) High performance AC servo motor As the servo motors for the X–axis. OUTLINE OUTLINE B–85014EN/01 1. As a result. (3) Rigid tapping For rigid tapping in which the spindle and the Z axis are synchronously fed. no maintenance including brush replacement is required. Y–axis. Z–axis). This function enables the operator to operate the machine as desired with the graphical screen and guidance. The rapid traverse rate along each axis is 48 m/min (X–axis.000 min–1 (150min–1 to 15000min–1 as option).1 FEATURES (1) Linear machining and arc machining High precision linear and arc milling at various angles can be done. so that waste time can be minimized when cutting is not performed. Drilling and tapping can also be done. (10)Safety functions The safety–related functions of this machine comply with category 3 in accordance with the EN954–1 European Safety Standard. and Z–axis. Return to the reference position is not required after switching the power on (annual battery replacement is necessary). AC servo motors are used. (5) Absolute–position detecting system The absolute–position detecting system is one of the standard features. a tap with a floating mechanism is not required. (6) Highly reliable The problems that conventionally occurred with pneumatic or hydraulic technology have been solved using electronic technology. (4) Abundant NC functions A variety of NC functions supporting various types of machining ranging from parts machining such as drilling and tapping to milling and model machining are provided. The spindle speed is programmable at every 1 min–1 and therefore the optimum spindle speed can be set.

tapping. jigs. cutters. For details.axis (Cross movement of saddle) Z. Do not use the FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe series machines for any purpose other than stated above.5 264 660 ADC12 M24 3 219 657 No. Workpiece Drill diameter (mm) Material Spindle speed S (min–1) Feedrate F (mm/min) Coolant Load meter (%) S45C 20 HSS 398 80 No.B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 1. The cutting power of the ROBODRILL varies with the workpiece type. and milling) under control of a CNC (computerized numerical controller). refer to the applicable cutter or coolant operator’s manuals.2 USE OF THE MACHINE The FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe series machines are vertical drilling machines that perform cutting (such as drilling. Y. The following table lists examples of machining with the ROBODRILL.axis travel (Vertical movement of spindle head) Distance from table surface to spindle edge surface Distance from the front surface of the column to the center line of the spindle Table Area Load capacity Type Spindle Feedrate Spindle speed range Type of spindle taper hole Rapid traverse feedrate cutting feedrate 630 × 330mm 150kg (unifom load) 300mm 300 + 10mm 330mm 150 to 480mm 400mm 650mm × 400mm 850mm × 410mm SPECIFICATIONS α–T14iCe 500mm 400mm α–T14iCLe 700mm 200kg (uniform load) 250kg (uniform load) 80 to 8000min. and so forth. coolant. (α–T14iCe series) ITEM α–T14iCSe Travel X.000mm/min 1 to 15000mm/min 3–14–mm slots with a space of 125mm 5 . 5 of JIS type 2 135 FC200 φ25 HSS 382 115 ADC12 φ30 HSS 637 255 No. and workpieces. cutter. The following table lists the specifications of the machines. 30 (X. 2 of JISW type 1 (diluted to 1:9) Qualified for JIS class 2 These values depend on the types and rigidity of tooling. the property and supply state of coolant.1 7/24 taper No. 2 of JIS type 1 (diluted to 1:9) 140 140 Workpiece Tapping screw designation Pitch Spindle speed S(min–1) Feedrate F (mm/min) Coolant Precision S45C M16 2 298 596 No.axis travel (Longitudinal movement of table) Y. OUTLINE 1. Z) 48. and other factors. 5 of JIS type 2 FC200 M20 2.

1 7/24 taper No. 7 kW (continuous rating) FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL αM8i X.0 kw) 200V AC + 10% to –15%. 3 kg/tool (total mass : 22kg) Approx.1 (45° ) 14 Distance from taper gage line /max. Y.010mm/300mm ±0. OUTLINE OUTLINE B–85014EN/01 ITEM α–T14iCSe Turret Tool change system Type of tool shank Type of retension knob Tool storage capacity Maximum tool diameter SPECIFICATIONS α–T14iCe α–T14iCLe Turret type (spindle independent from turret) MAS BT30 MAS P30T.15m3/min (150 /min) (at atmospheric pressure) 2236 ± 10mm 995mm × 2207mm Approx. 60Hz 1Hz. 1650kg 1565mm × 2027mm Approx.1. Y. diameter: 0 to 28mm /50mm 34 to 120mm /80mm 120 to 250mm /40mm] (80mm : in case 3kg tool mass) 200mm 250mm (It’s depended on spec.9 sec. "10kVA 490kPa (5kgf/cm2) (gage pressure) 0. 0. or Approx. Z : αM8i (2.002mm 2115mm × 2027mm Approx. 2100kg Maximum tool length Method of tool selection Maximum tool mass Tool changing time (tool to tool) Motor Spindle drive motor Feed motors Power sources Electrical power supply Compressed air supply Machine size Machine height Floor space Mass of machine with the control section Accuracy (measured in compliance with JIS B 6201) Positioning accuracy Repeatability (α–T21iCe series) ITEM α–T21iCSe Travel X. FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR 5. 30 (X. 5 kW (10 min rating)/ 3.axis travel (Vertical movement of spindle head) Distance from table surface to spindle edge surface Distance from the front surface of the column to the center line of the spindle Table Area Load capacity Type Spindle Feedrate Spindle speed range Type of spindle taper hole Rapid traverse feedrate cutting feedrate 630 × 330mm 150kg (unifom load) 300mm 300 + 10mm 330mm 150 to 480mm 400mm 650mm × 400mm 850mm × 410mm SPECIFICATIONS α–T21iCe 500mm 400mm α–T21iCLe 700mm 200kg (uniform load) 250kg (uniform load) 80 to 8000min. 1. 2 kg/tool (total mass : 15kg) or Max. 50/60Hz "1Hz or 220V AC +10% to –15%.axis (Cross movement of saddle) Z. Z) 48.4 sec. 2000kg 0.) Random shortest path Max. 3–phase.axis travel (Longitudinal movement of table) Y.000mm/min 1 to 15000mm/min 3–14–mm slots with a space of 125mm 6 . 3–phase.

3–phase. 50/60Hz "1Hz or 220V AC +10% to –15%. 7 kW (continuous rating) FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL αM8i X.0 kw) 200V AC + 10% to –15%. 2 kg/tool (total mass : 23kg) or Max.002mm 2115mm × 2027mm Approx.4 sec.1 (45° ) 21 Distance from taper gage line /max.8 sec. 1. OUTLINE ITEM α–T21iCSe Turret Tool change system Type of tool shank Type of retension knob Tool storage capacity Maximum tool diameter SPECIFICATIONS α–T21iCe α–T21iCLe Turret type (spindle independent from turret) MAS BT30 MAS P30T. 2100kg Maximum tool length Method of tool selection Maximum tool mass Tool changing time (cut to cut) Motor Spindle drive motor Feed motors Power sources Electrical power supply Compressed air supply Machine size Machine height Floor space Mass of machine with the control section Accuracy (measured in compliance with JIS B 6201) *1 Positioning accuracy Repeatability It’s depended on spec. or Approx. 1650kg 1565mm × 2027mm Approx. 3 kg/tool (total mass : 23kg) Approx.1_C/min or lower Humidity Usual: 75% or lower (relative humidity) Short–period: 95% or lower Vibration 5 m/s2 (0. Z : αM8i (2. 3–phase. "10kVA 490kPa (5kgf/cm2) (gage pressure) 0.5G) or lower Atmosphere No corrosive gas No flammable gas 7 . Y.15m3/min (150 /min) (at atmospheric pressure) 2236 ± 10mm 995mm × 2207mm Approx. diameter: 0 to 28mm /50mm 34 to 120mm /80mm 120 to 250mm /40mm] (80mm : in case 3kg tool mass) 190mm 250mm*1 Random shortest path Max.B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 1. 60Hz 1Hz. FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR 5.010mm/300mm ±0. 2. 5 kW (10 min rating)/ 3. Environmental conditions Ambient temperature Operating: 0_C to 45_C Storage or transportation: 20_C to 60_C Temperature drift 1. 2000kg 0.

G28Z0G49. G00X0Y0.F600. M03S800.. The following table lists the measurement conditions. G54G28X0Y0Z0. G91M09. 8 .5(w) 3(d)cm) 1mm See the table below. The following table lists the measurement conditions. Item Program Tool Workpiece material Cutting depth Coolant Cycle time Measurement time O400 See the table below. 57s 57s Condition Measurement conditions Item Tool Tip Coolant Manufacturer SANDVIK SANDVIK Yushiro Model RA265. X0. M02. M05.. G00G40G49G80G90.2–80 (with six teeth) SM30 Yushiroken EZ20 D Program used O400 G91G28Z0. M08. Y–40.3 SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL The equivalent continuous A–weighted average sound level measured on the shop floor where the machine is installed is 70 dB or lower. OUTLINE OUTLINE B–85014EN/01 1. G00G90G43Z1. X250. G01G90Z–1. M06T01.H01.1. S45C (15(l) 9.

PART NAMES 2 PART NAMES 9 .B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 2.

2.2.1 (a) Inner view of Machine 10 .1 MACHINE Fig. PART NAMES OUTLINE B–85014EN/01 2.

2.B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 2.1 (b) Outer view of Machine (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) Spindle motor X axis servo motor (Serial pulse coder) Y axis servo motor (Serial pulse coder) Z axis servo motor (Serial pulse coder) Column Bed Table Saddle Leveling block Spindle head Turret support Turret (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) Grip Tool Turret gear Spindle (MS) gear X axis telescopic cover Y axis telescopic cover (front side) Y axis slide cover Z axis take–up cover Splash guard Controller operator’s panel Controller rack 11 . PART NAMES Fig.

2 CONTROLLER RACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Fig.2 Inside of Controller rack (1) (2) (3) (4) Power supply Spindle amplifier Servo amplifier Connector panel (5) (6) (7) Backup battery for pulse coder Circuit breaker Power panel 12 .2. PART NAMES OUTLINE B–85014EN/01 2.2.

B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 2. PART NAMES 2.3 VIEW AND COMPONENTS OF THE OPERATOR’S PANEL (3) Memory card slot (1) LCD (2) Soft keys (4) Power switches (5) Operation keys (8) Override (6) Manual pulse generator (7) Input protection key (9) Cycle start feed hold (11)RS–232C interface (10)Emergency stop button 13 .

3 (a) Standard type operator’s panel 14 ÃÃ Ã ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ Ã ÃÃ Ã ÃÃ Ã ÃÃ Ã ÃÃ Ã ÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ Ã ÃÃ ÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ Ã Ã ÃÃ ÃÃ 20 1 2 11 12 2 18 19 .3. OPERATOR’S PANEL OUTLINE B–85014EN/01 3 OPERATOR’S PANEL 10 3 8 9 4 5 6 7 13 16 15 17 Fig.

B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 3.3 (b) Full keyboard type operator’s panel 15 . OPERATOR’S PANEL Fig.

In reference position return and jog modes ³ Movement is made only when the key is being pressed. Turns coolant or cuttings air blow on and off. [“/” SKIP key] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Selects the function that suppresses the execution of blocks containing “/” in a program. 1 2 Name Power switches Operation mode selection keys Function These switches turn the control power on and off. Releases the lock of the front door. the spindle override is invalid. [Spindle speed override keys] These keys change the spindle speed specified with the S function by 30 to 200%. When this key is pressed while QUICK screen is being displayed. [AUTO (MEMORY) key] Selects automatic operation (memory) mode. this key is also used to select remote operation mode. jog. [M01 STOP key] Selects the function that stops operation after executing a block containing M01 in a program. these keys are used to select the target axis for movement and the movement direction. a tool change to the adjacent tool on the right on the turret takes place. [Handle magnification selection keys] In handle mode.) When this key is pressed when the LED of the MENU (MDI) key is on. (When the front door lock is released.3. [Axis selection keys] In manual mode (reference position return. In handle mode ³ A target axis for movement is selected. you can open the door. these keys are used to select the amount of travel per handle feed unit.POINT) key] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Selects reference position return mode. ignoring the programmed F feedrate. [MENU (MDI) key] Selects MDI operation mode.) [MANUAL (HANDLE) key] Selects the mode that allows the manual pulse generator to be used to cause movement along each axis. or handle mode). Decrease : The spindle speed is decreased. MENU OPERATION screen appears. [(REMOTE) key] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Selects remote operation mode. (When an alarm is issued.OFF key] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Selects the function that turns off the power automatically when a program terminates or when an alarm is issued. [DRY RUN key] Selects the function that sets the rapid traverse rate and cutting feedrate to the jog feed rate in automatic operation. [AUTO P. 3 Spindle operation key Spindle speed override keys 4 5 6 7 Tool change Coolant DOOR Axis selection keys Handle magnification selection keys 8 Operation selection [SINGLE BLOCK key] keys Selects the function of executing one block in automatic operation then stopping automatic operation. you cannot sometimes turn off the power. [Spindle operation key] Turns and stops the spindle. [EDIT key] Selects program editing (EDIT) mode. 100% : The spindle speed specified with the S function is restored. [(REF. With the standard operator’s panel. [(JOG) key] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Selects jog mode. Increase : The spindle speed is increased. 16 . After the lock is released. OPERATOR’S PANEL OUTLINE B–85014EN/01 No.

13 MDI keys 14 Manual pulse generator 17 . STATUS. OFFSET. Switches the LCD display between QUICK screen and CNC screen. [MDI].B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 3. History. [Cursor keys] Used to move the cursor. [Alter key] Replaces the portion indicated by the cursor with a new command during program editing on CNC screen. for example. etc. alphabetical characters are indicated in soft keys to allow you to enter alphabetical characters. When this key is set to ON. [Insert key] Inserts a new command after the command indicated by the cursor during program editing on CNC screen. PARAMETER. etc. [Numeric keypad] Used to enter numeric values. PROG. [Cancel key] Cancels characters or numbers being entered. <MESSAGE> Changes the screen display to an alarm or operator message screen.) [Shift key] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Used to enter a character indicated in the lower right part of each address and numeric key. operator messages. FROPY. [Alphabet keys] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Used to enter alphabetical characters. diagnosis.) Displays information about alarms. [Screen change keys] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Used to switch between screens within QUICK screen. [Help key] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Used to display the help screen of CNC screen. (You cannot use this key when QUICK screen is being displayed. (The 50% key is provided only for the full keyboard type. <POS> Changes the screen display to a position indication screen. MONITOR. etc. [Input key] Used to enter data. Z) of the machine manually (in handle mode). [Delete key] Deletes the command indicated by the cursor during program editing on CNC screen. (For the standard type operator’s panel only) [Page keys] Used to change pages and screens. <OFFSET/SETTING> Changes the screen display to an offset indication or setting screen. ABS. Turns on and off the alphabetical character input function using soft keys. <SYSTEM> Changes the screen display to a parameter or diagnosis screen. etc. <GRAPHIC> Changes the screen display to a graphics display. Y. OPERATOR’S PANEL No. etc. [Reset key] Used to. [PMC]. WORK. 9 10 11 12 Name Rapid traverse override keys Alarm/status key QUICK/NC Key Alphabet key (ABC@@@Z) Function These keys are used to select the rapid traverse rate. Diagnose. release an alarm. <PROG> Changes the screen display to a program indication screen. REL. Alarm. Used to operate each axis (X. and so forth in a window. SETING. ALL.

In this state.3. A memory card such as an ATA card is inserted into this slot. For the standard type operator’s panel. Used to connect an external I/O device such as the Handy File. When this key is set to ON. OPERATOR’S PANEL OUTLINE B–85014EN/01 No. 15 Name Cycle start/ feed hold Function Automatic operation starts when you press the start button. the temporary stop button is turned on in red. the machine is placed in temporary halt state (feed hold state). the start button is turned on in green. When you press the stop button. [Feedrate override dial] The feedrate specified with the F function for an axis is changed by 0 to 200%. [Jog override dial] (provided for the full keyboard type only) The feedrate in jog mode and dry run operation is changed. the feedrate in dry run operation can also be changed with this dial. During operation. Used to stop machine movement in a moment in case of emergency. 16 Override 17 18 19 20 Emergency stop button Input protection key RS–232–C interface Memory card slot 18 . editing and input of programs and data are disabled.

B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 4. BASIC OPERATIONS 4 BASIC OPERATIONS 19 .

1. [Characteristics of the display] D The title bar is yellow. <SYSTEM> : Enables you to set parameters.1 SCREEN SWITCHING The screens for the ROBODRILL are grouped into the following two types. [Characteristics of the display] D The title bar is blue.4. These screen groups can be selected as stated below: 20 .1 (a) CNC screen QUICK screen This is specially developed for the ROBODRILL.4. Fig. 4. D The characters displayed on the right half of the title bar are large.2 CNC Screen Switching The CNC screen is classified as one of the following: <POS> : Displays the current position. <MESSAGE> : Displays alarms and operator messages. BASIC OPERATIONS OUTLINE B–85014EN/01 4. CNC screen This is a typical FANUC Series 18i–MB screen.4. Fig. <GRAPHIC> : Draws tool paths and animated graphics patterns.1. <PROG> : Enables you to edit and view programs.1 (b) QUICK screen 4. D The current time is displayed on the right half of the title bar.1 Switching between the QUICK Screen and CNC Screen The QUICK screen and CNC screen are alternately displayed each time the QUICK/NC button is pressed. <OFFSET/SETTING>: Enables you to specify offset and workpiece coordinate data.

21 . (POS group) (PROG group) (OFFSET/SETTING group) + (SYSTEM group) or ³ Switched to the respective screen group (MESSAGE group) (GRAPHIC group) (Operator’s panel with a full keyboard) Press one of the following keys. BASIC OPERATIONS (Operator’s panel of standard type) To select one of the following screen groups. then press a page key. press the numeral key labeled the corresponding screen group name.B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 4.

2. alphabetic character entry is available only to the functions that require entering alphabetic characters. H I J K P Q R ALTER DELETE : N / B C D FULL ALTER DELETE . Pressing the mode. HALF pattern arrangement (switched using a soft key at either end). Soft keys labeled alphabetic characters appear.1 Arrangement of the Letter Keys O G F The letter keys are arranged in either the HALF pattern for program entry or the FULL pattern for comment entry. 22 . M S T X Y Z . 4. Press the key on the operator’s panel. BASIC OPERATIONS OUTLINE B–85014EN/01 4. key again cancels the alphabetic character entry D On the QUICK screen. This key switches the mode between FULL and HALF.4. D No alphabetic character entry is available on the GRAPHIC screen (such as the PATH GRAPHIC/SOLID GRAPHIC). enabling alphabetic characters to be entered.2 ENTERING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS On the standard–type operator’s panel. soft keys are used to enter alphabetic characters.

BASIC OPERATIONS FULL pattern arrangement (switched using a soft key at either end). ( ) [ ] . + – * / = ? # & @ .B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 4. This key switches the mode between FULL and HALF. HALF ALTER DELETE . 23 . A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z SPACE ALTER DELETE .

TOOLS OUTLINE B–85014EN/01 5 TOOLS The standard tools of the former Japan Machine Tool Builder’s Association (MAS403–1982 BT30 P30T–1) can be used. Fig.5 (b) Pull Stud The standard tools of the German industrial standard (DIN 69871–A30) can be used with the machine conforming to the DIN GRIP standard. 24 . confirm the shape and dimensions by referring to the figure of the taper shank (MAS403–1982 BT30) and the pull stud (MAS403–1982 P30T–1) of the Japan Machine Tool Builder’s Association standard shown below.5.5 (a) Taper Shank Fig. When you purchase tools. Use the pull stud manufactured by FANUC (A290–6056–X801).

Details of the X portion Fig.5 (c) Taper Shank Fig. TOOLS The shapes and the dimensions of the taper shank (DIN 69871–A30) and the pull stud (A290–6056–X801) of the German industrial standard are shown in the figures below.5 (d) Pull Stud 25 .B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 5.

TOOLS OUTLINE B–85014EN/01 Center–through specification The shape and dimensions of pull studs that comply with the center–through specification are shown below. O RING Fig.5.5 (e) Pull Stud (MAS) O RING Fig.5 (f) Pull Stud (DIN) 26 .

Fig. Fig.15) between the φ30.1 to 0.B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 5.5 (h) Pull stud (without center through) 27 .5 (g) Taper shank NOTE 1 The distance (0.4 reference diameter and φ46 end face is an adjustment value dedicated to the ROBODRILL. TOOLS Double–plane bound center through spindle (NC5) specification The figures and dimensions of a taper shank and pull stud based on the double–plane bound center through spindle (NC5) specification are shown below.

5 (i) Pull stud (with center through) In the α–T14/21iCe series. check the dimensions and weight of the tool. Before operating the machine. (1) Maximum tool diameter Length (mm) from the taper gauge surface 34 or less From 34 (exclusive) to 120 (inclusive) From 120 (exclusive) to 250 (inclusive) Maximum diameter (mm) ø65 ø80 ø40 (2) Maximum tool length α–T14iCe/CLe MACHINE SPLASH GUARD 1 door 2 doors HIGH COLUMN 100 mm 1 door 2 doors HIGH COLUMN 200 mm 1 door 2 doors HIGH COLUMN 300 mm 1 door 2 doors without Auto door 250mm 250mm 235mm 215mm 250mm 215mm 250mm 250mm with Auto door 250mm 250mm 235mm 215mm 235mm 215mm 235mm 215mm STANDARD 28 . and weight are limited as listed below.5. TOOLS OUTLINE B–85014EN/01 Fig. length. the maximum tool diameter.

4 = 1 3 kg setting 2 kg setting. the temperature of the spindle bearing rises abnormally. the troubles listed below can occur. 250 (Depend on specifications see Tables) 200 (α–T14iCSe) 190 (Depend on specifications see Tables) Fig.5 (j) Tool Limits (α–T14iCe/CLe. α–T21iCe/CLe) (α–T21iCSe) Be careful not to use tools that do not satisfy the dimensional restrictions above. (Setting the tool mass) (1) Specify the following PMC parameters: K00#4 = 0: Changes the tool mass to 3 kg.100mm HIGH COLUMN 200mm Maximum tool length 250mm 215mm 190mm 90mm (3) Maximum tool mass: 2 kg (total mass: 15 kg)/3 kg (total mass: 22 kg) When mounting a tool of 2 kg or more (up to 3 kg). reducing the life of the spindle bearing. (From a viewpoint of safety.4 = 0 K0. (1) A tool longer than the maximum tool length can interfere with the splash guard in turret turning. (2) When the maximum tool diameter is exceeded: * Rigid tapping may not be able to be performed normally.) Keep relay K0. set the tool mass to 3 kg. TOOLS α–T14iCSe 200mm α–T21iCe/CLe Product α–T21iCe/CLe MACHINE SPG 1 door SPG 2 doors α–T21iCse HIGH COLUMN 0. 29 . * If an excessively heavy tool is used. 3 kg is factory–set. (3) When the maximum tool weight is exceeded: * Trouble can occur when the tool is changed.B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 5. Otherwise.

TOOLS OUTLINE B–85014EN/01 K00#4 = 1: Changes the tool mass to 2 kg. (3) Turn the power ON. click [CANCEL]. ARE YOU SURE?” (4) Click soft key [EXEC] or [CANCEL]. NOTE Bit 4 of parameter K00 is set to 0 (tool mass of 3 kg) before shipment from the factory. To automatically change the NC parameters related to the tool mass. turn the power OFF and then ON again according to the guidance. (2) Turn the power OFF. “PARAMETER FOR TOOL MASS 3kg IS SET. To return bit 4 of parameter K00 to the previous value and cancel the changing of the NC parameters related to the tool mass. ARE YOU SURE?” or “PARAMETER FOR TOOL MASS 2kg IS SET. 30 . The following message appears on the screen. click [EXEC].5. (5) If [EXEC] is clicked in the above step.

(See Appendix B. “DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE”. JIGS 6 JIGS Three T–shaped grooves with the nominal size of 14 mm are provided at intervals of 125 mm on the top surface of the table. can be put on the table.B–85014EN/01 OUTLINE 6.) NOTE A maximum load of 200 kg (Max 150kg for α–T14iCSe and α–T21iCSe). Avoid putting more on the table than the maximum load. including jigs and workpieces. 31 .

COOLANT OUTLINE B–85014EN/01 7 COOLANT The capacity of the coolant tank of the ROBODRILL α–T14/21iC series are approximately 100 or 200 litres. nitrile–butadiene rubber (NBR) and fluorination rubber are used as sealant and protective materials. Nisseki Mitsubishi IDEMITSU KOSAN CO. Ltd. Brand UNICUT TG20 DAPHNE CUT AS–25F SPEED SC22A Bakumaru 15J UNISOLUBLE HD–M UNISOLUBLE HD DAPHNE MILCOOL SD DROMUS OIL EPL MOBIL MET 150 MOBIL MET 150 Yusiroken EZ20 NOTE On the ROBODRILL.K. Water–soluble SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K. Do not use so strong coolant that will cause paint to peel off. MOBIL OIL CORPORATION Yusiro Chemical Industry Co. When water–soluble coolant is thinned with water. take every precaution so water does not drop on the machine or the NC unit. Mobil Oil Corp. Type Manufacturer Nisseki Mitsubishi IDEMITSU KOSAN CO. LTD.K. Oily SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K. FANUC recommends the following coolants (cutting fluids).7.. LTD. 32 .

II. INSTALLATION .

.

with no protuberance or hollow. or rope whose allowable load is below 3 tons to lift the machine. To lift the machine. 6. Working in a dark place can invite an incorrect operation. put it down on the floor. The floor surface is smooth. Do not use a crane. 4.5 MPa (15 kgf/cm2). 5. No person other than the maintenance personnel of the ROBODRILL shall move or install it. 35 . making it impossible to make the most of the machine performance. The floor on which the machine is installed must satisfy the following conditions: 1. and adjust the length of the hook and rope. The floor surface is hard enough to withstand a pressure of 1. it can develop a failure. hook.5 tons on the floor does not deform it or develop any other trouble. Illuminate in the shop floor with a sufficient brightness. without being deformed. If the machine gets out of balance when lifted. 2. Fork lift or crane operators in charge of moving the ROBODRILL shall have the relevant license. The shop floor on which the machine is installed must be illuminated with at least 300 luxes. use a crane with an allowable load of at least 3 tons. The term “maintenance personnel” refers to those people who have working knowledge about machinery and electricity for maintenance and have finished the maintenance course of the FA school or ROBOMACHINE school or who have equivalent knowledge and have been certified by the company they work for. Moving or installing the ROBODRILL requires understanding it in details. Place the machine on a flat. 3. Placing a load of 2. The floor will not deteriorate in regular use. then lift it again. Allow a service clearance in an area where the machine is installed. If the floor does not meet any of the above conditions. stable floor. The floor will not deteriorate with time.B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION CAUTIONS The machine shall be moved or installed by the maintenance personnel. leading to an accident. It is recommended that an optional intra–machine lamp be installed. The floor is completely flat.

therefore. 3. observe the following: 1. Firmly secure the spindle head and table with the packing materials before removing the Z–axis motor.INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01 Pay attention to how the mechanism is saved and packed. Fix the turret mechanism with nylon ties. Fix the spindle head and table with packing materials. When transporting the machine or leaving it unused for a long time. 2. the Z–axis will fall out. 36 . Apply a rust inhibitor to the specified portions of the machine. If the Z–axis motor is removed without the spindle head and table first being secured with the packing materials. The Z–axis motor incorporates a brake.

B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 1. (4) Humidity Normal Temporary : 75% or less (relative humidity) : 95% or less : 0 _C to 45 _C : –20 _C to 60 _C (5) Compressed air supply 0. the power supply voltage is valid.1 _C/min. it is valid. (220V is valid for only 60Hz) (3 PHASE = three phases) If the frequency is 50 "1 or 60 "1 Hz. frequency (Hz).49 MPa. and power capacity (kVA) Check the following nameplate on the upper side of the NC rack: JAPAN and export standard If the value of the power supply voltage indicated on “POWER SUPPLY V V” in the nameplate is in the range of +10% to –15%. (2) Ambient temperature In operation In storage or transportation (3) Temperature change Within 1. 150 N /min 37 . CHECKING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1 CHECKING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS (1) Power supply voltage.

TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01 2 TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE 38 .2.

1 (b) Securing the Packing Plate (at Spindle Head) 39 . (9) Fix the spindle head to the packing plate with an M12 30 bolt. Fig.B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 2. (8) Turn off the power.2.1 PREPARATION BEFORE TRANSPORTATION Prepare for transporting the machine according to the following steps: (1) Remove the Y–axis telescopic cover (at the front). Be careful not to damage the top of the table. (3) Move the table to the position indicated by the machine coordinates X=250(T14/21iCe)/350(T14/21iCLe)/150(T14/21iCSe). (7) After the hole position is aligned correctly. (2) Remove the coolant nozzle base at the bottom of the spindle head.2. and plain washer. Y=–300(T14(21)iCe. Fig. iCLe)/–277(T14(21)iCSe). lower the spindle head until it touches the packing plate. If not. spring washer. Be careful not to hit the spindle head against the packing plate. (4) Firmly secure the packing plate using the M12 tapped hole on the top rear of the table. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE 2. (6) Check whether the position of the hole on the packing plate is aligned with that of the tapped hole for installing the coolant nozzle base at the bottom of the spindle head. move the table slightly to make the adjustment.1 (a) Securing the Packing Plate (at the Table) (5) Slowly lower the spindle head to the position where Z=–282.

2.1 (c) Securing the Turret (11)Install two M30 eyebolts in the upper front of the bed and on top of the column. M30 eyebolt M30 eyebolts Fig. Turret supprt Turret Spring Nylon band Bolt Turretcam Cam groove Fig.2.1 (d) Transportation status NOTE Be sure to make the above preparations before transporting or lifting the machine.2. 40 . TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01 (10)Secure the turret with the nylon band or equivalent.

2 TRANSPORTATION Fig. lift the machine slowly. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE 2. That is. 2 Be very careful not to impact the machine when lifting it. insert cloth or wood between the rope and the machine to prevent the machine from being damaged. NOTE 1 Use a rope or cable whose permissible load is 3000 kg or more. 3 If the rope can directly touch the machine.2.2 Lift the machine Three eyebolts and a rope or cable are used to lift the machine.B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 2. 41 .

INSTALLATION INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01 3 INSTALLATION 42 .3.

1 INSTALLING LEVELING BOLTS AND BLOCKS α–T14/21iCe Position the attached leveling blocks under the four leveling bolts and slowly put the machine on the blocks. 43 .B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 3. INSTALLATION 3. Leveling bolt Nut Leveling block α–T14/21iCSe α–T14/21iCLe Fig.3. Set the nuts over the casting (bed).1 Mount the YC stand with the shown surface (surface with white resin) facing forward.

2 REMOVING THE EYEBOLTS FOR LIFTING THE MACHINE Remove the two M30 eyebolts on the top front of the bed. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01 3.3. 44 .

B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 3. (2) After turning on the power. INSTALLATION 3.3 REMOVING THE PACKING PLATE Untie the nylon band that secures the turret. slowly raise the spindle head and remove the packing plate. (See II–3.) (3) Remove three eye bolts.4 for connecting the power supply. Remove the packing plate according to the following steps: (1) Remove the bolts fixing the packing plate on the top of the table and at the bottom of the spindle head. 45 .

4. Phase Matching Connect an input terminal block phase rotation meter as shown in Fig. and connect the power supply so that the phase rotation meter disk rotates clockwise.1 Cabling and Phase Matching Connect the power cable to the power distribution board.4.4.1 (a). 3.).3.3.1 (a) Connecting of Phase Rotation Meter 46 . connect the coolant to the terminals of the coolant motor (U.4 CONNECTING THE POWER SUPPLY 3.W. To switchboard Phase rotation meter Circuit breaker Fig. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01 3.V.G. Then.

1 (b) Locations of Fuses (1/5) Fuses (1A) Fig.3.1 (c) Locations of Fuses (2/5) 47 . Confirm these fuses are not blown out.3. INSTALLATION Fuses Fuses are located in the control unit cabinet as shown below. Fuses (F1 to F5) Fuses (F6) Fig.4.4.B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 3.

0A) Fuses (1. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01 Fuses (3.1 (d) Locations of Fuses (3/5) 48 .3.4.3.2A) Fuses (2.0A) Fuses (1A) Fuses (1A) Fig.

4.B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 3.1 (e) Locations of Fuses (4/5) Fuses (5A) Fig.3.3.4. INSTALLATION Rear side of LCD CP1 FUSE Fuses (5A) Fig.1 (f) Locations of Fuses (5/5) 49 .

4.7 A and 2.2 A.6 A. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01 3.2 Setting of Input Power Supply Check the following items for each input power supply. (MCC2) 50 .8A (NOTE) 2. (MCC1) Adjust the setting to the midpoint of 1.4 A and 2. Current values of thermal relay Thermal Relay Coolant Flood coolant MCC1 MCC2 Set Value 1.1A NOTE Adjust the setting to the midpoint of 1.3.

respectively. INSTALLATION 3.02 m3/min are added.B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 3.) 51 . Specification: 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2 of gauge pressure) 0.5 m3/min (for a machine with an automatic door opening +0. Connect the compressed air supply satisfying the following specification with the IN port (PT 1/4 inch) of the filter regulator at the rear of splash guard.5 CONNECTING THE COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY Compressed air is used for spindle air blow and for opening and closing the automatic door in the ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe series.

6MPa) Pressure switch Pressure setting : 0.26MPa to 0.34MPa) Pressure switch Pressure setting : 0.3MPa Air sealing regulator Speed controlPressure setting : 0.04MPa ler fully (Pressure range mark : opened 0.05MPa) 52 .03MPa to 0.5MPa (Pressure range mark : 0.4MPa to 0.3.6MPa) Rotary–union regulator Pressure setting : 0.3MPa (Pressure range mark : 0.4MPa to 0.05MPa) Speed controller fully opened Primary filter/regulator Pressure setting : 0.5MPa (Pressure range mark : 0. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01 Regulator Pressure adjustment valve (to be pulled up and turned) Top view Air supply inlet Primary filter/regulator Pressure setting : 0.04MPa (Pressure range mark : 0.3MPa Air sealing regulator Pressure setting : 0.03MPa to 0.

1.B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 3. Z axis D Internal face of spindle taper part D Upper face of table D Turret rear side and spindle nose gears (After removing anticorrosive grease.1).6 REMOVAL OF CORROSION PREVENTIVE GREASE The following parts are coated with corrosion–preventive grease for preventing them from being corroded during transportation. Refer to V–2. D Rolling guides (LM guides) for X. Y. Remove the corrosion–preventive grease from these parts. INSTALLATION 3. apply lubricating grease. 53 .

If the motor and housing mounting bolt holes are not in line.4KN (145kg.cm) (5) As shown below.7 MOUNTING A Z–AXIS MOTOR AT MACHINE INSTALLATION The ROBODRILL α-T14/21iCe may be shipped with its Z-axis motor dismounted. 54 . In this case.) (3) Wipe off any rust inhibitor grease from the coupling. align them by rotating the motor manually with a relatively strong force. (4) After making sure that the motor shaft is provided with a key. the Z-axis motor must be mounted so that the factory-set machine zero point is reestablished correctly when the machine is installed. (1) Turn off the power to the machine. place the servo motor on the housing with the motor shaft key aligned to the key groove of the coupling. Coupling Retaining screw Tightening torque : 1. follow the procedure below. tighten the motor mounting bolts. or check that the power to the machine is already off.3. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01 3. after making sure that the motor connector is on the left–hand side of the machine as viewed from the front of the machine. To achieve this. (2) Remove the cover from the Z–axis housing. (These items are packaged separately when shipped.

4 kN or 145 kg. make a reference position return. If a servo motor is mounted in other than its original machine. Cover NOTE 1 The motor grid position used as the reference for the zero point varies from one servo motor to another.B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 3. If the bolts are in such a phase that tightening is impossible. 55 . see Section V3. causing abnormal machine operation. For an explanation of how to perform origin return. INSTALLATION (6) Fasten the coupling retaining bolts on the motor shaft side to a specified torque (1. turn on the power and move the Z–axis manually to put them in a phase that allows tightening. (9) After turning on the power. (Do not perform automatic operation with the bolts for the coupling loose. To avoid this. then tighten the screws.) (7) Connect the three Z-axis motor cables. 2 After motor installation. the machine zero point will shift.cm). an alarm is issued to request origin return when the power is turned on. (8) Mount the Z-axis housing cover. motors must be mounted only on the machine with which they are supplied. then tighten them.

8 LEVEL ADJUSTING After removing the devices for transportation.8 Leveling 56 . adjust the leveling bolts to a suitable length. to within 0. Fig. (4) Confirm that level is maintained. level the machine tool. (1) Turn on the power and move the table to the middle of X and Y–axis stroke. (3) Adjust for level by the four leveling bolts by turns to within 0. secure the leveling bolts with the fixing nuts.04 mm/m at the stroke end of the positive and negative sides of the Y axis.04 mm/m using the 150 mm JIS first class level.3. Finally. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01 3. (2) After loosening fixing nuts.3.

(2) Press the (3) Press the key on the MDI operator’s panel. a failure such as tool dropping occurs. prepare to press the EMERGENCY STOP key immediately. If tools can be changed smoothly. Then. INSTALLATION 3. key. NOTE 1 The turret is finely adjusted. If not. 2 The weight of an arbor to be installed in the turret must be 2 kg max. any of the rapid traverse selection buttons may be pressed on the machine operator’s panel. set the tool mass to 3 kg. (8) Turn off the power. 3 Take into consideration the weight of each arbor when installing the arbors so that the turret is not out of balance in weight.9 MOUNTING TOOLS (1) Attach one arbor to the grip through the notch of the cover at the right rear of the turret. The total weight of the fourteen arbors must not exceed 15 kg and 23kg. (4) Press the key on the machine operator’s panel.B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 3. The tool mass is factory–set to 3 kg to assure operator safety. Change cutting tools once under no–load running. check whether tools were changed smoothly. Check whether the arbor and the spindle head are firmly clamped together. 57 . which is one of the rapid traverse selection buttons on the machine operator’s panel. (7) After repeating the same procedure. When mounting a tool of 2 kg or more (up to 3 kg). check whether fourteen and twentyone arbors are gripped in the turret. (5) Attach one arbor to the grip through the notch. NOTE If the arbor is not correctly attached to the grip. Do not carelessly grab or apply load to the turret. (6) Press the key.

however.10 (a) 58 . NOTE Insulate the terminals using vinyl caps. Pump for coolant unit Pump for flood coolant unit Fig. or under the NC rack.3. (3) Connect the pump to the nozzle. (2) Install the nozzle at the bottom of the spindle head. The coolant tank must.10 INSTALLING THE COOLANT UNIT After installing the machine. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01 3.3. and the pump to the pipe of the flood–coolant unit. (4) Connect the controller rack to the pump terminal with the coolant cable. install the coolant unit (and flood–coolant unit) according to the following steps: (1) Install the coolant tank at the back of the machine. be installed so that the pump is positioned at the right of the machine. when viewing the machine from the front.

INSTALLATION Fig.3.B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 3.10 (b) 59 .

3. 60 . INSTALLATION INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01 (5) Press the coolant button.10 (c) Pump and Surrounding Area (6) Supply the coolant to the coolant tank. Then stop the rotation of the pump.3. Check that the pump rotates in the direction shown by the arrow when viewing the pump from the window on the top of the pump. Direction of rotation Fig.

Temporarily tighten the flange securing bolts.11 Y–AXIS TELESCOPIC COVER (Y–COVER F) (1) Mount the YC stand with the shown surface (surface with white resin) facing forward. so that the telescopic cover does not push the stopper vertically.B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION 3. Then. tighten the flange securing bolts. (3) Move the telescopic cover. Push in the free covers as far as possible. along the Y–axis toward you. as much as possible.11 61 . Cover fixed to the saddle Saddle Flange securing bolt Free cover Head Fig. INSTALLATION 3. (2) Mount a telescopic cover.3.

the machine must be packed to prevent the machine from being impacted. transported.1 when packing the machine. Pack the machine according to the following steps: (1) Sufficiently clean the top of the table and the inside of the splash guard so that cuttings or other foreign matter do not remain in the machine. (2) Remove the tools from the turret. or lifted. PACKING INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01 4 PACKING When the machine is moved. (3) See II–2.4. 62 .

ROUTINE OPERATIONS .III.

.

Front door Coolant unit Operator’s panel Left Fixed cover Right Fixed cover Table Internal Light 65 . OPERATING POSITIONS 1 OPERATING POSITIONS The following figure shows the working places for the α–T14/21iCe series.B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 1.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Operation Workpiece change and jig setting Program editing and data input/output Power on/off Tool change Chip cleaning Coolant replenishment Fuse replacement Air pressure supplying and shutting off Greasing Lubricant replenishment for the lubrication unit Fluorescent lamp replacement Spindle motor cleaning Operating position Working place Viewed from A A A.B A Machine front section Operator’s panel and table top Machine front section Operator’s panel Machine front/rear section Machine front/rear section Machine rear section Machine rear section Machine rear section Machine front section/both sides Machine rear section Operator’s panel and controller cabinet rear section Machine front section Turret Inside the splash guard and coolant unit A.B Coolant unit Inside the controller cabinet Air unit Inside the splash guard Lubrication unit B B B A. is likely to be hazardous because of a bad working condition or unstable footing. turn off the power. and remove the fixed side covers and the protective cover.C. Do not perform operation at a location other than the operation locations described above. D Inside the machine D On top of the controller cabinet D On top of the column D On top of the splash guard D On top of the turret support 66 . Working in the following places. OPERATING POSITIONS ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 The following table lists the operating positions and working places.D B A A Machine front section Intra–machine lamp Machine front section Spindle motor Before greasing. No.1. for example.

SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF 2 SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF 67 .B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 2.

) Fig. (Check that the door of the control unit rack is closed. close it before turning the breaker handle to the ON position.2. the “NOT READY” display on the CRT screen disappears.1 Turning the Breaker On (2) Turn the power on by pressing the POWER ON button on the operator’s panel. NOTE When the power is switched on. (4) Confirm that the fan motor for ventilation of the control unit rack running. (3) Several seconds after switching the power on. 68 . do not simultaneously press any button (on the MDI panel or the machine operator’s panel) other than the POWER ON button.1 SWITCHING POWER ON (1) Turn the handle of the circuit breaker on the control unit rack until it clicks in the ON position. If it is open.2. SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 2. and the machine is ready for operation.

2 When the power is switched off. (2) Confirm that no movable parts of the machine are moving.B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 2.) 69 . (4) Press the POWER OFF button. (5) Turn the circuit–breaker handle on the door of the control unit rack to the OFF position. Normally. do not simultaneously press any key (on the MDI panel or the machine operator’s panel) other than the POWER OFF key. (See Section IV–17. (3) If any input/output device is connected. It turns the power off automatically at the end of a program (M30). Fig. turn it off. SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF 2. 3 An automatic power disconnect function is available.2 SWITCHING POWER OFF (1) Confirm that the lamp of the CYCLE START button on the operator’s panel is not lit.2 Turning the Breaker Off NOTE 1 If the door of the control unit rack is not locked. the door should be locked. the door opens when the breaker handle is fully turned to the OFF side.2. Confirm this lamp is off.

(See Section V–4” for recovering the machine after pressing the EMERGENCY STOP button during the tool change job. all operation of the machine can be stopped by pressing the EMERGENCY STOP button.) Fig. the Z axis stops moving immediately and the spindle is freed from the controlled status. the following takes place depending on the status of operation: (a) If the spindle orientation is in progress. (c) The control unit is reset and the machine alarm status is assumed. If the EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed while tool change is in progress.3. the spindle stops immediately. the Z axis stops moving immediately and the spindle is freed from the controlled status. It is unlocked when it is turned clockwise. EMERGENCY STOP ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 3 EMERGENCY STOP This button is used to instantly stop the movement of the machine at the time of an emergency. remove the cause of the problem. And all the automatic operation nor manual operation become unoperable state. (d) The Z axis slightly descends. (b) If the Z axis is ascending. 3 Before releasing the emergency stop. the following events occur: (a) All moving axes stop immediately. (c) If the turret is rotating. Coolant stops its operation. 2 The emergency stop causes electric current to the motors to be cut off. NOTE 1 The emergency stop operation should be done before anything else when danger arises. (b) The rotating spindle stops immediately. Be prepared to press the button whenever necessary. it stops quickly. 70 . When the EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed.3 EMERGENCY STOP Button The EMERGENCY STOP button is locked when it is pressed. If the machine shows unexpected operation. (d) If the Z axis is descending.

OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR 4 OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR The FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe series monitors the state of the splash–guard front door (safety door). This function is known as a splash–guard door interlock function. unlocking the safety door (pressing the <DOOR> key on the operator’s panel) suspends the operation. using a controller. During machine operation. Electromagnetic lock swich Front door α–T14(21)iCe/iCLe Electromagnetic lock swich Front door α–T14/21iCSe 71 . there are restrictions on the operation of the machine with the safety door open.B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 4. To assure safe use of the machine.

) In the following cases. When the safety door is open: D Close the safety door. (If the safety door is released immediately before it is completely closed. which usually prevents the door from opening. does not indicate a failure. however. When the safety door is unlocked. D When an alarm occurs for the spindle or an axis. the operator message “2004 DOOR IS UNLOCKED FORCIBLY” is displayed. the <DOOR> key LED on the operator’s panel goes off.1 LOCKING THE SAFETY DOOR The safety door is equipped with a lock mechanism. D When the spindle or an axis is moving. the <DOOR> key LED on the operator’s panel lights. D Press the <DOOR> key. Performing either of the following steps unlocks the door. When the safety door is closed (but not locked): D Press the <DOOR> key on the operator’s panel. D Within about 20 seconds after the power is turned on. When the safety door is locked. D Issue M02 or M30 (if bit 6 of PMC parameter K12 = 1). This message. and safety cannot be confirmed. 72 . Performing the following steps locks the safety door. allowing you to open it.4. the safety door cannot be unlocked. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 4.

4) Tool exchange is impossible. an air blow is output even when the safety door is open. However. Only the following operations are possible. the spindle and each axis stop.2 RESTRICTIONS ON THE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE WITH THE SAFETY DOOR OPEN The following restrictions are placed on the operation of the machine with the safety door open. Y–. 3) No coolant can be supplied.B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 4. 73 . D When the safety door is closed. D Spindle rotation of 100 min–1 or less (Machines designed to the CE marking specification are excluded. and Z–axis movement of 2 m/min or less D Manual additional axis movement of 700 degrees/min or less D Manual handle feed 6) During manual operation with the safety door open: D If the mode is switched. the spindle and each axis stop. 2) MDI operation is impossible.) D Manual X–. 1) Automatic operation is impossible. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR 4. 5) There are speed limits to manual operation.

(If the coolant button is not pressed. (If the spindle is not started to rotate. follow the steps below.) If the door is closed but not locked.) 3) If coolant and air blow output operations are performed. press the DOOR button on the operator’s panel. 3) Coolant and air blow output operations stop.3 IF THE SAFETY DOOR IS UNLOCKED DURING OPERATION When the safety door is locked (closed).4. To resume automatic operation. operator message No.) 4) Select the operation mode. the machine is stopped after the tool change is completed. the dwelling is brought to a pause. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 4. 1) Close the safety door without doing anything else. 2) If the spindle was rotating when the safety door was opened. 74 . 2009 will be displayed when the start button is pressed. the machine is stopped after the orientation is finished. the spindle and axes are decelerated to a stop with the rigid mode retained. 6) If spindle orientation is under way. 2) If tool change is under way. and press the start button. automatic operation is resumed with no coolant supplied when the start button is pressed. 5) If dwelling is under way. unlocking it (pressing the <DOOR> button on the operator’s panel) stops the machine in the sequence stated below. in which case it is impossible to resume automatic operation. after the drill bit reaches the hole bottom or R point. press the coolant button then perform another coolant output operation. press the spindle rotation button during the manual mode to cause the spindle to start rotating. 1) The spindle and axes are decelerated to a stop by effecting feed hold.(Closing the door locks it automatically. 4) If rigid tapping is under way.

ask the maintenance personnel. KEY Electromagnetic lock swich Unlocked state Locked state 75 . (4) If you need to open the door when the power is off. no operator is allowed to open the door.B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 4.4 OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOOR WHEN THE POWER IS OFF (1) To open the door when the power is off. do not use the LOCK/UNLOCK key to open the door. (5) To open the door when the power is off. Do no leave the key attached to the door. (3) When the power is off. the message “2004 DOOR IS UNLOCKED FORCIBLY” is displayed. If you open the door with the unlock key. (2) When the power is on. use the LOCK/UNLOCK key. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR 4. the maintenance personnel must use the LOCK/UNLOCK key. which is managed by the sector in charge of maintenance.

When M02/M30 is specified. S The safety door is not locked when automatic operation/MDI operation is started. S The safety door is locked when automatic operation/MDI operation is started. When M00/M01 is specified. PMC parameter K12. 76 . S The safety door is locked when the safety door is closed. The safety door is unlocked when operation stops in the single–block operation mode.1 Setting *0 1 T82 (No. the safety door is unlocked. S The safety door is not unlocked after a tool change is made using the tool change button on the operator’s panel. the safety door is not unlocked. Wait time from the stop of operation in the single–block operation mode until the safety door is unlocked The settings marked with * are factory settings.6 0 *1 A machine operation related to the locking/unlocking of the safety door can be selected.5 SWITCHING OF SAFETY DOOR LOCK CONTROL PMC parameter K11. (1) Safety door control when machining ends Whether to unlock the safety door when machining ends can be selected. When an automatic door (option) is mounted. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 4. The settings marked with * are factory settings. S The door is not locked even when the safety door is closed.42) *2000(ms) Function The safety door is not unlocked when operation stops in the single–block operation mode. When M02/M30 is specified.7 Setting *0 Function S The safety door is not unlocked when the power is turned on. 1 S The door is unlocked when the power is turned on. Function When M00/M01 is specified. (2) Safety door control in single–block operation Whether to unlock the safety door automatically when operation stops in the single–block operation mode can be selected. the safety door is not unlocked. S The safety door is unlocked after a tool change is made using the tool change button on the operator’s panel. the safety door is unlocked. (3) General safety door control Whether the safety door is automatically unlocked when operation stops in the single–block operation mode can be selected. PMC parameter K11.4.7 Setting *0 1 K12. these parameters are ignored (assumed to be set to 0). The settings marked with * are factory settings.

During maintenance underneath the Z–axis. be careful that the Z–axis may come down. The Z–axis (spindle head) comes down once in a while because of the Z–axis brake failing to work. Before opening the safety door with the power switched off. Before opening the safety door. place a wooden block between the table and spindle head so that the Z–axis will not come down even if the brake fails to work. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR 4.6 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Before opening the safety door. When the safety door is open. Be careful when opening the safety door with the power switched off. make sure that the Z–axis does not come down.B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 4. make sure that the Z–axis does not come down. make sure that the Z–axis (spindle head) does not come down. 77 .

“TOOLS”. Install each tool by pushing it into the respective grip until it stops. For details of the tools that may be used and for the installation of tools. 78 . and so that there is no gross imbalance of weight. After mounting the tools. MOUNTING TOOLS ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 5 MOUNTING TOOLS Confirm that all cutters to be used are firmly held on the tools and that the cutters have no abnormal wear or chips. Install the tools so that they are well–distributed over the turret. or the maximum tool weight. see Section I–3.5. the maximum tool length. The used tools must not exceed the maximum tool diameter. check whether they are firmly installed.

B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 6. Especially. 2 When the load to be placed on the table weights 100 kg or more. confirm the following: (a) Confirm that the jigs are firmly fixed on the table. NOTE 1 The maximum load capacity of the α–T14(21)iCe/iCLe table is 250 kg and of the α–T14/21iCSe table is 150 kg. confirm that the necessary air pressure is obtained. If operation is continued with “less than 100 kg” set. (b) Confirm that the workpieces are firmly fixed on the jigs. 79 . MOUNTING JIGS AND WORKPIECES 6 MOUNTING JIGS AND WORKPIECES To fix the jigs on the table. when an air cylinder jig is used. the T–bolt having the nominal diameter of 14 mm (as specified in JIS B 1166) or the T–nut having the nominal diameter of 14 mm (as specified in JIS B 1167) can be used. change the setting of “permissible mass of workpiece” to “more than 100 kg” on the QUICK screen. Using a T–bolt Using a T–nut Before starting automatic running. a servo alarm may be generated.

MOUNTING JIGS AND WORKPIECES ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Set table load 80 .6.

When water soluble coolant is used. NOTE Do not spill water into the splash guard. a substantial portion of coolant reduction is caused by the evaporation of water. If the amount of coolant is insufficient. Water can cause corrosion. COOLANT SUPPLY 7 COOLANT SUPPLY Check that the amount of coolant is sufficient. 81 . If no degradation of quality is noticed. add some in the manner shown below: Some water soluble coolants solidify when the stock solution is put into water or coolant solution. only adding water may be necessary.B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 7. If the coolant is water soluble. use another container to thin the stock solution well before pouring it into the tank.

press and in the stated sequence to select the soft key “O search” on the screen. PREPARING PROGRAMS [CNC OPERATION] ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 8 PREPARING PROGRAMS [CNC OPERATION] Call the program according to the following procedure. 82 . an alarm is issued. Example) To call O0010. (2) Press screen. (1) Press the mode selection key operation mode (MEM). and to put the machine in the in the stated sequence to select the program (3) Call the program by specifying its program number.8. Press to select [CNC operation]. This is the end of preparation for automatic operation. Press the reset key and enter the program number again. Program O0010 will be called. NOTE If O0010 is not found.

One block of the program is executed and the machine tool stops. (a) SINGLE BLOCK Single block is the function that executes one block of the program each time the CYCLE START button is pressed. NOTE 1 For G28 and G29. 2. (1) Turn on the SINGL BLOCK key to set the single block.B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 9. When the CYCLE START button is pressed. after the single block is executed. To release the single block mode press the SINGL BLOCK key again. the machine tool stops at the specified point and the FEED HOLD lamp lights. 2 The single block stop point in a canned cycle is any of the end point 1. the machine tool stops even during machining. or 6 in the figure shown below. 1 2 6 3 5 Rapid traverse Cutting feed 4 3 For a tool change sequence. 83 . the next block is executed and the machine tool stops. TRIAL RUN 9 TRIAL RUN The following functions can be used for trial run.

This operation support function is used for program check. 84 . the dry run function cannot be turned on/off. operate with the quick screen ”SEQ. NOTE 1 Even if the G27 or G28 command is executed. the machine tool can be displayed as if it were moving although it is not. refer to the NC Operator’s Manual. To switch machine lock. Dry run key NOTE 1 During tool change operation. The display changes momentarily at the specified speed. the reference position LED (HOME) does not light because the machine tool does not move to the reference position. the F–function specified in the program is ignored and the feedrate is set to the maximum jog feedrate at rapid traverse or cutting feed command. be sure to turn the power off then back on.9. 3 After executing a machine lock operation. 2 All M and S functions except M06 (tool change command) are executed. 2 The rapid traverse rate can be held as it is by changing the sixth bit (RDRN) of parameter 1401 from 1 to 0. (c) MACHINE LOCK By making the machine lock on. For details. TRIAL RUN ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (b) DRY RUN When dry run is effected. SELECTION.

) 3 After executing a Z–axis lock operation. To switch Z axis lock. “Settings and Operations of Automatic Running. M06. When an override of LOW is applied. NOTE 1 Even when the G27 or G28 command is executed. or LOW can be applied. the rapid traverse rate becomes about 12 m/min. the fixed rapid traverse rate 400 mm/min is used. TRIAL RUN (d) Z AXIS LOCK When the Z AXIS LOCK is on.”) (a) CYCLE START Operation is started by pressing the CYCLE START button. “EMERGENCY STOP” and Section IV–5. the reference position lamp does not light because the machine tool does not move to the reference position. This Z axis lock is useful in checking the program contents by drawing the axis movement with a ball–point pen. see Section III–3. operate with the quick screen ”SEQ. If an override of 25% is applied when the rapid traverse rate is 48 m/min. (Only the tool change command. SELECTION. When the CYCLE START button is pressed in the feed hold mode. 2 The M–function and the S–function are executed. A rapid traverse command for applying this override is as follows: (1) Rapid traverse by G00 (2) Rapid traverse during a canned cycle (3) Rapid traverse at G27. be sure to turn the power off then back on. G28.B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 9. only the Z axis enters the machine lock status. 25%. or G29 (4) Manual rapid traverse (5) Rapid traverse for manual return to the reference position (6) Rapid traverse in tool change sequence The following operations are related to the trial run: (For details of each operation.4. is not executed. CYCLE START button (b) FEED HOLD 85 . operation is restarted. (e) RAPID TRAVERSE RATE OVERRIDE An override of 100%.

) 86 . and check each operation of the program. immediately press the FEED HOLD button. The <RESET> key is used for other purposes. Dry run is useful for checking that the F values in the program are appropriate or for conducting a trial run to check the operation of a program that is used for the first time. Single block enabled Rapid traverse feedrate override 25% (3) Press the CYCLE START button as necessary. such as releasing the alarm. and call the program to be used.) FEED HOLD button (c) RESET Automatic running is suspended by pressing the <RESET> key.SRH] Calling a program (2) Enable the single block function and apply rapid traverse override 25%. the dry run function need not be used when a proven machining program is used. For restart. <RESET> key Trial run is performed using the functions described above. TRIAL RUN ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 When the FEED HOLD button is pressed. The following is the description of an example of a normal trial run: (1) Show the program screen in the AUTO mode.9. + Memory mode button Program screen Number input + [O. (If you encounter an unexpected operation. Generally. traverse of the axes stops during traverse. press the CYCLE START button. The status of stopping by the feed hold function is called “feed hold status”.

Check the depth of cut. the cutter compensation in the program. TRIAL RUN CYCLE START button FEED HOLD button (4) At a position where the workpiece and the tool are close to each other. remaining traverse amount. and the remaining traverse amount of the current block that is displayed on the program check screen. and perform regular operation. (8) Disable the single block function. (6) Confirm that the machining status is not abnormal in the machining block. Single block disabled 100% rapid traverse override 87 . apply the 100% rapid traverse feedrate override. Rapid traverse override LOW (5) Stop operation by pressing the FEED HOLD button just before the workpiece and the tool contact each other. the workpiece coordinate system. Check the depth of the cut.B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 9. the trial run ends. (7) When a series of machining checks have been finished and the program has been executed. set the rapid traverse override to LOW. etc.

AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 10 AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] Machine operation that follows the program is called automatic running. “AUTOMATIC RUNNING. and restarting procedure of automatic running is described in this section. see Section IV–5. stopping. The starting. (For details of each operation.10.”) 88 .

89 .SRH] Calling a program (2) Press the CYCLE START button. automatic running starts. + Memory mode button Program screen Number input + [O.1 STARTING AUTOMATIC RUNNING (1) Show the program screen in the memory mode and call the program to be used.B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 10. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] 10. When the CYCLE START button is pressed. and the CYCLE START lamp lights.

the machine stops after executing another block. (a) Stop by feed hold function When the FEED HOLD button is pressed. automatic running stops. (b) Stop by single block function When the single block function is enabled. and the FEED HOLD lamp lights. When the CYCLE START button is pressed again. the CYCLE START lamp goes off. At the same time. 90 .10.2 STOPPING AUTOMATIC RUNNING The feed hold function or the single block function stops automatic running. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 10. the machine atops after executing one block of the program.

At the same time.B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 10. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] 10. 91 . and the CYCLE START lamp lights. When the CYCLE START button is pressed. the automatic running restarts.3 RESTARTING AUTOMATIC RUNNING Press the CYCLE START button again to restart automatic running. the FEED HOLD lamp goes off.

POWER SHUTOFF METHODS ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 11 POWER SHUTOFF METHODS 92 .11.

B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 11. Regulator Pressure adjustment valve (to be pulled up and turned) Top view Air supply inlet Compressed air is used as a spindle taper air blower. The residual pressure can be released by closing the regulator pressure adjustment valve. 93 .1 AIR SUPPLY SHUTOFF METHOD Removing the hose from the supply inlet or closing the regulator pressure adjustment valve shuts off the air supply. POWER SHUTOFF METHODS 11.

11. POWER SHUTOFF METHODS ROUTINE OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 11. External power supply transformer (if provided) 2. Note that the power on the primary side remains live.2 ELECTRIC POWER SUPPLY SHUTOFF METHOD Setting the main circuit breaker handle on the rear of the machine shuts off all electric power supplies on the secondary side of the circuit breaker. Also keep in mind that the following units may be connected to the primary side of the main circuit breaker. 1. Non–standard peripheral unit (if installed) Controller rack 94 .

DETAILED OPERATIONS .IV.

.

QUICK SCREEN 1 QUICK SCREEN 97 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1.

it is possible to operate the machine and to create a machining program even if a operator is not used to CNC operation. too. By using QUICK SCREEN. can perform various operations by using QUICK SCREEN easily.1 OVERVIEW “QUICK SCREEN” is the exclusive screen to ROBODRILL.1. 98 . And a operator who is used to CNC operation well. QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 1.

(Note 2) 23: QUICK EDITOR (Note 3) 24: COUNTER 31: SEQ. P. 3 A detailed explanation is provided in manual of Appendix IV–12. 99 .2.1 Overview QUICK SCREEN is constituted as follows. A. “MANUAL GUIDE” in Part IV.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1. SELECTION MAINTENANCE 32: MAINTENANCE SETTING 33: DIAGNOSE / ALARM NOTE 1 Option 2 For conversational programming screens. see Section 13. QUICK EDTIOR. QUICK SCREEN 1. “QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING” and Section 36.2 CONSTITUTION OF QUICK SCREEN 1. 11: COORDINATES/OFFSET 12: DATA I/O SET UP 13: TOOL LIFE 14: PALLET SETTING (Note 1) 21: AUTOMATIC OPERATION 1: MENU OPERATION 2: MENU OPERATION 22: QUICK C.

(6) Display of maximum and minimum values A range of values that can be entered to an item where the cursor is set is indicated. a guidance message is displayed. 100 . (5) Display of an entered value or operation guidance message The data entered from the operator’s panel is displayed.2. (9) Screen group display soft key This soft key is used to display a screen group name at (7) when the display is switched to the screen of a different group (for example. QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 1.2 Descriptions of Screen Displays (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (9) (7) (8) (10) (1) Screen name The number and name of the currently selected QUICK SCREEN are displayed. (8) Function selection soft keys These soft keys are used to select a function on an individual screen. from COORDINATES SCREEN “SET UP” group) to AUTOMATIC OPERATION SCREEN “OPERATION” group. (7) Screen switching soft keys These soft keys are used to select a QUICK SCREEN. (3) Current time The current date and time are displayed. (2) Selected program number The number of the currently selected program is displayed.1. If an entered value or selected soft key is invalid. The cursor is moved using the cursor keys on the operator’s panel. (4) Cursor The selected entry item is indicated.

It is used if a screen has many functions.) 1. PRESS The menu of “OPERATION” group is displayed on SOFT–KEYS for screen change.3.3 Screen Switching Methods The following three methods can be used for QUICK SCREEN switching: D Soft keys D Screen number and PAGE key D <MENU> (<MDI>) key 1.3.2.1 Soft Key–triggered Screen Switching The left–side six soft keys are used for screen switching.2 Screen Number and PAGE Key Triggered Screen Switching Numeral and page (previous or next page) keys are used for screen switching. and <PAGE key> in the stated sequence. because the screen number of the AUTOMATIC OPERATION SCREEN is 21. 1.2. QUICK SCREEN (10)Function selection switching soft key This soft key is used to switch functions displayed on the function selection soft keys (8).B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1. [Example Switching to the 21:AUTOMATIC OPERATION SCREEN] Click the <2>. [Example: Switching from the 11:COORDINATES/OFFSET SCREEN to the 23:QUICK EDITOR SCREEN] PRESS Screen group names are displayed on the respective screen switching soft keys. 101 . (This soft key is usable when it has a triangle mark.2. <1>. PRESS The QUICK EDITOR SCREEN is displayed.

When a QUICK SCREEN is displayed.3. no other screens can be displayed using a special key. 102 . pressing the <MENU> (<MDI>) key on the operator’s panel displays the MENU OPERATION SCREEN. a special key can be used to display the MENU OPERATION SCREEN.2.1.3 MENU OPERATION Key–triggered Screen Switching In addition to the methods described above. QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 1.

SET UP. i. (This screen is displayed by pressing “1” and PAGE KEY (Y or B). The number and name of the screen in each group are displayed.1 Menu Screen The constitution of QUICK SCREEN is displayed. QUICK SCREEN 1.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1. The position of each screen is seen by displaying this screen. 103 . OPERATION.) (1) (2) Item 1 2 SCREEN GROUP NAME AND NUMBER OF EACH SCREEN Contents QUICK SCREEN is classified into three groups. e.3 EXPLANATION OF EACH SCREEN 1.3. and MAINTENANCE.

This function is intended to make a reference position return for a specified axis easily. A specified operation is performed when you enter data according to guidance messages displayed on the screen and press the CYCLE START button. This function is used to move axes to arbitrary position by conversational operations. using menus. The guidance is displayed on screen. using menus. A specified item is canceled when you select the item according to guidance messages displayed on the screen and press the CYCLE START button. QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 1. (Correspondence to MDI running on CNC SCREEN. and tool length compensation easily. 2 AXES MOVEMENT 3 SPINDLE REVOLUTIONS 4 RESTORATION TO THE REFERENCE POINT CANCEL 5 104 . Then TOOL CHANGE will be finished. This function is intended to cancel a canned cycle. Item 1 TOOL CHANGE Contents This function is used to change a tool for another by conversational operations.3. A reference position return for the specified axis is completed when you operate according to guidance messages displayed on the screen. The guidance is displayed on screen. This function is intended to rotate and stop the spindle easily.1. using menus.2 Menu Operation This screen is used to perform one block running by conversational operations. Input data and press CYCLE START button in accordance with the instructions. Then MOVEMENT OF AXES will be finished.) It is possible to run the machine tool by inputting data in accordance with instructions easily even if a operator is not used to CNC operation. Input data and press CYCLE START button in accordance with the instructions. cutter compensation.

using menus. using menus. QUICK SCREEN Item 6 EXTERNAL SIGNAL Contents This function is intended to output M codes easily. A specified operation is performed when you select the corresponding item according to guidance messages displayed on the screen and press the CYCLE START button. This function is intended to clamp and unclamp additional axes easily. enter the corresponding number. from 1 to 8. This function is intended to execute NC language commands for one block easily. A specified operation is performed when you enter data according to guidance messages displayed on the screen and press the CYCLE START button.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1. A specified signal is output when you enter data according to guidance messages displayed on the screen and press the CYCLE START button. using menus. 7 CLAMP 8 NC LANGUAGE To perform an operation described above. 105 .

It can also be used to save and restore the data you set up. as a workpiece coordinate system origin. Supplement) When adding the Z–axis to the automatic workpiece coordinate system setting.3. The following WINDOW is displayed by pressing [AUTO SET] of SOFT–KEY. 3 The current machine position can be set as the origin of the workpiece coordinate system. a tool compensation amount. QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 1. A position determined by adding desired adjustment values to the current machine coordinates can also be set. Clicking the [X–EXEC] or [Y–EXEC] soft key automatically sets up.3 Coordinate/Tool Compensation This screen enables you to set up a workpiece coordinate system. (1) (2) (6) (4) (3) (5) Item 1 2 GRAPHICAL DISPLAY WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM AUTOMATIC SETTING Contents The present position of tool and the origin of workpiece coordinate system are displayed graphically.1. set the following parameter: PMC parameter keep relay K0 bit 2 = 1 106 . and table payload. Input the workpiece coordinate system number. the sum of the current machine coordinate and adjustment value for an individual axis.

and tool life management data) and machining programs at a time. thus curtailing the required setup time. impossible if the program is not in memory. If the setup file contains a program. The cursor can be used to select one of 30 setup files. it is possible to select whether to save the program to the CNC memory. registered. The selected file can be called. it is called and set at the start position. and deleted. 107 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1. however. This is. Clicking the SET UP FILE soft key displays a list of setup files in a window as shown below. If a program included in the file list is available. (a) Item a READ (b) Contents (c) The selected setup file is read from storage memory and used for automatic setting of the setup data. QUICK SCREEN Item 4 SETUP FILE Contents This screen enables you to save and restore all setup data (such as workpiece coordinate system. tool compensation amount.

108 . QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Item b REGISTER Contents Clicking the REGISTER soft key displays the window and soft keys that can be used for registration.) c DELETE The SET UP FILE data registered in a memory can be deleted. and M code @ PALLET SETTING machining program number (option) @ Machining programs (whether to register them can be selected.) @ Tool compensation amount (length–figure. and radius–wear when the option for tool compensation memory C is selected) @ Table payload @ Magazine data tool management number @ TOOL LIFE AI tool monitor setting and tool group setting @ PRODUCT MANAGEMENT function (ON/ OFF). and 48 workpiece coordinate systems (option) (300 workpiece coordinate systems (optional) are not stored. The following data can be saved. length–wear. @ Workpiece coordinate system. name. and the maximum registerable size is 17 Kbytes. workpiece coordinate system offset. Enter the target file name and program number. then click the #29–3 soft key.1. radius–figure. and the date.

(AUTO SET soft key) Supplement) Length–figure. 6 TABLE PAYLOAD Select the [>=100kg] or [<100kg] soft key. @ [<100kg] R If the total load (such as workpiece and jigs) on the table is not heavier than approximately 100 kg. radius– figure. Also available is a function that automatically sets the current Z–axis machine coordinates as a compensation amount. QUICK SCREEN Item 5 OFFSET Contents Clicking the OFFSET soft key displays the window that can be used for tool compensation amount setting as shown below. and radius–wear data can be displayed/input when the option for tool compensation memory C is selected. and enter a compensation amount. using the cursor and page keys. @ [>=100kg] R If the total load on the table is 100 kg or heavier. 109 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1. Move the cursor to the desired number. length–wear.

Select this when data is input to or output from a memory card. And parenthesized values are standard ones. 110 . cursor is displayed and a display of SOFT–KEY is changed for [I/O SELECT]. CH1–0 CH1–1 : RS–232C on the operator’s panel : RS–232C on the operator’s panel 2 I/O channel Memory card : Memory card slot beside the LCD. Select this when using a remote buffer. Each value can be modified by pressing [CHANGE PARAM] of SOFT–KEY. After modifications.1. Data server : Data server (optional). It also enables you to set up a data server and remote buffer for use. press [END] of SOFT–KEY. By pressing [CHANGE PARAM]. QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 1. 3 COMMUNICATION Several pieces of parameter on DATA I/O and their PARAMETER present values are displayed in this section. (2) (3) (1) Item 1 MENU Contents This screen enables you to transfer data (such as machining programs and parameters) with a memory card and floppy disk. It also enables you to set up a data server and remote buffer for use. Remote buffer: Reader/punch panel (optional) in the control cabinet.4 Data I/O Screen This screen enables you to transfer data (such as machining programs and parameters) with a memory card and floppy disk. Select this to enable programmed operation by a data server.3. Select the location to which an input/output device is connected.

2 3 WRITE 4 5 6 7 READ RENAME FILE DELETE FILE END NOTE 1 Communication parameter has to be standard setting. by pressing [END] of SOFT– KEY. use an SRAM card/ATA card. File list in a floppy disk or a memory card is displayed by pressing [FILE LIST] of SOFT–KEY. CNC PROGRAM or SET UP FILE in a CNC memory can be written in a floppy disk or a memory card.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1. If you select “9: SETUP FILE”. QUICK SCREEN * PROGRAM and SET UP FILE If PROGRAM or SET UP FILE is selected. the following screen is displayed and then data can be written or read easily by using FANUC Handy File or FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTER or a Memory card. 3 As a memory card. the Set up file list appears. A file in a floppy disk or a memory card can be read in a CNC memory. 2 “Multivolume file” cannot be treated. (The FROM card cannot be used. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Item 1 CNC PROGRAM LIST (SET UP FILE LIST) FILE LIST Contents If you select “1: PROGRAM”. the CNC program list appears. Up to 200 files can be displayed. except for I/O channel and baud rate. A file in a floppy disk or a memory card can be deleted.) 111 . This screen is closed. A file in a floppy disk or a memory card can be renamed.

2 FILE No. the tool is changed to a reserved tool registered in the same group. QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 1.5 Tool Life Management Screen This screen enables you to set data related to the AI tool monitor function. SETTING Set a reference load data file number for each tool. Machining is continued. OFF : Machining is continued as is. when the next tool change command is specified.3. and the tool is moved along the Z–axis to the machine zero point. 112 . TOOL CHNG : Machining is continued. OFF : The AI tool monitor function is disabled. FEED DOWN : Tool movement is decelerated to reduce the load on the tool. MCHN STOP : Machining is stopped. ON : The AI tool monitor function is enabled according to the setting of 2 through 4. when the next tool change command is specified. 3 OPERATION WHEN WARNING LOAD IS REACHED DOWN+CHNG : Tool movement is decelerated. (5) (1) (2) (3) (4) (6) (7) (8) (9) Item 1 AI TOOL MONITOR Contents Specify whether to use the AI tool monitor function. the tool is changed to a reserved tool registered in the same group. Pressing the FILE key causes a file number to be displayed on the screen. spindle rotation and coolant output are stopped. Moreover. and an alarm is displayed. Select the machine operation to be performed when spindle load w warning–level load.1.

the window shown below is displayed. When the [TOOL GROUP] soft key is pressed. 8 CLEAR TOOL INFORMATION TOOL GROUP SETTING 9 113 . clicking the page key changes the display to another file number. and the tool is moved along the Z–axis to the machine zero point. spindle rotation and coolant output are stopped. click the [ENTRY] soft key. QUICK SCREEN Item 4 OPERATION WHEN BREAKAGE LOAD IS REACHED (AI tool monitor function) Contents Select a machine operation to be performed when spindle load w breakage–level load. currently being displayed about the tools in a tool group. and an alarm is displayed. If a list of spindle load level files is displayed. To set the obtained values in a file. MCHN STOP : Machining is stopped. Information (such as use status and lifetime).] soft key calculates the WARNING and BREKAGE values from a DETECTED and N–DIA. set up for the file number. This box displays monitored information (such as the load information and tool group information about the tool in current use) or a list of spindle load level files. A value can be entered directly in an item indicated by the cursor. clicking the [MONITOR] soft key displays monitored information.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1. 5 MONITORED INFORMATION DISPLAYS OR SPINDLE LOAD LEVEL FILE LISTING REFERENCE LOAD CALCULATION AND REGISTRATION INTO FILE 6 When the [SPNDL LOAD] soft key is pressed. If a list of spindle load level files is displayed. If monitored information is displayed. the following windows are displayed: After moving the cursor to an item related to the target file number with the page and cursor keys. clicking the page key changes the display to another tool group. clicking the [CALC. OFF : Machining is continued as is. clicking the FILE soft key displays a list of spindle load level files. 7 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE SPINDLE LOAD LEVEL FILE LIST AND THE MONITORED–INFORMATION DISPLAY This soft key selects a list of spindle load level files or monitored information as a display in the right section of the screen ((5)). is cleared. Moreover. If monitored information is displayed.

(16) Contents GROUP No. The signal is output when the number of times or the duration that the last tool was used becomes greater than or equal to: Tool life (by cycle quantity or time) minus tool life limit (by cycle quantity or time) to trigger an expiration advance notice The present USED COUNT or TIME is displayed graphically. 114 . maximum number of tools = 8 11 LIFE TOOL LIFE LIMIT (BY CYCLE QUANTITY OR TIME) TO TRIGGER AN EXPIRATION ADVANCE NOTICE 12 USED COUNT or TIME Specify the value of tool life of each group. Clicking the USED COUNT ([USED TIME]) soft key changes USED COUNT (TIME). is changed from 1 to 14 by pressing PAGE KEY. maximum number of tools = 16 T21iC series: Maximum number of groups = 32. QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) Item 10 GROUP No.6800 bit 1 0 0 1 1 No. The maximum number of groups and the maximum number of tools that can be registered per group can be changed by setting the following NC parameters: No.1.6800 bit0 0 1 0 1 Maximum number of groups 16 32 64 128 Maximum number of tools 16 8 4 2 The maximum number of groups and maximum number of tools are factory–set as follows: T14iC series: Maximum number of groups = 16. Specifies the timing when the tool life expiration advance notice signal is to be output.

and the cutter compensation value number (D–CODE) as required. the tool length compensation number (H–CODE) for the target tool. 15 CHANGE OF JUDGEMENT OF TOOL LIFE 16 CLEARANCE OF TOOL INFORMATION 1. “WARNING” : tool whose spindle load value detected by tool monitor function was beyond the warning value. QUICK SCREEN Item 13 TOOL INFORMATION Contents The state of the tool is displayed in TOOL INFORMATION as “USING”. Select COUNT or TIME as a means to judge TOOL LIFE by pressing [LIFE JUDGE. (Note) “USING” “LIFE” : tool which is on use in the group.3.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1.6 Pallet Setting Screen (Option) If a machining program number is set up for each of workpieces mounted on two pallets (A and B) in advance. (1) (2) (3) 115 . 14 T–CODE. H–CODE.] of SOFT–KEY. “LIFE”. and D–CODE Set the tool number (T–CODE) that belongs to the target group. or “WARNING”. the machining programs can be automatically called and executed. It is possible to strike off TOOL INFORMATION in the group. Enter 0 for an item if it is not used. : tool which arrived at the life.

QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Item 1 SETTINGS OF MACHINING PROGRAM Contents Specify a machining program number for each pallet (A and B). An example of main program is shown below. Return to the head of a program. [Varieties of alarm] SAFETY DOOR/PALLET SETTING DETECTION/ PALLET TRANSPORT /PALLET EXIST OR NOT/ LOCK– UNLOCK (PALLET–A) /LOCK–UNLOCK (PALLET–B) /AUTOMATIC DOOR/PALLET UNCLAMP 116 . M99 . Calling of a machining program (subprogram) corresponding to the pallet on the table. * main program * O0001 . ² ² ² ² M code for pallet changing operation. The program is stopped when M01 STOP button on the operator’s panel is ON. Do not modify the program. In this case. and #999) for other use. #998. M01 . ON ³ The work number search function is used. #998 : A machining program number for the pallet A. 3 DISPLAY OF ALARM ON PALLET CHANGER Alarms occurred to the pallet changer are displayed. In other words. the specified program number (1) is set to #990 after pallet change and then the program is called and executed. The specified program numbers are set to the following macro variables respectively. 2 USE OF THE WORK NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION Specify whether the work number search function is used for each pallet. the number “9023” is set to #990 after pallet change and then the program “O9023” is called and executed. (NOTE 1) Do not use the macro variables above (#990. The machining program number for the current pallet on the table is set in #990. #999 : A machining program number for the pallet B. OFF ³ The work number search function is not used. M65 . (O9023 is already registered and no machining is performed by O9023. ) The program O9023 is registered beforehand. M98 P#990 . (NOTE 2) Create a machining program as a subprogram.1.

In automatic operation (MEM) mode. the beginning of the current program is accessed. (2) (4) (5) (6) Item 1 MAGNIFIED COORDINATE DISPLAY (1) Contents Workpiece coordinates. Modal information is displayed. spindle rotation speed. 4 5 Pressing the [PROG.3. SELECT] soft key displays a list of programs. A desired program can be selected from the list. 6 117 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1. machine coordinates. 2 3 MONITOR DISPLAY RUNNING PROGRAM DISPLAY MODAL INFORMATION DISPLAY PROGRAM SELECTION PROGRAM ACCESS The feedrate. and spindle load meter reading are displayed. QUICK SCREEN 1. the selected program is displayed. Each time the [COORDINATE] soft key is pressed. REWIND] soft key is pressed.7 Automatic Operation Screen (1) This screen enables you to select the desired machining program and get it ready for operation. or remaining travel distance can be displayed in large–size text. the magnified display changes as follows: workpiece coordinates –> machine coordinates –> remaining travel distance. It is useful to check a program because it displays a running program and magnifies the display of coordinate values. When the [PROG.

8 Counter This screen enables you to set up the production quantity count function.3.1. QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 1. (1) (2) (3) (4) 118 . It also displays the current use status and elapsed operation time for all tool groups.

the tool number is prefixed with an asterisk (*). A dedicated M code (M91 or M92) is available for incrementing each of the two counters. PARTS REQUIRED : The scheduled number of products is entered in this item. The box enables you to check the use status of all tool groups at a glance. The operator message “PRODUCTION IS COMPLETED” is displayed when a scheduled number of products are created.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1. press the <ABC@@@Z> key on the operator’s panel. click the TOOL GROUP soft key. If a tool in current use is the last one in a tool group. 119 . When the actual number of products reaches the scheduled number. it is possible to turn on a status display lamp. alphabetic letters. : An arbitrary name consisting of numerals. When the selected M code is issued. and symbols can be set up.TOTAL COUNT : These items represent the number of counted products and the total number of products. FUNCTION : If the counter is to be used. To enter alphabetic letters or symbols. set it to “OFF”. The two counters stated above are incremented by a value entered in PIECE COUNT. QUICK SCREEN Item 1 PRODUCTION/ QUALITY COUNTER Contents This box offers two counters for production quantity counting. If not. set this item to “ON”. NAME PARTS COUNT. how many times or how long it was used. It is also possible to enter a value in these counters. M CODE : An M code for counting products is selected using a soft key. respectively. PIECE COUNT : The number of products per cycle (count scaling factor) is entered in this item. To set up tool groups. the number of the current products and the total number of products are incremented. and its service life value for all tool groups. 2 TOOL COUNTER This box lists the tool number (T–CODE) of a tool in current use.

1. 1. This function is exactly the same as the tool group setting on the TOOL LIFE. QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Item 3 SERVICE TIME RUN TIME Contents : The cumulative automatic operation time (excluding the time when the machine is at a stop or pause) is displayed. See the descriptions about the TOOL LIFE for details. This value is automatically preset with “0” when the cycle starts from a reset state or when the power is turned off. (2) (3) 120 . CYCLE TIME : The duration of one cycle of automatic operation (excluding the time when the machine is at a stop or pause) is displayed.3.9 Sequence Selection (1) This screen enables you to set up machine operation modes. 4 TOOL GROUP SETTING This soft key enables you to set up tool groups.

Coolant is not supplied.” and a black dot (S) appears in an upper–left corner of the switch graphic. INTERNAL LIGHT ON OFF The internal light goes on. This is intended to check the programs. then select the [ON] or [OFF] soft key. OFF ON (When ON is selected. The machine runs as directed by programs.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1. Commands in program blocks that contain a slash (/) are executed. M and S functions are executed. The power of the CNC unit is not turned off automatically. The internal light goes off. This is intended to check the programs. (1) Various kinds of setting The following items can be set up. Programs are executed without movement along the Z–axis. When M30 is specified. (Normal operation) Programs are executed without running the machine. Each coordinate displayed on the screen is updated according to move commands. Each coordinate displayed on the screen is updated according to move commands. The machine runs as directed by programs. QUICK SCREEN Item 1 FLOOD COOLANT INTERNAL LIGHT BLOCK SKIP AUTOMATIC POWER OFF REMOTE MODE TEACHING IN (from the preceding page) Contents Position the cursor to the desired setting item. The machine tool is run according to a program stored in CNC memory.) The functions of each item are as follows. This is intended to check the programs. Commands in program blocks that contain a slash (/) are executed. Item FLOOD COOLANT (Option) Branch ON OFF Functions Coolant is supplied by flood coolant unit. the switch graphic appears to have been “pressed. M and S functions are executed. Commands in program blocks that contain a slash (/) are skipped. REMOTE MODE (Note 1) ON The machine tool is run according to a program stored in external memory. Commands in program blocks that contain a slash (/) are skipped. OFF AUTOMATIC POWER OFF (Note 1) (Note 2) ON OFF OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP (Note 1) ON OFF MACHINE LOCK OFF ALL Z OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP (*1) ON OFF MACHINE LOCK OFF ALL Z 121 . This is intended to check the programs. the power to the CNC is turned off about five seconds later. Programs are executed without movement along the Z–axis. (Normal operation) Programs are executed without runrun ning the machine.

the screen is erased to protect the LCD. QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Item Item TEACHING IN Contents Branch ON Functions The machine position obtained by manual operation can be stored in memory and can be used to create a program. The above function cannot be used. Selecting ON enables the following function.1. Use the corresponding button on the operator’s panel. DOOR CLOSING BY START BUTTON: When the cycle start button on the ROBODRILL operator’s panel is pressed the door is automatically closed and program operation is started. the door is opened automatically. AUTOMATIC POWER OFF This item enables you to set up connections for effecting the automatic power shutoff function. AUTOMATIC DOOR CONTROL FUNCTION SELECTION (Option) Specify the automatic door control functions (F = ON f = OFF). 122 . the door is opened automatically. (This function is unavailable to the full keyboard–type operator’s panel.) SPINDLE SPEED(DOOR OPEN) (except for the CE marking specification) If the following conditions are all satisfied during the time set here (in minutes). 2 REFERENCE LOAD CALCULATION AND REGISTRATION INTO FILE FUNCTIONS Clicking the FUNCTIONS displays the following window. DOOR OPENING BY M00. OFF (NOTE) This item is not displayed for a full keyboard–type operator’s panel. M01: When M00 or M01 is specified. DOOR OPENING BY M30: When M30 is specified. POWER OFF BY ALARM: The automatic power shutoff function works if an alarm condition occurs. RELEASE AT TURN ON THE POWER: The automatic power shutoff function is set to OFF when the power is turned on.

This item enables you to select the status in which the machine is to be when the power is turned on. they appear again. and the rapid traverse rate is 100%. M08 COMMAND SELECTION COOLANT BUTTON SELECTION 3 BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT Select the use of the M08 command between coolant control and air blow control. 123 . If this function is not to be used. @ A key (except some) on the operator’s panel or a soft key is operated. If either of the following functions is met after all displays on the screen are erased. it must be reset to 0. @ An alarm or operator message is issued. and the rapid traverse rate is LOW. Select the use of the coolant button on the operator’s panel between coolant control and air blow control. AUTO/100%: The machine is in the MEM mode. INITIAL SCREEN(POWER ON) INITIAL OPE. MDI/LOW : The machine is in the MDI mode. QUICK SCREEN Item SCREEN SAVER Contents The screen display is cleared to prolong the life of the LCD screen if no key input is made for the duration (in seconds) specified in this item. @ Both single–block and dry run modes are OFF. @ No alarm or operator message is issued. The standard background color is the third one. @ Neither a key (except some) on the operator’s panel nor a soft key is operated.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1.MODE(PW ON) This item enables you to select the screen to be displayed when the power is turned on. Set the brightness of background color to one of five supported levels. Set 0 when this function is not to be used.

“Servo Motor Zero Point Restoration Method. See Chapter 6. and Registering. This function is used in pulling out a tapping tool from a workpiece if it has been caught in it. See Chapter 3. To execute any function in this window. “Rigid Tap Retracting. QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 1.” of Part V for details. enter the corresponding number (from 1 to 6). it becomes necessary to restore the turret to the normal position. the controller loses the machine zero point. If the pulse coder cable is removed during motor replacement.10 MAINTENCE/SETTING This window enables you to perform various types of maintenance and setup. it is necessary to set the motor to the machine zero point.3. Contents If the machine stops during tool change because of an alarm being issued or the power being turned off.” of Part V for details. Checking.” of Part V for details. See Chapter 5.1. “Automatic Turret Restoration. resulting in an alarm being issued for a reference position return. This function is used if all parameters have been lost for some reason or you want to return the parameters to the values to which they were factory– set.” of Part V for details. See Chapter 4. In this case. Item 1 TURRET RESTO. It can also be used to compare and check the current parameter settings with the factory settings. 2 MOTOR ORIGIN 3 PARAMETER 4 RIGID TAPPING 124 . “Parameter Re–setting.

125 . See Chapter 26.INTERFACE Contents This function enables you to set up and use only the desired signals on the terminal board of the ROBODRILL. of Part IV for details. “FACTOLINK Function”. See Chapter 15.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 1. “External Interface Function. QUICK SCREEN Item 5 EXT.” of Part IV for details. 6 COMMUNICATION This function enables you to set up the communication parameters that are needed in using the FACTOLINK function.

1. and remaining travel are displayed. The workpiece coordinates.DIAGNOSTIC COORDINATE DISPLAY RUNNING PROGRAM DISPLAY DIAGNOSTIC MONITOR Contents (6) These boxes display an alarm. 5 ALARM/DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY PAGE SWITCH SAFETY MONI.11 DIAGNOSIS/ALARM This window enables you to check the cause of machine trouble. In automatic operation (MEM) mode.3. See Appendixes 6 and 7 for details. machine coordinates. it is active. This soft key enables you to monitor various signals related to door lock control. or operator message. (2) (3) (1) (4) (5) Item 1 ALARM. These items indicate the operating status of the machine. the selected program is displayed. 6 126 . diagnosis information. The detailed description about the cause is given in (1). Another page of the alarm/diagnostic display is displayed. QUICK SCREEN DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 1. Interlock Hold Reset : Axial movement inhibited : Program operation stopped : Reset state 2 3 4 Start inhibited : Program operation start inhibited The detailed cause is displayed in 1. When a circle is yellow.

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 2. CREATING A PROGRAM 2 CREATING A PROGRAM 127 .

(4) Enter the number of a program.1 Creating a Program (1) Put the system in the EDIT mode. CREATING A PROGRAM DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 2. (2) Turn off the protect key. + function key to display the PROGRAM 128 .2. then press the <INSERT> key. (3) Press the screen. insert the necessary words sequentially.1 EDITING A PROGRAM 2.1.

start the following operation: (1) To change a word Cursor Position the cursor on the word to be modified using the cursor keys. When the PROGRAM screen is displayed. CREATING A PROGRAM 2.2 Modifying a Program A program can be modified by changing. Before modifying a program. Press the <ALTER> key. select the EDIT mode and press the + key. 129 . (Example) Enter a new word.1. inserting. or/and deleting words.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 2.

CREATING A PROGRAM DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (2) To insert a word Cursor Position the cursor on the word to be modified using the cursor keys. Press the <INSERT> key. (Example) Insert the necessary word. 130 .2.

then press the cursor key. then press the cursor key. (Example) Press the <DELETE> key. CREATING A PROGRAM (3) To delete a word Cursor Position the cursor on the word to be modified using the cursor keys. 131 . (3) By specifying the word (Example) When moving the cursor to the next S800 word Enter the word S800. (*) The cursor can be moved by one of the following three methods: (1) By the cursor keys Cursor Press either of the cursor keys.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 2. (2) By the S key (Example) When moving the cursor to the next S address or Press the S key.

2. 2. (2) Press the screen. (2) For example.SRH] key.1. (2) Press the following keys: or [O.4 Checking Program Nos. enter key.1. press the following keys: or [O. in Memory (1) Put the system in the EDIT mode. In this case.SRH] (2) When the number of the program is identified (1) Select the EDIT mode. press the <RESET> key to release the alarm. (3) For example.SRH] NOTE When the called program is not found. then press the <DELET> + function key to display the PROGRAM 2. an alarm indication appears on the screen.5 Calling a Program in Memory (1) When the number of the program is not identified (1) Select the EDIT mode. when the number of the program to be deleted is 01000. 132 .1. CREATING A PROGRAM DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 2. (2) The contents of memory and the contents of programs are displayed alternately by pressing the [O. when the number of the program to be called is O1000.3 Deleting a Program (1) Select the EDIT mode.

M01. 133 .2. . the S or M function is executed simultaneously with the move command except some M codes. .0 M05. . . 50 50 X 2. . .2. . . (Spindle rotation clockwise) Y The spindle starts to rotate clockwise at the same time when the axes begin to move. . .0 Y–50. . M09 and M30 start to be executed when the move command is finished. 4. . .000 min–1 (standard). CREATING A PROGRAM 2. (Example 1) N1 G01 X50.1 General S codes are used for spindle speed control.000 min–1 NOTE Spindle speed can be specified ranging from 80 min–1 to 8. . M02.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 2. (Example 2) N10 G01 X50. . (Example) S 150 . . . . . When move command and an S or M code are commanded in the same block. .0 Y–50. M05. 150 min–1 S 4000 . .2 PROGRAMMING 2. . 50 50 X Only commands M00.2 Spindle Speed Function (S Function) The spindle speed is directly controlled by address S and a following 2– to 4–digit number.000min–1 spindle) in increments of 1 min–1. (Spindle stop) Y Spindle stops at the end of move command. .0 M03. .000min–1 (15. . 150 to 15. M codes are used for ON/OFF of the various functions of the machine tool.

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

2.2.3
Miscellaneous Function (M Function)
M code M00 M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 *M07 *M08 *M09 *M10 *M11 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M28 M29 M30 *M32 *M33 *M34 *M40 *M41 Program stop Optional stop End of program Spindle CW Spindle CCW Spindle STOP Tool change Air blow ON Coolant ON Coolant OFF Clamp Unclamp Touch Probe ON Touch Probe OFF Orientation Name

Up to three M codes can be specified at the same time. An M code not marked with * in the table below must be specified as the first M code.
Table 2.2.3 M Function Meaning The machine stops after M00. The machine stops after M01. The machine finishes the program. The spindle starts to rotate clockwise. The spindle starts to rotate counterclockwise. The spindle will stop. A tool changed will be done. The air for chip will blow. The coolant oil will blow. The coolant oil will stop. When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of additional axis specifications, the 4–axis is clamped. When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of additional axis specifications, the 4–axis is clamped. Turn on power to the touch probe. Turn off power to the touch probe. The spindle sets the positioning. Stops the center–through coolant pump. Starts the center–through coolant pump. Supplies coolant from the tool tip. Outputs air from the tool tip. Stops center–through coolant/air purge. I I I I I I I D I Sequence D D D I I D I I I D

Center–through coolant pump OFF Center–through coolant pump ON Center–through coolant ON Air purge ON Center–through coolant/air purge OFF

Small hope peck drilling cycle ON Turns small–diameter, deep hole drilling cycle mode ON. (Option) Rigid mode End of program Peck cycle Peck cycle Peck cycle AI function disable AI function enable Tapping cycle is rigid mode The machine finishes the program. Triggers AI function no-load detection. Judges on AI function no-load detection. Ends AI function no-load detection. Disables the AI function. Enables the AI function.

D I I I I I

134

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

M code M42 *M43 M44 M45 M46 *M50 (NOTE2) M52 M53 *M60 to M65 *M71 *M72 *M73 *M74 *M76 *M77 M80 to M89 M90 *M91 *M92 M93 M94 M95 M96 M97 M98 M99 M100 to M129 M198 Air blow ON Not used Not used

Name _ Tool life status check Programmed data rewrite _ _

Meaning Used by the machine a menu. Checks current tool life status for processing. Sets the data of AI tool minitor. Used by macroprogram 09029. Used by macroprogram 09029. The air for chip will blow.

Sequence I I I

I

Automatic door opening/closing and output signal ON until answer comes The 4–axis clamp The 4–axis unclamp X–axis mirror image ON Y–axis mirror image ON The 4–axis mirror image ON Mirror image OFF For external interface Not used Product control counter 1 Product control counter 2 Not used Not used Not used Interruption type custom macro ON Interruption type custom macro OFF Calling of subprogram End of subprogram For external interface Subprogram call from external memory

In the case of splashguard B with automatic door opneing/closing specifications, the door opens/closes automatically. When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of additional axis specifications, the 4–axis is clamped. When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of additional axis specifications, the 4–axis is unclamped. X–axis turns the mirror image function ON. Y–axis turns the mirror image function ON. The 4–axis turns the mirror image function ON. Mirror image is OFF See IV–15(5), ”M code output function”. I

Counts the amount of products for counter 1. Counts the amount of products for counter 2.

I I

Enables the custom macro interrupt function. Disables the custom macro interrupt function.

I I

See IV–15(5), ”M code output function”.

I

135

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

NOTE 1 “I” and “D” in the column “Sequence” means as follows: I : This function will be active as soon as the block is read. D This function will be active after all commands in the block have been executed. 2 To be specified as the first M code when the center through coolant specification is applied. (1) M00: Program stop Automatic operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. Even when the program is stopped, all modal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The automatic operation can be restarted by pushing the CYCLE START button. In the status light (option) specifications, a yellow display lamp illuminates. (2) M01: Optional stop Similar to the M00, automatic operation is stopped after a block which contains M01 is executed. This code is effective only when the optional stop switch is ON on the operator’s panel. In the status light (option) specifications, a yellow display lamp illuminates. (3) M02, M30: End of program (a) Indicates the end of the main program. Used when the program is loaded in memory from tape. (b) Ends automatic operation and resets. (c) For memory operation, passes program control to the beginning of the program. (d) In the status light (option) specifications, the yellow display lamp blinks. (e) M30 puts the automatic power turn–off function into effect, provided that the function is enabled. (4) M29: Rigid mode When M29 Sxxxx is commanded previous to tapping/reverse tapping cycle command, the machine becomes rigid mode. Refer to IV–2.2.6. (5) M32 to M34, M40 to M46: AI tool monitor These M functions are related to the AI tool monitor. For details, see descriptions about the AI tool monitor. (6) M60 to M65: Automatic opening and closing of the door This function is provided for the splash guard with an automatic door. With this function, the door can be opened while a program is being executed to access the inside of the machine. After the access is completed, the door can be closed automatically by applying an external signal to the machine. After the door is closed, program execution resumes. This function is useful when a robot or pallet changer is used. (7) M98: Calling of subprogram This code is used to enter a subprogram. Refer to “Execution of subprogram” in the Operator’s Manual of NC for details. (8) M99: End of subprogram This code shows the end of a subprogram. Executing M99 takes the control back to the main program. Refer to “Preparation of Subprograms” in the Operator’s Manual of NC for details.
136

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

NOTE • If there is a block following M00, M01, M02 or M30, it is not read into the buffer. • Do not use M codes M00 to M99 for the external M code BCD output function.

2.2.4
Tool Function (T Function)

Specify a tool position by using a 2–digit or 3–digit number after T. M 0 6 T VV ( VV : Tool number) or M 0 6 T VVV ( VVV : Tool group number) A tool thus specified can be randomly specified via the shortest path. When using the tool life management function, specify a tool group number in the T code. In addition to the T function, the following incremental command can be specified: M 0 6 P n (n : the nth from present tool position with CW) NOTE 1 When T is not specified in a command such as M06, the current tool is changed to the tool with the adjacent tool number on the right. 2 When a tool number other than 01, 02, ..., 14(*) is specified, alarm 251 (an ATC error) is issued. 3 If a value other than 1, 2, ..., 14(*) is specified in n after P, the remainder obtained by dividing the value by 14(*) is assumed. For example, when 58 is specified in n, n is assumed to be 2. 4 When a tool change command is executed during cutter compensation, tool length compensation, or a canned cycle, alarm 251 (an ATC error) is issued. Before executing the tool change command, be sure to cancel cutter compensation, tool length compensation, and canned cycle. (G49 and G80 can be specified in the block that specifies M06.) 5 When Tool change sequence is being executed, Z axis must not be moved by manual operation after stopping the Tool change sequence by single block or pressing the FEED HOLD button. 6 When the tool change (M06) command is specified, coolant stops. Therefore, specify the command to turn on the coolant (M08) in the next block as necessary. (When bit 7 of PMC parameter K0 is set to 0) * For the T21iCe series, up to 21.

137

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

2.2.5
Spindle Orientation Function (M19 Function)

a) M19 ; The spindle stops at the position of angle specified in parameter (Note) by means of this command. NOTE At this time of the shipment the spindle stop position is adjusted so that the spindle key is parallel with the Y–axis direction. b) M19S__; Angle specification (0_ to 359_) This command enable the angle (0_ to 359_) to be specified. NOTE 1 This command is effective until a spindle rotation command (M03, M04), spindle stop command (M05), or a command specifying a miscellaneous function for terminating the program (such as M00 and M01) is executed. (The reset key stops spindle excitation but does not cancel a command.) When a tool change is specified during this command, alarm 252 (an ATC spindle alarm) is issued. When a spindle index function command is executed during rigid tapping, alarm 1007 (M19 not permitted during tapping) is issued. 2 Do not execute this command during canned cycle. In fine boring (G76) and back boring (G87), the spindle index is automatically performed and the table shifts. Table shift direction is set in parameter No. 5101.

138

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

2.2.6
Rigid Tapping Cycle (Function M29)

(1) General Tapping cycle (G84) and reverse tapping cycle (G74) are effective in both of rigid mode and conventional mode. These modes are switched by M code. Rigid tapping is performed by simultaneously feeding the spindle and the Z axis without the floating tapper, therefore, effective for high–speed and high–accuracy tapping. (2) Command format
Z_ R_ P_ Q_ F_ K_ ; Repeat number Cutting feedrate Depth of cut in the peck tapping cycle Dwell time at the bottom of tapping and R–point return Position command at R–point Position command at the bottom of tapping Position command of tapping

G jj

X_

Y_

G74 – Reverse tapping cycle G84 – Tapping cycle

NOTE 1 The machining start point in a peck tapping cycle and clearance d in a high–speed peck tapping cycle are specified in parameter 5114 or 5115. 2 A peck tapping cycle is validated by the Q command in the tapping cycle. When Q0 is specified, no peck tapping cycle is executed. (3) Rigid mode To specify the rigid mode, M29Sxxxx; is commanded previous to tapping/reverse tapping cycle command. The spindle is stopped, and tapping/reverse tapping cycle is the following command becomes rigid mode.
... ... M29Sxxxx; G jj X___ Y___ Z___ R___ P___ Q___ F___ K___ ; X___ Y___; X___ Y___; ... ... G80; ... ... Rigid mode

139

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

F ___ Sxxxx; Lead of thread Sxxxx should be less than 5000 (5000 min–1) 6000 (6000 min–1) (15000 min–1 spindle). When a value greater than it is command, PS alarm (No. 200) will occur in the GVV block. F ___ should be less than 15000 (15 m/min). If a value more than 15000 is commanded, the feed rate does not exceed 15000 (15 m/min). It is impossible to input Sxxxx again before inputting GVV , after having input Sxxxx once. Do not specify M29 during the canned cycle in the conventional mode. In any case, a PS alarm (No. 203) occurs. When the rigid tapping cycle ends, the spindle stops, that is, S0 is specified. After specifying G code (G80, other canned cycle G code, or G code in group 01), rigid mode will change to former mode. NOTE 1 GVV indicates the reverse tapping cycle (G74) and tapping cycle (G84). 2 Be sure to input Sxxxx in the M29 block. Even when the canned cycle cancel (G80) is entered without executing the tapping cycles (G74, G84) after the rigid mode is selected by M29Sxxxx;, the rigid mode is not released. 3 Specify M29Sxxxx independently without fail. 4 Don’t specify M03, M04 and M05 in the block just after G80. 5 Don’t specify M03, M04 and M05 in the block between M29Sxxxx and G80. (4) Conventional mode (floating tap) Command method in conventional mode remains. Refer to the NC’s OPERATOR’S MANUAL for details.
... ... M03 (or M04) Sxxxx; G jj X___ Y___ Z___ R___ P___ Q___ F___ K___ ; X___ Y___; X___ Y___; ... ... G80;

140

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

(5) G84 (Tapping cycle) Command method in conventional mode remains. G84 in rigid mode is shown below.

G84 (G98)

G84 (G99)

Spindle stops Initial point Movement 1 Movement 6 Movement 2 Spindle tops rotates CW Movement 3 Movement 5 Spindle tops rotates CCW Point Z Movement 4 P Point R Spindle stops

Spindle stops Initial point

Spindle tops rotates CW

P

Point R

Spindle stops

Spindle stops

P

Spindle stops

P

Spindle tops rotates CCW Point Z

Rapid traverse Synchronous feeding of Z axis and spindle P Dwell

NOTE 1 Feedrate override during synchronously feeding Z axis and spindle is assumed 100%. Override of spindle is also assumed 100%. 2 Single block When executing tapping cycle in single block, the machine dwells or stops at terminate points of movement 1, 2 and 6. 3 Feed hold When specifying feed hold while movement 3 through 5, FEED HOLD lamp will be lit immediately, but the machine will not stop immediately and stops after movement 6 will finish. When specifying feed hold while movement 6 is executed, the machine will stop immediately.

141

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

(6) G74 (Reverse tapping cycle) Command method in conventional mode remains. G74 in rigid mode is shown below.

G74 (G98)

G74 (G99)

Spindle stops Initial point

Spindle stops

P Spindle tops rotates CCW Spindle tops Point R Spindle stops Spindle tops rotates CW Point Z Spindle stops P Spindle stops P rotates CCW

P Point R Spindle stops Spindle tops rotates CW Point Z

Rapid traverse Synchronous feeding of Z axis and spindle P Dwell

Refer to notes in (5), G84 tapping cycle.

142

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

2.3
PLAYBACK

The machine position obtained by the manual operation is inserted in a program and a program can be created. In other words, after the tool is moved by the manual operation (jog or handle feed), the tool can be moved by the same distance in the automatic operation (playback). Words other than X, Y, Z (B, C, D, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, EOB) can be registered in the memory by exactly the same operation as EDIT mode. The machine position is inserted by the following procedure. (1) Set “TEACH IN” switch to “ON” on the QUICK screen.

(2) Set the mode switch to EDIT. (3) Move the machine to the required position by handle or jog. (The mode must be EDIT.) (4) Push the + key.

(5) Enter the address X [X] . (6) Push the key, then the machine position along the X axis

is stored in the memory. If the current machine position is X10.521 Y30.270 Z–15.0, for example, X10521 is stored in memory as X–axis coordinate value, by pushing the key.

Content stored in the program = X10521 Push [ Y ], , [ Z ] and keys, then the machine

position along the Y and Z axis is stored in the memory respectively.

143

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

NOTE 1 After entering the address X, Y or Z, enter numerical values and push key then the values entered in the

machine position are added and registered. This is used to correct the machine position through key entry. 2 The cordinate value registered in this way is an absolute coordinate. Enter G90 (Absolute command) at the head of a program. 3 Insert in the same way as edit operation for program commands other than machine position. 4 Insert an EOB ( completes.

[;] ,

), and one block registration

144

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

3

DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

145

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

3.1
DISPLAYING PARAMETERS
NOTE Modes need not be changed when parameters are only monitored. Modes can be monitored even automatic operation.

3.1.1
NC Parameter

Follow the procedure below to display parameters. (1) After pressing the key, press the and the section select

soft key [PARAM] to select the parameter screen.

← Soft key display (section select) Backward menu key Soft keys Forward menu key

(2) The parameter screen consists of multiple pages. Use step (a) or (b) to display the page that contains the parameter you want to display. (a) Use the page select key , or the cursor move keys

to display the desired page. (b) Enter the data number of the parameter you want to display from the keyboard, then press the [NO.SRH] soft key. The parameter page containing the specified data number appears with the cursor positioned at the data number. (The data is displayed in reverse video.) NOTE If key entry is started with the section select soft keys displayed, they are replaced automatically by operation select soft keys including [NO.SRH]. Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key can also cause the operation select keys to be displayed.

146

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

← Data entered from the keyboard ← Soft key display (section select)

Cursor

147

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

3.1.2
PMC Parameter
(1) After pressing and in the stated sequence, clicking the

chapter selection soft key [PMC] selects the PMCPRM. (2) Clicking the [PARAMETER] and [KEEPRL] softkeys in the stated sequence displays the “PMC PRM(KEEP RELAY)”.

148

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

3.2
CHANGING PARAMETERS
NOTE Parameters can be changed only in the MDI mode when the machine is stopped or in the emergency stop state. Some parameter settings, for example, those for machine operation, can be changed. After changing parameters, the machine may not operate, or something dangerous may occur depending on the situation. Therefore, parameters are usually not changeable (i.e., write–protected). Before changing the data of a parameter, be sure to check the number of the desired parameter and the data to be set. Following is the procedure for changing NC parameters. (1) Enter the MDI mode, or bring the machine to an emergency stop. (2) Enable parameter writing. (2)–1 To display the setting screen, press the then the [SETTING] section select soft key. The first page of the setting screen appears. After pressing and in the stated sequence, click + key,

the chapter selection soft key [SETTING]. (2)–2 Position the cursor on “PARAMETER WRITE” using the cursor move keys.

(2)–3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select soft keys.)

149

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

Data entered from the keyboard Soft key display (operation select)

(2)–4 To set “PARAMETER WRITE=” to 1, press the [ON:1] soft key, or alternatively enter 1 and press the [INPUT] soft key. From now on, the parameters can be set. At the same time an alarm condition (P/S 100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE) occurs in the NC. (3) To display the parameter screen, press the + key, then

the [PARAM] section select soft key. (4) Display the page containing the parameter you want to set, and position the cursor on the parameter. (5) Enter data, then press the [INPUT] soft key. The parameter indicated by the cursor is set to the entered data. Example: 12000 [INPUT]

Cursor

Data can be entered continuously for parameters, starting at the selected parameter, by separating each data item with a semicolon (;). Example: Entering 10;20;30;40 and pressing the [INPUT] key assigns values 10, 20, 30 and 40 to parameters in order starting at the parameter indicated by the cursor. (6) Repeat steps (4) and (5) as required.
150

Set bit 7 of NC parameter No. set “PARAMETER WRITE=” to 0 on the setting screen to disable further parameter setting. If the program protection key is set to “RELEASE”: Parameters can be changed. 151 . DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS (7) If parameter setting is complete.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 3. If the program protection key is set to “ON”: Parameters cannot be changed. If this function is used. The program protection key can be used to enable or disable parameter entry. turn it off before continuing operation. 3297 to 1. (8) Reset the NC to release the alarm condition (P/S 100). it is impossible to enable “PARAMETER WRITE” on the “SETTING”. If an alarm condition (000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER) occurs in the NC.

0.3. Here. + Soft key [OFFSET] OFFSET screen appears. place the cursor at 001. Move the cursor to the target number for setting. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 3.3 CHANGING OFFSET DATA For example. let’s set the compensation amount with compensation No. Suppose that the setting is –100. 152 . 001.

DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS Enter the following values: 153 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 3.

Move the cursor to the number to be set. 01 154 . 1 (offset value of the workpiece reference position in the G54 system).0 and the Y value is –190. In this example.4 CHANGING WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM DATA For example. let’s set an offset value of the workpiece reference position in the G54 system. + Soft key [WORK] The WORK OFSET (workpiece offset) screen is displayed.3.0. No. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 3. Assume that the X value is 250. move the cursor to Y in No.

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS Enter the following values: 155 .

#5024 #5041 to #5044 #5061 to #5064 #5081 to #5083 #5101. Write are enabled. #1 to #33 #100 to #149 #500 to #531 #100 to #199 #500 to #999 #1000 to #1015.1 Custom Macro Variables Variable name Local variables (can be used by user) Common variables (can be used by user) Additional common variables As shown in the table below. #5004 #5021. #5104 #2500 to #2506 or #5201.5 CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLES 3. Remarks Write are enabled. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 3. #1132.5. #5221. Write are enabled. number of required parts Modal information Block end position Machine coordinates Workpiece coordinates Skip signal position Tool offset value Servo deviation Write are enabled. #5261. custom macro variables are classified into common variables and system variables according to their variable numbers. Types of variables Variable No. #1133 #2000 to #2200 #3000 #3001. #5281. #3012 Description Variables used in a macro locally Data cleared when power is turned off Data retained when power is turned off Data cleared when power is turned off Data retained when power is turned off Interface input signal (DI) Interface output signal (DO) Tool offset value Macro alarm Clock Automatic operation control Setting Clock information Number of machined parts. #5301.3. #5241. System variables (fixed uses) System variables (fixed uses) #3901. #3004 #3005 #3011. #5321 Workpiece offset (X-axis) 156 . #3902 #4001 to #4120 #5001. #3002 #3003. #1032 #1100 to #1115.

then press the [NO. #5304. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS Variable name Variable No. just press the [INPUT] soft key without data. #5222. #5224. #5244. Press the ["] soft key then the [MACRO] soft key to select the macro variable screen. #5283. #5264. #5302. #5223. SRH] key. #2600 to #2606 or #5202. #5303. For details on programs that use custom macro variables and system variables. #5282. refer to “Custom macro” in the CNC Operator’s Manual. #5263. #5322 #2700 to #2706 or #5203. #5243. 157 . then press the * key. To set <empty>. 3. #5262. (b) Use the numeric keys to enter data for the common variable. (2) Setting common variables * Turn off the program protect key. #5284. #5242.2 Setting and Displaying Common Variables (1) Displaying common variables (a) Press the key + . #5324 Description Remarks Workpiece offset (Y-axis) System variables (fixed uses) Workpiece offset (Z-axis) Workpiece offset (fourth axis) This section explains how to display and set common variables on the screen. (b) Enter variable number.5. #5323 #2800 to #2806 or #5204.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 3. (a) Move the cursor to the common variable to be set.

4. first select the manual operation mode key on the operator’s panel. MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 4 MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] To operate the ROBODRILL manually. and axis movement). then the appropriate function keys (such as spindle. 158 . automatic door.

1 MANUAL OPERATION OF THE SPINDLE Set the S command with MDI. 159 . A combination of rotates the spindle. MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] 4. The spindle speed can be adjusted using and and .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 4.

4. It is 160 . MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 4. and .2 AUTOMATIC DOOR The door is automatically opened or closed by opened or closed each time is pressed.

Inches 0.1 0.001 Metric mm mm mm mm .02 0.01 0.001 0. Feedrate selection 200 100 10 1 0.01 0. .0001 inch inch inch inch 161 . .3 AXIS MOVEMENT (1) First select the manual operation mode using (2) Select the target axis using (3) Select the feedrate using (4) Rotate the handle to drive the tool along the axis. MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] 4.2 0.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 4.

5. 162 . AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 5 AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] Automatic running means to run the machine tool according to a program.

For the second and subsequent key inputs.) 163 .] [X] Enter data for each address. See Section I–4.1 MDI RUNNING 5.1. + Select the program screen. The program (MDI) window appears.1 MDI Running A program of one block can be entered to run the machine in the MDI mode. address data switches to “numeric”. NOTE A program for MDI running can be edited irrespective of the program protect key status. Examples 1 To move the axis Select the MDI mode. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] 5.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 5. For the first key input. address data switches to “address”. Letters are entered using soft keys.2. [G] [.

5. 164 . AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Press the CYCLE START button.

AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] Examples 2 To turn the spindle M03S500 Select the MDI mode. Press the PRGRM button. 165 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 5. + The program (MDI) window appears. [M] [S] [.] Press the CYCLE START button.

5. Press the PRGRM button. + The program (MDI) window appears. 166 . AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Examples 3 To replace the tool M06T3 Select the MDI mode. [M] [T] [.] Press the CYCLE START button.

be sure to read Section III–9 “Trial Run” once to assure safe operation. An example of effectively checking the machining program is given here. 31: SEQ. 31: SEQ. (1) When dry run is on. feedrate) specified by the program is ignored and the machine tool is set to the jog feed speed. (2) ON/OFF switching operates on the quick screen. (2) This button is used to check whether the M/S function and command formats. Whether jig settings and offset are correct must also be checked. SELECTION Single block key (1) Stops the machine each time one block of a program is executed. Rapid traverse override (1) The feedrate specified by the move command for the machine tool can be reduced according to the percentage which corresponds to a key by pressing one of the rapid traverse override keys: TRVRS LOW. The operator can check a program by executing it on a block–by–block basis and pressing the cycle start button. such as G code and axis address are correct. 2 Even if the machine lock or the Z axis lock is on. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] 5.2.1 Settings for Memory Running Memory running means to run the machine tool according to a program stored in memory. the F function (that is. the spindle turns and coolant ON/OFF is executed. TRVRS 25%. 1. Machine lock (1) When the machine lock is on. 167 . TRVRS 100% Dry run NOTE 1 For these operation support functions.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 5. check that no mechanical interference occurs during running.2 MEMORY RUNNING (MEM) 5. SELECTION Z axis lock (1) This key is used to check the relative movement of the spindle and table with the Z axis movement fixed. (2) Before pressing this key. each axis of the machine tool does not move. These support functions are validated for the command to be executed immediately after each function button is turned on and for the subsequent commands. (3) ON/OFF switching operates on the quick screen. Machining program check Whether the part program coded by the programmer is correct must be checked. This machine tool provides various operation support functions that can perform these checks efficiently and safely. The tool change command is not executed.

2. When Z–axis lock has been turned on and a program containing axis move commands has been suspended.5. (2) Press the + function key to display the PROGRAM screen and enter the number (O–****) of the program to run. the power must be turned off then back on. is pressed. When machining is started with the dry run on. (5) The PROGRAM CHECK screen can also be displayed in step (1). AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 2. Machine lock button When machine lock has been turned on and a program containing axis move commands has been suspended. NOTE The CYCLE START button is ignored in the following cases: (a) When the FEED HOLD button is being pressed (b) When the EMERGENCY STOP button is being pressed (c) When the RESET key is being pressed (d) When the mode is invalid (e) When a sequence number is being searched (f) When an alarm is on (g) When automatic running is in progress (h) When the NC is not ready (i) When the external workpiece number search signal and the external program number search signal are on 168 . causing danger. memory cursor key to check that the part (4) When the CYCLE START button running starts and the CYCLE START lamp lights. Starting memory running (1) Press the mode selection key.2 Memory Running Operation 1. feedrate is not appropriate. Then use the program has been searched. Actual machining Be sure to turn off the following function keys when doing the actual machining. Z axis lock button Dry run button 5. the power must be turned off then back on. (3) Press the mode selection key.

the dwell is halted. (1) When the SPINDLE STOP button is pressed. the FEED HOLD LED lights and the CYCLE START LED goes off.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] 2. (2) When an M00 code is entered. the operation automatically stops and the FEED HOLD LED lights. all operations stop. (iii) Automatic running stops after M jj and S jj operations are executed. the feed stops after deceleration. When the FEED HOLD button is pressed. Stopping memory running (1) Press the FEED HOLD button. (i) When the axis is moving. 169 . (ii) When it is being executed. (3) When an M01 code is entered with the M01 STOP button on. the block that includes the M00 code is executed. then the operation automatically stops.

170 . CNC Parameters Manual.5. and other settings. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 5.2 Remote Running Operation 1. (3) Check the settings of the parameters related to the reader/punch interface. This section explains how to connect the “Handy File” FANUC I/O unit for remote operation of the machine.3.3 REMOTE RUNNING (REMOT) Machine running by a program stored in external memory is enabled by connecting FANUC input/output units or a host computer to the reader/punch interface of this machine tool. The following explanation is applicable only to remote running enabled when FANUC input/output units are connected to the reader/punch interface. a problem may occur that the control unit of this machine tool cannot start operation of the product. as an example. (4) Set REMOTE MODE to ON on the QUICK screen. (6) Select the mode selection key .1 Settings for Remote Running To enable remote running.3. connect the communication cables of the input/output units to the reader/punch interface and set the parameters related to the interface. 5. 5. NOTE If a product other than FANUC products is connected to the reader/punch interface as an input/output unit. Starting remote running (1) Connect the input/output device to the reader/punch interface of the machine operator’s panel. (2) Check the program format (ISO/EIA) of the input/output device. (5) Cause the program screen to appear.

and the message “CURRENT SELECTED: ****” appears at the top of the screen. Automatic running using a program in memory cannot be executed with REMOTE ON on the QUICK screen. and the “FILE (9) Press the soft key [SELECT].B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 5. SDL]. (8) Press the soft key [FL. (10)Enter the target file number and press . Turn REMOTE to OFF if the remote operation is not to be done further. 2. 3.” 4.2. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] (7) Press the soft key [ " ].2 in IV. When remote running is interrupted by MDI running or manual running Remote running can be interrupted by MDI running and manual running. SDL] appears provided that the I/O devices are connected correctly. and the message “SELECT FILE NUMBER =” appears at the lower left section of the screen. and the remote operation starts and the corresponding lamp lights. see the next page. (11)Press the soft key [EXEC]. and the soft key [SL. See Section 5. Stopping remote running Remote running is stopped in the same way memory running is stopped For details. 171 . DIRECTORY”screen appears. “Settings and Operations of Automatic Running. (12)Press the CYCLE START button .

172 . after the single block is executed. the machine tool stops at the specified point and the FEED HOLD lamp lights. or 6 in the figure shown below. 2. NOTE 1 For G28 and G29. When the CYCLE START button is pressed.4.1 Single Block (SINGL BLOCK) Single block is the function that executes one block of the program each time the CYCLE START button is pressed. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 5. the next block is executed and the machine tool stops.4 SETTINGS AND OPERATIONS OF AUTOMATIC RUNNING 5. 2 The single block stop point in a canned cycle is any of the end point 1. (1) Turn on the SINGL BLOCK key to set the single block. 1 2 6 3 5 Rapid traverse Cutting feed 4 3 For a tool change sequence. the machine tool stops even during machining. One block of the program is executed and the machine tool stops. To release the single block mode press the SINGL BLOCK key again.5.

in IV). The FEED HOLD lamp goes off when it is lit.4.4.3 Manual Running Execution During Automatic Running (1) Press the FEED HOLD button or the SINGL BLOCK button during automatic running to stop or halt the machine tool. (2) Set the MDI mode.4.2 Restarting Automatic Running After Feed Hold or Stop (1) Return to the feed hold mode. 5. (4) To restart automatic running. (4) Return the axis to the recorded coordinates (start point of manual running) while looking at the position indicator.1 in IV). (5) To restart automatic running. (6) Press the CYCLE START button. 173 . (3) Execute manual running (see 4. switch the mode to the original mode. 5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] 5. or (2) Look at the position indicator and record the coordinates of the stop position. (3) Operate the MDI (see Section 5. The machine tool stops after one block of the program has been executed. (2) Press the CYCLE START button.4 MDI Command Execution During Automatic Running (1) Turn on the SINGL BLOCK key. press the MEM mode selection button and then the CYCLE START button.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 5.

the instruction of that block is executed.6 M01 Stop (OPT STOP) When the block that includes M01 is encountered. This LED lights when an optional stop occurs. the axes and spindle stop. To validate M01.5. and the FEED HOLD LED lights. 3 The MDI cannot be used to specify cutter compensation. If new modal data is needed. 5. 5. the M01 STOP key must be on.4. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 NOTE 1 Old modal data remains.5 Feedrate Override Dial (FEEDRATE OVERRIDE) The F–function can be used to override feedrate for each 10% step between 0% and 200%. After the block has been executed. and the coolant power supply is turned off. the FEED HOLD LED lights (optional stop status) regardless of whether the M01 STOP key is on or off. travel during a canned cycle) 2 The modal data specified from the MDI after MDI operation affects the subsequent automatic running. it must be registered.) When M00 is executed. 174 .4. (Example: G code. press the CYCLE START button. 4 The MDI command cannot be executed when automatic running is being stopped by the feed hold. To restart the operation.

G28. This override is applicable to the following rapid traverses: (1) Rapid traverse by G00 (2) Rapid traverse during a canned cycle (3) Rapid traverse at G27. When one block is skipped entirely. the rapid traverse rate becomes about 12 m/min. or LOW. TRVRS 100%) The rapid traverse rate override can be set to 100%. When the rapid traverse override is set to LOW. If an override of 25% is applied when the rapid traverse rate is 48 m/min.4. 25%. the rapid traverse rate is 400 mm/minute. 5. the portion between the slash and EOB is ignored. It is enabled/disabled by setting OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP on the QUICK SCREEN 31:SEQ.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 5. NOTE 1 The information of the block skipped by this function cannot be stored in the buffer register. TRVRS 25%. 2 A slash must be placed at the beginning of the block to be skipped. If the block to be skipped does not begin with the slash. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] 5. or G29 (4) Manual rapid traverse (5) Rapid traverse for manual return to the reference position (6) Rapid traverse in tool change sequence 175 . the next block is stored in the buffer register.SELECTION to ON/OFF.8 Rapid Traverse Rate Override (TRVRS LOW.4.7 Optional Block Skip This function is intended to skip program blocks that contain a slash (/).

6. TOOL CHANGE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 6 TOOL CHANGE 176 .

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 6. Be sure to install it on the tool cartridge. The unit will lose track of the coordinate and failure will occur. the single block mode is disabled. be sure to insert it in all the way to the end until the grip key is fully engaged in the keyway of the tool. TOOL CHANGE 6.) (5) During changing of tools.) (3) When installing the tool to the tool cartridge. (See Item I.1 TOOL CHANGE PRECAUTIONS (1) Never try to install the tool directly on the spindle since it is dangerous.3. (2) Never try to use tool arbors other than those specified. 177 . Tooling Grip (4) Never try to install the tool on the tool cartridge which is located below the spindle. If tools are changed when the single block mode is set (for example. confirm that the tool has been firmly secured without any play. never try to move the Z–axis in the manual running mode. Upon completion of the tool installation. (6) When the operation is stopped by pressing the “FEED HOLD” button. “TOOLS” for the tool arbors that can be used. pressing the “TOOL CHANGE” key in the MDI mode). the machine cannot be stopped until the tool change operation is completed.

at the same time the Z axis moves to the top. the tool change operation is executed first. M06 T VV ( VV : Tool No. * For the T21iCe series. but tool change is not. (Commands G49 and G80 may be specified within the block for M06. the tool change operation is temporarily interrupted until the movement of the X (Y) axis is completed. up to 21. the tool change operation resumes.) or M06 T VVV ( VVV : Tool group number) With this command.) In addition to the above. 2 When a tool number other than 1 to 14(*) are specified for the “n” following P. To execute the tool change command. 3 Alarm 252 (ATC alarm) will be displayed when the tool change command is executed during the cutter compensation.) 4 When X and Y axes movement and a tool change are commanded within the same block (Example) G00 X500. 5 If a specified tool has the same tool number as the currently selected tool. tool length compensation. the turret begins to rotate. or canned cycle. be sure to cancel the cutter compensation. the following command may be used: (n: The n–th tool from the current tool in the clockwise direction) The tool cartridge always rotates clockwise.6. the following command needs to be given using the M06 code: After T.) M06 Pn NOTE 1 PS alarm (ATC alarm) is displayed when a tool number other than 01 to 14(*) are specified. and the X (Y) axis begins to move. Upon completion of the X (Y) axis movement. the tool having the specified number is selected in the shorter path. tool length compensation. Then. If the X (Y) axis is still moving even after the turret rotation is completed. TOOL CHANGE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 6. 178 .0 M06 T02 In this case. specify the tool to be indexed using a two digit number.2 COMMANDS WITH M CODES When specifying the tool change using the program or MDI. For example. the number minus multiple of 14(*) will be effective. “n” will be 2 when n = 58 is specified. or canned cycle. spindle orientation and return to the Z–axis reference position are performed.

When TOOL CHANGE key is pressed.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 6. 179 . TOOL CHANGE 6. the tool cartridge rotates clockwise to select the tool next to the current one.3 “TOOL CHANGE” KEY A tool change can be executed by pressing the tool change button in the MDI mode.

The following table lists how to recover from an incorrect tool change operation.6. 180 . Close the door. TOOL CHANGE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 6. Perform automatic recovery. If the reset button is pressed while the tools are being changed. specified.4 MEASURES WHEN AN ERROR OCCURS DURING TOOL CHANGE The ROBODRILL series has a function for checking whether an arbor is mounted on the spindle. Most tool change alarms can be released using this program. The tool was changed with the tool of a unspecified tool number. This function is designed to stop the machine for safety in an emergency situation. then restart the machine. stopped with the STOP button. The ROBODRILL is provided with an automatic tool change recovery program (described later) so a tool change alarm can be released easily. Perform automatic recovery. when the pull stud of the arbor is broken during machining. The specified tool number has no tool assigned to it. Correct the program. tool change stops. Action Correct the program. When the machine was stopped with the EMERGENCY STOP button or <RESET> key. for example. Description An incorrect When a tool is already tool number assigned to the specified tool was number. The operator stopped the machine while the tool was being changed. When the machine was stopped by opening the door. For detailed information. see Section V–4. and an alarm is issued. When no tool is assigned to the specified tool number. When the machine was Restart the machine.

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 7. SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS 7 SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS 181 .

Pressing this button during automatic operation stops the machine by effecting feed hold.000 min–1.500 min–1. NOTE 1 The spindle rotation can be stopped in any mode. and the spindle rotates. 2 The lamp blinks during the rigid tapping mode.1. Examples 7. The spindle speed can be specified for each rotation using the address S and a number from two to four (five) digits.2 Method Using the Spindle Key (Manual) on the Operator’s Panel (1) Specify the spindle speed in the MDI mode.) (4) When the spindle operation key is pressed again.7. 3 If a spindle speed is not specified. SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 7. N04 M05: Stops the spindle. M05: Stops the spindle motion after completing all the commands within a given block. and spindle rotation stops. Spindle rotation key is lit depending on the direction of the spindle rotation. the spindle rotation can be controlled by the following M codes: M03: Rotates the spindle clockwise. it rotates clockwise. N01 M03 S1500: Rotates the spindle clockwise at the speed of 1. (2) Select one of the MANUAL modes. (When the safety door is closed) 182 . N02 S4000: Sets the spindle speed to 4.1 Method Using the M Code In the AUTO or MDI mode. M04: Rotates the spindle counterclockwise. The unit of the number is min–1. the LED goes off. N03 M04: Rotates the spindle counterclockwise. pressing the key cannot cause the spindle to rotate. (3) When the spindle operation key is pressed.1. When the spindle rotates for the first time after power–on. Rotation of the spindle can be controlled by either of the following two methods: 7. the LED goes on. (The spindle rotates in the same direction as the direction in which the spindle rotated previously.1 ROTATION OF THE SPINDLE The rotating direction of the spindle is defined when viewing the tip of the spindle from the spindle motor side.

SELECTION. D The spindle rotates at a specified constant speed (with S commands ignored). The rotation speed is specified at FUNCTIONS on the QUICK screen 31 : SEQ. 183 . D Spindle overriding is ignored.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 7. pressing the SPINDLE key causes the spindle to rotate under the following conditions.3 Spindle Rotation When the Safety Door is Open Even if the safety door is open.1. SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS 7.

184 . the spindle speed becomes that of S command. (In case of standard specification.000 80/100 = 2.7.) When the overridden spindle speed exceeds the spindle’s maximum speed.000 min–1. Examples When an override of 120% is set at S7500 with a maximum spindle speed of 8. Pressing the SPINDLE OVERRIDE [DOWN] or [UP] key can specify an override speed from 30% to 200% in 10% units to control the spindle speed. Examples With 80% override at S3000 3.400 min–1.) NOTE The override setting for the spindle is not valid in the tapping cycle (G74 and G84).400 (The spindle speed is 2.000 min–1. SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 7. the spindle speed is 8.000 min–1 rather than 7.500 120/100 = 9. When 100% key is pressed. the spindle rotates at its maximum speed.2 SPINDLE OVERRIDE The spindle speed may be overridden in all the running modes.

1) Press the + key to cause the system screen to appear. 25%ED 1500 or less 53 1750 62 2000 71 148 2250 80 2500 89 2800 or greater 100 * 25%ED means that the motor is turned on for 2. 50 Load meter reading (%) 100 150 200 The α–T14/21iCe standard spindle controls the spindle motor in a unique way. The continuous rating varies with the speed. 185 .3 SPINDLE LOAD METER The load meter is displayed on the spindle monitor screen. 3) Press the soft key [SP. monitor].5 minutes and off for 7. SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS 7. 2) Press the soft key [ å ] to turn over the soft key pages.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 7. parameter]. Speed (min–1) Continuous rating (%) 10-minute rating (%). 4) Press the soft key [SP. Select this screen according to the following procedure.5 minutes on a cycle time of 10 minutes. Set the load meter according to the list below.

(Changing this angle disables automatic tool change recovery operation.4 SPINDLE ORIENTATION (M19) Spindle orientation means to stop the spindle at a position specified with a parameter. This is done using the M19 command. SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 7. 2 Issuing this command during rigid tapping generates an EX alarm (No.) NOTE 1 This command remains effective until the spindle rotation command (M00 or M01). or program end auxiliary function (M00 or M01) is issued. Do not change this angle. 1007). Fine boring (G76) and back boring (G87) cause automatic spindle orientation.7. 186 . The machine is factory–set so that the spindle stops with the spindle key parallel to the Y–axis. (M19 cannot be specified during tapping) 3 Do not issue this command during a canned cycle. spindle stop command (M05).

5 (a) Spindle Motor Diagram (standard) Output characteristics 4 3.5 20 15 10 Continuous rating 5 4.7. SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS 7.5 1 0 Continuous rating 6000 9000 12000 15000 Spindle speed (min–1) Note) The graphs shown above are obtained when the efficiency is 1.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 7.4 Torque Nm Continuous rating 30 20 12. Spindle speed (min–1) Fig.5 SPINDLE MOTOR CHARACTERISTIC Output characteristics 6 5.7 3 10 min.7 3 2 1 0 0 1500 2000 2800 4000 6000 8000 0 0 10 min. rating (40%ED) 2 1.8 0 0 1500 3000 6000 9000 12000 15000 0 1500 3000 Torque characteristics 10 min. rating (40%ED) 30 25 23. rating Torque characteristics 1500 2000 2800 4000 6000 8000 Spindle speed (min–1) Note) The graphs shown above are obtained when the efficiency is 1. Spindle speed (min–1) Fig.5 5 Output kW 4 3.5 (b) Spindle Motor Diagram (15000min–1) 187 .5 10 Continuous rating 10 min. rating (40% ED) 40 39.7.

DISPLAYING ALARM. OPERATOR. AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 8 DISPLAYING ALARM. OPERATOR. AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES 188 .8.

DISPLAYING ALARM. (When bit 7 of NC parameter No. Otherwise.1.1 CNC SCREEN 8. While you are using background editing. To release an alarm which occurs during background editing. do not press the RESET key. OPERATOR. automatic machine operation would stop. [ALARM MESSAGE] is automatically displayed. press any key. AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES 8.1 Alarm Message If an alarm occurs.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 8. 189 . 3111 is set to 0) NOTE 1 If an alarm occurs during edit operation using background editing. the alarm is displayed on PROGRAM without screen switching.

[OPERATOR MESSAGE] is automatically displayed. (When bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3111 is set to 0) [Displaying OPERATOR MESSAGE] (1) Press the key. OPERATOR. DISPLAYING ALARM.8.1. then the or key. (2) Press soft key [ALARM]. AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 [Displaying ALARM MESSAGE] (1) Press the key. (2) Press soft key [MSG]. then the or key. 8.2 Operator Message When an operator message is issued. 190 .

Operator messages are numbered starting with 2000.) [DIAGNOSTIC] Window displays all operator and diagnostic messages being displayed. 8. (The [DGN P. operator.) [ALARM] Window displays all alarms being displayed. (The [ALARM P.2. (See the figure above.2. OPERATOR. 3111 is set to 0) One message is displayed at a time. it is displayed at the top of the screen.PAGE] soft keys can be used.) Diagnostic messages are numbered 0 to 999. AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES 8.2 Diagnose/Alarm Screen On [33:DIAGNOSE/ALARM]. 191 . An alarm message is displayed in red and an operator message is displayed in magenta. and diagnostic messages.PAGE] and [DGN N.2 QUICK SCREEN 8. (When bit 7 of NC parameter No. DISPLAYING ALARM.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 8.1 Common to Screens When an alarm or operator message is issued.PAGE] and [ALARM N.PAGE] soft keys can be used. you can check the displayed alarm.

Pressing the key again closes [MESSAGE] WINDOW. AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 8. DISPLAYING ALARM. For details of each message. Such a window cannot be displayed simultaneously. OPERATOR. When a particular window (such as the OUTPUT NC STATEMENTS window) of the manual guide screen is displayed. close it. 192 .8.3 COMMON TO CNC SCREEN AND QUICK SCREEN Pressing the key on the operator’s panel displays [MESSAGE] Window in the center of the screen. see the alarm list and operator and diagnostic message list in Appendix.

“500: Overtravel +X” How to release An overtravel is released according to the following procedure. 4 Pressing the <RESET> key clears the alarm indication and reset the alarm. 2 The axes on which an overtravel occurred are displayed on the screen. 3 Rotate the manual pulse generator in the direction opposite to the direction indicated on the screen to place the tool within a range of stroke. 500 to 507 is displayed on the screen. 1 Put the machine in the manual operation mode. an alarm is generated. Overtravel An alarm from No. it is necessary to return the tool to within a specified range. 193 . RELEASING OVERTRAVEL 9 Examples RELEASING OVERTRAVEL The term overtravel refers to a fact that the tool goes beyond a range specified for each axis.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 9. If an overtravel occurs. To reset the overtravel. Select one using the axis selection key.

2 When a tap is trapped. . (4) Turn the manual pulse generator clockwise and pull out the cutter from the workpiece. the rigid tapping return function is available. follow the procedure below to release the state. it cannot be pull out upward. RELEASING THE TOOL TRAPPING STATE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 10 RELEASING THE TOOL TRAPPING STATE If the cutter bites into the workpiece and the machine stops. 194 . (2) Press Manual operation mode key (3) Press Z axis key .10.10. See Subsection IV 1.3. Remove the cutter from the arm bar. (1) Press Reset key on the operator’s panel to release the alarm. NOTE 1 When a T–slot cutter is trapped.

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 11. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES 11 INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES 195 .

When using RS–422. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR DETAILED OPERATIONS EXTERNAL DEVICES B–85014EN/01 11. (2) Memory card Set “4” to No. remove the JD28A connector from the FS16i option board in the rear of the display device and connect it to JD6A. 0020 (I/O channel) to “3”. NOTE 1 Remote buffer connection Connect the remote buffer to the D–SUB 25 connector in the cabinet (when RS–232C is being used). 0133: Baud rate No. 4 For details of the data server. No. 0020 (I/O channel) is set to “0”.1 OVERVIEW To use an external device other than the Handy File for input/output using the RS–232C interface. Change the following parameters according to the device you are going to use. 0101: Stop bit. change the following parameters according to the device you are going to use. 0135: RS–422/RS–232–C selection. No. etc. 0100: Output format No. No. (For normal input/output using the Handy File. 0102: Input/output unit specification number No. The RS–232–C connector on the machine operator’s panel may be used for this purpose. 0100: Output format No. refer to “FAST Ethernet Board FAST/DATA SERVER OPERATOR’S MANUAL”. etc.) (1) Ordinary input/output To use an ordinary input/output unit. 196 . the factory–set defaults need not be changed. In this case. No. 0020 (I/O channel) to 5. 0134: Protocol selection No.11. change parameters to suit the device. (4) When the data server (option) is used Set No. 0132: Input/output unit specification number No. the customers should prepare cables to connect it to external equipment by themselves. 0131: Stop bit. set parameter No. remove connector JD36A from the FS16i main PC board in the back side of display and connect it to JD5C on the optional board. 2 To use a remote buffer. 0103: Baud rate Make sure that parameter No. 3 For detailed descriptions about the remote buffer. refer to the Descriptions: Additional Information on the FANUC Series 15i/150i–MODEL A (Supplement for Remote Buffer) from this manual. etc. 0020 (I/O channel) (3) Remote buffer (option) To use a remote buffer.

The input/output device to be used is specified by setting the channel connected to that device in setting parameter I/O CHANNEL. such as a baud rate and the number of stop bits. of an input/output device connected to a specific channel must be set in parameters for that channel in advance.2 DETAILS OF THE RELATED PARAMETERS ROBODRILL has three channels of input/output device interfaces as the reader/puncher interface. The following shows the interrelation between the input/output device interface parameters for the channels.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 11. 0 : The device on channel 1 is selected. two combinations of parameters to specify the input/output device data are provided. For channel 1. and other data Specify a channel for an input/output device. – Channel 5 (data server) is optional. – Channel 2 cannot be used. The specified data. 0020) 0101 0020 I/O CHANNEL I/O CHANNEL=0 (channel 1) 0103 0111 I/O CHANNEL=1 (channel 1) 0113 0121 I/O CHANNEL=2 (channel 2) 0123 0131 0132 I/O CHANNEL=3 (channel 3) 0134 0135 0133 0122 0112 0102 Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/output device Baud rate Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/output device Baud rate Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/output device Baud rate Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/output device Baud rate Selection of protocol Selection of RS-422 or RS-232C. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 5 [I/O CHANNEL] An input/output device used is selected. (Input/output device connected to JD36A on the mother board) 197 . Input/output channel number (parameter No. – Channel 3 (remote buffer) is optional. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES 11. I/O CHANNEL =0: Channel 1 =1: Channel 1 =2: Channel 2 (Not used) =3: Channel 3 =4: Memory card =5: Data server 0020 I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device Setting entry is acceptable.

JD28A. the number of stop bits. For each. 3 JD36A. (Input/output device connected to JD36A on the mother board) 2 : The device on channel 2 is selected. 2 The specified data. such as a baud rate and the number of stop bits. Using the setting screen is a more common method for selecting the device.11. I/O CHANNEL=0 and I/O CHANNEL=1 both refer to channel 1. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR DETAILED OPERATIONS EXTERNAL DEVICES B–85014EN/01 1 : The device on channel 1 is selected. parameters to set the baud rate. of an input/output device connected to a specific channel must be set in parameters for that channel in advance. JD36B. and JD6A are numbers of connectors on the printed circuit boards. Series 16 MAIN CPU BOARD OPTION-1 BOARD Channel 1 JD36A RS232C Channel 2 JD36B RS232C Channel 3 JD28A RS232C JD6A RS422 Reader/ puncher I/O CHANNEL=0 or I/O CHANNEL=1 Reader/ puncher I/O CHANNEL=2 Host computer I/O CHANNEL=3 Host computer I/O CHANNEL=3 198 . (Input/output device connected to JD36B on the mother board) 3 : The device on channel 3 is selected. (Input/output device connected to the serial communication board) 4 : Memory card 5 : Data server NOTE 1 The input/output device used can be selected also on the setting screen. and other data are provided separately.

CR are output. 1 : Only LF is output. 0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0) [Data type] Bit Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0. set NFD to 1. (2) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0) 0101 #7 NFD #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2 [Data type] Bit [SB2] The number of stop bits 0: 1 1: 2 [ASI] Code used at data input 0 : EIA or ISO code (automatically distinguished) 1 : ASCII code [NFD] Feed before and after the data at data output 0 : Output 1 : Not output NOTE When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are used. with one of the set values listed in Table 11.2 (a). CR. 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code 0 : LF. Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of EIA code 0 : The NULL code is ignored. 199 . Bit Character counting for TV check on controlling (in the comment section).B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 11. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES (1) Parameters common to all channels #7 ENS #6 #5 #4 #3 NCR #2 #1 CTV #0 0100 [Data type] [CTV] [NCR] [ENS] Setting entry is acceptable. 1 : An alarm is generated.

INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR DETAILED OPERATIONS EXTERNAL DEVICES B–85014EN/01 Table 11. FANUC Handy File Not used Portable tape reader FANUC PPR FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G.2 (b).2 (a) Set Value and Input/Output Device Set value 0 1 2 3 Input/output device RS-232-C (Set the parameters to 0 other than those listed below.) FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2) FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1) FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate. FANUC FA Card Adapter FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H. 200 .2 (b) Baud Rate Settings Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 Baud rate 50 100 110 150 200 300 Set value 7 8 9 10 11 12 Baud rate 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 (3) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1) #7 NFD #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2 0111 [Data type] Bit These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. The meanings of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101. FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H 4 5 6 0103 Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0) [Data type] Byte Set the specification number of the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0. Table 11.11.2 (a). 0112 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 1) [Data type] Bit Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. with one of the set values listed in Table 11. with a set value in Table 11.

INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES 0113 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1) [Data type] Bit Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. 201 . (5) Parameters for channel 3 (I/O CHANNEL=3) #7 NFD #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2 0131 [Data type] Bit These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 3. 0123 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2) [Data type] Bit Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2. with a value in Table 11. the power must be turned off before operation is continued. with a number in Table 11.2 (a).2 (c). (4) Parameters for channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2) #7 NFD #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2 0121 [Data type] Bit These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 11. with a value in Table 11. 0132 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 3) [Data type] Bit Set the number specified for the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 3. 0122 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 2) [Data type] Bit Set the number specified for the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2.2 (b).2 (a).2 (b). with a value in Table 11. NOTE When this parameter is set. 0133 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 3) [Data type] Bit Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 3 according to the Table 11. The meanings of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101. The meanings of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.

the power must be turned off before operation is continued. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR DETAILED OPERATIONS EXTERNAL DEVICES B–85014EN/01 NOTE Valid data range: 1 to 15 (up to a baud rate of 86400 bps) for the RS–422 interface or 1 to 12 (up to a baud rate of 19200 bps) for the RS–232–C interface. #7 0134 #6 #5 CLK #4 NCD #3 #2 SYN #1 PRY #0 [Data type] Bit [PRY] Parity bit 0 : Not used 1 : Used [SYN] NC reset/alarm in protocol B 0: Not reported to the host 1: Reported to the host with SYN and NAK codes [NCD] CD (signal quality detection) of the RS–232–C interface 0 : Checked 1 : Not checked [CLK] Baud rate clock when the RS–422 interface is used 0 : Internal clock 1 : External clock 202 . Table 11.11.2 (c) Baud Rate Settings Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Baud rate 50 100 110 150 200 300 600 1200 Set value 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 — Baud rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 76800 86400 — NOTE When this parameter is set.

INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES 0135 #7 RMS #6 #5 #4 #3 R42 #2 PRA #1 ETX #0 ASC [Data type] Bit [ASC] Communication code except NC data 0 : ISO code 1 : ASCII code [ETX] End code for protocol A or extended protocol A 0 : CR code in ASCII/ISO 1 : ETX code in ASCII/ISO NOTE Use of ASCII/ISO is specified by ASC. the power must be turned off before operation is continued. 203 . [PRA] Communication protocol 0 : Protocol B 1 : Protocol A [R42] Interface 0 : RS–232–C interface 1 : RS–422 interface [RMS] State of remote/tape operation when protocol A is used 0: Always 0 is returned. NOTE When this parameter is set. 1: Contents of the change request of the remote/tape operation in the SET command from the host is returned.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 11.

12. QUICK EDITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 12 QUICK EDITOR 204 .

1 OVERVIEW QUICK EDITOR is a full–screen editor which is the exclusive one to ROBODRILL and provides various functions to edit a CNC program on the QUICK SCREEN. 205 . QUICK EDITOR 12.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 12.

1 Features of QUICK EDITOR (1) QUICK EDITOR provides an editing area of 1000 lines. QUICK EDITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 12. note the contents of the notes appended to each description.9). (3) It is unnecessary to enter EOB (end of block). 12.2. some functions cannot be used. cannot be registered.5. (4) Before registering or deleting the program currently being executed. (2) Each editing operation can be performed at an arbitrary position in the editing area by using page key.3).5.2. 206 .2 Notes (1) The program with lines more than 1000 cannot be edited (created). Furthermore addresses which follow G or M code are displayed automatically. and cannot be deleted by QUICK EDITOR. before performing other operations. (5) G and M codes can be specified very easily. a program cannot be edited. or cursor jump function (see Subsec. cursor key.5). But the program is not applied immediately because the program cannot be registered in the CNC in the operation (see Subsec. This is very useful to a CNC programmer.5. note the contents of the relevant notes. QUICK EDITOR interprets one line in the editing area as one block in principle. Consequently the machining program can be modified while the machining processes are checked. Similarly. 12. 12. Consequently the number of use of alphabet is reduced and the fact that no address key exists on the operator’s panel does not cause inconvenience. Each line can consist of up to 46 characters.12. and add EOB to each line when a program is registered in the CNC. (4) It is possible to edit the machining program in the operation. (3) If the alphabet keyboard type operator’s panel is provided. But some lines in the editing area can be treated as one block by using continuous line function (see Subsec. 12. (2) During background editing.2 FEATURES AND NOTES OF QUICK EDITOR 12.

and page key on the operator’s panel because QUICK EDITOR screen number is “23”.PAGE 2 PROG å 3 SET å or N. “3”.Procedures for displaying QUICK EDITOR screen are as follows.3.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 12.1 Procedure for Displaying QUICK EDITOR Screen This chapter describes how to display the QUICK EDITOR screen and how to select each editing function.PAGE QUICK EDITOR screen (next page) is displayed by the above way (1) or (2). The menu of “OPERATION” group is displayed on the soft–key for screen change. P. (1) The way by using soft–keys Press the soft–key [OPERATON] for screen change. QUICK EDITOR screen is in the QUICK SCREEN (screen number: 23). (2) The way by inputting screen number and page key Press “2”. Current mode 207 . QUICK EDITOR 12. Then press [QUICK EDITOR].3 QUICK EDITOR SCREEN 12.

but cannot create a new program or edit any program. 208 .12. (Edit mode) In this mode. 12. But if QUICK EDITOR screen is displayed for the first time after power on. To switch to another screen. see Section 12. Pressing the rightmost soft key changes the edit functions assigned to the right–side soft keys as follows: For details of each edit function. 12. the screen cannot be changed because the left–side soft keys are also assigned edit functions. [QUICK EDITOR] is in the browse mode immediately after selected. QUICK EDITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 NOTE The last program will be read and displayed on the editing area automatically after QUICK EDITOR screen is selected. there are two modes: browse mode and edit mode. Pressing soft key [EDIT] displays the cursor and puts the screen in the edit mode. In this mode. (2) Edit mode You can create a new program and edit a program using various edit functions described later. You can create and edit a program.5.2 Browse Mode and Edit Mode For [QUICK EDITOR]. the program whose number is selected in the CNC screen is displayed. You can create and edit a program. you can reference a program. You cannot create a new program or edit any program. press END.3.3.3 Selecting an Edit Function Pressing soft key [EDIT] on [QUICK SCREEN] shown on the previous page changes the displayed soft keys as shown below. “Quick Editor Edit Functions”. The current mode is displayed at the upper right of the edit area. (1) Browse mode You can only reference or delete existing programs.

QUICK EDITOR 12. key again displays the names of edit functions in the NOTE An operator’s panel having a full keyboard does not have this function. You can press a desired soft key to enter the corresponding character or symbol.4 INPUT FUNCTION OF QUICK EDITOR 12.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 12. For entering alphabetic characters and symbols. (1) HALF mode (frequently used alphabetic characters and symbols) PAGE MODE Switching to the FULL mode (2) FULL mode (all alphabetic characters and symbols) Switching to the HALF mode Pressing the soft key area.1 Entering Alphabetic Characters and Symbols Pressing the key on the operator’s panel displays alphabetic characters and symbols in the soft key area. there are two modes: HALF mode and FULL mode.4. 209 .

addresses possible to follow the G code or the M code are displayed in the window. In the window for G code. [OK].2 Simple Input of G and M Codes When G or M code is entered. Enter numerical values if necessary.4. A numerical value entered in the window once is canceled by pressing <INPUT> key after moving the cursor. no word is entered in the editing area. [CANCEL]. QUICK EDITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 12. NOTE The G code and the M code must be specified with 2 digits long. Only words specified in the window are entered in the editing area by pressing the soft–key [OK] or <INSERT> key on the operator’s panel.12. some G codes can also be entered. 210 . If the soft–key [CANCEL] is pressed. and <INSERT> key are the same function. When no numerical value is entered in the window.

See the previous page for details of the use of the operator’s panel (such as the functions of the [OK].4 Other Operations (1) To enter a space. Words can be entered in the editing area similarly to “12. use the [INSERT] key on the operator’s panel. [CANCEL]. 12. (3) To delete the character at the cursor.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 12.4. and <INSERT> keys). (2) To delete the character to the left of the cursor. QUICK EDITOR 12. which is performed using the <INPUT> key. use the [DELETE] key. use the [CANCEL] key.4.4. 211 . is useful for repeating a canned cycle. The above function.3 Simple Input of Words by Input Key Addresses which are frequently used independently of G or M code are displayed in the window by pressing <INPUT> key on the operator’s panel.2 Simple input of G and M code” without using alphabet.

3 The protected program cannot be selected. (2) Enter a desired program number by using numeric key on the operator’s panel.5. if the program is already registered. 212 . (the <INPUT> key need not be pressed) and press the soft–key [SELECT] . QUICK EDITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 12.5 EDITING FUNCTION OF QUICK EDITOR 12. 4 The program with lines more than 999 cannot be edited and created. NOTE 1 In the browse mode. you cannot select any protected program. When a desired program is selected by using the above means (1) or (2). 2 In the edit mode.12. SELECT] . the corresponding program is displayed on the editing area. the only program number is displayed and program creation begins. and press the soft–key [SELECT] . (1) Select a desired program number from the program list moving the cursor in the window. If the program number is for an unregistered program.1 Selecting the Program The above window is displayed by pressing the soft–key [PROG. you can select only an existing program. There are two means to select the program.

To delete a program. the following message and soft–key are displayed. press soft key EXEC. Then press the soft–key [DELETE]. deletion of multiple programs (with specifying a range) either of the following can be selected: the deletion of one program or the deletion of all programs.5. After specifying the deletion range.].2 Deleting the Program The above window is displayed by pressing the soft–key [PROG. (3) Deleting all programs The following message and soft–key are displayed by pressing the soft–key [ALL PROGS. 213 . QUICK EDITOR 12. (1) Deleting one program Select a desired program number from the program list moving the cursor in the window. or enter a desired program number by using numeric key on the operator’s panel (the <INPUT> key need not be pressed). Enter the numbers of the first and last programs to be deleted to specify a deletion range. DELETE]. All programs registered in the CNC are deleted by pressing [EXEC]. (2) Deletion of multiple programs Pressing soft key PLURAL displays the following window. The program with the specified program number is deleted by pressing [EXEC].B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 12. When pressing [DELETE].

But if a subprogram with the deleted subprogram number is not registered before the subprogram is called. it is possible to delete another sub–program called by the same main program.12. 5 When the machine is in the operation. 2 The main program cannot be deleted during execution of a subprogram. 4 A protected program cannot be deleted. all programs cannot be deleted. the executing program cannot be deleted. 6 When the deletion of all programs is executed. QUICK EDITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 NOTE 1 When the machine is in the operation. 3 While a subprogram is being executed. 078) occurs. all programs other than those which have been protected (those having a program number between 9000 and 9999) will be cleared. 214 . alarm (No.

(2)Perform screen change or program selection.3 Registering the Program The following message and soft–key are displayed by pressing the soft–key [REGISTER]. 078) occurs.14.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 12. (4)The program registered in step (1) is no longer required (because it was reregistered in step (3)). But if the subprogram is called in the midst of the registration. 215 . ) As described in Note 1. In this case. (1)Change the program number into an unregistered number. In this case. and register it. if screen change or program selection is performed. the change will not be reflected in the program. the registration might end in failure. the executing program cannot be registered until the operation is finished. 6 Always enter a four–digit program number following “O” in the first line. But it is possible to edit it. screen change or program selection can be executed by the following procedure. (1) When a new program is registered (2) When a program with the same number has already been registered NOTE 1 When the machine is in the operation. (See section 12. 4 If an inappropriate format for the CNC exists in a program. 2 After the executing program is edited. however. and register it. the modification become null.5.5. If [NO] is selected. QUICK EDITOR 12. Then the program can be registered in the CNC by pressing [EXEC]. alarm (No. (3)After the operation is finished. a message which asks whether to register the program is displayed. [YES] cannot be selected. return the program number (1) to the former one. register the program again after modification on the inappropriate format. 3 While a subprogram is being executed. Delete it. it is possible to edit and register another subprogram called by the same main program. 5 If the power is turned off without registering a edited program.

5. press [COPY/MOVE] and [EXEC] . After the program is displayed. 216 .4 Copy and Move (by Line) The above soft–key is displayed by pressing the soft–key [COPY/MOVE]. SELECT] and select a program in which the range is to be inserted. Then the following soft–key is displayed. (b) Copying the specified range in another program Press the soft–key [CANCEL] first. except that the specified range is deleted. Then the range is displayed reversely. Procedure for moving Moving is the same as copying. QUICK EDITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 12. (2) Move the cursor to the start of the range to be copied and press the soft–key [START]. But [EXEC] is not displayed when this function is selected for the first time after displaying QUICK EDITOR screen. move the cursor to the line at which the range is to be inserted and press the soft–key [COPY/MOVE] and [EXEC] .) Press the soft–key [PROG.12. The range is specified by pressing the soft–key [END] and then the display is returned to a normal one. (3) Specify the range to be copied by moving the cursor. If you want to copy the same range successively. Procedure for copying (1) The following soft–key is displayed by pressing the soft–key [COPY]. (The specified range is not lost by pressing [CANCEL]. [EXEC] is used to insert the range specified previously or to insert the range in another program. (4) Executing (a) Copying the specified range in the same program Move the cursor to the line at which the range is to be inserted and press the soft–key [EXEC] .

When the line number of the destination of jump is entered according to the message.5. . . 12. 12. The cursor is moved to the bottom of the program. Press the [EXEC ±] or [EXEC °] soft key after entering the word. . 217 . 2 The range to be copied or moved cannot be specified by the character. . .5 Cursor Jump The above window and soft–key are displayed by pressing the soft–key [CURSOR JUMP] . Upon entering a word for which a search is to be made. . . . The [EXEC ±] soft key is used to perform downward search. . [GO TO LINE] . Select from the soft–key. the cursor is positioned to the specified line. .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 12. . QUICK EDITOR NOTE 1 If the program will exceed 1000 lines by copying. . .6 Search for the Specified Word The above window is displayed by pressing the soft–key [SEARCH]. . . and the [EXEC °] soft key is used to perform upward search. . copying cannot be executed. [BOTTOM] . . it is displayed in reverse video at the bottom of the window. . . . . . The window is closed and the cursor is positioned to the point at which the specified word was first found. . . . . . [TOP] . 3 The range to be copied or moved can be specified up to 100 lines.5. The cursor is moved to the top of the program.

move the cursor to the character to be input and press INPUT. Pressing soft key [ENTERING A MACRO STATEMENT] displays the following window: To input a character displayed in the window in the edit area. to appear at the bottom of the window. the message “THE WORD IS NOT FOUND.” is displayed. That word for which a search was made most recently remains stored in the system. 218 . NOTE The word to be searched for can be specified up to 10 letters.5. if any. The word itself does not have to be entered again. it is only necessary to press [SEARCH] then [EXEC±]³[EXEC °]. NOTE When the window is displayed.12. to subsequently search for the same word again. Therefore. QUICK EDITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 If the specified word is not found. Before using this function. the cursor in the window is moved. Pressing [SEARCH] causes the word for which a search was last made.7 Entering a Macro Statement You can simply enter words frequently used for creating custom macros. 12. move the cursor to the position in which a character is to be input.

LINE] again. LINE]. 219 . Then the mark of “+” disappears and the treatment as one block is canceled. (See the above (a). press soft key [EXEC]. And those lines are treated as one block. You can check the positions of the parentheses at the bottom of the window to see the allowable length for inputting a comment in the current position.5.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 12. Then the mark of “+” is displayed at the right side of the line. 12.) The mark of “+” means that a line which has the mark is followed by the next line. If you want to cancel this function.9 Setting and Cancel of Continuous Line (a) Move the cursor to the desired line and press the soft–key [CONT. The window is closed and the input comment enclosed by parentheses is inserted or overwritten in the cursor position.5. NOTE A comment input using this function cannot extend over multiple lines. move the cursor to the disired line and press the soft–key [CONT. After entry. it is temporarily displayed at the bottom of the window.8 Entering a Comment Pressing soft key [COMMENT SECTION] displays the following [COMMENT SECTION] Window: When you enter a character string. QUICK EDITOR 12.

The currently selected mode is displayed at the upper right of the edit area. Then. Pressing the [END] soft key closes the window and sets the selected function. QUICK EDITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 NOTE This function cannot be used at the bottom of the editing area.5. this function cannot be executed.5.13 Selecting the Function Pressing soft key [FUNCTION SELECTION] displays the following window. You can sets the function of the up and down arrow keys to [ONLY UP AND DOWN] or [GO TO LEFT AFTER THAT].5.12 Setting of Inserting or Overwriting Mode Pressing the [ALTER] key on the operator’s panel switches back and forth between the insert mode and write–over mode. select a function of the selected item by pressing the [SELECT↑] or [SELECT↓] soft key. 12.5. 12.12.11 Deleting a Line The current line is deleted by pressing the soft–key [DELETE 1 LINE]. 12. 12. NOTE If the bottom line (line 999) of the editing area is not empty.10 Inserting a Line A line is inserted by pressing the soft–key [INSERT 1 LINE] and then the cursor is moved to the head of the line. 220 .

. . . Then select from the soft–key in accordance with the message. . . 221 . QUICK EDITOR 12. . .5. . . if screen change or program selection is performed without registering the program. . .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 12. Screen change or program selection is not performed. [YES] . . . [CANCEL] . UPDATED is displayed at the upper left of the screen. . . . . . . . . . [NO] . . . . the following message and soft–key are displayed. . . . . Screen change or program selection is performed without registering the current program. . . Screen change or program selection is performed after the current program is registered. .14 Screen Change and Program Selection after Editing After editing a program. . . When changes are made to a read program. . .

A.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.A.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 13 QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.P iM) 222 .13.

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING
B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

13.1
OVERVIEW (SUPER C.A.P iM)

(1) This section uses some abbreviated names as follows: (a) Conversational programming using SUPER C.A.P iM is referred to as the conversational function. (b) A part program created and edited by conversational programming using SUPER C.A.P iM is referred to as a conversational program. (c) A part program created and edited in the NC format is referred to as an “NC statement”. (2) This section briefly describes the conversational function. For details including the operation, setting data, notes and cautions, and so forth of each function, refer to “FANUC SUPER C.A.P iM OPERATOR’S MANUAL”.

223

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

13.2
CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 13.2.1
Operation
(1) Creating and editing a conversational program (a) Study the settings of jigs and tools while viewing the machining drawings. Keep a record of the study together with the machining drawings. 1 Which program number is to be assigned? (If plural programs already exist, a unique number must be assigned. ) 2 Where is the reference point in a workpiece coordinate syetem? (In general, the center of an air chuck or a corner of the mouth piece of a machine vise is selected. ) In addition, determine whether to machine multiple workpiece. 3 Which tools are used? Which turret numbers are assigned to the tools? 4 Which surface is used as the reference surface for tool length compensation setting ? (For example, the Z axis coordinate where the tool tip contacts the workpiece surface is used.) (b) Upon completion of these studies, proceed to the creation and editing of a conversational program. 1 Create a cutting condition file. A detailed explanation is provided in subsec. 13.3.1. 2 Create a tool file. A detailed explanation is provided in subsec. 13.3.2. 3 Create a pre– tool file. A detailed explanation is provided in subsec. 13.3.3. 4 Set a workpiece coordinate system. A detailed explanation is provided in subsec. 13.3.5. 5 Create and edit a conversational program. A detailed explanation is provided in sections 13.4. , and 13.5. (2) Conversational program checking and execution 1 Mount a tool on the turret, then measure and set tool length compensation and cutter compensation data. 2 In multiple workpiece machining, set multiple workpiece setting as required. 3 Use the drawing functions (tool path drawing, animated simulation) to check a created machining program. See Section 13.6. 4 Select the conversational program subject to execution. 5 Perform test machining in the same way as for memory operation. If there is a problem, correct the program.
224

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING
B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

13.2.2
Notes

Note the restrictions on the conversational function as described below. (1) Cutting condition file/automatic cutting condition determination function (a) Even if the cutting condition file data is set again, no spindle speed and feedrate already edited in the conversational program change after a conversational program is created and edited. (b) With the conversational function, the automatic cutting condition determination function determines a spindle speed and feedrate at the time of program creation. Note that the above function uses only data set in the cutting condition file and the number of teeth on the tool in the tool file for its computation. However, actual machining requires some changes after initial setting. For example, peck drilling requires the setting of a slower feedrate to match the hole depth. End milling requires different feedrates for side cutting and grooving. In these cases, change a spindle speed and feedrate determined during conversational program creation. (2) Tool file/pre–tool file/automatic pre–tool selection function (a) Even if the tool file or pre– tool file is set again, the tools and related conditions set in the conversational program already edited does not change after conversational program creation and editing. Tool name is allotted to each tool ID number beforehand. (3) Functions for random and pattern machining in multiple quantities (a) For multiple workpiece machining, a range of functions are available. These are the all–copy (random) function, all–copy (pattern) function, group copy (random) function, group copy (pattern) function, and group copy (rotation) function. Use the all–copy (random and pattern) functions in the process immediately following initialization. Use the group copy (random, pattern, and rotation) functions immediately after initialization, or in the process immediately after an all–copy operation if selected. Note that the all–copy (random) function and the all–copy (pattern) function cannot be used together in the same program. (b) The all–copy (random) function can machine up to six workpieces, placed in arbitrary positions according, to the same machining program. The all–copy (random) function uses workpiece coordinate systems 1 through 6 (G54 through G59) for workpiece positioning. When the all–copy (random) function is used, machining is performed by changing the settings of workpiece coordinate systems 1 through 6 (G54 through G59).

225

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

If a program is created without first setting the workpiece positions on the data setting screen of the all–copy (random) function, the program is executed using the workpiece coordinate system settings available when the program is started. If workpiece positions are set on the data setting screen of the all–copy (random) function, the settings of the workpiece coordinate systems before the program is started will differ from those after the program is terminated. (c) The all–copy (pattern) function can perform multiple workpiece machining based on a displacement in the X and Y directions, according to the same program. No limit is imposed on the number of workpieces to be machined. The all–copy (pattern) function uses workpiece coordinate system 6 (G56) for workpiece positioning. When the all–copy (pattern) function is used, machining is performed by changing the setting of workpiece coordinate system 6 (G59) for each workpiece position. The setting of workpiece coordinate system 6 (G59) before the program is started differs from that after the program is terminated. (d) The group copy (random) function or group copy (pattern) function is used for multiple workpiece machining at arbitrary positions, or at intervals on the X–Y plane, according to the machining pattern of a program. The group copy (rotation) function is used to rotate and copy a machining pattern of a program on the X–Y plane. (e) In multiple workpiece machining, the workpiece coordinate system of each machining data setting screen is ignored; only the workpiece coordinate system specified on the multi–ple workpiece machining screen is valid. (f) For details of the multiple workpiece machining function, refer to the “FANUC Super CAP iM Operator’s Manual.”

(4) Tool compensation (a) The following shows the tool length compensation command in the conversational function:

G 90 G 00 G 43 Z ** H ** ; Tool compensation number Input data at common safety Z point

Accordingly, as the amount of tool length compensation, set the relative Z axis coordinate where the tool tip contacts the workpiece (or jig) reference plane on the table. See “13.3.4 Tool Geometry Compensation” for how to specify it. The above instructions do not include G17 (plane specification) . So if G18 or G19 remains as modal before the conversational program is executed, the tool may move along the X or Y axis when the instruction above is executed.
226

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING
B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

(b) Cutter compensation C is used for cutter compensation when the conversational function is used. So, as the amount of cutter compensation, set the radius of a tool. See “13.3.4 Tool Geometry Compensation” for how to specify it. (5) Setting a coordinate system for a workpiece (a) With the conversational function, select a number from 1 to 5 for COORDINATE on each conversational data input screen. Never use work piece coordinate system 6. (b) When a conversational program operation creates a local coordinate system as in machining multiple workpieces, a local coordinate system available until then is cancelled. (6) Other conversational program editing operations (a) A conversational program can insert no comments in parentheses. (b) If the machine tool is running at the time of conversational program creation and editing, background editing is selected automatically. Except for this case, the current mode is switched to the edit mode automatically at the time of conversational program creation and editing. (c) When using the conversational function for background editing, if an alarm occurs in the conversational mode, do not press the <RESET> key. Otherwise, the program being executed in the foreground will stop. Once the foreground program stops, it cannot be restarted. To reset this alarm, press the <CAN> key. (7) Restrictions on program execution (a) Be sure to execute a conversational program from the beginning of a program. (b) No conversational program can be executed, with the mirror image set on. (c) Conversational program cannot be called by G66. (Program initialization specifies the cancellation of modal calling. ) (8) External I/O (a) No offset value for multiple workpiece machining can input/output to an external memory through the reader/puncher interface.

227

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

13.3
SETTING SEVERAL DATA

The following data must be specified before a conversational program can be created. (a) Cutting condition file : This file contains data from which cutting conditions are derived for automatic setting according to the workpiece and tool materials. The file initially contains cutting conditions for seven types of workpiece materials. Select [CUTTING CONDITION FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] to set data. (b) Tool file : This file contains the specified tool materials and dimensions. A tool name, tool length, and cutter compensation number are assigned to each tool ID number beforehand, such that the tool ID numbers cannot be changed. Select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] to set data. : This file specifies the tools used in preparatory cutting. The tools may include a drill used before the final cutting, such as tapping, in multi–toolmachining, as typified in the case of prepared holes. Select [PRE–TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] to set data.

(c) Pre– tool file

(d) Tool geometry compensation : For cutter compensation, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] to set data for end mills, face milling cutters, and chamfering tools. For tool length compensation, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] to set data for all tools. Alternatively, select [MAGAZINE DATA] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN]. Tool compensation number (H–code, D–code) is allotted to each tool ID number beforehand. Therefore specified data is set to the corresponding tool compensation number automatically. (e) Workpiece coordinate system : Positional data used as a reference in mounting a workpiece is specified. Use [COORDINATES/OFFSET SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] to set data.
228

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING
B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

The above data can be specified in the QUICK SCREEN. A detailed explanations are provided in the following sections.

13.3.1
Cutting Condition File

For each of two types of tool materials, cutting conditions (cutting speeds, feedrates) for up to eight types of workpiece materials can be registered. (Cutting conditions for up to seven workpiece materials are already registered. ) A cutting condition is not set for a special workpiece material. This material should be specified by the user as required. To set cutting condition data, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN]. First, display [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN].

Move the cursor to [TOOL FILE] and press soft key [SELECT]. The screen for setting cutting condition data appears.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

229

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

Item 1 CUTTING SPEED

Contents For CARBIDE and HIGH–SPEED STEEL of tool materials, the cutting speed for each of workpiece materials can be registered. @ CARBIDE : including coated carbide

@ HIGH–SPEED STEEL : including powdersinter/ coating high–speed steel 2 FEED FOR EACH CUTTING BLADE The feed for each cutting blade can be specified except TAP. The feed is common to all tool materials. It is unnecessary to specify a feedrate for TAP because it is automatically determined by the pitch. The feedrate is adjusted with a compensation factor that corresponds to the nominal diameter of the tool. This data is common to all tool materials. It is unnecessary to specify this data for TAP. Specify a range of nominal diameter for feed coefficient (4). This data applies to all tools except TAP. It is unnecessary to specify this data for TAP. A tool can be selected to register cutting conditions. A WINDOW is displayed by pressing [TOOL SELECT] of SOFT–KEY. Then operate in accordance with instructions in the WINDOW.

4

FEED COEFFICIENT

3

NOMINAL DIAMETER

5

TOOL SELECTION

230

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING
B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

13.3.2
Tool File

For each tool, tool materials and dimensions are specified. With a conversational program, cutting conditions such as S and F can be automatically determined just by programming the tool ID numbers of registered tools. To set tool data, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P.SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN]. First, display [QUICK C.A.P.SCREEN].

Move the cursor to [TOOL FILE] and press soft key [SELECT]. The screen for setting tool data appears.

(1)

(2)

231

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

(1) Tool data
Item 1 TOOL No. Contents TOOL No. is the ID number which is allotted to each tool beforehand. This is used to create a conversational program. The numbers are allotted as follows.
TOOL NAME CENTER DRILL DRILL TAP REAMER BORE TOOL No. 1–10 11–50 51–70 71–75 76–80 TOOL NAME BACK BORE END MILL FACE MILL CHAMFER TOOL No. 81– 85 86–105 106–110 111–115

2

NOMINAL DIA.

Specify the outside diameter of the tool. Data on the TOOL No. (the following data) are canceled by setting “0” to nominal diameter. Select a material of the tool from the following SOFT–KEYS. Specify the tool radius compensation value. A compensation number is assigned to each tool ID number as listed in the following table:
TOOL NAME END MILL FACE MILL CHAMFER TOOL No. 86–105 106–110 111–115 D–CODE 166–185 186–190 191–195

3 4

MATERIAL RADI. COMP. (ONLY FOR END MILL, FACE MILL, AND CHAM–FER)

5

LENG. COMP.

Specify the tool length compensation value. A compensation number is assigned to each tool ID number as listed in the following table:
TOOL NAME CENTER DRILL DRILL TAP REAMER BORE BACK BORE END MILL FACE MILL CHAMFER TOOL No. 1– 10 11– 50 51– 70 71– 75 76– 80 80– 85 86–105 106–110 111–115 H–CODE 41– 50 51– 90 101–120 121–125 126–130 131–135 136–155 156–160 161–165

6 7

PITCH (ONLY FOR TAP) S–DIA. (ONLY FOR CHAMFER)

For TAP, specify the pitch of the tapping screw thread. For CHAMFER, specify the diameter of the smaller tool end.

SMALLER DIAMETER

8

No. TOOTH (ONLY FOR END MILL, FACE MILL, AND CHAMFER) EDGE ANGLE (ONLY FOR CHAMFER)

Specify the number of teeth.

9

For CHAMFER, specify the angle of the tip of the cutting tool. (typically 90°)

232

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING
B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

Item 10 LENGTH OF CUT 11 HOLE–BOTTOM COMPENSATION

Contents Specify the length of the blade of the cutting tool. Specify the distance between the measurement point (tool tip) for tool length compensation and a point to determine the effective depth (corresponding to the nominal diameter). When machining holes, this is the hole–bottom compensation value by which the hole is cut beyond the specified effective depth. In chamfering, this is the clearance between the blade tip and the smaller–diameter end.

Clearance (ONLY FOR CHAMFER) Hole–bottom compensation value

12 CORNER–R (ONLY FOR END MILL, AND FACE MILL) 13 TOOL SELECT

Specify the radius of the corner on the tip of the end milling or face milling tool blade.

Select a target tool for setting tool data. Pressing this soft key displays a window. Enter the number of a desired tool according to the instructions. Various types of data items related to the selected tool are displayed on the screen.

233

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

13.3.3
Pre–Tool File
Example :

Program creation and editing for multi– step cutting (such as tapping) can be simplified by creating a pre– tool file. When it is necessary to drill a center hole and prepare it for tapping, the drills used in these steps are specified as pre–tools for taps. Up to eight pre–tools can be specified for a single final tool. Pre–tools can be specified for up to 80 final tools. To set pre–tool data, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN]. First, display [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN].

Move the cursor to [PRE–TOOL FILE] and press soft key [SELECT]. The screen for setting pre–tool data appears.

(1)

(2)

234

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING
B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

Item 1 AUX TOOL FIN TOOL PRETOOL1 PRETOOL2 PRETOOL3 PRETOOL4 PRETOOL5 PRETOOL6 PRETOOL7 PRETOOL8

Contents Pre–tools can be specified for up to 80 final tools (27 pages). Next page or back page is displayed by pressing PAGE KEY. Specify only TOOL No., which is used to display the tool name and nominal diameter from the tool file automatically. (a) FIN TOOL : Specify TOOL No. of the tool to be used in the final machining step. (b) PRETOOL1 TO 8 : Specify TOOL No. for machining steps before the final step. Use lower numbers for steps closer to the final step, starting with pre–tool number 1 for the step nearest the final step, without skipping a number. (c) AUX TOOL : Specify the TOOL No. for the chamfering step that followed a drilling step. (NOTE1) A machining sequence using pre–tools is as follows. PRETOOL8→PRETOOL7→ PRETOOL6→PRETOOL5→ PRETOOL4→PRETOOL3→ PRETOOL2→PRETOOL1→ FINAL TOOL→AUXILIARY TOOL (NOTE2) Set “0” for unnecessary steps. (NOTE3) For an auxiliary tool, specify the TOOL No. for a tool used after the final tool. Chamfering tap holes must, however, be performed before the final or tapping step. Specify PRETOOL1 for the chamfering step.

2

TOOL LIST

TOOL LIST (TOOL No., tool name, and nominal diameter) is displayed by pressing SOFT–KEY. Only for DRILL, there are 2 pages and they are displayed by pressing [DRILL 1/2] or [DRILL 2/2] of SOFT–KEY alternately. All other tool data is displayed on a single page. The tool list is useful for setting the management number of an auxiliary tool, final tool, and pre–tools 1 to 8.

235

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

13.3.4
Tool Geometry Compensation

Cutter compensation (tool radius compensation) data is specified only for end mill, face mill, and chamfer in the TOOL FILE SCREEN in the QUICK C.A.P SCREEN. A detailed explanation is provided in “13.3.2 Tool file”. Tool length compensation data is specified for all tools in the TOOL FILE SCREEN or the MAGAZINE DATA SCREEN in the QUICK C.A.P SCREEN. A detailed explanation is provided in “13.3.2 Tool file” or this section (in the case of use of the MAGAZINE DATA SCREEN) . First, display [QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN], move the cursor to [MAGAZINE DATA], and press soft key [SELECT]. The screen for setting cartridge data appears.

(1)

(2) (3)

Item 1 TOOL No.

Contents Set the ID number of a tool to be mounted for each tool number (T code). When the ID number is input, the name and nominal diameter of the tool are automatically displayed. (NOTE) You cannot enter the ID number of a tool that has already been set for another tool number.

2

TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION

Set tool length compensation. Tool length compensation can also be set by selecting [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN]. Pressing soft key [AUTO SET] can also set the current Z machine coordinate as tool length compensation. A compensation number is assigned to each tool ID number as listed in the following table:
TOOL NAME CENTER DRILL DRILL TAP REAMER BORE BACK BORE END MILL FACE MILL CHAMFER TOOL No. 1– 10 11– 50 51– 70 71– 75 76– 80 80– 85 86–105 106–110 111–115 H–CODE 41– 50 51– 90 101–120 121–125 126–130 131–135 136–155 156–160 161–165

236

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING
B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

Item 3 TOOL LIST

Contents The contents of the tool file (ID numbers, tool names, and nominal diameters) are listed. It is useful to reference this [TOOL LIST] when setting an ID number.

13.3.5
Workpiece Coordinate System

Positional data used as a reference in mounting a workpiece is specified in the COORDINATES/OFFSET in the QUICK SCREEN.

(1)

(2)

(3) Item 1 2 GRAPHICAL DISPLAY WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM Contents The present position of tool and the origin of workpiece coordinate system are displayed graphically. Input the workpiece coordinate system number. Then specify the origin of the workpiece coordinage system.

237

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

Item 3 AUTOMATIC SETTING

Contents It is possible to set the present machine position to workpiece coordinates. At this time, you can also set the value obtained by adding a desired adjustment value to each machine coordinate.

When the window is displayed, press soft key [X– EXEC] or [Y–EXEC]. The value obtained by adding the adjustment value to the current machine coordinate for each axis is automatically set as the workpiece coordinate origin. Supplement) When adding the Z–axis to the automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, set the following parameter: PMC parameter keep relay K0 bit 2 = 1

238

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING
B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

13.4
CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM

A machining program is created by the following procedure:

Start

QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN Position the cursor on [PROGRAM MAKE OR EDIT].
SELECT +

Program creation screen Automatic Title input

> INPUT PROGRAM NO.
EXEC â SEARCH

– Enter a program name.

Initial setting

– Enter the initial data (workpiece material, coolant, reference coordinate system) required for machining. – Select a desired machining menu.
HOLE FACING SIDE POCKET NC CUTING /GROOV LANGUAGE

Selection of a machining menu

2+1/2 2+1/2 AUXCVX CCV ILIARY

PROGRM END

Specification of the machining data

– In response to messages displayed on the screen, (1) Specify a machining method. → Position on the Z–axis, tool (preparation menu) (2) Specify the figure data. → Positions on the X– and Y–axes (figure menu) (3) Specify the process end. Repeat these steps until all machining data is specified.

(*1) (*2)

Program end

– Select [PROGRM END]. End
2+1/2 2+1/2 AUXCVX CCV ILIARY PROGRM END

239

Process end . Contour pocket / grooving start menu Corresponding contouring menu Contour end . figure of product. *1 The machining data is specified in the following procedures.A. (3) Process end Process end .P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 First. Process end . Facing start menu Corresponding facing menu This step can be repeated. The operator repeats this process to generate a machining program. ã (1) Preparation menu (2) Figure menu Hole position This step can be repeated. Process end . Side cutting start menu Corresponding side cutting menu This step can be repeated. and other data in response to inquiries on the screen. Drilling . The menu of (1) below is automatically displayed only once immediately after the machining menu is selected. Auxiliary 240 . Process end . NC language . Pocketing start menu Corresponding pocket cutting menu This step can be repeated.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.13. then enters the type of machining. 2 +1/2 start Corresponding 2 +1/2 menu This step can be repeated. the operator selects a machining menu. Contouring start menu Corresponding contouring menu Contour end .

The data which cannot be displayed in this window (data to be determined automatically. The system checks whether the machining data consists of the above three elements and prevents the operator from creating a machining program which cannot be executed. B : Guide screen that displays the data of the C window with a drawing or tool file. The cursor is placed on the corresponding parameter in the C window.A. A B C Ten soft keys Return key Next key A : Program screen that is always displayed. [+] is indicated here. and [PROCES END]. The A window always lists the existing programs.) is displayed and specified in the B window. the data is displayed and specified in this window. *2 The screen on which the machining data is specified is basically configured as shown below.cuting conditions. [<] is indicated here. Basically.13. Return key : Displays the previous screen. Next key : Displays the next part of the currently displayed soft keys. The data in the B and C windows depend on the data input. The A. etc. When the return key can be used. When the next key can be used. and C windows show different data. [FIGURE MENU].P iM) A single machining process has the machining data of the [START MENU]. B. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C. 241 . C : Data input screen.

SELECT] key.13. The program name is registered in part program storage. the editing screen is displayed. specify a desired program name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters. the number of the program to be created is assumed to be 3000. You can also press the INPUT key on the operator’s panel to register the program. entered using the MDI keys. To abandon the registration. 242 . press the [CANCEL] key. On this screen. When a new program is to be created.A. Enter program number 3000 and press the [PROG. [PROGRAM DIR] appears. Display [QUICK C.) After entering a program number.P. the name input screen is automatically displayed in the bottom window. The explanation of edit operation is omitted here.) 1. press the [INPUT TITLE] key. (When the program is present. 2. you can also press the INPUT key on the operator’s panel to create the program. Then.A. 3.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Examples are given below: (In the following example. Position the cursor on [PROGRAM MAKE OR EDIT] and press soft key [SELECT]. SCREEN] or [QUICK SCREEN].

P iM) 4. a message relating to the entry is displayed above the soft keys. the second cursor blinks at the position corresponding to the current entry. On the guidance in window B. 243 . Being able to see both cursors enables the easy input of data.13.A. The operator usually enters necessary data. as shown below: When the cursor is positioned to an entry in window C. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C. the initial setting screen is automatically displayed in the lower window. as instructed by the message. When the [INPUT TITLE] key is pressed.

such that the workpiece may be damaged or the tool may collide with the machine and/or workpiece. The system automatically checks the input data. the program creation screen is displayed again.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C. press the soft key [INPUT END]. – When the cursor is on [Q: MATERIAL] – When the cursor is on [M: COOLANT] NOTE [COOLNT M7] means cutting air blow (option). If the system finds an invalid value among the input data. If any data is not set correctly.13. The process of initial setting is incorporated into the following screen: WARNING After completing input of the initial setting data. – When the cursor is on [W: COORDINATES] 5. After entering all desired data. ensure that all required data is set correctly.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 The displayed soft keys differ depending on the cursor position as follows. machining will be performed under abnormal cutting conditions. the cursor is placed on that data and an alarm message is displayed.A. If all the input data is correct. or even injury to the user or bystanders. possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine. 244 .

P iM) 6. Select a required detail menu from among hole machining types. [06:TAOOING] is selected. The following screen appears: 245 . As an example. Select a desired machining menu. the following screen is displayed: 7. When the soft key [HOLE] is selected. for example.A. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C.13.

press the soft key [PRE–TOOL]. T codes. On the screen. The system displays the following screen. press the soft key [TOOL INFORM]. When the system asks about the tool ID number. cutter compensation D codes. tool file.13. then enter the desired data. press the soft key [WINDOW CHANGE]. enter the ID number of the last tool (the tool to be used last in that machining. other information (pre–tool list. excluding chamfering tools). The cursor moves to the pre–tool list screen. tool names. 9.A. and tool length compensation H codes in the tool file. 246 . Place the cursor at a desired position.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 8. NOTE NOTE Never attempt to modify the tool ID numbers. If required. responding to messages and checking the guidance. Enter desired data. [LIST PRE–TOOL] is displayed on the window as shown below. To change the data of the pre–tool list or add data to it. on which the required tool ID number can be easily checked and specified. tool list) can be referenced and specified. For example.

When a tool ID number is changed at this time.P iM) 10. and the hole position menu is automatically displayed on the screen.S. 11. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C. AUTO] executes automatic cutting condition selection for the tool ID number again and displays cutting condition data. the drilling process is incorporated into the program.A. To return the cursor to [C WINDOWS].Enter a desired value for [TOOL ID NO]. To change the cutting condition data determined by automatic tool selection and automatic cutting condition selection.After checking that all data is correctly entered. Automatic tool selection and automatic cutting condition selection are executed and automatically determined cutting condition data is displayed on the window. press [WINDOW CHANGE]. When all the input data is correct. Move the cursor to a desired value and change the value.13. 247 . The system automatically checks all the input data. press the soft key [INPUT END]. press [WINDOW CHANGE] to move the cursor to [CUTTING DATA]. pressing [F.

A. (The data of the point to be omitted can also be specified. press the soft key [CHECK]. The following screen is displayed.13. for example. According to the input data.) 13. 248 . the hole position is drawn in the right window.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 12.Press the soft key [PARALLEL OGRM]. The input data can be easily checked in the window.After entering all the desired data.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C. Enter the desired data.

The original program screen is displayed again. Repeat these steps to select another machining menu and enter desired data until a desired machining program is created.P iM) 14.Check that all data is correctly input. 15. The previous [HOLE PATERN] screen appears again. To terminate drilling.To select another hole position menu. then press [INPUT END]. The [HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM] process is inserted into the program.A.13. 249 . press the soft key [PROCESS END]. follow the same steps as when the parallel diagram menu is selected. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C.

After entering the necessary data. always confirm that the machining is performed in a logical sequence.13. This completes the creation of a new machining program. WARNING No check is made to determine whether the machining sequence is satisfactory. The screen is automatically cleared and the basic menu screen appears. or even injury to the user or bystanders. therefore. or perform finishing without first roughing. or the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities.A. even if you program tapping without first preparing a hole.To terminate a program. For example.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C. 250 . the tool may collide with the workpiece. specify the position in the machine coordinate system (G53). the machine will nevertheless attempt to execute the programmed machining sequence. possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine. when using a conversational function to create a machining program. For this reason. press [PROGRAMEND] in the following soft key display: As End X Coordinate and End Y Coordinate. press the [INPUT END] key. If the machining sequence is logically incorrect.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 16.

the optimal process editing function includes a function that allows processes to be alternated automatically. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C.) (1) Optimizing the number of tool change operations Processes that use the same tool can be performed in succession to minimize the number of tool change operations.13.P iM) 13.8 drilling øM8 tapping Process (3) ø5 center drilling ø7 drilling [EXEC] 251 . For this purpose. Process (1) ø5 center drilling ø10 drilling Optimized program Automatic process alteration ø5 center drilling of ø5 center drilling of ø5 center drilling of ø10 drilling of ø6. This concept is shown below.A.8 drilling of øM8 tapping of ø7 drilling of process (1) process (2) process (3) process (1) process (2) process (2) process (3) Process (2) ø5 center drilling ø6. (This function is referred to as the optimal process editing function. thus reducing the machining time.5 MACHINING PROGRAM OPTIMIZATION A machining program created using the conversational automatic programming function can be edited to create a new machining program by automatically changing the machining sequence as described below.

therefore. or perform finishing without first roughing. no check is made to determine whether the machining sequence is satisfactory. or the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities. For example.A. the optimal process editing function includes a function that allows processes to be alternated manually. Process (1) ø5 center drilling ø10 drilling Sequence specification 1.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C. Manual process alteration [EXEC] Below is a detailed description using an example. 5. For this purpose.8 drilling of øM8 tapping of process (1) process (2) process (3) process (1) process (3) process (2) process (2) Process (2) ø5 center drilling ø6. If the machining sequence is logical incorrect. This concept is shown below. 4. 6. the machine will nevertheless attempt to execute the programmed machining sequence. For this reason. even if you program tapping without first preparing a hole. 2. 252 . when using a conversational function to create a machining program. 7. or even injury to the user or bystanders. the tool may collide with the workpiece. always confirm that the machining is performed in a logical sequence.13. possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine. Optimized program ø5 center drilling of ø5 center drilling of ø5 center drilling of ø10 drilling of ø7 drilling of ø6. thus preventing machining precision degradation due to heat distortion.8 drilling øM8 tapping Process (3) ø5 center drilling ø7 drilling 3.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (2) Optimizing the machining sequence The machining sequence of processes automatically determined by the conversational automatic programming function can be changed so that finishing is performed at the end. WARNING Even when the optimal process editing function is used.

Position the cursor on [OPTIMUM PROGRAM] and press soft key [SELECT]. 3. Then.1 Optimal Process Editing Function (Automatic Alteration) Then.5. the following screen for setting termination appears: 1. [PROGRAM DIR] appears.] screen of [QUICK] screen. Display [QUICK C.P iM) 13. the screen for entering a program number appears. 2.13. 253 .A. Select a program from the list.P.A. The following screen appears: 4. Press soft key [AUTO]. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C.

P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 5. the entire program is optimized. Enter the number of the program to create using the optimal process editing function (3101 in this case). the subprogram is not subject to sequence alteration. Selecting [ALL SELECT] specifies the entire program as the range. then press [EXEC]. For multiple ranges.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.13. The screen changes as follows: You can specify a target range for the optimum process edit function (range specification). 6. As an example. 2 An editing range cannot extend from the main program to a subprogram. NOTE 1 Only one range can be specified for each partial range setting operation.A. If a subprogram is called in a specified range. perform separate setting operations for each range. The screen does not change and the displayed soft keys change as follows: 254 . Press soft key [ALL SELECT].

2 Optimal Process Editing Algorithm Drilling Drill 1 Drill 2 Hole position A Process end Optimal process editing is shown as follows: Drilling Drill 1 Hole position A Process end Rules Drilling Drill 1 Hole position A Process end Drilling Drill 1 Hole position B Process end Drilling Drill 2 Hole position A Process end å Drilling Drill 1 Drill 3 Hole position B Process end Step I Drilling Drill 2 Hole position A Process end Drilling Drill 1 Hole position B Process end å Step II Drilling Drill 3 Hole position B Process end Drilling Drill 3 Hole position B Process end When [EXEC] is pressed. (This step is also used in manual alteration described in the next section. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C. 255 .5.P iM) 7.A. The selected range of machining processes (only the drilling processes in this example) is rearranged automatically by the system algorithm to change the machining sequence.13. 13. Press [EXEC].) Step II: Rearranges the processes of such a resolved program according to the rules shown below to create a new program. a new program is created by the following internal processing steps: Step I : Internally creates a program where all tools in the editing range are resolved on a process–by–process basis.

Therefore. when using the optimal process editing function for a program. Similarly. (3) Processes that use the same tool should be chosen in succession where possible.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (1) The execution sequence of the processes in the same machining menu must not be changed. Rule (1) must always be satisfied. the following commands must not be included in the editing range: – Rotation around the B axis – Plane selection – Coordinate system rotation – Absolute/incremental command – Workpiece coordinate system setting – Scaling – Inch/metric conversion When optimal process editing is applied to a program including any of these processes and NC statements. the user who creates the program can then apply optimal process editing to processes whose sequences may be rearranged.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C. Rules (2) Processes should be chosen in the order of machining menu creation where possible.13. be careful not to change the sequence of machining menus that cannot be reversed. NOTE 1 The optimal process editing function changes the sequence of processes by referencing only the tools used in the program. After checking for any processes whose execution timing must not be changed. be especially careful when the program includes a process or NC statement that reverses the sequential relationship. 256 . Rule (2) has higher priority than rule (3). When the optimal process editing function is used. the partial range setting capability of the optimal process editing function must be used. rules (2) and (3) may be ignored when these rules cannot be satisfied.A.

P iM) Drilling Drill 1 Drill 2 Hole position A Process end Set a partial range for this section. NOTE 2 The complete range setting can be used on programs for which the sequence of machining menus can be reversed. when a process for rotation about the B axis is included in a partial setting range). but instead outputs the alarm message NOT SUITABLE COMBINE PROGRAM.13.A. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C. 257 . Drilling Drill 1 Drill 3 Hole position B Process end Rotation around the B axis Drilling Drill 1 Drill 3 Hole position B Process end ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Set another partial range for this section. 3 When the system determines that optimization is impossible (for example. the system does not perform optimal process editing.

P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 13. 2. Select a program from the list. the screen for entering a program number appears.3 Optimal Process Editing Function (Manual Alteration) 1. Press soft key [ALL SELECT].A.P.A. Display [QUICK C.13.]screen of [QUICK]screen. 258 . Then. The following screen appears: 4.5. 3. [PROGRAM DIR] appears. Position the cursor on [OPTIMUM PROGRAM] and press soft key [SELECT].QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.

the other numbers are changed. then press [EXEC].P iM) 5. After entering the number. NOTE No number is assigned to processes for the initial setting. numbers 3 and 6 for center drills are changed to 2 and 3. The entered number appears by the number item. Enter the number of the program to be created using the optimal process editing function (3102 in this case). 6. and the following screen appears. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C. press [NUMBER]. The program is renumbered. (When a number is changed to a unique number.) As an example. other numbers are changed automatically.13. NC language menu. figure menu. At the same time. then enter a new sequence number.A. and other items that need not be rearranged. 259 . Move the cursor to the number of the item to change.

A machining program is created according to the entered sequence number. but instead outputs the alarm message UNJUST NUMBER. 260 . the system does not perform the renumbering operation. The screen remains unchanged. Upon completion of sequence number input. Press [MOVE]. press [SET END].P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 NOTE The system performs a check to prevent the execution sequence of processes in the same machining menu from being changed. but the following soft keys appear: 8.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.13.A. 7. If an invalid sequence number is entered.

and press soft key [SELECT]. Select a program from the list. Two functions are available.13. the previously displayed screen appears.1 Tool Path Drawing 1. After that. are drawn with lines in three dimensions. The machining program can be easily understood by viewing this simulation. The first screen after power–on displays a tool path drawing. A soft key can be used to switch between tool path drawing and animated simulation. machining profile. [PROGRAM DIR] appears. 2 Press [SOLID GRAPH] to display the animated simulation screen (solid).A.A. NOTE 1 Set the operation mode to MEM before starting drawing.]screen of [QUICK]screen. 261 . The following screen appears. The machining program can be checked closely using this drawing. PATH GRAPHIC(EXECUTION) Display [QUICK C.6 MACHINING PROGRAM CHECK This function is used to check a created machining program by drawing it. position the cursor on [PROGRAM CHECK].6. (2) Animated simulation (solid): A three–dimensional profile subject to machining is drawn using surfaces. (1) Tool path drawing (wire–frame): The tool path. 13. etc. tool figure. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C.P.P iM) 13.

Displays the current tool center position with a mark. before starting actual machining. automatic scaling is performed before drawing is started. automatic scaling is peformed before drawing is started. for example. If scale value setting is incomplete. 262 . Press this soft key to toggle the display of [SCALING ON] and [SCALING OFF]. Usually. Soft key SOLID GRAPH GRAPH PARAM SCALE TOOL POS.A. possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine. NOTE The soft keys [SCALING ON/OFF] and [SINGLE BLOCK] indicate drawing execution conditions.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 WARNING Even after tool path drawing has been used to ensure that the programmed tool path is satisfactory. the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine (including the jig). Pressing this key indicates [SINGLE ON] and [SINGLE OFF] alternately. or even injury to the user or bystanders. Pressing these soft keys does not start operation. the display of [SCALING ON] switches to [SCALING OFF].QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C. the [SCALING OFF] mode is set.13. f Additional information about [SCALING ON/OFF] Each time this soft key is pressed. drawing is startedusing the current scale value data. Sets and cancels single block mode. Indicates whether to use scaling before drawing. If [DRAW START] is pressed when [SCALING ON] is displayed. Starts drawing after erase and head search operation. if the actually entered data such as the tool offset is not as intended. by executing the machining program at an extremely low feedrate with no workpiece mounted in the machine. For this reason. Press to change drawing parameters. Scaling is performed according to the table below. Enlarges or reduces a part of the drawn figure. Erases all figures drawn up until this soft key is pressed. ERASE SCALING ON/OFF SINGLE ON/OFF DRAW START Meaning Switches to the animated simulation screen (solid). If [DRAW START] is pressed when [SCALING OFF] is displayed. The meanings of each soft key are indicated below. or vice versa. ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine.

A. Scaling time is shorter(*1). QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C. drawing can be started earlier as described below. continuous drawing is performed. Scaling time is longer. A slightly inaccurate scale value is used. Ordinary NC pro. 1. or vice versa. The maximum and minimum values obtained by this time are set. Scaling is performed based on the tool path. The display of [SINGLE ON] represents the single block mode.Scaling is performed based gram on the tool path. If scaling takes too long. but drawing can be performed by reducing the time for scaling. Scaling time is longer. 263 . Stop scaling by using soft key [STOP]. The tool path drawing is then displayed in the proper scale on the screen. Press [DRAW START]. 2. After the results of scaling are set in the maximum value and minimum value drawing parameters. drawing is started. After drawing is performed in the [SCALING ON] mode. scaling is performed based on the machining profile and the tool path. Scaling time is longer. 1 : The [SCALING ON] soft key is displayed. f Additional information about [SINGLE ON/OFF] Each time this soft key is pressed.P iM) When the machining profile diplay is provided by the drawing parameter setting Program created in the conversational mode Scaling is performed based on the machining profile. #7 9106 #6 PSCL #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PSCL When the previous program number differs from the current program number on the graphic screen: 0 : The [SCALING OFF] soft key is displayed. When [SINGLE OFF] is displayed. When the machining profile diplay is not provided by the drawing parameter setting Scaling is performed based on the tool path. the mode is automatically switched to the [SCALING OFF] mode. the display of [SINGLE ON] switches to [SINGLE OFF].13. *1 When bi–plane drawing is selected.

P again. STOP 1 BLOCK EXEC.13. When the [SINGLE ON] state is set during drawing. Pressing the leftmost soft key displays QUICK. operation switches to continuous drawing. When the [SINGLE OFF] state is set. By pressing [1 BLOCK EXEC. Drawing terminates when an end of program (M02 or M30) is encountered. 264 . Soft key SINGLE ON/OFF Meaning Sets the single block mode when the characters of this soft key are displayed in reverse video. the single block mode is set.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 2. block–by–block drawing can be performed. When this soft key is pressed in this state.] in this state. Terminates drawing forcibly. the characters are displayed normally. the single block mode is released. Performs drawing block–by–block in the single block mode. Start of tool path drawing Press [DRAW START] to start drawing.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.A. C.A.

13. Drawing parameters Press [GRAPH PARAM] to change the tool path drawing parameters. press [SET END].P iM) 3. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C. The following drawing parameter screen appears: After setting required parameters. 265 . The screen display returns to the original execution screen.A.

X–Y plane Y Z Y–Z plane Y Z–Y plane X X–Z plane Z Y Isometric projection drawing (XYZ) Z Z Isometric projection drawing (ZXY) Y X Bi–plane (X–Y.13. X–Z) Y X Y Z X X Z X (2) Horizontal rotation angle This parameter specifies an angle of rotation (–180 to +180 ) around the vertical axis in degrees.A.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 The meanings of each parameter are described below (1) Drawing screens Seven types of drawing screens are available for selection.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C. 266 .

a scale factor is automatically determined. Y. Y. To check a program created in conversational mode. and Z axes Minimum drawing coordinates on the X.A. specify 0. Y.13. A sequence number check is made with the main program and subprograms as well.00 can be specified. To check a program created in conversational mode.P iM) (3) Vertical rotation angle This parameter specifies a tilt angle (–180 to +180 ) with respect to the vertical axis. or maximum drawing coordinates (X. (7) End sequence number This parameter is used only when an NC program is to be checked. This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing end block with a four–digit number. the scale factor parameter and maximum value (center)/minimum value parameter are automatically determined so that these parameters need not be set. When 0 is set. (8) TOOL RADIUS COMP Specifies whether to draw a tool path with cutter compensation enabled or disabled. and K Value other than 0 Drawing center coordinates Ignored on the X.Z) of a drawing center. drawing is performed until the end of the program is reached. Drawing scale factor value Setting Addresses X.) (5) Maximum value (center)/minimum value The coordinates (X. a scale factor is automatically determined so that this parameter need not be set.) (6) Start sequence number This parameter is used only when an NC program is to be checked. (4) Scale factor A value from 0. Specify an end sequence number. and Z axes 0 Maximum drawing coordinates on the X.01 to 100.K) are set. and Z Addresses I. and Z axes (Usually. Y. When 1.0 is set. These settings depend on the value of the drawing scale factor as indicated below. drawing starts at the beginning of the program. (Usually. an actual–size drawing is generated. When 0 is set.Z)/minimum drawing coordinates (I.J.Y. A sequence number check is made with the main program and subprograms as well. specify 0.Y. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C. When 0 is set. This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing start block with a four–digit number. 267 . J.

yellow. When Yes is specified. when light blue is used. (This item is valid only when tool figure display is provided. purple.A. green. (11)Color specification Seven colors (white.13. No : Does not change the color of a tool path automatically. red.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C. For this reason. the next color is white. The tool figure cannot be drawn for a machining program which is not created in the conversational mode. and light blue) are available for selection. – Tool position : Specify the color of the mark used to indicate the current tool position. set this item to [OFF] because no machining profile can be drawn for a machining program which is not created in the conversational mode.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (9) PART FIGURE DISP A machining profile drawing program must be registered. blue. the color of the tool path changes in the order described above each time a T code is specified. – Automatic change : Specify this item when the color of the tool path is to be automatically changed by a T command. – Path : Specify the color for drawing the tool path. Yes : Changes the color of a tool path automatically. (10)TOOL FIGURE DISP Draws the tool figure with a cylinder (the height is 0 as the FANUC standard) at the start point of each block during a drawing check of the tool path of a machining program created in the conversational mode. 268 .) – TOOL POS: : Specifies the color of the mark indicating the current tool position. – TOOL FIG: : Specify the color for drawing a tool.

Generates a triplane drawing from a drawn machining profile. The following screen appears: NOTE 1 Set the operation mode to MEM before starting drawing. Soft key PATH GRAPH GRAPH PARAM ROTATION 3–PLAN PLANE FIGURE SECT. Animated simulation execution screen Press [SOLID GRAPH].6. specify the drawing parameters for blank dimensions. Starts drawing after drawing a blank and performing the head search operation.A. color. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C. press [PATH GRAPH]. 4 The current machine coordinates are used for drawing. A soft key can be used to switch between tool path drawing and animated simulation. 269 . Displays a sectional view of the drawn machining profile. Press to change drawing parameters.P iM) 13. Rotates a generated drawing. 3 To draw a blank. (Commands associated with the workpiece coordinate systems are ignored.) The meanings of each soft key are indicated below.2 Animated Simulation 1. Displays a top view of the drawn machining profile.13. PLANE DRAW START Meaning Switches to the tool path drawing screen (wire–frame). and so forth appropriately. 2 To switch to tool path drawing (wire–frame).

Soft key STOP Meaning Terminates drawing forcibly. or even injury to the user or bystanders. When drawing is terminated forcibly using this soft key. if the actually entered data such as the tool offset is not as intended. for example. C. it may take a short time before drawing terminates completely.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C. 270 .A. 2. ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine. before starting actual machining.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 WARNING Even after animated simulation has been used to ensure that the programmed machining operation is satisfactory.P again.13. Drawing terminates when an end of program (M02 or M30) is encountered. For this reason. Execution of drawing Press [DRAW START] to execute animated simulation. During execution.A. Pressing the leftmost soft key displays QUICK. by executing the machining program at an extremely low feedrate with no workpiece mounted in the machine. only soft key [STOP] can be used. possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine. the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine (including the jig).

A. The screen display returns to the original execution screen. When the blank is a column or cylinder.Y. Each parameter has the meaning described below. press [SET END]. (1) Blank figures Up to two types of blank figures can be set: – Rectangular parallelepiped – Column/cylinder (parallel to the Z axis) (2) Blank origin (X.The following drawing parameter screen appears: After setting required parameters. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C. Animated simulation drawing parameters Press [GRAPH PARAM] to change the animated simulation drawing parameters.13. its reference position is the center of the base. its reference position is the corner facing the negative direction along each axis.Z) This parameter sets the coordinates (X.Y.Z) of the reference position of a blank in the workpiece coordinate system.P iM) 3. When the blank is a rectangular parallelepiped. 271 .

Note that this parameter applies only when the tool figure is a cylinder.Z) X I Column/cylinder (parallel to the Z axis) Z J I Y K X (X. this parameter is determined automatically and need not be set for a machining program created in the conversational mode.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (3) Blank dimensions (I. Usually.Z) (4) Tool radius This parameter sets the tool radius.A.Y.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.K) This parameter sets the dimensions of a blank.13.Y. Rectangular parallelepiped Z Y J K (X. this parameter is determined automatically and need not be set for a machining program created in the conversational mode. (5) Tool tip distance This parameter sets the distance (usually 0) between the programmed point and the tool tip. Usually.J. R Programmed point K Tool tip 272 .

(8) Animated simulation speed This parameter sets the interval (0 to 255) used in animated simulation drawing. a drawing is generated for each block. A new drawing is displayed each time the machining of a specified number of blocks has been completed. A sequence number check is made with the main program and subprograms as well. When 0 is set. When 0 is set. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C. A sequence number check is made with the main program and subprograms as well.13. drawing is performed until the end of the program is reached. (9) Color specification Seven colors are available for drawing. Color White Red Green Yellow Blue Purple Light blue 273 . drawing starts at the beginning of the program. (7) End sequence number This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing end block. When 0 is specified.A.P iM) (6) Start sequence number This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing start block.

Such a program can also be converted to an NC statement program for execution or modification. Here. Position the cursor on CONVERT NC FORMAT and press soft key SELECT. 1. C.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C. and data setting using the MDI cannot be performed. Then. manual movement.13. The following screen appears: 4. memory protection must be released. PROGRAM DIR. – [PUNCH] : Outputs the program created by conversion to an external storage unit via the reader/punch interface. Press one of the soft keys.A. 3. Specify the destination to which NC statements after conversion are to be output.A. This function is optional.7.P of QUICK screen. [MEMORY] is pressed as an example.7 NC STATEMENT OUTPUT FUNCTION 13. 2. In this case. NOTE While this type of conversion is in progress. appears. Display QUICK.1 NC Statement Output Function A machining program created in the conversational mode can be directly executed without modification. – [MEMORY] : Stores the program created by conversion in an NC part program storage area. other operations such as background editing. the displayed soft keys change as follows: 274 . An NC statement program created by such conversion can be stored in an NC part program storage area or can be punched out on an external storage unit via the reader/punch interface. Select a program from the list.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 13.

To perform conversion again. then press SELECT. the NC format program converted until that time has already been stored in the part program storage area or external storage device.13. correct the invalid part in the machining program. delete the partially converted NC format program. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C. Change the operation mode to the MEM mode and enter a new program number after conversion.) The moment tool path drawing starts. Then. The converted program is stored in the part program storage area or output to an external storage device.P iM) 5. then perform the conversion start operation from the beginning. START] on this screen executes NC statement output and tool path drawing. NOTE If an alarm occurs during conversion. the tool path is drawn. 275 . (Always after scaling is executed. the following [GRAPHIC SCREEN] appears: Pressing [CONV. the selected machining program is converted to the NC format program in block units as an NC operation command is executed.A.

(Selecting [ALL DATA] can output all conversational data at a time.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.13.A. Before using this function. The displayed soft keys change as follows: Press the soft key corresponding to data to be output. position the cursor on C. As an example. connect an external storage device and set necessary parameters including a parameter for device selection.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 13. Then. use the screen of [3:DATA I/O].) On DATA I/O of QUICK screen. [ALL DATA] is pressed.A. (For setting. press soft key [DATA I/O].P. DATA and press soft key SELECT.8 DATA I/O Various types of conversational data can be input and output using an external storage device (such as a Handy File and memory card). The following screen appears: To input or output conversational data. the following screen appears: (1) To output conversational data to an external device Press soft key [PUNCH].) 276 .

enter the number of a file on a data medium (such as a floppy disk). Press [READ EXEC]. NOTE • When the input/output device setting (parameter 102. you need not enter a file number. (2) To read conversational data from an external device Press soft key [READ].) Then.P iM) Press [PUNCH EXEC]. The specified data is output. Also. • Conversational data output with the old type ROBODRILL cannot be read. The specified data is read. 112. output conversational data cannot be read with the old type ROBODRILL. 277 . QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C. (Pressing [ALL DATA] can input all conversational data at a time.A. [ALL DATA] is pressed. As an example. The displayed soft keys change as follows: Press the soft key corresponding to data to be read.13. 122. or 132) is RS–232C. Press [READ EXEC] with entering no data.

00 0.75 0.A.65 0.25 0.35 0.75 0. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 30 60 100 107 (5) BORE WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGH–SPD [m/min] [m/min] 50 27 43 26 36 20 10 85 30 17 50 27 43 26 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0.75 0.1 Cutting Condition File The tables below contain factory–set values.9.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 13.00 0.75 0.9 STANDARD DATA 13. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 31 75 100 140 (2) DRILL WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGH–SPD [m/min] [m/min] 35 20 30 15 40 25 100 50 0 10 35 20 30 15 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0.80 1.00 NOMINAL DIA.65 0.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.75 0.75 0.13.75 0.60 0.50 0.60 0.25 0. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 100 100 100 100 (6) BACK BORE WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGH–SPD [m/min] [m/min] 50 27 43 26 36 20 10 85 30 17 50 27 43 26 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0. (1) CENTER DRILL WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGH–SPD [m/min] [m/min] 0 20 0 15 0 25 0 30 0 8 0 20 0 15 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0.75 0.75 0. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 100 100 100 100 278 .65 0.00 1.00 0.00 NOMINAL DIA.00 NOMINAL DIA.75 0.00 NOMINAL DIA.75 1.75 0.75 0.00 NOMINAL DIA. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 31 75 100 140 (3) TAP WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGH–SPD [m/min] [m/min] 30 15 25 13 20 15 50 40 0 8 30 15 25 13 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] (4) REAMER WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGH–SPD [m/min] [m/min] 12 10 10 8 12 11 25 20 0 0 12 10 10 8 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0.75 1.75 0.75 0.75 0.50 0.65 0.75 0.75 0.

400 2.000 HIGH–SPD 0.13. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 60 75 90 100 (8) FACE MILL WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGH–SPD [m/min] [m/min] 120 100 120 100 100 170 192 192 60 40 120 100 120 100 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0.400 19 9. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 11 1. NOM–DIA.800 HIGH–SPD 0.000 95.000 54.000 0.200 15 4.500 279 .800 4.15 0.000 42.35 0.000 2.18 0.000 0. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP.000 0.000 111.600 23 13.000 3.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.20 0.000 4.000 0.200 25 15. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C.500 1.50 0.000 2.20 0.000 103.000 1.800 TOOL No.900 14 3.21 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 1.900 24 14.000 HIGH–SPD 0.P iM) (7) END MILL WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGH–SPD [m/min] [m/min] 40 35 30 25 40 40 130 130 0 18 40 35 30 25 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0.2 Tool File (1) CENTER DRILL TOOL No.000 4 2.00 0.A.000 1.000 29.18 0. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 60 100 100 100 (9) CHAMFER WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGH–SPD [m/min] [m/min] 35 20 30 15 40 25 100 30 14 0 35 20 30 15 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0.9.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.500 2 1. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 6 4.000 0.000 73.300 22 12. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP.000 9.000 4. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 21 11.000 HIGH–SPD 0.300 HIGH–SPD 0.15 0.75 0.75 0. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 31 75 100 140 13.000 62.000 122.150 HIGH–SPD 0. NOM–DIA.05 0.000 114.000 0.000 0.75 0.000 1.90 1.000 81.600 13 3.000 9 0.400 3 2.000 6.000 70. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 1 1.800 HIGH–SPD 0. NOM–DIA.10 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 125.000 2.40 0.300 12 2.000 0. NOM–DIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP.800 5 3.700 20 10.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 (2) DRILL TOOL No.000 2.000 3.200 9.800 3.000 0.000 0.000 TOOL No.000 7 6.800 17 7.000 3.000 HIGH–SPD 0.500 HIGH–SPD 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 12.000 4.15 0.500 TOOL No.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 3.000 89.100 18 8.200 8 0.00 NOMINAL DIA.000 3.000 3.00 NOMINAL DIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP.75 0.15 0.000 6.15 0.000 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.00 NOMINAL DIA.600 HIGH–SPD 0.000 3.000 HIGH–SPD 0. NOM–DIA MATERIAL LENGTH COMP.000 10 0. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 16 6.000 HIGH–SPD 0.

000 0.000 74 8.500 HIGH–SPD 0. NOM–DIA.000 0.000 130.000 1.000 73 6.000 0.250 63 16.040 TOOL No.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP.000 10.400 59 6.000 0.630 TOOL No.750 37 3.000 1.000 0.700 13. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 71 2.000 38.000 HIGH–SPD 0.100 28 18.750 29.000 122.000 CARBIDE 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2.000 5.600 HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 16.000 (3) TAP TOOL No. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 41 8.000 0.000 2.000 HIGH–SPD 0.500 62 12.350 8.000 HIGH–SPD 0.500 HIGH–SPD 0.000 3.500 37.000 80 0.000 85 0.000 0.000 33.000 CARBIDE 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0. PITCH LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 56 3.000 35.600 HIGH–SPD 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 29.000 55 2.000 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 2.000 0.000 0. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 31 0.000 5.000 2.000 3.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 11.000 0.000 0. PITCH LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 51 1.000 6.100 58 5.550 42 10.500 84 20.500 2.000 0. NOM–DIA.000 10. NOM–DIA.240 32 0.000 145.000 HIGH–SPD 0.990 38 4.000 CARBIDE 0.000 26.000 HIGH–SPD 0.750 54 2.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 TOOL No.000 62.13. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP.000 0.000 0.000 135.250 5.000 0.300 HIGH–SPD 0.000 CARBIDE 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.800 27 17.000 0.000 150.000 20.000 0.000 0.260 45 0.000 12.500 HIGH–SPD 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.250 52 1.950 HIGH–SPD 0. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP.500 1.000 0.200 HIGH–SPD 0.380 34 1. PITCH LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 61 10.000 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 0.500 40 6.000 CARBIDE 0.450 9.000 0.000 1. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP.500 HIGH–SPD 0.000 4.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 60 8. NOM–DIA.000 1.250 53 1.250 5.000 1.200 HIGH–SPD 0.000 5.800 HIGH–SPD 0.000 2.000 CARBIDE 0.000 45.000 77 10. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP.000 0. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP.A.000 73.000 19. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP.000 TOOL No.000 280 .300 HIGH–SPD 0.800 16.500 57 4.500 24.260 39 5.000 0.000 4.000 1.000 0. NOM–DIA.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 2.500 65 0.000 (4) REAMER TOOL No.000 CARBIDE 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 79 20.000 54.100 HIGH–SPD 0. NOM–DIA.000 2.000 87.000 0. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 36 2.000 2.000 5.700 30 20.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 0. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 81 5.480 35 2.000 0.090 43 14.250 HIGH–SPD 0.750 HIGH–SPD 0.000 11.000 19. NOM–DIA.000 83 15.000 32.000 CARBIDE 0.000 78 15.000 0.000 1. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP.000 0.000 5.000 0. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 26 16. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP.500 11.000 7. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP.000 0.000 0.250 TOOL No.000 72 4.000 3.000 0.750 TOOL No.000 4.000 5.000 64 20.000 75 10.500 1.400 8.000 (5) BORE TOOL No.000 0.290 33 1.000 98.000 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 140.000 0.000 1.210 44 17. NOM–DIA. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 76 5.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0. NOM–DIA.250 22.000 9.400 29 19.000 HIGH–SPD 0. NOM–DIA.000 140.000 (6) BACK BORE TOOL No.500 82 10.

000 88 3.000 2 19. MATERIAL RADIUS COMP.000 0.000 2 13.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0. No. OF TOOTH LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 111 7.000 90 4.000 0.000 102 20.000 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 TOOL No.000 110 0.000 0 0.000 0.000 90.000 HIGH–SPD 0.750 112 15.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 281 .000 0.000 0.000 89 3. MATERIAL RADIUS COMP.000 0. LENGTH COMP.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 1 0.000 94 8. NOM–DIA.000 0.800 108 80.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 98 12.000 2 22.000 CARBIDE 0. LENGTH COMP. MATERIAL RADIUS COMP.000 0.000 1.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 2 4.000 0.000 87 2.000 HIGH–SPD 0. NOM–DIA.000 2 8.000 0.000 0.000 0. EDGE ANGLE No.000 HIGH–SPD 0. No. LENGTH COMP.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 2 7.000 5 9.000 3.000 0.000 0. No.000 0. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C.000 (9) CHAMFER TOOL No.000 0.000 0.000 0 0. No. LENGTH COMP.000 0.000 2 5.000 2 11.000 0.000 TOOL No.000 0 0.P iM) (7) END MILL TOOL No.000 2.000 2 6.000 CARBIDE 0. OF TOOTH LENGTH OF CUT CORNER–R 106 50.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 1. OF TOOTH LENGTH OF CUT CORNER–R 91 5.000 0.000 0.000 2 13.000 2 11.800 107 63.000 2 16.000 0.000 6.000 2 8.000 0.000 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 2 19.000 0.000 0.000 1 0.000 0. MATERIAL RADIUS COMP.000 104 0.000 0.000 100 16.000 0.000 (8) FACE MILL TOOL No.000 0. S–DIA.000 90.000 0 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 103 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 97 11.000 92 6.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 0. NOM–DIA.000 0.000 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 6 12.000 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0. LENGTH COMP.A.000 113 25.000 95 9.000 0. No.000 115 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 TOOL No.000 2 10.000 99 14. OF TOOTH LENGTH OF CUT CORNER–R 96 10.800 109 0. NOM–DIA. NOM–DIA.000 CARBIDE 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.500 90.000 0.000 114 0.000 0. OF TOOTH LENGTH OF CUT CORNER–R 86 2.000 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.000 6 12. MATERIAL RADIUS COMP. OF TOOTH LENGTH OF CUT CORNER–R 101 18.13.000 0. NOM–DIA.000 0.000 105 0.000 0 0.000 0 0. LENGTH COMP.000 93 7.000 1 0.500 HIGH–SPD 0.000 0. MATERIAL RADIUS COMP.000 0.000 HIGH–SPD 0.500 HIGH–SPD 0.000 2 16.000 2 5.

500 5 0 0 0 0 0 NAME 8 N–DIA.13.000 52 0 0.500 6. 0 10.000 10. 0 63 0 43 7 0 0 0 0 0 NAME 13 N–DIA. 0 16.500 2. 0 8.000 TAP DRILL C–DRILL TAP DRILL C–DRILL PAGE: 3/27 7 AUX TOOL FIN TOOL PRETOOL1 PRETOOL2 PRETOOL3 PRETOOL4 PRETOOL5 PRETOOL6 PRETOOL7 PRETOOL8 No. 6. 0 51 0 31 1 0 0 0 0 0 NAME TAP DRILL C–DRILL N–DIA.150 6 0 0 0 0 0 NAME 9 N–DIA.300 TAP DRILL C–DRILL PAGE: 5/27 AUX TOOL FIN TOOL PRETOOL1 PRETOOL2 PRETOOL3 PRETOOL4 PRETOOL5 PRETOOL6 PRETOOL7 PRETOOL8 No.200 39 3.800 41 4. No.000 TAP DRILL C–DRILL TAP DRILL C–DRILL PAGE: 4/27 AUX TOOL FIN TOOL PRETOOL1 PRETOOL2 PRETOOL3 PRETOOL4 PRETOOL5 PRETOOL6 PRETOOL7 PRETOOL8 No. 0 57 0 37 4 0 0 0 0 0 NAME TAP DRILL C–DRILL N–DIA.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C. 0 2. 0 54 0 34 1 0 0 0 0 0 NAME TAP DRILL C–DRILL N–DIA. 1. No.300 No. TAP DRILL C–DRILL No. TAP DRILL C–DRILL No.000 55 0 1. 0 1.000 44 6.000 5.000 62 0 8.600 35 1. 0 4. NAME 15 N–DIA.A.000 4.300 38 2.000 59 0 4.9.300 7 0 0 0 0 0 NAME 14 N–DIA.000 64 0 14.200 53 0 0.P iM) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 13. 0 5.500 56 0 2. 3. No.000 2 0 0 0 0 0 NAME 5 N–DIA.000 61 0 6.500 42 6.000 1 0 0 0 0 0 NAME TAP DRILL C–DRILL PAGE: 1/27 3 N–DIA. 0 1.950 33 1.750 32 1.000 17.250 1.300 7 0 0 0 0 0 NAME 12 N–DIA.600 3 0 0 0 0 0 NAME 6 N–DIA.300 6.000 PAGE: 2/27 4 AUX TOOL FIN TOOL PRETOOL1 PRETOOL2 PRETOOL3 PRETOOL4 PRETOOL5 PRETOOL6 PRETOOL7 PRETOOL8 No. 20. TAP DRILL C–DRILL 282 . No. 0 60 0 40 6 0 0 0 0 0 NAME 10 N–DIA.000 7 0 0 0 0 0 NAME 11 N–DIA. TAP DRILL C–DRILL No. No.3 Pre–Tool File 1 AUX TOOL FIN TOOL PRETOOL1 PRETOOL2 PRETOOL3 PRETOOL4 PRETOOL5 PRETOOL6 PRETOOL7 PRETOOL8 No.000 58 0 3. No.100 36 1. 12.000 2. 0 2.600 1.000 1 0 0 0 0 0 NAME TAP DRILL C–DRILL 2 N–DIA.

000 6.000 6.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 2.000 2.000 70.000 1.000 1.000 99999. #6117 #6118 #6119 #6120 #6121 #6122 #6123 #6124 #6125 #6126 #6127 #6128 #6129 #6130 #6131 #6132 DATA 1.000 2. #6197 #6198 #6199 #6200 DATA 99998.9.4 Default File DEFAULT FILE : 1 NO #6101 #6102 #6103 #6104 #6105 #6106 #6107 #6108 #6109 #6110 #6111 #6112 #6113 #6114 #6115 #6116 DATA 2.000 1. position the cursor on C.000 5.A.000 5.000 2.000 1.000 1. 283 .000 100.000 1.000 4.000 NOTE To display DEFAULT FILE SETTING screen.000 2.000 0.000 2.P DATA and press soft key SELECT on 12: DATA I/O of QUICK screen.A.000 7.000 2.000 0.000 6.000 1.000 DEFAULT FILE : 2 NO #6165 #6166 #6167 #6168 #6169 #6170 #6171 #6172 #6173 #6174 #6175 #6176 #6177 #6178 #6179 #6180 DATA NO. then press soft key DEFAULT FILE.000 0.000 0.000 4.000 NO.000 1.000 1.000 2. #6133 #6134 #6135 #6136 #6137 #6138 #6139 #6140 #6141 #6142 #6143 #6144 #6145 #6146 #6147 #6148 DATA NO.000 NO.000 0.000 1.000 2.000 1. #6181 #6182 #6183 #6184 #6185 #6186 #6187 #6188 #6189 #6190 #6191 #6192 #6193 #6194 #6195 #6196 DATA NO.P iM) 13.000 0.000 3. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS (SUPER C.000 2.000 0.000 3. #6149 #6150 #6151 #6152 #6153 #6154 #6155 #6156 #6157 #6158 #6159 #6160 #6161 #6162 #6163 #6164 DATA 3.000 8.000 3.000 5.000 7.000 0.13.000 1.000 90.000 0.

14. AI TOOL MONITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 14 AI TOOL MONITOR 284 .

and stops the machine. enables tool exchange. (4) The current mode is cutting feed mode. the AI TOOL MONITOR function decelerates the tool. issues alarms on any abnormal drilling load.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 14. AI TOOL MONITOR 14. (1) The spindle is rotating.1 OVERVIEW The AI TOOL MONITOR function monitors the load on a spindle during hole machining. If an alarm condition is detected. (3) Tapping has not be specified. The AI TOOL MONITOR function is enabled when the following conditions are satisfied. If breakage is detected. Specify tool if tool exchange is to be performed when abnormal condition is detected 285 . (2) The Z–axis is lowering. and detects breakage. it stops the machine. The execution flow of the AI TOOL MONITOR is shown below: [TOOL FILE] screen Specify tool to be used [TOOL LIFE/SPINDLE LOAD] screen Set nominal diameter for file number to be used Tool data is created by trial machining Detect spindle load torque from trial machining Automatic computation Direct setting Calculate warning and breakage levels Register warning and breakage levels [TOOL LIFE] screen Specify operation to be performed if specified warning or breakage level is detected [TOOL LIFE/TOOL GROUP] screen Production machining is started.

when the next tool change command is specified. 3 OPERATION WHEN WARNING LOAD IS REACHED DOWN+CHNG : Tool movement is decelerated. MCHN STOP : Machining is stopped. OFF : The AI tool monitor function is disabled. ON : The AI tool monitor function is enabled according to the setting of 2 through 5. and the tool is moved along the Z–axis to the machine zero point. 286 . use [13:TOOL LIFE]Screen of [QUICK]Screen.14. To set these data items. some data items must be set. the tool is changed to a reserved tool registered in the same group. TOOL CHNG : Machining is continued. (5) (2) (3) (4) (1) (6) Item 1 AI TOOL MONITOR (7) (8) (9) Contents Specify whether to use the AI tool monitor function. Pressing the FILE key causes a file number to be displayed on the screen. 2 FILE No. AI TOOL MONITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 14. SETTING Set a reference load data file number for each tool. OFF : Machining is continued as is. Machining is continued. Moreover. Select the machine operation to be performed when spindle load w warning–level load. This section outlines [TOOL LIFE]. FEED DOWN : Tool movement is decelerated to reduce the load on the tool. and an alarm is displayed. the tool is changed to a reserved tool registered in the same group.2 TOOL LIFE SCREEN To use the AI tool monitor function. spindle rotation and coolant output are stopped. when the next tool change command is specified.

7 REFERENCE LOAD CALCULATION AND REGISTRATION INTO FILE Switching between the directory display of spindle load level files or monitor information display This soft key switches the display in the right–hand part of the screen ((5)) between the directory display of spindle load level files or monitor information. spindle rotation and coolant output are stopped. The warning level and damage level are calculated using the detected value and nominal diameter set for the file number. When the [SPNDL LOAD] soft key is pressed. OFF : Machining is continued as is. currently being displayed about the tools in a tool group. 9 287 . press soft key [ENTRY]. Displays monitor information such as load information related to the currently used tool and tool group information or directory of spindle load level files. When monitor information is displayed. To set the calculated values in the file. the following windows are displayed: 5 Monitor display or directory display of spindle load level files REFERENCE LOAD CALCULATION AND REGISTRATION INTO FILE 6 Use the page and cursor keys to move the cursor to an item for the target file number and press soft key [CALC. When the directory of spindle load level files is displayed. pressing soft key [MONITER] switches the display to monitor information. When the [TOOL GROUP] soft key is pressed.]. 8 CLEAR TOOL INFORMATION TOOL GROUP SETTING Information (such as use status and lifetime). pressing the page key changes the displayed file numbers. pressing soft key [FILE] switches the display to the directory of spindle load level files. When the directory of spindle load level files is displayed. pressing the page key changes the displayed tool group. Moreover. is cleared. You can also directly enter a value for the item at the cursor. When monitor information is displayed. the window shown below is displayed. and an alarm is displayed. and the tool is moved along the Z–axis to the machine zero point.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 14. AI TOOL MONITOR Item 4 OPERATION WHEN BREAKAGE LOAD IS REACHED (AI tool monitor function) Contents Select a machine operation to be performed when spindle load w breakage–level load. MCHN STOP : Machining is stopped.

“WARNING” : tool whose spindle load value detected by tool monitor function was beyond the warning value. 14 T–CODE H–CODE D–CODE Set the number (T code) of each tool that belongs to the group. or “WARNING”. Enter 0 for each item that is not to be used. the tool life notice signal is output. (Note) “USING” “LIFE” : tool which is on use in the group. You can also press soft key [USED COUNT] [USED TIME] to change the use count (or time). and the tool length compensation number (H code) and cutter compensation number (D code) of the tool as required. The present USED COUNT or TIME is displayed graphically. “LIFE”. 11 LIFE TOOL LIFE LIMIT (BY CYCLE QUANTITY OR TIME) TO TRIGGER AN EXPIRATION ADVANCE NOTICE 12 USED COUNT or TIME (16) Contents GROUP No. 13 TOOL INFORMATION The state of the tool is displayed in TOOL INFORMATION as “USING”. When the use count (or time) of the last tool is greater than or equal to the value obtained by life– count (or life–time) – life–notice–count (or life–notice–time).14. : tool which arrived at the life. 288 . is changed from 1 to 16 by pressing PAGE KEY. Also set the output start timing of the tool life notice signal. Specify the value of tool life of each group. AI TOOL MONITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) Item 10 GROUP No.

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 14. Pressing this soft key deletes all registered tool group data. It is possible to strike off TOOL INFORMATION in the group. AI TOOL MONITOR Item 15 CHANGE OF JUDGEMENT OF TOOL LIFE 16 CLEARANCE OF TOOL INFORMATION Contents All data on TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT are cleared by selecting [COUNT] or [TIME] . 289 .

For the detected spindle load value (%).14. This detected value is used as the basic value for automatically calculating the warning level and damage level.] without positioning the cursor on the file number used for test cutting does not calculate correct data. In the right–hand part of the window. the automatically calculated warning level value and damage level value are displayed.) (6) Calculate the warning level and damage level. (When the program performs continuous machining. (3) Press soft key [SPNDL LOAD].]. Use the page and cursor keys to position the cursor on the file number set for the tool with which test cutting was performed. NOTE Pressing [CALC. At this point. (4) Set a tool nominal diameter for each file number set in step (2). 290 . [SPINDLE LOAD FILE] appears. [TOOL MONITOR] should be set to OFF. (2) Display [TOOL LIFE]Screen and assign the file number of a spindle load level file to each tool to be used.3 SETTING DATA (1) Mount a tool to be used on the cartridge. the maximum torque (%) during test cutting is displayed at termination of hole machining. and press soft key [CALC. AI TOOL MONITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 14. perform single operation. (5) Perform test cutting according to the actual cutting conditions and check the load put by test cutting.

move the cursor to [WARNING] or [BREAKAGE] and select operation by pressing the corresponding soft key. On [TOOL FILE]. After automatic return. (8) After setting data for all file numbers to be used. Operation to be performed when the warning load is detected OFF : Continues machining even when the warning level is exceeded. MCHN STOP : Stops feeding the tool along the Z–axis when the warning level is detected. (2) Feeding the tool along the axis stops. press soft key [END]. set operation to be performed when the warning load is detected and that to be performed when the damage load is detected. and replaces the tool with the next one registered to the same group when the next tool change command is issued.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 14. The automatically calculated values are registered. see the following.) TOOL CHNG : Continues machining when the warning level isreached. performs spindle or coolant unit stop processing and displays an alarm. MCHN STOP : Stops feeding the tool along the Z–axis when the damage level is detected. Operation to be performed when the damage load is detected. OFF : Continues machining even when the damage level is exceeded. performs spindle or coolant unit stop processing and displays an alarm. You can also change the setting for the item at the cursor manually. DOWN)CHANGE : Reduces the feedrate when the warning level is reached. (Reduces the feedrate to up to 60%. [SPINDLE LOAD FILE] is closed. (3) The Z–axis automatically returns to the reference position (25% of rapid traverse override) (4) The spindle or coolant unit stops. AI TOOL MONITOR (7) Register the warning level and damage level. Press soft key [ENTRY]. The Z–axis automatically returns to the reference position. The Z–axis automatically returns to the reference position. Operation is performed for machine stop as follows: (1) Damage to a tool is detected. (9) For each tool to be used. For details of operation to be performed for machine stop. After automatic return. FEED DOWN : Reduces the feedrate to decrease the load on the tool and continues machining when the warning level is reached. 291 . and replaces the tool with the next one registered to the same group when the next tool change command is issued.

14. 292 . On [TOOL FILE] Screen. The following message is displayed during reference position return of the Z–axis: “2013 EXECUTING TOOL ESCAPE” The following alarm is displayed when damage to a used tool is detected: “1010 TOOL BREAKAGE WAS DETECTED” (10)Enable the AI tool monitor function (set it to ON). move the cursor to [TOOL MONITOR] and select [ON] by pressing the corresponding soft key. AI TOOL MONITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (5) An alarm is displayed.

14.1 Setting a Tool Group (1) On [TOOL FILE] Screen. [TOOL GROUP SETTING] appears. For other items.) (4) Set tool length compensation codes (H codes). a tool group must be set. set the correct tool life time. (2) Set a desired life value for the tool life item. In this case. press soft key [TOOL GROUP]. (5) Press soft key [END] to terminate tool group setting. set the same values as when each tool is replaced using the AI tool monitor function.4 TOOL GROUP CREATION AND AUTOMATIC TOOL EXCHANGE If the spindle load reaches the warning level. a used tool can be replaced with a spare one when the next tool change command is issued. the tool is replaced even when the spindle load does not exceed the warning level.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 14. 293 . set a sufficiently large value as the life value. When you want to use the AI tool monitor function only for replacing tools.4. NOTE You can also manage the life of each tool and replace the tool using the tool use count and time without using the AI tool monitor function. 1. AI TOOL MONITOR 14. To replace the tool. (Always set numbers in fields. (3) Set the number (T code) of each tool to be used. When the tool use count or time exceeds this life value. sequentially from No.

When a tool is exchanged. Example) M06 T101 T101 ⇐ T102 ⇐ T103 ⇐ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Tool group 1 Tool group 2 Tool group 3 (2) Specify the H–code using the H99 command.2 Program Creation To use a tool group.4. the H99 command performs compensation using a tool length compensation code in the tool group window. AI TOOL MONITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 14. (1) Specify the T–code using a 3–digit number (Tfff) corresponding to the tool group. Example) M06 T101 Tool life management screen T101 : Group 1 Specify group 1 as follows: T1 ⇒ T2 ⇒ T3 (H62) (H63) (H64) G43 Z30.3 Registering a Tool Length Compensation Value Set a compensation value for each specified tool length compensation code.4. 294 .14. change the T–code and H–code values as described below. H99 The following compensation values are used: H62 when T1 is used H63 when T2 is used H64 when T3 is used 14.

5 CONFIRMING THE CURRENT STATUS AND CLEARING (1) Confirming the current status Display [TOOL FILE] Screen. Monitor information is displayed. or [WARNING] is displayed according to the use status of the tool. 1 When a tool breakage is detected If operation to be performed when the damage load is detected is set to [MCHN STOP]. [LIFE]. [LIFE] : The life count (or time) of the tool is reached. [USING]. AI TOOL MONITOR 14. the following alarm is displayed immediately: “1011 ALL TOOLS IN SAME GROUP ARE USED. When monitor information is not displayed in the right–hand part of the screen. the machine is stopped on the spot and the following alarm is displayed: “1010 TOOL BREAKAGE WAS DETECTED. [WARNING] : The AI tool monitor function detected the spindle load for the tool exceeding the warning level. Tool group information Monitor information For each tool in the tool group displayed in monitor information. the following alarm is displayed at termination of the program.” 2 When all tools in a group were used up When operation to be performed when the warning load is detected is set to [TOOL CHNG] or [DOWN)CHANGE] and the load exceeds the warning level for the last tool in a tool group. Pressing the page key changes the tool group number displayed in monitor information. press soft key [MONITOR].B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 14. When operation to be performed when the damage load is detected is set to [MCHN STOP] and the load exceeds the damage level for the last tool. (2) Examples of alarm displays Alarms are displayed under the following conditions.” 295 . [USING] : The tool is used in the group.

(3) Clearing When the load reaches the warning or damage level for all tools in a tool group or the life count or time for each of the tools is reached. Because the M99 is not assumed to be the last command of a program.14. Otherwise. select a tool group for which information is to be cleared using the page key and press soft keys [CLR TLINFO. the alarm messages explained above will not be displayed. clear tool information. the above two alarms are displayed simultaneously. no alarm message will be displayed. M43 is a tool status read command. 296 . NOTE If M99 is specified at the end of a program. On [TOOL FILE] Screen. AI TOOL MONITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 NOTE Set TOOL CHNG or DOWN+CHNG for the last tool in a tool group. In this case. the tools must be replaced with new ones and tool life management must be performed from the beginning.] and [EXEC]. or if the program is large. It can read the status of tools and cause alarm messages to be displayed (if any). 3 When operation to be performed when the damage load is detected is set to [MCHN STOP] and damage to the last tool is detected. The currently displayed tool group information is cleared. Specify M43 at any location separately from any other command.

G28X0Y0 . AI TOOL MONITOR 14.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 14. M08 . G90G43G00Z30. M03S600 . “TOOLMN STP” is M41 (Enable AI displayed in the lower section of the QUICK TOOL MONITOR) screen. G91G28Z0M05 . If the setting for operations to be performed on warning and breakage levels has not been specified on the TOOL LIFE screen. G80M09 . F150K0 . these operations will not be per– AI TOOL MONITOR formed even after M41 is specified. In this case. ä When the power is switched on. 297 . M41 : Enables AI TOOL MONITOR. Y20. the AI TOOL MONITOR function is disabled and remains AI TOOL MONITOR so until M41 (enable AI TOOL MONITOR) is disabled. 01200 . G81Z–20. the AI TOOL MONITOR function is enabled. the AI tool monitor function does not operate even when M41 is issued. If the is enabled. M41 . G91G28Z0 . If [TOOL MONITOR] is set to OFF. G28X0Y0 . M06T101 . X80 . X40. M40 . is executed. NOTE This function is available when the AI tool monitor function is enabled ([TOOL MONITOR] is set to ON) on [TOOL FILE]Screen. X85 .6 SUPPLEMENT TO PROGRAM COMMANDS Power ON (1) Using program commands to specify whether to enable or disable the AI tool monitor function M40 : Disables AI TOOL MONITOR. X90 . X100 . H99 . AI TOOL MONITOR is enabled. “TOOLMN STP” will not be displayed. . ä ä When M40 (disable AI TOOL MONITOR) is executed. G49M30 . G40G49G80G59 . setting for operations to be performed on warning or breakage level is turned off in M41 (enable AI TOOL MONITOR).

the commands listed above are provided so as to perform control different from a G81 or G82 canned cycle. . X Y . When using these M commands : M32 G83 M33 M33 . so that the program starts with M32. For a tool number (T): : • File number (U) å 1 to 100 • Operation to be performed when the warning load is detected (V) å 0:Disabled 1:Deceleration 2:Tool change 3:Deceleration + tool change 4:Machine stop • Operation to be performed when the damage level is detected (W) å 0:Disabled 1:Machine stop 298 . X Y X Y ––––– . operation to be performed when the warning load is detected. AI TOOL MONITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (2) Peck cycle M32 M33 M34 Starts to detect a no–load condition for the AI function. and M34 is issued at the end of the peck cycle. a workpiece may not be machined in the first machining cycle depending on the position of the R point. In this peck drilling cycle. Program as listed above. To overcome this problem. for each tool number. (3) Using a program command to set AI tool monitor data You can use a program command to set the spindle load level file number. Judges on a no–load condition for the AI function. Disables the no–load detection function for a peck cycle. (Enables the standard no–load detection function. and that to be performed when the damage load is detected. (Last hole position) M33 G98 M34 X Y . Checks whether a no–load error has occurred. M33 is issued before the position of the hole.) The term peck cycle refers to a peck drilling cycle directed by G73 or G83.14. .

using a custom macro function. (Example) M44 T98 U41. Otherwise.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 14. or specify OFF. 299 . NOTE If data updating in a program is specified incorrectly. For this reason. To update data in a program. the current tool number is recognized. an alarm will be issued. Tool numbers where data is to be updated: 1 to 14 (1 to 21 for the T21iC series). The NC unit does not recognize a T–code (current tool number) immediately after the power is switched on. exchange a tool. it is necessary to execute O9029. the NC unit becomes inoperable when T99 is issued for updating data in a program. program number O9029 cannot be used for another purpose. specify 0 also at [V] (operation for warning load level) and [W] (operation for breakage load level). (2) A decimal point cannot be used. the message “1013 AI TOOL MONITOR DATA ERROR” will be displayed.) M–code for specifying to update data. 99 (Specifying 99 causes rewriting for the currently used tool. To have the T–code recognized. If this operation is not performed. an alarm will be issued. If any of the above errors occurs. AI TOOL MONITOR Command format M44 T Ujj Vf W∆ .5 V1 W2 . Setting 0 at [U] (management number) disables the AI TOOL MONITOR function. and an alarm will be issued. (1) (2) (3) (1) T98 is out of a valid range. (3) W2 is out of a valid range. When specifying 0 as a management number. Once a tool is exchanged.

ALL TOOL IN SAME GROUP ARE USED. All tools in a specified tool group reached a warning or breakage level. and exchange the tool if T99 has been specified. then check the tool. Reset the system. Response Reset the system. function • Program format error • Data out of tolerance (2) Messages Number 2013 Message EXECUTING TOOL ESCAPE. 300 . Description The tool in current use reached a breakage level. or exchange the tool and clear data about use status. The machine is returning to the Z–axis reference position. then exchange the broken tool. Description A breakage level was detected and the machine stopped feeding. 1013 AI TOOL MONITOR DATA Abnormal data related to the AI ERROR.7 ALARM MESSAGES DISPLAYED BY THE AI TOOL MONITOR FUNCTION (1) Alarms Number 1010 1011 Message TOOL BREAKAGE WAS DETECTED.14. then check the specified command. AI TOOL MONITOR DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 14. Reset the system.

AI TOOL MONITOR 14. For setting and connection of signal output. 301 .8 SIGNAL OUTPUT When a warning or breakage level is detected.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 14. a signal can be output to an external device. see 15 external interface function. This function can be used regardless of whether the AI tool monitor function is abled.

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 15 EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION 302 .

SEARCH 2 INPUT 3 : PROGRAM NO. Standard specifications OUTPUT 1 : M80 OUTPUT OUTPUT 2 : M81 OUTPUT OUTPUT 3 : M82 OUTPUT · · · INPUT 1 : WORK NO. You can change the nature of each input/output signal without restrictions to suit your machine. 14 input points and 16 output points can be used. SEARCH 3 · · NOTE 1 If the optional side automatic door is fitted. SEARCH 1 INPUT 2 : WORK NO.1 OVERVIEW The ROBODRILL is supplied with an external interface (16 output and 16 input signals(*)) as standard. input 32 points and max. SEARCH 1 INPUT 2 : PROGRAM NO. 3 It can be increased max. SEARCH 2 INPUT 3 : WORK NO. additional eight input signals and eight output signals are used. 303 . SEARCH 3 · · Can be customized as desired User’s requirements OUTPUT 1 : M CODE BCD OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 : M CODE BCD OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 : M CODE BCD OUTPUT 3 · · · INPUT 1 : PROGRAM NO. 2 When the center–through coolant option is installed. output 32 points as optional. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION 15.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15.

To set 2 : M CODE OUTPUT BY BCD 2^0 at output address Y0002.0.0 and press the following keys : 304 . then enter a number listed in the SIGNAL LIST. position the cursor to Y0002.2 SETTING INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND FUNCTIONS The input/output signals and functions are set on the EXT. (1) Setting the input/output signals I/O signal title I/O signal address Switching INPUT/OUTPUT Status List of I/O signal Position the cursor to a desired address. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 15. for example.15. INTERFACE screen (a QUICK screen).

an alarm and operator message are issued). Select an output type (LIGHT UP/BLINK). 305 . Press Position the cursor to the item corresponding to the desired output. press the [END] soft key. Setting other functions Press the [FUNCTIONS] soft key. After setting the function. When multiple menu items (e.. press the [END] soft key.g.g.. Setting machine status output Press the [STAT. and the conditions of the menu items simultaneously selected are satisfied (e. LIGHT UP for one. After setting the output. the output types of the menu items are different (e. 2. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION (2) Setting functions 1.. Press Position the cursor to the item corresponding to the desired function.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15.g.g. OUTPUT 1). then press the [ON] or [OFF] soft key. ALARM and OPERATOR MESSAGE) are selected for the same output (e. then press the [SELECT²] or [SELECT³] soft key. OUTPUT] soft key. and BLINK for the other). the output types of the menu items become LIGHT UP..

press the [END] soft key. Use this function to check output signal wiring. Press Position the cursor to the address of the output to be checked.3 OUTPUT SIGNAL CHECK FUNCTION This function can turn a signal on or off independently of the output signal setting. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 15. Press the [TEST] soft key. disable the custom PMC function (by setting PMC keep relay K15 bit 7 to 0). 306 . then press the [ON] or [OFF] soft key. NOTE When testing an output signal for which 1. After checking the output. for example. the ON or OFF status set with this function is automatically cancelled.15. FOR CUSTOM PMC is set. When TEST mode terminates.

(1) Output signals (ROBODRILL ³ External equipment) Function Does not output any signal. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Unused For custom PMC Signal name The following input/output signals are supported.” See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” Outputs the operation mode status of the α-T14iA. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION 15.” See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (5) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (5) in “Detailed description of input/output signals. Output signal reserved for custom PMC. (*1) M code output BY BCD 2^0 M code output BY BCD 2^1 M code output BY BCD 2^2 M code output BY BCD 2^3 M code output BY BCD 2^0*10 M code output BY BCD 2^1*10 M code output BY BCD 2^2*10 M code output BY BCD 2^3*10 M code output BY BCD 2^0*100 M code output BY BCD 2^1*100 M code output BY BCD 2^2*100 M code output BY BCD 2^3*100 Request of M code data read Parity check of BCD data Distribution completion M80 output M81 output M82 output M83 output M84 output M85 output M86 output M87 output M88 output M89 output In the AUTO mode 307 .” See (5) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (5) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (5) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (5) in “Detailed description of input/output signals. See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (5) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (5) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (5) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (5) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.4 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS No.” See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15.

” Remains on in the spindle stop state.” See “Details of I/O signals 5.” See (1) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (1) in “Detailed description of input/output signals. (*2) Goes on when the spindle load exceeds the breakage level.” See “Details of I/O signals 5. See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See “Details of I/O signals 5. Goes on when the automatic door open limit is reached.” See (1) in “Detailed description of input/output signals. Remains on in the feed hold state. Warning level detection Breakage level detection Door open (M60) Door open (M61) Door open (M62) Door open (M63) Door open (M64) Door open (M65) BATTERY ALARM Tool life M100 output M101 output M102 output M103 output M104 output M105 output M106 output M107 output M108 output M109 output Function Remains on during programmed operation. 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 Signal name Cycle start (In progress) Feed hold Emergency stop Reset Machine status output 1 Machine status output 2 Machine status output 3 Spindle is at hold Automatic door close state Automatic door open state Splash guard door close Production completed Search end of the program No.” See “Details of I/O signals 5.” See (1) in “Detailed description of input/output signals. Goes on when the automatic door close limit is reached.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See “Details of I/O signals 5.” See “Details of I/O signals 5. Remains on in the reset state.” Goes on when the battery voltage drops to a preset level. Remains off in the emergency stop state. Goes on when machining has been completed. (*2) See (1) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” Goes on when the spindle load exceeds the warning level. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (2) Output signals (ROBODRILL ³ External equipment) No.” See (1) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” 308 .15.” See (6) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See “Details of I/O signals 5. Read end of the program No.” See “Details of I/O signals 5.” See “Details of I/O signals 5. Goes on when the splash guard door is closed. See (6) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (6) in “Detailed description of input/output signals. Goes on once all of the tools in the tool group have reached the end of their service life. See “Details of I/O signals 5.

80 81 82 Alarm output 2 In the remote control Probe ON/OFF 309 . See (9) in “Details of input/output signals. POINT (5TH–AXIS) Manual mode Position switch Notice of tool life Function See “Details of I/O signals 5.” See “Details of I/O signals 5. POINT (X–AXIS) 1st. POINT (Y–AXIS) 1st. 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 Signal name M120 output M121 output M122 output M123 output M124 output M125 output M126 output M127 output M128 output M129 output 1st. REF. Goes on upon the completion of reference position return. REF.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION No. Is set to ON when the number of times that the last tool in the tool group will be able to be used in the future is not greater than the tool life limit to trigger an expiration advance notice. REF. Goes on upon the completion of reference position return.” See “Details of I/O signals 5.” On during remote operation. Goes on upon the completion of reference position return.” See “Details of I/O signals 5.” See “Details of I/O signals 5.” See “Details of I/O signals 5. REF. See the item describing the touch probe control function.” See “Details of I/O signals 5. POINT (4TH–AXIS) 1st.” See “Details of I/O signals 5.” Goes on upon the completion of reference position return. REF. See Input/output signal details (5).” See “Details of I/O signals 5. POINT (Z–AXIS) 1st.” See “Details of I/O signals 5. Goes on upon the completion of reference position return. Goes on when manual mode is selected.

” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals. stops the programmed operation.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals. data read Work number search 2^0 Work number search 2^1 Work number search 2^2 Work number search 2^3 External start External hold External reset External emergency stop Completion (FIN) Reset & rewind Signal name Ignores the signal input.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.15.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (2) in “Detailed description of input/output signals. resets the CNC.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals. resets the CNC and calls the beginning of a program. places the machine in the emergency stop state.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Unused For custom PMC Program number search 2^0 Program number search 2^1 Program number search 2^2 Program number search 2^3 Program number search 2^0*10 Program number search 2^1*10 Program number search 2^2*10 Program number search 2^3*10 Program number search 2^0*100 Program number search 2^1*100 Program number search 2^2*100 Program number search 2^3*100 Program number search 2^0*1000 Program number search 2^1*1000 Program number search 2^2*1000 Program number search 2^3*1000 Request of Prog.” See (2) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals. (*3) When turned on.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (3) Input signals (External equipment ³ ROBODRILL) No. See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (2) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals. When turned on.” When turned on. (*4) See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” When turned off. No. Input signal reserved for custom PMC. Function 310 .” See (2) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.

(*7) See “Details of I/O signals 5.” See “Details of I/O signals 5. places the machine in DNC operation mode. places the machine in dry run operation mode.” See “Details of I/O signals 5. 311 .”(*9) When off. See the item describing the touch probe control function. (*5) When turned on. See (1) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.” See (7) in “Details of I/O signals .” The signal being on indicates that the tool is damaged. movement on any servo axis is inhibited.” See “Details of I/O signals 5.” Another program is called while the current program is being executed. Interlock (ALL AXES) Skip 2 Skip 3 Skip 4 Skip 5 Skip 6 Skip 7 Skip 8 Alarm output 2 release Probe status Probe battery low Probe error Function When turned on. 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Signal name External door open control External door close control DNC operation Request of door close Single block on Dry run on M100 FIN M101 FIN M102 FIN M103 FIN M104 FIN M105 FIN M106 FIN M107 FIN M108 FIN M109 FIN Tool breakage Skip Interrupt–type custom macro Auto.” See (7) in “Details of I/O signals .” See “Details of I/O signals 5.” See “Details of I/O signals 5.” See (7) in “Details of I/O signals .(*9) See “Details of I/O signals 8. See “Details of I/O signals 7.” See “Details of I/O signals 5. (*6) When turned on. places the machine in single block operation mode.” See (7) in “Details of I/O signals . EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION (4) Input signals (External equipment ³ ROBODRILL) No. (*8) See (7) in “Details of I/O signals .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15. See the item describing the touch probe control function.” When turned on. (*5) When turned on.” See “Details of I/O signals 5.” See (9) in “Details of I/O signals .” See “Details of I/O signals 5. measurement of tool leng.” See (7) in “Details of I/O signals .” See “Details of I/O signals 5.” See the item describing the touch probe control function.” See (7) in “Details of I/O signals . opens the automatic door. closes the automatic door.

*7 Set bit 4 of keep relay K8 to 1. *6 Set bit 3 of keep relay K8 to 1.15. *4 Set [ON] in the EXTERNAL EMG STOP field of the FUNCTION SELECTION window. *8 At “FUNCTION SELECTION.” set “INTERLOCK (ALL AXES)” to “ON. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 *1 The output status can be selected by setting bit 7 of keep relay K6. *5 Signal reception mode can be selected by setting bit 1 of keep relay K7.” *9 Option Standard settings are as folllows: 312 . *2 The output status can be selected by setting bit 6 of keep relay K8. *3 Set [ON] in the EXTERNAL FEED HOLD field of the FUNCTION SELECTION window.

1 Detailled Description of Input/Output Signals M60 to M65 is specified (1) Automatic door open/close (option) When one of commands M60 to M65 is specified in automatic (MEM) or MDI mode. 313 .4. the door closes and operation is resumed. The specified program is selected. Program numbers O0001 to O0015 can be selected. the automatic door opens. and automatic operation starts. SEARCH for PROGRAM SELECTION. A required program can thus be called by using the rotary switch or similar. When using the external work number search function. After selecting the number of the program. The automatic door opens The door open signal is output Note 1) The door close request signal (external equipment ³ ROBO DRILL) is valid only while one of commands M60 to M65 is being executed.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15. operator message “2001 THE DOOR OF THE SPLASH GUARD IS OPEN” is not displayed. even if the door is open. set EXT. The signal is ignored upon a reset or while one of com mands M60 to M65 is not being executed. Note 2) While one of commands M60 to M65 is being executed. press the CYCLE START button. When a signal is input to the machine while the door is open. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION 15. Is the door close request signal being input? YES The automatic door closes NO Operation is resumed (2) External work number search function Some machining programs can be stored in program memory. WORK No.

2 The program number must be selected from O0001 to O0015. search 2^0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Selected program number Not selected O0001 O0002 O0003 O0004 O0005 O0006 O0007 O0008 O0009 O0010 O0011 O0012 O0013 O0014 O0015 NOTE 1 This function can be used only in automatic operation (MEM) mode. To enable automatic operation of a program other than O0001 to O0015. 8 This function cannot be used simultaneously with the external program number search function. 4 If the program corresponding to a specified number is not found in memory. an alarm is output at activation. search for a sequence number in automatic operation (MEM) mode. then restart the program. but execution of the currently selected program is resumed from the point at which execution was stopped. · Press the operation start button. · Set all signals for program selection switches to OPEN. no program number is selected.15. A program number is not selected. for example) or automatic operation halt state (feed hold stop). 3 Not all program numbers need be used to store programs in memory. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 [Relationship between signal statuses and selected program numbers] Work No. 6 When resuming the execution of a part-completed program. 7 When the function is started with all signals open. 314 . The currently selected program is resumed from the current stop point. but the currently selected program is executed. search 2^2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Work No. search 2^1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Work No. search 2^3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Work No. not during MDI operation. follow the steps shown below: · Search for a program number (on the screen). (Alarm message “59 PROGRAM NUMBER IS NOT FOUND”) 5 No program is selected if the function is started in the automatic operation stop state (single block stop.

set [EXT. Program numbers O0001 to O9999 can be selected. this function retrieves the corresponding program from the memory of the ROBODRILL control unit.PRPG. To use the external program number search function. Specify a desired program with a four-digit binary-coded decimal (BCD) number. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION (3) External program number search function When a sequencer or other external equipment issues a program number to the ROBODRILL.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15.No.SEARCH] for “PRPGRAM SELECTION”. 315 .

After this signal is output. turn the data read request signal off. This signal goes off at the following timings: · · · When operation is activated Upon a reset When a new program number is selected 316 . (Automatic operation starts at the falling edge of the pulse signal.) Function Specify a program with a binary-coded decimal (BCD) number. (ROBODRILL ³ External equipment) Signal name Program number selection end Function Indicates that a program number has been selected and that automatic operation can be started. automatic operation starts. This signal is output after output of the data read end signal ends. Omit wiring according to the program numbers to be used. Wiring is not required for a bit that is always set to 0. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 [Interface] (External equipment ³ ROBODRILL) Signal name Program number search 2^0 Program number search 2^1 Program number search 2^2 Program number search 2^3 Program number search 2^0*10 Program number search 2^1*10 Program number search 2^2*10 Program number search 2^3*10 Program number search 2^0*100 Program number search 2^1*100 Program number search 2^2*100 Program number search 2^3*100 Program number search 2^0*1000 Program number search 2^1*1000 Program number search 2^2*1000 Program number search 2^3*1000 Program number read request External start When the signal is input. Enter a pulse signal of 200 ms or longer. the ROBODRILL reads the data corresponding to the program number specified by the program number data signal.15. When a signal is input after a program number has been selected (while the ROBODRILL is sending the selection end signal).

The currently selected program is started from the point at which execution stopped. an alarm is output at activation.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15. 3202 (NE8)). 3 When the program corresponding to the specified number cannot be found in memory. 2 No program is selected when the function is started in automatic operation stop state (single block stop. Programs O9000 to O9999 are protected beforehand according to the setting of a parameter (bit 4 of NC parameter No. 5 Programs O8000 to O8999 can be protected by setting an NC parameter (bit 0 of NC parameter No. no program numbers are selected. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION [Timing of external program number search] Program number data signal : Number specified Data read request signal : ON External start signal : ON Data read end signal : ON Selection end signal : ON ROBODRILL operation : Number read Selection Automatic operation NOTE 1 This function cannot be used simultaneously with the external work number search function. 317 . (Alarm message “59 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND”) 4 When program number 0 is specified. The currently selected program is executed. for example) or automatic operation halt state (feed hold stop). 3202 (NE9)).

To use the external M code BCD output function. set [NEITHER USE] for “M CODE OUTPUT BY BCD”. it is interlocked with the ROBODRILL. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (4) External M code BCD output function This function outputs a specified M code number to a sequencer or other external equipment. When the external equipment operates according to the specified M code. The M code number is output as a three-digit binary-coded decimal (BCD) number. 318 .15.

319 . the ROBODRILL terminates M code output and proceeds to the next block of the program. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION [Interface] (ROBODRILL ³ External equipment) Signal name M code BCD output 2^0 M code BCD output 2^1 M code BCD output 2^2 M code BCD output 2^3 M code BCD output 2^0*10 M code BCD output 2^1*10 M code BCD output 2^2*10 M code BCD output 2^3*10 M code BCD output 2^0*100 M code BCD output 2^1*100 M code BCD output 2^2*100 M code BCD output 2^3*100 M code data read request Indicates that the M code number data signal is being output. Distribution end Indicates that an auxiliary function (M. Even parity check (K1.1 K4. Not all data need be read.1=0) Odd parity check (K1. or T code) is specified and that axial movement has been completed. Parity of specified M code Parity check Check signal 0 1 0 1 K4. (Usually.5 : Switching between even parity check and odd parity check : Switching the output status of the results of parity check (External equipment ³ ROBODRILL) Signal name Finish (FIN) Function The signal is input once operation of the external equipment ends. When the signal is input. Read the M code number while the signal is being output.) BCD data parity check Outputs the results of a parity check. Omit wiring according to the M codes to be used.5=0 Odd Even Even Odd K4. S.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15.1=1) (PMC parameter) K1.5=1 Even Odd Odd Even Function A specified M code is output as a binary-coded decimal (BCD) number. this feature is not used.

320 . 2 M0 to M99 must not be used.15. 3 Specify this function with the first M code if two or more M codes are to be specified. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 [Timing of external M code BCD output] M code number data signal : ON ON Data read request signal : ON ON Finish signal : ON ON ROBODRILL operation : M code specified M code specified NOTE 1 This function cannot be used simultaneously with the M code output function.

(M84) Turned on at the beginning of the specification of an M code. Pulse FIN :Used only by M10X : Used only by M10X. FIN. Each M code is used in combination with an M code having the same least significant digit. turns on the M12X output. Signal name M81 output M82 output Turns an output signal on. ON1. (M83) Output type Instantaneous Function Outputs a pulse signal of 100 ms duration.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15. Turned off when the finish signal is input from the external equipment. Each M code is used in combination with an M code having the same least significant digit. (Example: M100 <––> M120) j: 0 to 9 M80 output M85 output M86 output M87 output M88 output M89 output M100 output M101 output M102 output M103 output M104 output M105 output M106 output M107 output M108 output M109 output ON1 Turns off the M10X and M12X output. at the same time. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION (5) M code output function (M80 to M89. This is used when ON2 is selected as the output type of M100 to M109. FIN ON1 Turns an output signal off. Individual M codes have a corresponding FIN signal. M code M81 M82 M83 M83 output M84 M80 M85 M86 M87 M88 M89 M100 M101 M102 M103 M104 M105 M106 M107 M108 M109 M110 M111 M112 M113 M114 M115 M116 M117 M118 M119 M120 M121 M122 M123 M124 M125 M126 M127 M128 M129 M120 output M121 output M122 output M123 output M124 output M125 output M126 output M127 output M128 output M129 output ON2 Turns off the M10X output and. and ON2. This is used when ON1 or ON2 is selected as the output type of M100 to M109. M100 to M129) This function outputs a signal corresponding to a specified M code. j: 0 to 9 321 . ON/OFF1 : Used in combination with M11X ON/OFF2 : Used in combination with M11X and M12X. (Example: M100 <––> M110) j: 0 to 9 Selectable Selects an output type from pulse.

set [M100 – M129] to [ON]. 322 .15. When an M code of FIN type is specified. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (pulse type) M code specification (ON1 type) M code specification : M81 : M83 M84 Signal output : ON Signal output : ON (FIN type) M code specification (ON2 type) M code specification : M81 : M100 M120 M100 M110 Signal output : ON Signal output1 : ON ON External equipment : Operation Finish signal output Signal output2 : ON When an M code of pulse ON1 or ON2 type is specified. To use the function to output M100 to M129. After this signal is input. the ROBODRILL waits until a finish signal is input from the external equipment. the ROBODRILL automatically proceeds to the next program block after the signal has been output (or stopped). the ROBODRILL proceeds to the next program block.

Press Item 1 2 M CODE OUTPUT TYPE AUXILIARY DATA Contents A desired M code output type is selected by pressing the corresponding soft key. FIN type : The duration for waiting for the FIN signal is set. Press soft key [M–CODE OUTPUT]. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION To set the output type of M100 to M109. 323 . PULSE type : The ON duration of the pulse signal is set. feed hold occurs and operator message 2003 TIME OUT (M100 – M109) appears. This is used when PULSE or FIN is selected as the M code output type. If the completion signal is not input within the specified period. use “M code output type”.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15.

MF 1 : Does not use the high-speed interface for M/S/T code processing.) (NC parameter) #7 MHI #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3001 MHI 1 : Uses the high-speed interface for M/S/T code processing.15. NOTE The ROBODRILL uses a high-speed M/S/T interface. set M80–M89 to FIN TYPE.MF P. (PMC parameter) #7 K00 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 P. 0 : Uses the high-speed interface for M/S/T code processing. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 All of M80 to M89 can be changed to FIN type. This interface can be set to emulate a conventional M/S/T interface by setting the following parameters. M84 output can be used. To do this. After FIN TYPE is set. 0 : Does not use the high-speed interface for M/S/T code processing. (This change need not be made for an ordinary connection between the ROBODRILL and external equipment. 324 .

EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION (6) Machine status output function This function outputs machine status signals. PRODUCT COMP.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15.production management function). hence can be used to light a status indicator. M01. Signals are also output to a relay contact. MESSAGE PROGRAM EXEC. for example. 325 . STATUS OUT. : A signal is output upon the completion of machining (QUICK screen . : A signal is output upon the completion of programmed operation (execution of M00. : A signal is output while the stop button’s indicator on the operator’s panel is lit. OF MAC. PROGRAM END : A signal is output if a CNC alarm occurs. Select the machine state in which this signal is output in the SET. : A signal is output during programmed operation. : A signal is output while an operator message is displayed. M02. or M30). Press ALARM OPE. : Is FEED HOLD NOTICE OF TOOL LIFE set to ON when the number of times that the last tool in the tool group will be able to be used in the future is not greater than the tool life limit to trigger an expiration advance notice.

15. and the conditions of the menu items simultaneously selected are satisfied (e. and BLINK for the other). 2 A (7) Skip function (option) When a signal is input from the external equipment while a G31 move command is being executed.g. For details.g. When multiple menu items (e. instead being given by a signal (b) Workpiece dimension calculation: Movement is made in G31 mode to determine the shape and dimensions of a workpiece or other object.. this function instigates the following operation: D The current coordinates at the time of signal input are stored into the CNC. This function is used for the following: (a) Grinding and other machining for which the end point is notprogrammed. refer to the “CNC Operator’s Manual. D The current block is terminated and execution of the next block is started.g.g.. check fuse 7 (FU7) (3. The coordinates are calculated and stored in the CNC according to the signal received from a sensor.10 XT3–11. the output types of the menu items are different (e.12 NOTE 1 If +24V is not output from 5 and 6 of XT3.8 XT3–9. LIGHT UP for one. the output types of the menu items become LIGHT UP. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Select an output type (LIGHT UP/BLINK).. ALARM and OPERATOR MESSAGE) are selected for the same output (e.” 326 . 2 A 250 VAC.. 2 Relay contact capacity: 30 VDC. an alarm and operator message are issued). The dimensions of the workpiece are calculated by a custom macro instruction. [Signal connections] [XT 3] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 10 13 12 15 14 17 16 19 18 20 )24E : 0V : Output 1 : Output 2 : Output 3 : XT3–5 XT3–6 XT3–7. OUTPUT 1).2 A). based on the stored coordinates.

7 “SKIP2” (50) ³ X0004.6 “SKIP7” (55) ³ X0004. refer to the “CNC Operator’s Manual. For details. This function adds the difference between the stop position and the predetermined measurement position to the current tool length compensation.” 327 .3 “SKIP4” (52) ³ X0004. Provided the feedrate is constant. program a constant feedrate. 5 “SKIP” (46) ³ X0004.0 “SKIP8” (56) ³ X0004. the measurement error will increase. 2 When using this function for measurement.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15. If a signal (measurement position reach signal) is input from external equipment while the tool is moving to the measurement position. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION NOTE 1 A block in G31 mode is unconditionally changed to G01 mode.5 “SKIP6” (54) ³ X0004. The feedrate specified with an F code is selected.4 “SKIP5” (53) ³ X0004. If the feedrate is allowed to vary.2 “SKIP3” (51) ³ X0004. the tool stops immediately. the tool moves to a predetermined measurement position. (8) Automatic tool length measurement function (option) When G37 is specified.1 Set each item as above. the measurement error can be calculated as follows: 1 4 ERRmax=Fm 60 1000 ERRmax : Maximum measurement error (mm or inch) Fm : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min) 3 The amount of overrun after a skip signal is input is calculated as follows: 1 20+Tc+Ts Qmax=Fm ( ) 1000 60 Qmax : Overrun (mm or inch) Fm : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min) Tc : Cutting time constant (msec) Ts : Servo time constant (usually 33 msec) 4 The skip signal must have a width of at least 10 msec.

and 5. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Feedrate Rapid traverse rate Rapid traverse Measurement speed Start point ε ε Predetermined measurement position Deceleration position Measurement position reach signal ON ε : Range in which the measurement position reach signal is valid [Parameter settings] Set the following parameters: NC parameters No.15.2. 2. (9) Alarm output 2 This signal is mainly used for controlling the buzzer when an alarm occurs. D Turned off when the alarm output 2 release signal (57) is input. D Turned off when the specified time (PMC parameter T06) has elapsed. and 7. (when bit 2 of PMC parameter K6 is set to 1) (10)Position switches This signal is turned on when five position switches are on. K2#5 = 0: Uses position switches 1. maximum value. 2. 4. 328 . The data (axis. PMC parameter keep relay K2#5 K2#5 = 0: Uses position switches 1. and minimum value) of the position switches is to be set using NC parameters. D Turned off when the alarm is released. 3. 3. 6241 : Measurement speed No. 4. 6251 : Deceleration position No. 6254 : Range in which the measurement position reach signal is valid NOTE Set automatic tool length measurement (48) for address X0004. D Turned on when an alarm occurs.

6 X 4.7 X 5.0 X 5.7 User DI09 User DI10 User DI11 User DI12 User DI13 User DI14 User DI15 User DI16 XT4–13 XT4–14 XT4–17 XT4–18 XT4–19 XT4–20 XT4–23 XT4–24 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 UDO01 UDO02 UDO03 UDO04 UDO05 UDO06 UDO07 UDO08 Y 2.4 Y 2.6 0V 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 X4.4 X 5.1 )24B X 5.7 Y 3.2 X 5.7 Y 2. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION 15.2 X 4.2 X 4.3 Y 2.1 Y 2.5 X 5.6 X 5.6 Y 3.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15.4 0V Y 3.2 Y 2.0 )24B X 5.5 X 4.4 0V Y 2.3 X 5.5 Y 3.7 Signal User DI01 User DI02 User DI03 User DI04 User DI05 User DI06 User DI07 User DI08 Destination XT4–01 XT4–02 XT4–05 XT4–06 XT4–07 XT4–08 XT4–11 XT4–12 01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 UDI09 UDI10 UDI11 UDI12 UDI13 UDI14 UDI15 UDI16 X 5.5) Name UDI01 UDI02 UDI03 UDI03 UDI05 UDI06 UDI07 UDI08 Address X 4.3 X 4.0 )24B X 4.3 Y 3.3 X 5.6 Y 2.1 X 5.1 Y 3.5 )24B X 5.3 Y 3.0 X 4.0 0V Y 3.2 Y 2.1 X 4.2 Y 3.3 X 4.4 )24B X 4.4 )24B X 5.1 )24B X 4.5 0V Y 2.6 X 5.6 Y 3.7 )24B UDO09 UDO10 UDO11 UDO12 UDO13 UDO14 UDO15 UDO16 Y 3.7 User DO09 User DO10 User DO11 User DO12 User DO13 User DO14 User DO15 User DO16 XT4–37 XT4–38 XT4–41 XT4–42 XT4–43 XT4–44 XT4–47 XT4–48 329 .5 )24B X 4.5 Y 2.4 X 4.2 X 5.2 Y 3.0 Y 2.7 User DO01 User DO02 User DO03 User DO04 User DO05 User DO06 User DO07 User DO08 XT4–25 XT4–26 XT4–29 XT4–30 XT4–31 XT4–32 XT4–35 XT4–36 39 41 43 45 47 49 X 4.1 0V Y 2.6 Y 2.3 Y 2.0 0V Y 2.4 Y 3.5 EXTERNAL INTERFACE CONNECTION (NT 4) (Terminal size M3.5 0V Y 3.1 0V Y 3.0 Y 3.

6 X 11.6 X 10.2 Y 11.6 X 11.0 X 10.1 X 11.1 X 10.7 Signal User DI17 User DI18 User DI19 User DI20 User DI21 User DI22 User DI23 User DI24 Destination XTC1–01 XTC1–02 XTC1–05 XTC1–06 XTC1–07 XTC1–08 XTC1–11 XTC1–12 01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 UDI25 UDI26 UDI27 UDI28 UDI29 UDI30 UDI31 UDI32 X 11.2 Y 10.5 )24B X 11.3 Y 11.5 Y 11.5) Name UDI17 UDI18 UDI19 UDI20 UDI21 UDI22 UDI23 UDI24 Address X 10.1 0V Y 11.3 X 11.4 X 11.3 X 10.7 Y 11.15.7 )24B UDO25 UDO26 UDO27 UDO28 UDO29 UDO30 UDO31 UDO32 Y 11.5 0V Y 11.6 0V 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 X10.5 Y 10.0 Y 11.0 )24B X 10.2 X 11.0 0V Y 11.2 X 10.5 X 11.4 Y 10.3 Y 10.7 User DO17 User DO18 User DO19 User DO20 User DO21 User DO22 User DO23 User DO24 XTC1–25 XTC1–26 XTC1–29 XTC1–30 XTC1–31 XTC1–32 XTC1–35 XTC1–36 39 41 43 45 47 49 X 10. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (XTC1) (Terminal size M3.3 X 11.5 0V Y 10.6 Y 11.7 Y 10.2 X 11.4 0V Y 11.0 X 11.0 )24B X 11.2 Y 11.0 0V Y 10.3 Y 10.4 )24B X 11.7 X 11.1 )24B X 10.4 X 10.5 X 10.7 User DO25 User DO26 User DO27 User DO28 User DO29 User DO30 User DO31 User DO32 XTC1–37 XTC1–38 XTC1–41 XTC1–42 XTC1–43 XTC1–44 XTC1–47 XTC1–48 330 .1 Y 11.0 Y 10.1 )24B X 11.3 X 10.6 Y 10.2 X 10.2 Y 10.3 Y 11.6 Y 10.4 Y 11.6 Y 11.5 )24B X 10.4 0V Y 10.1 Y 10.7 User DI25 User DI26 User DI27 User DI28 User DI29 User DI30 User DI31 User DI32 XTC1–13 XTC1–14 XTC1–17 XTC1–18 XTC1–19 XTC1–20 XTC1–23 XTC1–24 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 UDO17 UDO18 UDO19 UDO20 UDO21 UDO22 UDO23 UDO24 Y 10.1 0V Y 10.4 )24B X 10.

Insert the spark killer near the load as much as possible (within 20 cm). a surge current may flow. +24E 331 . When connecting a capacitive load. A transistor is used as the driver. (d) When a lamp is lit directly by the transistor output. (a) Output signal standard [0 V common] current flow type Output signal specifications: Maximum output current : 200 mA (including instantaneous values) Maximum voltage : 24 V +20% Saturation voltage : 1. For this reason.) (b) Output circuit +24E Relay (c) When connecting an inductive load such as a relay. resulting in damage to the transistor.) Leakage current : 100 mA (Max. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION NOTE 1 Output signals Output signals are used for driving relays and light–emitting diodes for indicators.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15.0 V (Max. always insert a spark killer. insert a protection circuit so that the transistor can be used within the rated current and voltage including instantaneous cases. always insert a resistor for limiting the current in series so that the load can be used within the rated current and voltage including instantaneous cases.

4 V) Voltage drop between contacts when closed : 2 V or less (Current: 8.5 mA) (including cable voltage drop) (b) The following shows the receiver circuit: External circuit ROBODRILL Direct current input signal Filter and level converter circuit Receiver output circuit Transistor OFF : logic 0 ON : logic 1 Receiver circuit +24V 332 .15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 NOTE 2 Input signals (a) Each contact must satisfy the following conditions: Contact capacity : 30 VDC. 16 mA or more Leakage current between contacts when opened : 1 mA or less (Voltage: 26.

333 . (2) Contact which outputs the emergency stop state of the machine XT3–3 (Up to 2A) XT3–4 D The emergency stop state of the machine can be output from XT3–3 and XT3–4.6 EMERGENCY STOP (1) Terminals for connecting the external emergency stop signal Emergency stop switch XTD–1 +24B Jumper KA1 XTD–3 KA2 D To connect the emergency stop signal of an external device to the machine.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15. remove the XTD3–1/XTD3–2 jumper wire. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION 15.

EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 15. check fuse 5 (FU5) (3. If +24B is not output. 334 .7 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY The +24B terminal on the external interface terminal block is rated at up to 2 A.15.2 A).

EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION 15. a choice between contact a and contact b can be made.1 Overview The relay module outputs four independent relay contact signals (dry contacts) for an input signal (24 VDC).1 Internal connection diagram S With a coil surge absorption diode S With an operation indication LED Input side: 24 VDC B1 CNTB1 A1 LED1 R1 D1 KA1 + A2 LED2 R2 D2 KA2 B2 + A3 LED3 R3 D3 KA3 B3 + A4 LED4 R4 D4 KA4 B4 + A5 B5 XTB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Output side: Dry contact 335 .8 RELAY MODULE 15. As a type of contact.8.8.2.2 Connection 15. 15.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15.8.

8.15.2. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 15.8.3 Specifications 15.54DSA A 01 02 03 04 05 TH01 TH02 TH03 TH04 B 0V 0V 0V 0V 2 4 6 8 10 TH01B TH02B TH03B TH04B Output side XTB1 YOSHIDA: PS7–10A (M3 screw) 1 3 5 7 9 TH01A TH02A TH03A TH04A 15.3.1 Ordering information (1) (2) Name Relay module Relay module Specification A20B–1007–0720 A20B–1007–0722 Contact configuration 4a 4b NOTE 1 (1) and (2) differ in the internal relay specification.8. 336 .2 Pin allocation Input side CNTB1 HIROSE: HIF3CD–10PA–2. 2 Do not use different voltages for the relay contacts on one module.

8.3.1mA a contact b contact 70% or less of the rated voltage 5% or more of the rated voltage 200mW 360mW a contact b contact Screw size Terminal block Applicable wire Tightening torque M3 1.1V DC24V 5A AC250V DC30V Rating Remarks 5A 5A 1A 1A 0.2 Rating Per relay Item Rated conducting current Maximum switching capacity Contact AC250V DC30V Minimum applicable load Rated voltage Operating voltage Coil Return voltage Power consumption DC0.8.5 to 0. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION 15.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15.75NSm 15.25mm2 0.3.3 Outside dimensions Mounting method Mounting using a DIN35 rail 337 .

9. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 15. Four points are made available so that a three–wire proximity switch of NPN type can be handled. 338 .9 USER TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE 15. the user terminal block module can be easily connected to a relay module by using a 10–conductor ribbon cable.15.1 Overview The user terminal block module is designed to expand 16 input signals and 16 output signals on the terminal block. The user terminal block module can be expanded for connection with up to four relay modules. In addition.

6 0V B X10.7 +24B 339 .1 Y10.0 Y10.3 X10.6 Y10.0 +24B X10.2 Y10.4 +24B X11.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15.0 B +24B.3 B 0V 0V 0V 0V 01 02 03 04 05 CNTC5 [HIROSE HIF3CD–10PA] A Y10.2 Y10.0 +24B X11.1 Block diagram 10–conductor ribbon cable Connector panel for T14iC 50–conductor ribbon cable Relay module 4 relays Additional I/O 24/16 Relay module Relay terminal block module DI/DO: 16/16 50–pin screw terminal block XTC1 M3.2 X10.0 Y10.4 0V Y10.1 0V Y11.2 Y10.3 Y11.4 +24B X10.5 +24B X10.7 Y10.5 0V Y10.0 Y10.3 Y10.6 X11.5 0V Y11.1 +24B X11.1 0V Y10.7 X11.5 Relay module 4 relays 4 relays CNTC6 [AMP 316517–5] A 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 CNTC2 [HIROSE HIF3CD–10PA] A 01 02 03 04 05 CNTC4 [HIROSE HIF3CD–10PA] A 01 02 03 04 05 Y10.1 Y10.2 Connection 2.3 X11.9.7 Y11. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION 15.2 Y10.1 Y10.3 B 0V 0V 0V 0V 01 02 03 04 05 Y10.0 0V Y10.2 Y11.2 Y10.1 Y10.1 X10.3 X10.3 B 0V 0V 0V 0V CNTC3 [HIROSE HIF3CD–10PA] A Y10. 0V +24B 0V +24B 0V +24B 0V Relay module 4 relays CNTC1 [HIROSE3CB–50PA] A 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 X10.3 B 0V 0V 0V 0V X10.5 +24B X11.2 X10.0 Y10.6 Y11.2 X11.0 0V Y11.4 0V Y11.1 +24B X10.

9.9.3.9.3 Specifications 15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 15.2 Outside dimensions PNP/NPN switch Connector for three–wire proximity switch Connector for relay module 90mm 228mm Mounting method Mounting using a DIN35 rail 62mm 340 .15.1 Ordering information (1) Name User terminal block module Specification A20B–1007–0720 Contact configuration 15.3.

10 RELAY TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE 15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION 15.1 Overview The relay terminal block module. connected via a connector I/O module and a cable.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15. Signals can be expanded to up to 96 DI signals and 64 DO signals.10.2 Connection CNC I/O LINK cable I/O LINK JD1A +24–V power JD1B CB150 CA52 Basic module A03B–0815–C001 CA53 Flat cable (34P) CA52 Expansion module 1 A03B–0815–C003 CA53 CB150 CA52 Expansion module 2 A03B–0815–C003 CA53 CB150 CA52 Expansion module 3 A03B–0815–C003 Relay module XP150 Relay module XP150 Relay module DI/DO on machine side CB150 XP150 Relay module XP150 Cable connecting modules 341 .10. 15. allows input/output signals (24 DI signals and 16 DO signals) of the machine to be relayed through a terminal block.

6 X80.7 24 +24E 25 X79.7 20 0V 21 Y78.6 Y78.5 X78.1 Y78.7 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 Y79.5 7 X78.6 31 Y79.7 Y78.1 Y78.2 20 X78.3 32 X80.0 3 1 2 XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) +24E X80.3 Y78.3 X79.0 15 16 +24E 14 X79.7 X78.7 30 +24E 31 X80.5 X79.7 XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0V DICOM X78.7 X79.0 0V Y79.3 21 DICOM 22 X78.3 X78.2 X80.1 X80.0 Y78.6 X79.3 23 0V 24 Y78.1 10 X79.7 0V 32 +24V Y79.5 Y79.6 23 X78.7 26 0V 27 Y79.5 Y78.5 342 .4 12 +24E 11 X79.7 Output signals : 16 signals Y78.1 X78.54DSA) A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 +24E +24E 0V Y79.5 Y78.0 Y79.4 X79.2 X80.4 X80.0 to X80. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 When the signals of the basic module [A03B–0815–C001] are assigned to the relay terminal block XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.15.2 Y78.6 X78.0 X78.4 0V Y78.4 DICOM0 Y79.0 0V Y78.1 X80.2 X79.3 X80.2 X78.1 Y79.2 28 Y79.0 0V 17 18 19 +24E X80.5 X80.3 29 0V 30 Y79.6 29 X79.4 Y78.1 0V Y79.0 to Y79.4 X78.5 13 X79.1 X79.6 +24V +24V Address Input signals : 24 signals X78.4 0V Y79.7 X80.0 9 +24E 8 X78.6 25 Y78.4 6 DICOM 5 X78.3 0V Y79.2 0V Y79.1 4 17 18 19 +24E DICOM X78.0 X79.3 27 +24E 28 X79.2 22 Y78.6 X80.2 26 X79.4 X80.5 X80.

2 X83.2 22 Y80.6 Y80.7 30 +24E 31 X83.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15.0 15 16 +24E 14 X82.0 0V Y80.4 X81.7 Output signals : 16 signals Y80.4 6 DICOM 5 X81.7 XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0V DICOM X81.6 25 Y80.5 343 .3 21 DICOM 22 X81.3 27 +24E 28 X82.0 0V 17 18 19 +24E X83.4 0V Y81.7 X82.2 20 X81.6 31 Y81.0 to X83.2 X82.5 Y80.1 0V Y81.6 29 X82.1 X83.4 12 +24E 11 X82.0 Y81.7 X81.0 9 +24E 8 X81.6 X83.3 X81.6 23 X81.2 28 Y81.0 3 1 2 XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) +24E X83.5 X81.4 X83.54DSA) A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 +24E +24E 0V Y81.1 Y81.7 0V 32 +24V Y81.5 X83.1 X82.2 26 X82.0 X81.4 X83.3 Y80.3 X82.7 20 0V 21 Y80.6 X83.5 7 X81.1 Y80.2 X83.4 Y80.5 X82.1 X81.7 24 +24E 25 X82.5 X83.3 32 X83.1 X83.6 X82. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION When the signals of the Expansion module 1 [A03B–0815–C003] are assigned to the relay terminal block XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.7 Y80.5 Y80.5 Y81.0 X82.0 Y80.1 Y80.6 +24V +24V Address Input signals : 24 signals X80.2 X81.5 13 X82.3 23 0V 24 Y80.3 0V Y81.0 0V Y81.3 X83.1 4 17 18 19 +24E DICOM X81.7 26 0V 27 Y81.4 DICOM0 Y81.4 X82.6 X81.7 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 Y81.3 29 0V 30 Y81.2 Y80.2 0V Y81.4 0V Y80.0 to Y81.7 X83.1 10 X82.

7 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 Y83.6 Y82.0 15 16 +24E 14 X85.6 X86.2 Y82.1 X85.4 0V Y83.15.6 X84.4 X86.54DSA) A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 +24E +24E 0V Y83.2 26 X85.3 27 +24E 28 X85.6 31 Y83.1 4 17 18 19 +24E DICOM X84.6 X86.5 X86.0 to X86.4 12 +24E 11 X85.4 X85.1 Y82. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 When the signals of the Expansion module 2 [A03B–0815–C003] are assigned to the relay terminal block XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.0 0V 17 18 19 +24E X86.5 13 X85.5 Y83.1 0V Y83.1 Y83.3 29 0V 30 Y83.5 X84.6 X85.4 6 DICOM 5 X84.1 Y82.4 Y82.5 Y82.7 20 0V 21 Y82.3 23 0V 24 Y82.7 24 +24E 25 X85.0 to Y83.4 0V Y82.3 32 X86.6 25 Y82.5 X85.1 X86.1 10 X85.2 X86.2 20 X84.7 30 +24E 31 X86.3 Y82.3 21 DICOM 22 X84.5 7 X84.3 X84.0 X84.7 Output signals : 16 signals Y82.0 3 1 2 XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) +24E X86.0 Y83.7 26 0V 27 Y83.2 28 Y83.5 X86.3 X86.1 X86.7 X84.5 Y82.4 X86.1 X84.4 DICOM0 Y83.2 0V Y83.6 23 X84.0 0V Y83.3 0V Y83.0 X85.7 X84.5 344 .7 0V 32 +24V Y83.0 9 +24E 8 X84.6 +24V +24V Address Input signals : 24 signals X84.0 0V Y82.7 Y82.0 Y82.2 X86.2 22 Y82.4 X84.7 XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0V DICOM X84.6 29 X85.3 X85.2 X85.7 X86.2 X84.

0 0V Y85.6 X89.7 0V 32 +24V Y85.6 X88.7 X87.1 4 17 18 19 +24E DICOM X87.4 0V Y85.2 26 X88.2 Y84.3 29 0V 30 Y85.4 DICOM0 Y85.1 X89.0 X88.2 28 Y85.1 X87.3 23 0V 24 Y84.3 27 +24E 28 X88.5 7 X87.7 X88.0 to X89.6 25 Y84.7 Y84.0 Y85.3 X87.1 Y84.1 Y85.5 X89.4 Y84.1 X88.0 Y84.5 13 X88.0 9 +24E 8 X87.4 X89.3 0V Y85.3 X89.6 29 X88.6 X87. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION When the signals of the Expansion module 3 [A03B–0815–C003] are assigned to the relay terminal block XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.2 X88.7 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 Y85.0 0V Y84.7 30 +24E 31 X89.1 X89.2 X89.2 20 X87.5 Y84.2 22 Y84.5 X88.4 X88.6 Y84.7 XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0V DICOM X87.7 Output signals : 16 signals Y84.1 10 X88.5 X87.3 Y84.6 31 Y85.3 21 DICOM 22 X87.0 to Y85.0 3 1 2 XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) +24E X89.7 26 0V 27 Y85.0 0V 17 18 19 +24E X89.6 23 X87.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15.4 0V Y84.5 X89.6 +24V +24V Address Input signals : 24 signals X87.1 0V Y85.2 X87.3 32 X89.4 6 DICOM 5 X87.4 12 +24E 11 X88.3 X88.2 0V Y85.4 X87.5 345 .6 X89.5 Y84.1 Y84.5 Y85.0 X87.2 X89.4 X89.7 X89.7 20 0V 21 Y84.7 24 +24E 25 X88.54DSA) A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 +24E +24E 0V Y85.0 15 16 +24E 14 X88.

10. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 15. Screw hole (Unit: mm) 346 .15.10.10.3 Specifications 15.3.1 Ordering information (1) Name Relay terminal block module Specification A03B–0815–C020 Remarks 15.2 Outside dimensions The relay module can be mounted by using screws or mounted on a DIN rail.3.

allows input/output signals (24 DI signals and 16 DO signals) of the machine to be relayed through a terminal block. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION 15. connected via an operator’s panel I/O module and a cable.1 Overview The relay terminal block module B.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15. 15.11 RELAY TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE B 15. Signals can be expanded to up to 96 DI signals and 64 DO signals.11.2 Connection I/O LINK JD1A +24–V power (DOCOM) JA3 Relay module B#1 JD1B CE56 CE57 +24V Power +24V Power CPD1(IN) CPD1(OUT) Sub–operator’s panel I/O printed circuit board A20B–2002–0521 JD1A CE70 CE70 Relay module B#2 DI=24 DO=16 DI=24 DO=16 347 .11.

3 21 DICOM 22 X90.2 X90.1 X90.3 Y91.5 X91.4 X92.4 12 +24E 11 X91.1 10 X91.5 X92.6 25 Y90.6 23 X90.0 15 16 +24E 14 X91.1 Y91.6 DOCOM DOCOM B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 +24V X90.0 X90.1 Y90.7 DOCOM DOCOM XT70A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0V DICOM X90.3 X91.4 0V Y91.0 9 +24E 8 X90.54DSA) A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 0V X90.4 X91.5 13 X91.2 Y90.5 348 .0 X91.1 Y90.5 Y91.2 22 Y90.5 Y91.15.2 Y91.3 29 0V 30 Y91.3 X90.4 X90.2 28 Y91.6 X91.6 31 Y91.6 29 X91.0 Y90.4 Y90.7 30 +24E 31 X92.6 X92.2 26 X91.4 0V Y90.1 Y91.5 Y90.1 X92.1 X91.7 0V 32 +24V Y91.5 Y90.0 0V Y90.3 Y90.4 6 DICOM 5 X90. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Pin layout in relay module B#1 [CE56–to–CE70 connection] CE70 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.3 X92.3 23 0V 24 Y90.4 Y91.2 X92.2 20 X90.6 X92.0 Y91.3 32 X92.1 X92.5 X90.5 7 X90.3 27 +24E 28 X91.4 X92.0 X92.2 X91.1 4 17 18 19 +0V DICOM X90.7 DICOM Y90.7 20 0V 21 Y90.6 DICOM Y90.7 X92.7 X91.0 0V 17 18 19 +24E X92.0 3 1 2 XT70B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) +24E X92.2 X92.7 24 +24E 25 X91.7 Y91.7 26 0V 27 Y91.6 Y91.

7 Y93.5 Y92.5 Y92.0 Y93.4 6 DICOM 5 X93.3 X94.5 X93.5 Y93.3 Y92.6 X95.4 X95.4 0V Y93.4 Y93.5 Y93.3 29 0V 30 Y93.2 Y92.0 0V 17 18 19 +24E X95.4 12 +24E 11 X94.0 3 1 2 XT70B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) +24E X95.7 DICOM Y92.3 X93.4 X94.6 X95.6 X94.4 Y92.6 25 Y92.7 20 0V 21 Y92.3 X95.6 DOCOM DOCOM B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 +24V X93.2 X93.7 26 0V 27 Y93.5 X94.1 4 17 18 19 +0V DICOM X93.1 Y93.3 23 0V 24 Y92.1 Y92.2 28 Y93.1 10 X94.54DSA) A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 0V X93.0 X95.1 Y93.2 20 X93.2 X94.7 30 +24E 31 X95.1 X95.2 Y93.0 Y92.7 0V 32 +24V Y93.2 X95.0 0V Y92.7 24 +24E 25 X94.4 X95.3 21 DICOM 22 X93.6 DICOM Y92.5 7 X93.1 X93. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION Pin layout in relay module B#2 [CE57–to–CE70 connection] CE70 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.3 Y93.6 29 X94.6 23 X93.2 22 Y92.7 DOCOM DOCOM XT70A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0V DICOM X93.3 32 X95.4 0V Y92.2 26 X94.3 27 +24E 28 X94.1 X94.0 9 +24E 8 X93.4 X93.6 Y93.6 31 Y93.2 X95.1 X95.7 X94.7 X95.5 X95.1 Y92.5 13 X94.5 349 .0 X93.0 15 16 +24E 14 X94.0 X94.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 15.

3 Specifications 15.11.2 Outside dimensions Screw hole . .3.3.11.1 Ordering information (1) Name Relay terminal block module B Specification A03B–0815–C022 Remarks 15. (Unit: mm) 350 . .11. . . EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 15. . . . . The relay module B can be mounted by using screws or mounted on a DIN rail.15. .

Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION 16 Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION 351 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 16.

for machining requiring a high precision. Do not use this function when the displacement is small because the Z–axis becomes more unstable instead. Conventionally. NOTE The displacement may not be able to be precisely compensated depending on the use conditions and environment. after the machine starts motion. You can use this function to start machining without dry run. Generally. Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 16. 352 . such as the displacement generated due to a worn tool cannot be compensated. the Z–axis is extending downward and it becomes stable after 2 or 3 hours.16.1 OVERVIEW The Z–axis thermal displacement compensation function estimates the amount of the thermal displacement in the Z–axis direction that is generated by the motion of the machine and compensates the displacement with using no sensor. Any displacement that is not generated by the motion of the machine. dry run is performed before start of machining to cancel the extension and machining is started when the Z–axis becomes stable.

After setting this parameter. always turn the power off. = 1: Enables the function.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 16. Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION 16. 353 . K17#1 = 0: Disables the Z–axis thermal displacement compensation function. then on again.2 ENABLING THE Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION Set keep relay K17#1 to 1 to enable the Z–axis thermal displacement compensation function.

respectively. then on again. (2) Turn the power off. This function uses data tables. see Tables 16. 16.3 (b). Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 16. When 180 minutes have elapsed. NOTE 1 To keep a history of the amounts of estimated thermal displacements at another Z–axis position.1 History of the Amounts of Estimated Thermal Displacements Keep a history of the amounts of estimated thermal displacements at the specified position on the Z–axis. keeping the history stops. the thermal displacement compensation amount can be adjusted to decrease the compensation error.3 (a) and 16. (3) The amounts of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement and of the estimated spindle thermal displacement at the Z–axis position (called the compensation position below) specified for D5940 immediately after power–on are saved in D5948 and D5950. For the data tables used. the data table for saving a history (D5948 to D6022) is cleared and keeping a new history starts. (1) First. set a Z–axis machine position for D5940 again. By this operation. then turn the power off once. (4) After that. the amounts of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement and of the estimated spindle thermal displacement at the compensation position are saved at 10–minute intervals to keep them as the history.3.16. set the position (Z machine coordinate) at which a history of the amounts of estimated thermal displacements is to be kept in D5940 in the data table. 2 Data is saved as a history at 10–minute intervals until 180 minutes have elapsed. 354 .3 ADJUSTING THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION If the thermal displacement compensated by this function (the estimated thermal displacement) differs from the actual thermal displacement.

(2) The thermal displacements of the Z–axis and spindle estimated when the workpiece is machined are set in D5944 and D5946. and the compensation error is set in data table D5942.3. a negative value is set. a positive value is set. the coefficient is modified automatically. Increment system mm mm D5944 mm D5946 mm 355 .2 (a) Data table set for adjusting thermal displacement compensation Address D5940 D5942 Description Z machine coordinate of the compensation position Estimated thermal displacements at this position are saved as a history. Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at termination of machining the workpiece Estimated using data saved as the history. Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement at termination of machining the workpiece Estimated using data saved as the history. a compensation error may become larger at a position other than the specified position. (3) Turn the power off. Compensation error obtained by measuring workpiece dimensions. Table 16. Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION 16. NOTE Only one position on the Z–axis can be specified.2 Adjustment Procedure From the actual displacement obtained by measuring workpiece dimensions (a compensation error) and the thermal displacement estimated in the previous subsection. The thermal displacements (the Z–axis and spindle) estimated at the time of workpiece machining are based on the history data saved in the previous subsection. (1) The workpiece dimensions are measured.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 16. then on again. After adjustment.3. In case of excessive compensation (when the compensation amount is to be decreased). In case of insufficient compensation (when the compensation amount is to be increased further). respectively. The coefficient for calculating an estimated thermal displacement is now changed and the amount of an estimated thermal displacement obtained by calculation becomes more precise.

3.2 (b) Data table for saving estimated thermal displacements as a history (1/2) Address D5948 D5950 D5952 D5954 D5956 D5958 D5960 D5962 D5964 D5966 D5968 D5970 D5972 D5974 D5976 D5978 D5980 D5982 D5984 D5986 Description Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (when keeping a history starts) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (when keeping a history starts) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (10 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (10 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (20 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (20 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (30 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (30 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (40 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (40 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (50 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (50 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (60 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (60 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (70 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (70 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (80 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (80 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (90 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (90 minutes after keeping a history started) Increment system mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 356 . Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Table 16.16.

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 16. Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION Table 16.3.2 (b) Data table for saving estimated thermal displacements as a history (2/2) Address D5988 D5990 D5992 D5994 D5996 D5998 D6000 D6002 D6004 D6006 D6008 D6010 D6012 D6014 D6016 D6018 D6020 D6022 Description Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (100 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (100 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (110 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (110 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (120 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (120 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (130 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (130 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (140 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (140 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (150 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (150 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (160 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (160 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (170 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (170 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (180 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (180 minutes after keeping a history started) Increment system mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 357 .

the power is turned off after about 5 seconds. To set conditions related to automatic power–off. AUTOMATIC POWER SUPPLY SHUT–OFF DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 17 AUTOMATIC POWER SUPPLY SHUT–OFF This function automatically shuts off the power supply to the unit upon termination of a given program.17. (Only for a standard operator’s panel) 358 . POWER OFF BY ALARM : Specifies whether to operate the automatic power–off function (ON) or not (OFF) when an alarm occurs. use [FUNCTIONS]. (1) Select the “AUTOMATIC POWER OFF”. (2) When M30 (end of program) is issued. RELEASE AT TURN ON THE POWER : Specifies whether to release the automatic power–off setting (ON) or not (OFF) at power–on.

359 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 17. 2 When the automatic circuit breaker function (option) is provided. AUTOMATIC POWER SUPPLY SHUT–OFF NOTE 1 This function cannot be activated using the program end code of M02. the circuit breaker of the controller is turned off. 3 This function does not operate for about 70 seconds after power–on.

18. NOTE See II–3. 100 or 200 liters. The coolant unit supplies coolant to the machining surface. The reservoir capacity is approx. COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 18 COOLANT (OPTION) A coolant unit is provided as an option.10 for installing the coolant unit. 360 .

Do not place the nozzle too close to the tool since it may cause interference between the nozzle and the turret during a tool change. (The pump can be stopped by pressing the button again. This causes coolant to come out of the nozzle tip. (2) Open the valve on the nozzle. COOLANT (OPTION) 18.18. Fig.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 18.1 (a) Nozzle 361 . (3) Press the “CLNT” key to rotate the pump. follow the procedure described below.) When the coolant unit is operating When the coolant unit is at a halt (4) Adjust the nozzle position so that coolant is poured on the correct position. replenish the reservoir with coolant. If not. Never try to adjust the nozzle position while the unit is running since it is very dangerous.1 COOLANT UNIT (OPTION) To supply coolant to the machining surface. (1) Confirm that the reservoir is filled with coolant.

1 (b) Pump 362 .1 (b) shows the rotating direction of the pump. Failure to observe either one of these practices may result in pump failure. To turn on and off the coolant unit automatically. execute M08 (ON) or M09 (OFF) in either the AUTO (MEM) or MENU (MDI) mode. NOTE 1 Never try to operate the pump for a prolonged period of time when the coolant reservoir is empty.) Never try to operate the pump with the valve closed. 2 The coolant unit will be turned on or off during automatic running in the M code as follows. Direction of rotation Fig.18. M09: The coolant unit is turned off after the block has been executed. (PMC Parameter K0#7=0) 3 The coolant unit is turned off during the tool change. M08: The coolant unit is immediately turned on when the block is read. 4 Fig. 18. COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 The coolant unit can be turned on (supplying coolant) and off (stop supplying coolant) automatically using the M code command or manually using the coolant button mentioned in step (3) above. Turn the coolant unit on using the the coolant key or the M08 code as required.18. (Be sure to fill the reservoir with coolant before operating the pump by following step (1) above.

If the shower gun is pointed towards the outside of the splash guard. use the shower gun only within the splash guard. COOLANT (OPTION) NOTE 5 To use the [COOLANT] key on the operator’s panel and M08 command for controlling the coolant unit.SELECTION]Screen of [QUICK]Screen and set “FOR COOLANT” for [M08 COMMAND] and [COOLANT BUTTON]. When using a machine cleaning coolant device. 363 . spilled coolant is likely to make the floor slippery.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 18. select [FUNCTIONS] on [31:SEQ.

the inside cleaning coolant unit is turned off. set bit 3 of PMC parameter K0 to 1. the inside cleaning coolant unit is turned on. NOTE 1 To stop the inside cleaning coolant unit in the emergency stop state. When using the machine cleaning coolant. set [MACHINE CLEANING COOLANT] to [ON] on quick screen STANDARD SELECTION. The control unit is rated up to 200 V.) When a fixed time (default: 1 minute (PMC parameter T02)) has elapsed after termination of programmed operation (including MDI operation). 364 . When using non–FANUC coolant. the inside cleaning coolant unit can automatically be stopped. When programmed operation starts. Pressing the manual button on the operator’s panel turns on cleaning coolant in the machine.6 A. (Set bit 3 of PMC parameter K6 to 1. adjust the thermal setting of the control MCC according to the rating of the coolant motor.18. COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 18. 2 When machining is not performed.2 MACHINE CLEANING COOLANT CONTROL (OPTIONAL) The ROBODRILL uses a 400–W motor for machine cleaning coolant. 2.

air blow operation can be turned on. Select [FUNCTIONS] on [31:SEQ. (Normally. [Press] Blower is turned off. (Normally. 365 .B–85014EN/01 APPENDIX 19.SELECTION] of [QUICK]Screen and set “FOR BLOWER” for [M08 COMMAND].SELECTION] of [QUICK]Screen and set “FOR BLOWER” for [COOLANT BUTTON]. [Press] Select [FUNCTIONS]on [31:SEQ. Even when the safety door is open.) (2) Turning the blower on or off from the machine operator’s panel. Blower is turned on. “FOR COOLANT” is selected. “FOR COOLANT” is selected.) Basic control is the same as for the coolant unit. BLOWER CONTROL FUNCTION (OPTION) 19 BLOWER CONTROL FUNCTION (OPTION) (1) Turning the blower on or off by specifying an M code M50 : Blower turned on M09 : Blower turned off You can also use M08 for turning air blow on.

This means that when the <Door Open/Close> key is pressed during automatic operation.SELECTION]of [QUICK]Screen. can be automatically opened and closed by pressing the “DOOR OPEN” or “DOOR CLOSE” key. the “DOOR OPEN/CLOSE” key lamp lights to indicate that the motion has been completed. confirm the absence of any foreign material at the door slides. select [FUNCTIONS] on [31:SEQ. and the automatic door opens. a gradual stop occurs along each axis. (1) Before opening or closing the door. which has the automatic door function. or The <Door Open/Close> key is enabled. regardless of the operation mode. OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 20 MANUAL mode OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION) The front door of splash guard. To enable the <Door Open/Close> key in the manual mode. (2) The door can be automatically opened or closed by pressing the “DOOR OPEN/CLOSE” key. (3) When the door has been properly opened or closed.20. 366 . set the following parameter: PMC parameter keep relay K11 bit 2 = 1 AUTO and MENU modes To set conditions for opening and closing the door in the automatic (MEM) mode and menu operation (MDI) mode.

367 . adjust it with the speed control adjustment screws mounted on the air cylinder.” is issued. M01 : Opens the automatic door when M00 or M01 is issued.5 seconds) [3 seconds or more (not longer than 3.5 seconds) for L type]. If door operation time is not within this range. NOTE 1 Pay attention not to get your head or hand caught in the door when it is automatically moving. 4 The door open/close time is 2 seconds or more (not longer than 2. 2 If the time of door open (or close) operation exceeds 4 seconds due to a foreign matter. Remove the foreign matter and press the [RESET] key to release the alarm. DOOR OPENING BY M00. then press the DOOR key to complete door open or close operation. 3 The automatic door does not operate in the emergency stop state.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 20. OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION) DOOR CLOSING BY START BUTTON : Automatically closes the door at the cycle start and starts programmed operation. DOOR OPENING BY M30 : Opens the automatic door when M30 is issued. alarm “1008 AUTO DOOR TOTAL TIME OVER.

) (a) α–T14(21)iCe/iCLe Inside of the machine Front of the machine Speed control adjustment screw for opening the door (The yellow air tubeis connected here.) Speed control adjustment screw for closing the door (The transparent air tude is connected here.) Speed control adjustment screw for opening the door (The yellow air tubeis connected here. OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Inside of the machine Front of the machine Speed control adjustment screw for closing the door (The transparent air tude is connected here.20.) (b) α–T14/21iCSe 368 .

defects may occur.2 second. OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION) D Tightening the adjustment screw by one rotation slows the door open/close speed by approximately 0. If the time is set to two seconds or shorter (three seconds or shorter for the α–T14/21iCLe).1 to 0.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 20. D Do not set the opening/closing time to two seconds or shorter (for the α–T14 (21) iCe/iCSe). Related parameters PMC parameters (TIMER) T20 4000 [ms] Total time for door open and close operations 369 .

Input EDIT. D Dry run mode is selected..21.. NOTE * Sheet keys other than Numeric keypad. INTERNAL LIGHT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 21 INTERNAL LIGHT (OPTION) The internal is turned on or off according to the setting of the Quick Screen. Page.Z). In the following cases. 370 . SELECTION. Cursor. change the PRESET value (PMC parameter counter No. Alarm/status.” The internal light is automatically turned off if no key on the operator’s panel (*) is pressed within the specified period (standard setting: 10 minutes). pressing any key on the operator’s panel turns on the internal light automatically. To disable automatic turn–off. To change the period for automatically turning off the internal light. Alphabet (ABC. Reset. Insert Delete. D Single block mode is selected. Alter. “SEQ. however. 4) (in units of minutes: up to 9999 minutes). set this parameter to 0. the internal light is not automatically turned off even if no key on the operator’s panel is pressed within the specified period: D The door is open. QUICK/NC. Subsequently. Cancel.

INTERFACE] quick screen. The following states are indicated with these three lamps: (1) A program is being executed. or program end (M02 or M30) coded in a program. (The green lamp is on. (The yellow lamp blinks.) (2) The machine is stopped by a program stop (M00).) NOTE The setting of the status indicator can be changed using [MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT] of the [43: EXT. STATUS LIGHTS (OPTION) 22 STATUS LIGHTS (OPTION) The stopped state of the machine is indicated with the red. 371 .) (3) The machine is stopped by an Alarm.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 22. After making the desired changes. (The red lamp blinks. and green lamps. Select an output type (LIGHT UP/BLINK). then press the [ON] or [OFF] soft key. press the [END] soft key. Position the cursor to the output menu to be set. yellow. optional stop (M01).

which is specified in a parameter. Do NOT change the setting of this parameter. In the same way as for the X–.23. and Z–axes. Do not change the setting of the feedrate parameter. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 23 ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) One or two servo motors can be controlled as the fourth axis (additional axis). The additional axis shall always be installed on the table. The additional axis (option) is mainly intended to be used with an index unit (based on a rotation axis) on the table.5/3000 (A06B–0113–B075) α1/3000 (A06B–0371–B075) α2/2000 (A06B–0372–B075) α2/3000 (A06B–0373–B075) α3/3000 (A06B–0123–B075) α6/2000 (A06B–0127–B075) α1/5000i (A06B–0202–B000) α2/5000i (A06B–0205–B000) αM2/5000i (A06B–0212–B000) αM3/5000i (A06B–0215–B000) α4/4000i (A06B–0223–B000) α8/3000i (A06B–0227–B000) Install an additional axis (option) on the table. It can be fed by the manual handle or at 600 degrees/min or less. the additional axis can be driven only by manual operation if the safety door is open. Y–. the fixed cover or safety door cannot be used to protect the operator from the additional axis. If it is installed in any other place. 372 . Controllable motors are as follows: β0. This is a very dangerous situation.

The cursor is displayed in the [RESTORATION] menu. Press soft key [EXEC]. (4) The following window appears. 373 . Move the cursor to “ADD. (2) Press soft key [RESTORATION].1 SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS (1) Display [QUICK]Screen. (3) Select the motor model.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23.AXIS PARAMETER” and press soft key [SELECT]. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) 23. [32:MAINTENANCE/ SETTING]. then [3:PARAMETER].

23. the following window appears. 374 . Turn the power off. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (5) After termination of parameter setting. then on again. and change and set parameters as required.

set 10.000. When you change the value of parameter 2085. 65: A) (65) 20 Command multiply (CMR) 40000 Reference counter capacity 10000 Grid shift (When making a shift of 1_. 1: –) 0: Linear axis.) 192 Load inertia ratio 111 Direction of motor rotation (111: Clockwise. 1006B 76543210 160001 Bit 5 Bit 0 1020B 1820B 1821B 1850B 2021B 2022B 2084B 2085B Description Reference position return direction (0: +.2 OTHER RELATED PARAMETERS (STANDARD SETTING) Example When the gear reduction ratio is 1:90: B : 4th axis A : 5th axis PRM No. -111: Counterclockwise) 4 (N) 100 (M) Flexible feed gear ratio (DMR) (N/M) (For a gear reduction ratio of 1/90) When you change the value of parameter 2084. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) 23. set the same value for parameter 2078. set the same value for parameter 2079. 1: Rotation axis 66 Axis name (66: B.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23. 2078 : Dual position feedback conversion coefficient (numerator) 2079 : Dual position feedback conversion coefficient (denominator) 375 .

23. 1821B) = 1000000 M (No. 1000000 P/rev) : 0. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 23. N (No. 1821B) 376 .000. 2084B) . also change the reference counter capacity (parameter No. . .000 = 4 100 360 0. . 1821B). . . . 2085B) NOTE When changing the standard setting of the flexible feed gear ratio (N/M) to a nonstandard setting. 2084B) Reference counter capacity (No. . (No. (No.3 CALCULATING THE FLEXIBLE FEED GEAR (DETECTION MULTIPLY DMR) Example Gear reduction ratio of the index table: 1:90 Servo motor used Detection unit Calculation Target number of pulses issued per table rotation: Number of pulses of the pulse coder per table rotation: Flexible feed gear N/M is calculated as follows: N M = 3600000 90. . 6 Reference counter capacity = 100 1000000 = 60000 · · · · ( No. .0001_ 1000000 .0001 = 3600000 pulses 90 = 90000000 pulses : α3 (with a serial pulse coder. 2085B) Example: Assuming N/M = 6/100. .

2 The parameter can be set with a value from 0 to "99999999 in the least input increment units.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) 23. set the parameter to “10000. To shift the table zero point by 1°.” 377 . it is necessary to switch off the power. NOTE 1 Once the parameter is re–set. 1850B can shift the reference position (zero point).4 GRID SHIFT Setting a grid shift amount in No.

7 No.0012 bit.23. 5 Factory-set 0 1 1 Removing auxiliary axis 1 1 0 378 . ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 23.) NC parameter No. change the parameters listed below. a servo alarm occurs and inhibits operation.1815 bit.5 REMOVING AUXILIARY AXES To remove an auxiliary axis. (Otherwise.1005 bit. 7 No.

6 SERVO PARAMETERS (STANDARD) (1) FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α/β series B: fourth axis Motor NO. 0012B 1005B 1006B 1007B 1008B 1020B 1022B (NOTE)1023B 1220B 1221B 1222B 1223B 1224B 1225B 1226B 1240B 1241B 1242B 1243B 1244B 1250B 1251B 1260B 1310B 1320B 1321B 1322B 1323B 1324B 1325B 1326B 1327B 1420B β0.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) 23.5/3000 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 00000000 9999999 –9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 –99999999 4000 α1/3000 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 00000000 9999999 –9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 –99999999 4000 α2/2000 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 00000000 9999999 –9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 –99999999 4000 α2/3000 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 00000000 9999999 –9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 –99999999 4000 α3/3000 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 00000000 9999999 –9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 –99999999 4000 α6/2000 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 00000000 9999999 –9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 –99999999 4000 379 .

23. 1421B 1423B 1424B 1425B 1427B 1428B 1430B 1432B 1434B 1610B 1620B 1621B 1622B 1623B 1624B 1625B 1722B 1762B 1763B 1783B 1785B 1815B 1816B 1817B 1819B 1820B 1821B 1825B 1826B 1827B 1828B 1829B 1832B 1838B 1850B 1851B 1852B 1860B 1861B β0.5/3000 76543210 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * α1/3000 76543210 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * α2/2000 76543210 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * α2/3000 76543210 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * α3/3000 76543210 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * α6/2000 76543210 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * 380 . ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Motor NO.

5/3000 76543210 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 –99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 01000100 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 13 128 111 8192 12500 176 –864 –2556 9 –79 0 –8235 –4789 0 α1/3000 76543210 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 –99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 01000100 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 61 128 111 8192 12500 312 –1685 –2480 111 –997 0 –8235 3806 0 α2/2000 76543210 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 –99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 46 128 111 8192 12500 936 –3662 –2485 91 –812 0 –8235 4674 0 α2/3000 76543210 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 –99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 01000100 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 62 128 111 8192 12500 424 –2645 –2490 128 –1146 0 –8235 3311 0 α3/3000 76543210 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 –99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 01000010 01000100 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 15 128 111 8192 12500 946 –4706 –3052 87 –781 0 –8235 4858 0 α6/2000 76543210 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 –99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 01000010 01000100 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 16 128 111 8192 12500 1643 –6710 –3052 99 –887 0 –8235 4639 0 381 . ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) Motor NO. 1904B (NOTE)1905B 1923 (NOTE)1924 1942B 1943B 1944B 2000B 2001B 2002B 2003B 2004B 2005B 2006B 2007B 2008B 2009B 2010B 2011B 2012B 2013B 2014B 2015B 2016B 2017B 2020B 2021B 2022B 2023B 2024B 2040B 2041B 2042B 2043B 2044B 2045B 2046B 2047B 2048B β0.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23.

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Motor NO. 2049B 2050B 2051B 2052B 2053B 2054B 2055B 2056B 2057B 2058B 2059B 2060B 2061B 2062B 2063B 2064B 2065B 2066B 2067B 2068B 2069B 2070B 2071B 2074B 2076B 2077B 2078B 2079B 2082B 2083B 2084B 2085B 2086B 2087B 2088B 2089B 2092B 2095B 2098B β0.5/3000 76543210 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 1200 2000 77 5 7282 120 32585 2288 4 6797 0 0 0 100 0 0 17384 0 0 4 100 0 100 4 100 1918 0 0 0 9200 0 5160 α1/3000 76543210 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 2800 2330 57 5 7282 120 32623 1811 4 5377 0 0 0 100 0 0 1680 0 0 4 100 0 100 4 100 1706 0 0 0 9200 0 50 α2/2000 76543210 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 2147 –7690 –1000 0 7282 120 32627 1766 4 5245 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 4 100 0 100 4 100 1685 0 0 0 9200 0 0 α2/3000 76543210 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 2520 –6156 –1200 5 7282 120 32519 3112 4 9256 0 0 0 100 0 0 8194 0 0 4 100 0 100 4 100 2239 0 0 0 9200 0 0 α3/3000 76543210 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 2000 –7690 –800 5 7282 120 32713 690 4 2045 0 0 0 100 0 0 3000 0 0 4 100 0 100 4 100 1052 0 0 0 9200 0 0 α6/2000 76543210 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 3500 –6415 –1600 5 7282 120 32689 991 4 2940 0 0 0 100 0 0 8192 0 0 4 100 0 100 4 100 1052 0 0 0 9200 0 10265 382 .

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23.5/3000 76543210 400 15000 0 0 29 100 16 0 7790 0 20 400 0 0 0 0 16 9900 100 0 0 0 0 0 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 α1/3000 76543210 400 15000 0 0 51 100 16 0 7715 0 20 785 0 0 7710 12830 16 9900 100 0 0 0 0 0 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 α2/2000 76543210 400 15000 0 0 104 100 16 0 6194 12776 20 4800 2500 1806 0 0 16 9900 100 0 0 0 0 0 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 α2/3000 76543210 400 15000 0 0 74 100 16 0 7780 0 20 2300 3000 3088 7710 12830 16 9900 100 0 0 0 0 0 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 α3/3000 76543210 400 15000 0 0 251 100 16 32 6214 0 20 2047 1500 1812 0 0 16 9900 100 0 0 0 0 0 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 α6/2000 76543210 400 15000 0 0 419 100 16 32 3960 0 20 2729 5000 1556 0 0 16 9900 100 0 0 0 0 0 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 383 . 2099B 2102B 2103B 2104B 2105B 2107B 2109B 2110B 2111B 2115B 2119B 2127B 2128B 2129B 2133B 2134B 2143B 2144B 2145B 2156B 2162B 2163B 2164B 2165B 2178B 2200B 2201B 2202B 2203B 2207B 2208B 2209B 2210B 2211B 2212B 2213B 2334B 2335B 3115B β0. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) Motor NO.

3620B 3621B 3622B 3623B 3624B 5401B 5421B 5440B 6131B 8410B 8470B 19510B β0.5/3000 76543210 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120 α1/3000 76543210 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120 α2/2000 76543210 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120 α2/3000 76543210 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120 α3/3000 76543210 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120 α6/2000 76543210 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120 (2) FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series B: fourth axis Motor NO. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Motor NO. 0012B 1005B 1006B 1007B 1008B 1020B 1022B (NOTE)1023B 1220B 1221B 1222B 1223B 1224B 1225B 1226B 1240B 1241B 1242B 1243B 1244B 1250B 1251B 1260B α1/5000i 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 α2/5000i 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 αM2/5000i 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 αM3/5000i 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 α4/4000i 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 α8/3000i 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 384 .23.

1310B 1320B 1321B 1322B 1323B 1324B 1325B 1326B 1327B 1420B 1421B 1423B 1424B 1425B 1427B 1428B 1430B 1432B 1434B 1610B 1620B 1621B 1622B 1623B 1624B 1625B 1722B 1762B 1763B 1783B 1785B 1815B 1816B 1817B 1819B 1820B 1821B 1825B 1826B α1/5000i 76543210 00000000 9999999 –9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 –99999999 4000 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 α2/5000i 76543210 00000000 9999999 –9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 –99999999 4000 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 αM2/5000i 76543210 00000000 9999999 –9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 –99999999 4000 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 αM3/5000i 76543210 00000000 9999999 –9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 –99999999 4000 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 α4/4000i 76543210 00000000 9999999 –9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 –99999999 4000 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 α8/3000i 76543210 00000000 9999999 –9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 –99999999 4000 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 385 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) Motor NO.

1827B 1828B 1829B 1832B 1838B 1850B 1851B 1852B 1860B 1861B 1904B (NOTE)1905B 1923 (NOTE)1924 1942B 1943B 1944B 2000B 2001B 2002B 2003B 2004B 2005B 2006B 2007B 2008B 2009B 2010B 2011B 2012B 2013B 2014B 2015B 2016B 2017B 2020B 2021B 2022B 2023B α1/5000i 76543210 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 –99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 252 128 111 8192 α2/5000i 76543210 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 –99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 255 128 111 8192 αM2/5000i 76543210 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 –99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 262 128 111 8192 αM3/5000i 76543210 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 –99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 265 128 111 8192 α4/4000i 76543210 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 –99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 273 128 111 8192 α8/3000i 76543210 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 –99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 277 128 111 8192 386 .23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Motor NO.

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23. 2024B 2040B 2041B 2042B 2043B 2044B 2045B 2046B 2047B 2048B 2049B 2050B 2051B 2052B 2053B 2054B 2055B 2056B 2057B 2058B 2059B 2060B 2061B 2062B 2063B 2064B 2065B 2066B 2067B 2068B 2069B 2070B 2071B 2074B 2076B 2077B 2078B 2079B 2082B α1/5000i 76543210 12500 620 –3034 –1256 66 –594 0 –8235 6384 0 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 0 0 0 0 7282 0 32613 1933 4 5739 0 0 0 100 0 0 20480 0 0 4 100 0 α2/5000i 76543210 12500 760 –3743 –1283 76 –680 0 –8235 5578 0 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 0 –12298 –1275 0 7282 0 32497 3390 4 10085 0 0 0 100 0 0 12288 0 0 4 100 0 αM2/5000i 76543210 12500 530 –2543 –1251 39 –350 0 –8235 10853 0 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 0 –10250 –2000 0 7282 0 32528 3005 4 8936 0 0 0 100 0 0 20480 0 0 4 100 0 αM3/5000i 76543210 12500 420 –1748 –1276 64 –574 0 –8235 –661 0 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 0 –8974 –3641 0 7282 0 32315 5660 4 16888 0 0 0 100 0 0 12288 0 0 4 100 0 α4/4000i 76543210 12500 993 –4260 –1311 106 –953 0 –8235 3980 0 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 0 –11789 –180 0 8010 0 32446 4029 4 11998 0 0 0 100 0 0 8192 0 0 4 100 0 α8/3000i 76543210 12500 787 –4184 –1325 113 –1009 0 –8235 3760 0 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 0 –6420 –2000 0 8010 0 32383 4807 4 14327 0 0 0 100 0 0 8192 0 0 4 100 0 387 . ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) Motor NO.

23. 2083B 2084B 2085B 2086B 2087B 2088B 2089B 2092B 2095B 2098B 2099B 2102B 2103B 2104B 2105B 2107B 2109B 2110B 2111B 2115B 2119B 2127B 2128B 2129B 2133B 2134B 2143B 2144B 2145B 2156B 2162B 2163B 2164B 2165B 2178B 2200B 2201B 2202B 2203B α1/5000i 76543210 100 4 100 1234 0 0 0 9200 0 0 400 0 0 0 72 100 16 32 10260 0 20 1188 1667 3858 7690 12840 16 9900 100 0 32767 13 2425 25 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 α2/5000i 76543210 100 4 100 1636 0 0 0 9200 0 0 400 0 0 0 109 100 16 32 10280 0 20 1276 2000 3862 7693 12840 16 9900 100 0 32766 23 4261 25 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 αM2/5000i 76543210 100 4 100 1540 0 0 0 9200 0 0 400 0 0 0 117 100 16 32 8995 0 20 1137 1000 3851 7690 12840 16 9900 100 0 32766 20 3776 25 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 αM3/5000i 76543210 100 4 100 2117 0 0 0 9200 0 0 400 0 0 0 127 100 16 8 10295 0 20 646 1667 3847 7690 12840 16 9900 100 0 32765 40 7135 25 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 α4/4000i 76543210 100 4 100 1784 0 0 0 9200 0 0 400 15000 0 0 201 100 16 32 5130 0 20 1443 2000 3338 6670 5140 16 9900 100 0 32766 27 5069 45 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 α8/3000i 76543210 100 4 100 1950 0 0 0 9200 0 0 400 15000 0 0 369 100 16 776 3870 0 20 2103 3500 1815 0 0 16 9900 100 0 32765 33 6053 45 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 388 . ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Motor NO.

2207B 2208B 2209B 2210B 2211B 2212B 2213B 2334B 2335B 3115B 3620B 3621B 3622B 3623B 3624B 5401B 5421B 5440B 6131B 8410B 8470B 19510B α1/5000i 76543210 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00001010 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120 α2/5000i 76543210 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00001010 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120 αM2/5000i 76543210 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00001010 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120 αM3/5000i 76543210 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00001010 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120 α4/4000i 76543210 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000010 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120 α8/3000i 76543210 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120 389 . ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) Motor NO.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23.

including the fourth axes. however. 390 .7 INDEX TABLE FUNCTION (OPTION) (1) Specifying a command D With the clamp/unclamp command (Clamp or unclamp command for the fourth axis) M72 B∆∆ M71 : : : (Unclamp) (Index) (Clamp)) Note) When using the fourth axis as the B–axis or M11 B∆∆ M10 : : : (Unclamp) (Index) (Clamp)) Note) When using the fourth axis as the B–axis (When making a reference position return. and Z–axes. D Feedrate G00/G01 can be applied in the same way as for the X–.) D Without the clamp/unclamp command B∆∆ : (Index) Note) When using the fourth axis as the B–axis) D Entering a value for the move command for the additional axis Without a decimal point With a decimal point) B1 B1 ! 0. D Number of axes to be subject to simultaneous control Among all axes. specify the unclamp command before movement along the additional axis starts. In MANUAL mode.001_ ! 1_ D Absolute/incremental command The absolute or incremental command can be specified with G90 or G91. only one axis can be controlled at a time.23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 23. Y–. up to three axes can be controlled simultaneously.

Pressing the [–] key instigates movement in the negative direction. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) (2) Manual operation Handle–mode operation can be executed in the same way as for the X–. [32:MAINTENANCE/SETTING]. then [2:MOTOR ORIGIN].B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23. (Selecting the fourth axis) [Press] (3) Return to the zero point (establishing the motor zero point) Display [QUICK]Screen. [For return to the motor origin with a dog] Pressing the [+] or [–] soft key causes a return to the zero point on the fourth axis (establishing the motor zero point). and Z–axes. (Pressing the [+] key instigates movement in the positive direction. Y–. 391 .) Keep the soft key held down until the completion of return to the zero point (establishing the motor zero point).

Pressing the [B+] or [B–] soft key instigates reference position return (movement to the machine zero point) on the fourth axis.) Keep the soft key held down until the completion of reference position return. close the safety door. (Pressing the [+] key instigates movement in the positive direction. (When the safety door is open. When motor reference position return is performed with the safety door open. the move speed about the additional axis is limited to 600 deg/min.) 392 . (4) Reference position return (moving to the machine zero point) Specify this operation on the 2: MENU OPERATION screen (a QUICK screen). ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 [For return to the motor origin without a dog] Perform motor origin return operation according to the guidance. then perform motor reference position return. In this case. Pressing the [–] instigates movement in the negative direction. alarm 90 REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE may be issued.23.

NOTE When M10. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) (5) Turning the servo motor off If the clamp or unclamp command is used for the fourth axis. In such a case. and Z–axes ! Movement along the axes can be enabled and disabled as necessary. This is because the clamp signal is input in the in–position state. or M71 is specified. or M71 command. (6) Disabling movement along axes (interlock) If the clamp/unclamp command is used for the fourth axis. Fourth axes ! Movement along the axes is not disabled. Y–. specify M72 or M11 (unclamp command) before movement along the axis starts. the servo off function can be used to prevent the servo motor from being overloaded by the use of the fourth axis. an alarm may be issued due to a position shift or excessively large error. Y–. and Z–axes ! Movement along the axes is not disabled. Fourth axes ! Movement along the axes is disabled. (7) Clamp/unclamp command (Fourth axis) Clamp command : M71 (or M10) Unclamp command : M72 (or M11) When using the clamp/unclamp command for the fourth axis.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23. the servo motor is activated or deactivated according to the status of the clamp/unclamp check switch. and M71 or M10 (clamp command) after completion of the movement. add a dwell operation before the M10. When the servo off function is used. 393 . operation is restricted as described below: In the clamp state : X–. In the unclamp state : X–.

the following alarms can be output: 506 OVERTRAVEL: +* (* corresponds to a displayed axis name. turn the power on. When the power line. After a power line. the detach (axis isolation) parameter is automatically reset so that the axis can be used. When the switch is tripped. signal line.) 507 OVERTRAVEL: –* 394 . (9) Overtravel function The range of motion along the fourth axis can be restricted by using a proximity switch.23. or similar has been connected or disconnected. After a QUICK screen or NC screen is displayed. signal line. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 [Clamp/unclamp timing] Command M72 Movement along the fourth axis M71 Clamp state ON OFF ON Clamp OFF ON OFF Unclamp OFF ON OFF Clamp check ON OFF ON Unclamp check OFF ON OFF (8) Detach function When the power line. or similar. turn the power off then on again. or similar is subsequently reconnected. for the fourth axis is disconnected. signal line. the function automatically sets a detach (axis isolation) parameter so that an axis alarm will not be displayed.

and Z-axes are interlocked. the servo motor is deactivated. the X-. 395 . The detach function and hardware overtravel function are used for the fourth axes.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23. the X-. Y-. (NC parameters) Parameter 3004#5 (OTH) Value 1 0 Function The hardware overtravel function is not used for the fourth axes. The clamp/unclamp command is not used for the fourth axis. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) (10)Setting parameters (PMC parameters) Keep relay K 2#1 Value 1 0 K 3#2 1 0 K 3#3 1 0 K 12#3 1 0 Function In the fourth-axis clamp state. and Z-axes are not interlocked. The clamp/unclamp command is used for the fourth axis. In the fourth-axis clamp state. The detach function and hardware overtravel function are not used for the fourth axes. the servo motor is not deactivated. In the fourth-axis unclamp state. Y-. The hardware overtravel function is used for the fourth axes. In the fourth-axis unclamp state.

8. Hirose Electric) (Right–angle plug. Hirose Electric) FANUC order number : A06B–6050–K115 H/MS3102A 20–29PCW4(10) Receptacle *1 178964–6 SDAB–15P (Hirose Electric) (Tyco Electronics AMP) (3) Power cable and input/output signal cable Servo AMP Connector *1 1)Additional 1 axis 1–917807–2 (Housing) H/MS3102A 22–14P H/MS3106A 22–14S H/MS3108B 22–14S JA06A–22–14S–J1 3–178129–6 (Housing) 1–175217–2 (Contact) (Tyco Electronics AMP) A06B–6050–K119 3–179554–3 (Tyco Electronics AMP) 2)Additional 2 axis 1–917807–2.23. *2 Available from the manufacturer of the index table. Hirose Electric) FI–20–CV (Connector cover. Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) Motor unit connection Plug *2 178289–6 (Housing) HDAB–15S 1–175217–2 (Contact) (Tyco Electronics AMP) HDAW–15–CV A06B–6050–K120 (Connector. 396 . Hirose Electric) (Plug. H/MS3106A 20–29SW(11) Hirose Electric) H/MS3108B 20–29SW(11) (Connector JA06A–20–29SW–J1–EB cover. Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) 176346–8 (Tyco Electronics AMP) FANUC order number : A06B–6050–K121 176339–2 (Tyco Electronics AMP) H/MS3106A 18–10S(10) H/MS3108B 18–10S(10) JA06A–18–10S–J1–(A72) H/MS3102A 18–10P–D– T(10) 3)31604D–6 (Contact) (Tyco Electronics AMP) Control unit connection Receptacle Plug *1 *2 Motor unit connection Plug *2 Receptacle *1 *1 Available from FANUC. Hirose Electric) H/MS3102A 20–29PW (Hirose Electric) H/MS3106A 20–29SW(11) H/MS3108B 20–29SW(11) JA06A–20–29SW–J1–EB (Straight plug. connection Control unit connection Receptacle Plug *1 *1 *2 FI40–2015S (Connector. 3–917807–2 (Housing) (Hirose Electric) (Straight plug.1 Connectors Motor model Pulse coder Motor code β0. Hirose Electric) (Right–angle plug. *3 All connectors to be used external to the machine shall be waterproof. Hirose Electric) (Plug.8 ADDITIONAL AXIS CABLE FOR THE INDEX TABLE (JAPAN AND EXPORT STANDARD) 23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 23.5/3000 βA32B (ABS) A06B–0113–B075 A06B–0371–B075 α1/3000 α2/3000 αA64 (ABS) A06B–0373–B075 A06B–0123–B075 α3/3000 (1) Motors for additional axis (2) Feedback cables Servo amp.

αM3i 1473060–2 (Tyco Electronics AMP) α4i. Hirose Electric) (Plug. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) 23. α8i Straight plug H/MS3106A18–10S(10) (Hirose Electric) JA06A–18–10S–J1–EB (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) MS3106A18–10S–B–BSS (DDK Ltd. JN1–22–22S: Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) A06B–6114–K200#E (FANUC number) *2 Right–angle plug Receptacle *1 JN1AS10UL1 (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) (3) Power cable and input/output signal cable Servo AMP Connector *1 1)Additional 1 axis 1–917807–2 (Housing) H/MS3102A 22–14P H/MS3106A 22–14S H/MS3108B 22–14S JA06A–22–14S–J1 α1i.8. *3 All connectors to be used external to the machine shall be waterproof.2 Connectors Motor model Pulse coder Motor code A06B–0202– B000 α1/5000i (1) Motors for additional axis α2/5000i αM2/5000i αM3/5000i α4/4000i α8/3000i αA1000i (ABS) A06B–0205– B000 A06B–0212– B000 A06B–0215– B000 A06B–0223– B000 A06B–0227– B000 (2) Feedback cables Servo amp.) H/MS3108B18–10S(10) (Hirose Electric) JA08A–18–10S–J1–EB (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) MS3108A18–10S–B–BAS (DDK Ltd. α8i H/MS3102A18–10P–D–T(10) (Hirose Electric) *1 Available from FANUC. αM2i. αM2i. connection Control unit connection Receptacle Plug *1 *1 *2 FI40–2015S (Connector. *2 Available from the manufacturer of the index table. Hirose Electric) (Plug.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23.) Receptacle *1 *1 α1i. Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) 3)31604D–6 (Contact) (Tyco Electronics AMP) Control unit connection Receptacle Plug *1 *2 Motor unit connection Plug *2 Right–angle plug H/MS3106A18–10S(13) (Hirose Electric) JA06A–18–10S–J1(A72) (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) MS3106A18–10S–B(D190) (DDK Ltd. 3–917807–2 (Housing) (Hirose Electric) (Straight plug. 397 . Hirose Electric) FI–20–CV (Connector cover. Hirose Electric) (Right–angle plug. Hirose Electric) (Right–angle plug. α2i. Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) Motor unit connection Plug *2 JN1DS10SL2. JN1–22–22S: Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) A06B–6114–K200#S (FANUC number) JN1FS10SL2. Hirose Electric) H/MS3102A 20–29PW (Hirose Electric) H/MS3106A 20–29SW(11) H/MS3108B 20–29SW(11) JA06A–20–29SW–J1–EB Straight plug (Straight plug.) 1473063–2 (Tyco Electronics AMP) / A06B–6114–K220#S (FANUC number) 1473393–2 (Tyco Electronics AMP) / A06B–6114–K220#E (FANUC number) 2)Additional 2 axis 1–917807–2. αM3i Straight Right–angle plug *2 α4i. α2i.

18mm2 0. (4th axis JF1) Control cabinet MS3102A20–29PW XS40 A D F G 0.18mm2 A5 +6VA +5V +5V 9 18 20 J K 0.5/3000 (a) Connecting the feedback cable INDEX TABLE Motor cover βA32B Pulse coder 178964–6 JF1 SD *SD REQ *REQ 1 2 5 6 7 A4 B4 A3 B3 SD *SD REQ *REQ 0.23.18mm2 +6VA R 0.8.5mm2 A2 B2 +5V +5V +5V 0V 12 14 N 0.18mm2 0.18mm2 (1) AC SV β0.3 Additional Axis Cable for the Index Table (4th axis) ROBODRILL Servo amp. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 23.5mm2 0.5mm2 A1 B1 0V 0V T 0.5mm2 A6 B6 0V SHLD Shield Grounding plate Available from FANUC Available from the manufacturer of the index table 398 .18mm2 0.5mm2 0V 0V 16 S H Shield 0.

0) *DEC4 (X9. Control cabinet MS3102A22–14P Motor cover INDEX TABLE U CZ2 B1 XS41 L 0.5mm2 or greater Unclamp check sewitch 0.5mm2 or greater 0.75mm2 or greater A2 G Tyco AMP D–3100D 178326–5 +24V UNCLPSW4 (X8.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23.3) *DTCH4 (X8.5mm2 or greater Solenoid valve for brake 4th-axis clamp 0.6) +OT4 (X8.5mm2 or greater (+) Overtravel 0.5) M11 . ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) (b) Connecting the motor power and index input/output signals ROBODRILL Servo amp.5) 0V CLAMP4 (Y1.7) XS25 A01 A02 B01 A04 B02 B06 B05 B04 A05 A03 B03 C D E F G P H R S A V 0.M72 (Y1.5mm2 or greater Clamp check switch Reference position return switch 0.75mm2 or greater M A4 U β Motor power 178289–6 1–175217–2 V A1 K U 0.M71 (Y1.5mm2 or greater 4th-axis unclamp 0.5mm2 or greater 0.75mm2 or greater A3 V W B2 J T 0.6) –OT4 (X8.5mm2 or greater Input common 0.75mm2 or greater A5 W G A2 N B 0.7) M10.5mm2 or greater Output common 0.5mm2 or greater (–) Overtravel Available from FANUC Available from the manufacturer of the index table 399 .1) CLPSW4 (X8.

5mm2 A2 B2 +5V +5V N T 0. (4th axis JF1) Control cabinet MS3102A20–29PW INDEX TABLE Motor cover αA64 Pulse coder D–SUB 15P JF1 SD *SD REQ *REQ +6VA 1 2 5 6 7 XS40 A D F G R 0.18mm2 0.18mm2 +5V +5V +5V 0V 0V 9 18 20 12 14 J K 0.18mm2 0.18mm2 0. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (2) AC SV α1/3000 or α2/3000 (a) Connecting the feedback cable ROBODRILL Servo amp.23.18mm2 A4 B4 A3 B3 A5 SD *SD REQ *REQ +6VA 0.5mm2 0.5mm2 A1 B1 0V 0V 0.5mm2 0V 16 S H Shield 0.18mm2 0.5mm2 A6 B6 0V SHLD Shield Grounding plate Available from FANUC Available from the manufacturer of the index table 400 .

5) 0V CLAMP4 (Y1.6) +OT4 (X8.1) CLPSW4 (X8.5mm2 or greater P 0. α2 Motor power HDAB–15S HDAW–15–CV U V A1 K U 0.6) –OT4 (X8.M71 (Y1.3) *DTCH4 (X8.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23.7) 0.5mm2 or greater R 0.5mm2 or greater Unclamp check sewitch E 0.5) M11 .5mm2 or greater A01 A02 B01 A04 B02 B06 B05 B04 A05 A03 B03 C 0.0) *DEC4 (X9.5mm2 or greater Output common Solenoid valve for brake 4th-axis clamp H 0.5mm2 or greater Clamp check switch F Reference position return switch G 0.5mm2 or greater S 0.5mm2 or greater 4th-axis unclamp A 0.75mm2 or greater A5 W G A2 N B A2 G XS25 Tyco AMP D–3100D 178326–5 +24V UNCLPSW4 (X8. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) (b) Connecting the motor power and index input/output signals ROBODRILL Servo amp.75mm2 or greater Motor cover U L M 0.75mm2 or greater A3 V W B2 J T 0.5mm2 or greater Input common D 0.75mm2 or greater A4 α1.M72 (Y1. INDEX TABLE CZ2 B1 Control cabinet MS3102A22–14P XS41 0.7) M10.5mm2 or greater (+) Overtravel (–) Overtravel V Available from FANUC Available from the manufacturer of the index table 401 .

5mm2 0V 16 S H Shield 0.5mm2 A6 B6 0V SHLD Shield Grounding plate Available from FANUC Available from the manufacturer of the index table 402 .18mm2 0. (4th axis JF1) Control cabinet MS3102A20–29PW INDEX TABLE Motor cover αA64 Pulse coder MS3102A20 –29PW 0.18mm2 0.5mm2 A1 B1 0V 0V 0.23.5mm2 0.18mm2 +5V +5V +5V 0V 0V 9 18 20 12 14 J K 0. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (3) AC SV α3/3000 (a) Connecting the feedback cable ROBODRILL Servo amp.18mm2 0.5mm2 A2 B2 +5V +5V N T 0.18mm2 JF1 1 2 5 6 7 XS40 A D F G R A4 B4 A3 B3 A5 SD *SD REQ *REQ +6VA SD *SD REQ *REQ +6VA 0.18mm2 0.

5mm2 or greater Solenoid valve for brake 4th-axis clamp 0.0mm2 or greater A5 W G A2 N B 2.5mm2 or greater 0.5mm2 or greater (+) Overtravel 0.3) *DTCH4 (X8.6) +OT4 (X8.5mm2 or greater Clamp check switch Reference position return switch 0.0) *DEC4 (X9.5mm2 or greater 4th-axis unclamp 0.5mm2 or greater 0.0mm2 or greater A2 G Tyco AMP D–3100D 178326–5 +24V UNCLPSW4 (X8.7) XS25 A01 A02 B01 A04 B02 B06 B05 B04 A05 A03 B03 C D E F G P H R S A V 0. M71 (Y1.5mm2 or greater Output common 0.6) –OT4 (X8.5mm2 or greater Input common Unclamp check sewitch 0.1) CLPSW4 (X8.5mm2 or greater (–) Overtravel Available from FANUC Available from the manufacturer of the index table 403 .5mm2 or greater 0.7) M10. M72 (Y1.5) M11.0mm2 or greater M A4 α3 Motor power MS3102A18–10P U V A1 K U 2.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) (b) Connecting the motor power and index input/output signals ROBODRILL Servo amp. Control cabinet MS3102A20–29PW Motor cover INDEX TABLE U CZ2 B1 XS41 L 2.0mm2 or greater A3 V W B2 J T 2.5) 0V CLAMP4 (Y1.

αM2/5000i.18mm2 +5V +5V +5V 0V 0V 9 18 20 12 14 J K 0.5mm2 7 10 0V 0V 0.23.5mm2 8 9 +5V +5V N T 0.18mm2 0.5mm2 0V 16 S H Shield Shield Grounding plate Available from FANUC Available from the manufacturer of the index table 404 .18mm2 0. (4th axis JF1) Control cabinet MS3102A20–29PW INDEX TABLE Motor cover αA1000i Pulse coder JN1AS10UL1 JF1 SD *SD RD *RD +6V 1 2 5 6 7 XS40 A D F G R 0.18mm2 6 5 4 RD *RD +6V 0. α2/5000i. αM3/5000i (a) Connecting the feedback cable ROBODRILL Servo amp.5mm2 0. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (4) AC SV α1/5000i.

1) CLPSW4 (X8.75mm2 or greater 4 G Tyco AMP D–3100D 178326–5 +24V UNCLPSW4 (X8.5mm2 or greater 0.5mm2 or greater Input common Unclamp check sewitch 0. αM2.5) 0V CLAMP4 (Y1.5mm2 or greater Solenoid valve for brake 4th-axis clamp 0. Motor power U 1473060–2 V A1 K U 0. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) (b) Connecting the motor power and index input/output signals ROBODRILL Servo amp. M72 (Y1. α2.6) +OT4 (X8.75mm2 or greater M 1 α1.75mm2 or greater 3 W G A2 N B 0.5mm2 or greater 0.5) M11 .5mm2 or greater (+) Overtravel 0. αM3.6) –OT4 (X8.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23.5mm2 or greater 4th-axis unclamp 0.75mm2 or greater 2 V W B2 J T 0.7) M10.5mm2 or greater (–) Overtravel Available from FANUC Available from the manufacturer of the index table 405 . Control cabinet MS3102A22–14P Motor cover INDEX TABLE U CZ2L B1 XS41 L 0.5mm2 or greater Clamp check switch Reference position return switch 0.5mm2 or greater 0.7) XS25 A01 A02 B01 A04 B02 B06 B05 B04 A05 A03 B03 C D E F G P H R S A V 0.3) *DTCH4 (X8.5mm2 or greater Output common 0. M71 (Y1.0) *DEC4 (X9.

5mm2 7 10 0V 0V 0.5mm2 8 9 +5V +5V N T 0.18mm2 +5V +5V +5V 0V 0V 9 18 20 12 14 J K 0. (4th axis JF1) Control cabinet MS3102A20–29PW INDEX TABLE Motor cover αA1000i Pulse coder JN1AS10UL1 JF1 SD *SD RD *RD +6V 1 2 5 6 7 XS40 A D F G R 0.5mm2 0.23.18mm2 0.5mm2 0V 16 S H Shield Shield Grounding plate Available from FANUC Available from the manufacturer of the index table 406 .18mm2 0. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (5) AC SV α4/4000i. α8/3000i (a) Connecting the feedback cable ROBODRILL Servo amp.18mm2 6 5 4 RD *RD +6V 0.

5mm2 or greater 4th-axis unclamp 0.5mm2 or greater Unclamp check sewitch 0.5mm2 or greater 0.0mm2 or greater C W G A2 N B 2.5mm2 or greater Available from FANUC Available from the manufacturer of the index table 407 .5mm2 or greater 0.5) 0V CLAMP4 (Y1.7) XS25 A01 A02 B01 A04 B02 B06 B05 B04 A05 A03 B03 C D E F G P H R S A V 0.0mm2 or greater B V W B2 J T 2.5mm2 or greater 0.6) +OT4 (X8.0) *DEC4 (X9. α8 Motor power H/MS3102A18 U –10P–D–T(10) V A1 K U 2. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) (b) Connecting the motor power and index input/output signals ROBODRILL Servo amp.1) CLPSW4 (X8.5) M11 .5mm2 or greater Input common 0.0mm2 or greater D G Tyco AMP D–3100D 178326–5 +24V UNCLPSW4 (X8.5mm2 or greater Output common Solenoid valve for brake 4th-axis clamp 0. M71 (Y1.5mm2 or greater (+) Overtravel (–) Overtravel 0.7) M10 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 23.0mm2 or greater A α4.3) *DTCH4 (X8.6) –OT4 (X8. Control cabinet MS3102A22–14P Motor cover INDEX TABLE U CZ2L B1 XS41 L M 2.5mm2 or greater Clamp check switch Reference position return switch 0. M72 (Y1.

the function can be PMC parameter No. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (6) Connecting the motor power and input/output signals ROBODRILL Tyco AMP D–3100D 178326–5 +24V UNCLPSW4 (X8. (Before connecting or disconnecting a cable.5mm2 or greater NO 0. 408 .) When the 4th–axis detachment signal is not used.6) +OT4 (X8.1) CLPSW4 (X8. = 1: Invalidates the 4th–axis detachment funcion.5mm2 or greater NO 0. the servo motor is deactivated.6) –OT4 (X8.3) *DTCH4 (X8. M72 (Y1.5mm2 or greater 0.5) M11 .5mm2 or greater Output common 0.5mm2 or greater 0. M71 (Y1.0) *DEC4 (X9.23.5) 0V CLAMP4 (Y1.7) INDEX TABLE XS25 A01 A02 B01 A04 B02 B06 B05 B04 A05 A03 B03 C D E F G P H R S A V 0.5mm2 or greater Solenoid valve for brake 4th-axis clamp 0.7) M10.K012. bit 3 = 0: Validates the 4th–axis detachment function.5mm2 or greater (+) Overtravel 0. first turn the machine off.5mm2 or greater 4th-axis unclamp 0.5mm2 or greater (–) Overtravel NOTE The 4th–axis detachment signal is used to check the cable connection status.5mm2 or greater NO Input common Unclamp check sewitch Clamp check switch Reference position return switch 0. When the level of the *DTCH4 signal falls to 0.

the program is not protected (can be edited). Lower the tool along the Z–axis until the tool tip touches the surface of the table. running down the right edge of the table. Measure the distance from the surface of the table to the switch–on position. SKIP signal : X0004. Check that the LED on the switch lights. 2) Align the tool with the switch and slowly lower the tool along the Z–axis until the LED of the switch lights.) (3) Store a macro program for tool length measurement (O9010) in program memory. fasten the cable to the X–axis motor cable duct. Check also that PMCDGN on the screen can be used to turn the signal on and off. Record the Z coordinate. Avoid using a coolant that would cause the NBR to swell. D A program having a number between O9000 and O9999 is usually protected. Note) Do not make any mark on the table. Brown line : Positive.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 24. 1) Place a sheet of paper on the surface of the table. D Select a tool whose tip can reach the surface of the table. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 24 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT Installing an automatic tool length measurement device (1) Mount a switch at a desired point on the table. O9000’s protection: NE9 bit (bit 4 of NC parameter 3202) When the NE9 bit is set to 1. 3) Obtain the difference between the Z coordinate of the table surface and the Z coordinate of the switch–on position. restore the original setting. the program is protected. Connect the + and – lines of the switch cable correctly. release the protection by changing the parameter.) NOTE The sealant is made of NBR. (Position the switch so that it will not interfere with the jig. turn the device on and operate the switch by hand. using cable ties. Record the Z coordinate. as the switch height. D Insert the cable by passing it through the lower sponge opening of the left cabinet. (4) Measure the height of the switch. Set the difference. When the NE9 bit is set to 0. 409 . (2) Connect the cable. Be careful to connect the cable to the terminal block. After entering the program. SKIP signal XT5–12 on the terminal block D After connecting the cable. bit 7 (The signal goes to 1 when the switch is set to the ON position. +24E XT5–10 on the terminal block Blue line : Negative. When entering the program. in macro variable #900. D Usually.

override is disabled.5 Set desired values #905 = 5.0 (7) Mount a tool on the spindle and specify G910 S1. 1) The tool temporarily stops 5 mm before the switch. D G910 S2 H** S2 : Tool failure is detected. H : Compensation number (The measurement result is input. D Check that the measured data is set for compensation number (H) after the operation.0 #904 = 0. D G910 S1 H** B***. as measured with a scale) D First. If the length exceeds the value set in #904.) B : Provisional tool length (Distance between the spindle taper gauge line and the tool tip. Set the machine coordinates in macro variables #901 and #902. #906 = 450. specify G910 S2. D Move the tool along the X–axis and Y–axis so that it is aligned with the center of the switch. The tool length is measured and compared with the previously specified compensation. perform the measurement slowly with TRVS set to LOW and single block set to ON. D Mount a shorter tool and check that an alarm is issued. 410 . H : Compensation number (compensation number for which the measured tool length was stored is step 7) D First.24. During the temporary stop. perform measurement slowly with TRVS set to LOW and single block set to ON. (5) #903 = 480. determine the approximate distance. (8) Using the same tool. an alarm is issued. During the temporary stop.0 according the use status. D Standard settings without high column #900 = Switch height.* S1 : The tool length is measured. override is disabled. (6) While referring to the operator’s manual. (5) #902 = Y coordinate of switch central position. 2) During skip (G31) measurement. 2) During skip (G31) measurement. 1) The tool temporarily stops 25 mm before the switch. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (5) Measure the central position of the switch. determine the approximate distance. set the following macro variables. (4) #901 = X coordinate of switch central position.

if omit.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 24. S1: Automatic tool length measurement S2: Automatic tool breakage detecting Tool offset No. Be carefule about the tool length and the position of detecting switch. if its difference is bigger than #905. _D__. NOTE 1 The temporary tool length can be set within "#905 value from true length.1 COMMAND FORMAT G910 Sj Hjj Bjjj Djjj M0 . 4 The automatic tool breakage detecting must be commanded after executing automatic tool length measurement. 3 The value set by automatic tool length measurement must not be changed by manual. 411 ._M0 AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTING G910S2H__ REMARKS Tool length is 250mm. the tool and detecting switch may be broken. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 24. 2 The tool length which can be measured is limited under the influence of the height of detecting switch. _D__. _ G910S1H__B___._ G910S1H__B___. Temporary tool length (from 30mm to 250mm) Tool radius (Shift value) Z axis stops before touching switch (25mm before switch ON) FORMAT AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT G910S1H__B___.

offset is set by “+” value.2 COMPENSATION METHOD BY USING AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT The G43 of tool length measurement is used in following both cases.) [In case of high column 100mm #903=580] [In case of high column 200mm #903=680] [In case of high column 300mm #903=780] Tool length offset (+ value) Work coordinate [Z axis (– value)] Reference point of program Height of switch (#900) Detecting switch Workpiece or jig Workpiece height Distance between table sureface and spindle gage line 412 . offset is set by “_” value.24.) Reference point of program Height of switch (#900) Detecting switch Workpiece or jig Workpiece height [Work coordinate] [Z axis (+ value)] Offset value (– VALUE) b) In case that offset value is the tool length (the distance between spindle gage line and tool edge) (when #903=480. a) In case that offset value is the distance between tool edge and table sureface. (when #903=0. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 24.

if #905 is not set. if #905 is no set. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 24. b) Measuring limit of automatic tool breakage detect Tool Rapid traverse area 10mm before switch ON Switch active position Permissible overrun value from switch active position (#905) Measurement permission area (G31 cutting feedrate) NOTE The permission overrun value is 5mm.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 24.3 MEASURING LIMIT a) Measuring limit of automatic tool length measurement Temporary tool length (Commanded value by B) Tool Rapid traverse area 25mm before switch ON Switch active position Permissible overrun value from switch active position (#905) Measurement permission area (G31 cutting feedrate) NOTE The permission overrun value is 5mm. 413 .

000 #904 : Tool breakage detecting tolerance (0.000 In case of high column 300mm. #903=780.000 In case of high column 300mm: 780.) When the difference between the measuring value of automatic tool length measurement and the measuring value of tool breakage detect exceed the tolerance.000 414 . #903=580.000 In case of high column 200mm: 680.000 (standard) In case of high column 100mm. the tool broken alarm occurs. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 24. offset is set by “_” value: #903=0 Using G44. #903=680. (09010 is called by G910 command. #901 : Distance between X–reference point and switch position (not omissible) (X–axis machine coordinate value at switch position) #902 : Distance between Y–reference point and switch position (not omissible) (Y–axis machine coordinate value at switch position) #903 : Selection of usage of tool length measurement (not omissible) Using G43.6050=910 : G code for calling custom macro with program number 09010.24. #905 : Overrun value from switch ON position (5mm when set “0”.) When the switch is not active until the Z axis going down to the overrun value by measuring with commanded temporary tool length. #906 : Distance between table surface and spindle gage line In case of standard: 480.5mm when set “0”.) b) MACRO VARIABLES #900 : Distance between table sureface and switch position (not omissible) The height of detecting switch must be heigher than 100mm (from the table sureface).000 In case of high column 200mm. offset is set by “+” value: #903=480. an alarm occurs.4 PARAMETERS AND MACRO VARIABLES a) NC parameters No. and should be under the position that the tool of 250mm length can be measured.000 In case of high column 100mm: 580.

) DATA ERROR “B”: The “B” value of the temporary tool length is too small.) DATA ERROR B TOOL SHORT: The switch signal is not active until the Z axis going down to the overrun value by automatic tool length measurement. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 24.3120 TOOL BROKEN: The tool breakage is detected.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 24. SETTING DATA ERROR #900: The value of the macro variable #900 is not set. 415 . please check and correct the program or setting value acoording to the contents of message. D Please change the broken cutter and carry out automatic tool length measurement. an alarm occurs. D The switch or its wirring is defective. (Switch position of X coordinate) SETTING DATA ERROR #902: The value of the macro variable #902 is not set. (Please set it beigger than 30mm(30. or too small.3110 DATA ERROR “H” NOT EXIST: The offset “H” number is not commanded in the program by G910 command. b) Alarm No. DATA ERROR “S”: The “S” value is out of range in the program by G910 command.000). The difference between the measuring value of automatic tool length measurement and the measuring value of tool breakage detect exceed the tolerance (#904). NOTE 1 If the offset value is changed bigger than the tolerance after execution of tool length measurement. D The “B” value of the temporary tool length is smaller than actual tool length. (Height of switch) SETTING DATA ERROR #901: The value of the macro variable #901 is not set. (Switch position of Y coordinate) SETTING DATA ERROR #903: The value of the macro variable #903 is not set. (Selection of usage of tool length measurement) SETTING DATA ERROR #906: The value of the macro variable #906 is not set. (Please command “S1” or “S2”. Alarms can be released by pressing the reset key [//] on the operator’s panel. After releasing alarm. 2 Please carry out the tool length measurement again after changing cutter. (Distance between table sureface and spindle gage line) c) Alarm No. D The setting value of the macro variable #900 or #906 is wrong.5 ALARM MESSAGES AND RELEASING METHOD a) Releasing method Please check the alarm message number and contens.

6 FLOWCHART Macro program Subprogram: 09010 Input MODAL DATA to VARIABLE Check setting value YES Check command value “H” YES Check setting value (#90500) YES NO #900 to #903 OK? ALARM SETTING DATA ERROR #900 to #903 #900: less than 100. not set) Overrun value=SETTING VALUE Overrun value=0.24.0 #901: no setting #902: no setting #903: no setting NO H value OK? ALARM DATA ERROR “H” NOT EXIST H: no setting (#11) NO #905 OK? (#905=0. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 24.5mm Check setting value YES Z axis reference point return NO ALARM SETTING DATA ERROR #906 #906: wrong setting Reading PRESENT X/Y/Z POSITION Move to X–Y SWITCH POSITION and SPINDLE ORIENTATION (M19) 1 416 .

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 24. 2) S OK? ALARM DATA ERROR “S” S: Except 1 or 2. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 1 Check command value “S” YES S=1 2 NO (01. or no setting (#19) S=2 3 to TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTING to AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 2 [AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT] Check command value “B” YES NO B OK? ALARM DATA ERROR “B” B: less than 30mm (#2) Temporary tool length=250mm B: no setting Check command value “D” without D with D X axis shift value D ok? D: Tool radius (#7) Z axis goes down by rapid 25mm before switch position 4 417 .

24. calculate TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT VALUE Check measurement value YES Z axis goes up by rapid NO value OK? ALARM DATA ERROR B TOOL SHORT MEASUREMENT VSLUE is equal with movement command end point (no switch detecting) Switch position+5mm Setting offset value Z axis reference point return Check command value “D” without D with D Cancel SHIFT VALUE D OK? D: Tool radius (#7) 5 End of AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 418 . AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 4 [contintinuance of AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT] Check command value “M” without M with M M OK? OPTIONAL STOP (M00) SPINDLE NO EXECUTE RESTART Start button ON Z axis SKIP FEED (MEASUREMENT) Z axis down distance: 25mm+Overrun value Reed SKIP POSITION.

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 24.5mm Check measurement value YES NO Setting value OK? ALARM TOOL BROKEN DIfference between OFFSET VALUE and MEASUREMENT VALUE exceeds TOLERANCE Z axis reference point return 6 End of TOOL BREKAGE DETECTING 419 . no setting) #904 OK? TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTING TOLERANCE=SETTING VALUE TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTING TOLERANCE=0. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 2 [TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTING] Input OFFSET VALUE to VALIABLE Z axis goes down by rapid 5mm before switch position Z axis SKIP FEED (MEASUREMENT) Z axis down distance: 5mm+Overrun value Read SKIP POSITION Z axis goes up by rapid Switch position+5mm Check setting value (#90400) YES NO (#904=0.

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 5 6 Reset MODAL DATA Return to main program M99 420 .

IF[#903NE#0] GOTO40 . . N20 . N10 . IF[#901NE#0] GOTO20 . #3000 =110 (SETTING DATA ERROR #900) .0] GOTO80 . .0] GOTO80 .7 MACRO PROGRAM 09010 (AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET) .T X500.0] GOTO80 .0 Y400. IF[#900GE100. IF[#906EQ780. IF[#906EQ680. (CHANGE PARAMETER NO. . #3000 =110 (SETTING DATA ERROR #902) . N50 . 421 . IF[#906EQ480.0 . #24 =#905 . N80. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 24. (START) . IF[#905EQ#0] GOTO60 .0) .0] GOTO10 . #3000 =110 (SETTING DATA ERROR #906) . #24 =5. IF[#906EQ580.0 Z330. #3000 =110 (DATA ERROR “H” NOT EXIST) .0] GOTO80 . (G110 S* H** B*** D*** M0) . N70 . . IF[#11NE#0] GOTO50 . #30 =#4001 . N30 .6050 DATA 110) . #3000 =110 (SETTING DATA ERROR #903) . #31 =#4003 . IF[#902NE#0] GOTO30 .0+150+HC) . #3000= 110 (SETTING DATA ERROR #901) . N40 . (S.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 24. GOTO70 . N60 . IF[#905EQ0] GOTO60 . (TOOL OFFSET MACRO PROGRAM VER–3.

IF[#2EQ#0] GOTO100 . #25 =#5063 . 422 . N1000 .0 . (AUTOMATIC TOOL MEASURING) . IF[[#906–#900–#2+#24]NE[ABS[#22–#25]]] GOTO160 . M00 .1 . N130 . N120 . G00 X–#7 . G00 X[#901–#20] Y[#902–#21] M19 . . G31 Z–[25. #26 =#903–[ABS[#22–#25]+#900] . #21 =#5022 . N110 .0+#24] F100 (*) . G90 G10 L1 P#11 R#26 . IF[#2GT30] GOTO110 . #3000 =110 (DATA ERROR “S”) . IF[#19EQ1] GOTO1000 . #22 =#5043 .0] (*) . #3000 =110 (DATA ERROR B TOOL SHORT) . IF[#19EQ2] GOTO2000 . IF[#7EQ#0] GOTO120 .24. G00 X#7 . N100 . IF[#7EQ#0] GOTO3000 . . M05 . GOTO3000 . #2 =250. G00 Z–[#906–#900–#2–25. G91 G28 Z0 . IF[#13EQ#0] GOTO130 . G04 X0.0 . Z5. N160 . #20 =#5021 . . #3000 =110 (DATA ERROR “B”) . S50 M03 . AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 G91 G28 G00 Z0 .

GOTO210 . #29 =#[2000+#11] .0+#24] F200 (*) . IF[#904EQ#0] GOTO200 . N200 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 24. Z5.0] (*) . 423 . G00 Z–[ABS[#3]–5. G91 G28 Z0 . G91 G28 Z0 . M99 .5 . N220 . #3 =#29+#900–#903 . #3000 =120 (TOOL BROKEN) . IF[#904EQ0] GOTO200 . N3000. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT N2000 .0 . G#30 G#31 M05 . IF[ABS[ABS[#3]–ABS[#25–#22]]LT#15] GOTO 220 . #25 =#5063 . G31 Z–[5. (AUTOMATIC TOOL BROKEN) . #15 =0. N210 . #15 =#904 . .

25. SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 25 SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION) 424 .

absolute) Repeated until the Z point is reached * * Cutting(second and subsequent operations. this is the clearance between the tool and bottom of the hole. (Operations that make up the cycle) * * * Positioning along the X. incremental) Dwell Return to R point (or the initial point) return along the Z-axis = end of the cycle 425 . Enable look–ahead control (G08P1) after the cycle is completed.1 OUTLINE OF THE FUNCTION This peck drilling cycle uses an arbor with an overload torque detection feature. indicates the path of movement at a programmed cutting feedrate. Disable look–ahead control (G08P0) before attempting to start a small–hole peck drilling cycle. incremental) Return (hole bottom ³ small clearance ∆. Upon reception of an overload torque detection signal (using the skip signal). The drilling cycle is illustrated below: NOTE This function cannot be used when look–ahead control is enabled. changes the spindle speed and cutting feedrate. Q: Depth of cut for one drilling operation indicates the path of rapid movement.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 25. SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION) 25. indicates the path of movement at the rapid traverse rate (³) (advancing and return speeds) in the cycle set by a parameter. absolute) ³ to a point (hole bottom + ∆ clearance). then resumes drilling. incremental) Return ( Advancing(R point ³ to the R point. depth of cut Q.and Y-axes Positioning to the R point along the Z-axis Z-axis: Cutting(first operation. R point Q ∆ Overload torque Overload torque Z point Dwell ∆: The clearance when the tool is first returned to the R point. this cycle returns the tool. In the second and subsequent drilling operations. depth of cut Q + ∆.

a position check is performed. even midway through an advancing operation. When return to the R point takes place.25. 426 . SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 NOTE 1 Return and advance operations are subject to acceleration/deceleration control by accelerating or decelerating the cutting feed. 2 When a skip signal is received. return operation starts.

Depth of cut per operation Specifies the distance from the initial level to the R point in the incremental mode. (Standard setting: M28) N03:Specifies the small-hole peck drilling cycle. Cutting feedrate Feedrate for advancing and return operations (in the same format as F) (If the specification is omitted. or specifies the bottom of the hole in the absolute mode.) NOTE G83 is a continuous-state G code. SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION) 25. the value set in the parameter is assumed as the default. The M code specified in N02 is also canceled. When the same drilling operation is performed successively. and performs the small-hole peck drilling cycle using the same drilling data as N03. This means that G83 remains unchanged unless another canned cycle is specified or a G code that cancels the current canned cycle is specified. Drilling data (except data with addresses K and P) is stored.) K P Iteration count (If the specification is omitted. or specifies the position of the R point in the absolute mode. N04:Changes the hole position. drilling data need only be specified in the first drilling block and need not be specified separately for each block. Mjj . P0 is assumed as the default.2 USAGE Sample program: N01 N02 N03 N04 M03 S___ . and drilling is performed. G83 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ I_ K_ P_ . N10:Cancels the small-hole peck drilling cycle. N10 Description of commands in each block N01:Specifies forward spindle rotation and spindle speed. The path and feedrate are the same as for positioning by G00. N02:M code specifying G83 as a small-hole peck drilling cycle. This M code is set in parameter No. 427 . X_ Y_ . Specification Hole position Drilling data Address X Y Z Q R F I Specifies the hole position in the incremental or absolute mode. Specifies the distance between the R point and bottom of the hole in the incremental mode.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 25. 5163.) Dwell time at the bottom of the hole (If the specification is omitted. : : G80 . K1 is assumed as the default.

The mode is entered by specifying the M code set in parameter No. exercise special care. 5163. SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 25. the drilling cycle can be performed by specifying G83. MVV M03. M03 MVV. The M code does not wait for FIN. ! Does not wait for FIN.25. So when specifying this M code with another M code in the same block.3 SETTING THE SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE MODE Examples In the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode. The mode is canceled by the reset operation or by specifying G80. 428 . ! Waits for FIN.

The skip signal is valid (for activating a return) only when the tool is located between the R and Z points and advancing or cutting operation is being performed. D Changing the cutting feedrate The cutting feedrate programmed with an F word is changed for each of the second and subsequent cutting operations. 2) The skip signal (X0004. 5160. When skip is present during the previous cutting operation: β = b1% (parameter No. 429 . 5166 and 5167: One change rate is used if the skip signal is received in the previous cutting operation. Cutting feedrate = F α (First operation ) α = 1. 5168. The cutting conditions. PECK2) is output during the period from when the tool is positioned to the R point to when the tool returns to the R point or initial level. however. SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION) 25. The cutting feedrate can be increased to up to the maximum cutting feedrate.7) is used as the overload torque detection signal. the small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal (F066. and the other is used if no skip signal is received. can be kept unchanged by settings bits 1 and 2 of parameter No. the cutting conditions are changed for each pecking operation (advancing ³ cutting ³ return).4 DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS 1) This peck drilling cycle is executed by specifying G83 in the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 25. the cutting feedrate is not changed. 5166) When skip is not present during the previous cutting operation: β = b2% (parameter No. 5167) If change rate a for the cutting feedrate is less than the rate set in parameter No.0 (Second and subsequent operations) = α β B 100 where β is the change rate for one operation. 3) During one G83 cycle. Set two change rates in parameter Nos. In this cycle. Supply the tooling overload signal to XT5–12. after a workpiece is positioned along axes other than the axis along which the tool moves.

the machine stops after every return operation. * Feed hold is enabled in every operation state during the canned cycle.25.. the spindle speed is not changed.0 (Second and subsequent operations) γ = γ δ B 100 where δ is the change rate for one operation. * Feedrate override is enabled for cutting. return. and additional axes S Arithmetic and branch operations using custom macros S Calling subprograms (such as hole positioning) S Switching between absolute and incremental modes S Rotating the coordinate system S Scaling command (not valid for depth of cut Q or small clearance d1) * Dry run is enabled in every operation state during the canned cycle. SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 D Changing the spindle speed The spindle speed programmed with an S word is changed for each of the second and subsequent advance operations. Y-. but executed as interpolation operations with cutting feed. 5164) When skip is not present during the previous cutting operation: δ = d2% (parameter No. Spindle speed = S γ (First operation ) γ = 1. The spindle speed can be changed to up to a value equivalent to the maximum value of the S analog data. 430 . When skip is present during the previous cutting operation: δ = d1% (parameter No. Set two change rates in parameter Nos. 5165) If the cutting feedrate is clamped to the lower limit. ³ 1000 mm/min G83 I1000. Note that. 4) Advance and return operations are not treated as positioning in rapid traverse. When the advance and return feedrate is specified an I word. Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied. however. and the other is used if no skip signal is received. ³ 1000 mm/min An I word specified in the G83 continuous state is in effect until G80 or reset is specified. 5) Others * The following are enabled in the canned cycle mode: S Specifying a hole position on the X-. the same format as for the F word is used as follows: G83 I1000. 5164 and 5165: One change rate is to be used if the skip signal is received in the previous cutting operation. * By setting the single block mode to ON. the tool life management function does not decrement the time used for advance and return operations from tool life. and advance operations during the cycle.

5160 76543210 00000010 Description Bit 2: Specifies whether to change the feedrate and spindle speed when the overload torque signal is received. 1: Changed 5163 5164 28 90 M code specifying the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode (for M28) Percentage (%) of change made to the spindle speed when return operation is performed after reception of the overload torque signal S2 = S1 d1 B 100 S1: Spindle speed before change S2: Spindle speed after change d1: Percentage to be set 5165 100 Percentage (%) of change made to the spindle speed when return operation is performed without the overload torque signal S2 = S1 d2 B 100 d2: Percentage to be set 5166 90 Percentage of change made to the cutting feedrate when return operation is performed after reception of the overload torque signal F2 = F1 b1 B 100 F1: Cutting feedrate before change F2: Cutting feedrate after change b1: Percentage to be set 5167 100 Percentage of change made to the cutting feedrate when return operation is performed without the overload torque signal F2 = F1 b2 B 100 b2: Percentage to be set 5168 10 Percentage of the lower limit of the allowable cutting feedrate resulting from repeated changes to the specified cutting feedrate FL = F F: FL: BL: 5170 100 BL B 100 Specified cutting feedrate Lower limit of the allowable cutting feedrate Percentage to be set Number of a common variable of a custom macro to which the total number of return operations during cutting is output. 0: Not changed. SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION) 25. 0 or 100 to 149 (0: No output) 431 . 1: Changed Bit 1: Specifies whether to change the feedrate and spindle speed when the depth of cut per operation is reached before reception of the overload torque signal.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 25. 0: Not changed. Note that the total number is not output to common variables #500 to #599.5 RELATED PARAMETERS (STANDARD SETTINGS) PRM No.

The total number is not output to common variables #500 to #599. (mm/min) Clearance in the first return to the R point or clearance at the bottom of the hole in the second and subsequent cutting operations during the cycle (least input increment) 432 . 0 or 100 to 149 (0: No output) 5172 5173 5174 1000 1000 500 Feedrate at which the tool returns to the R point without an I word specified. Feedrate at which the tool advances to the bottom of the hole machined immediately before without an I word specified. SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 PRM No. (mm/min).25. 5171 76543210 101 Description Number of a custom macro common variable to which the total number of return operations initiated by the overload torque signal during cutting is output.

FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS 26 FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS 433 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 26.

” 434 . refer to “FANUC FACTOLINK Script Function Operator’s Manual.1 OVERVIEW This chapter explains various types of settings and basic operations required for connecting the ROBODRILL to a personal computer using FACTOLINK functions. For details of FACTOLINK functions. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 26.26.

2 SETTINGS 26.2. you must set several items. Press the [OPERATION] soft key to display the following screen: Press the [EMBEDD] soft key. The ETHERNET PARAMETER screen of the CNC screen is displayed. Communication Setting.1 Setting Up Ethernet Before using FACTOLINK functions. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS 26. (a) When the ROBOMACHINE Ethernet (standard) board is mounted (1) Display Quick Screen – 32: Maintenance/Setting Screen – 6.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 26. (2) Press the [ETHERNET] soft key. 435 . Press the [BOARD] soft key when a data server board (option) or Ethernet board (option) is installed.

26. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 [Built–in Ethernet setting] 436 .

2/6 IP ADDRESS PORT NUMBER After setting all data. 437 . Set 9000 usually.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 26. Specify a port number to be used with the FACTOLINK function. Set the IP address of the FACTOLINK server (personal computer). Set a router IP address when a router exists on the network. Set the mask address of the IP address of the network. turn off the power then turn on the power again if Alarm 000 “TURN OFF POWER” is issued. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS [Data server/Ethernet board setting] Page 1/6 Setting item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER ADDRESS Details Set the IP address of the ROBODRILL.

Do not assign the name used for another machine. D AUTOMATIC CONNECTION If it is set to ON. (2) Press soft key [FACTOLINK]. the load on the network and host computer can increase. a FACTOLINK connection is automatically made when the power to the machine is turned on. @. #. [. =. D INTERFACE Select an Ethernet connection port/FACTOLINK server (personal computer).2. As a guideline. set an interval of 30 seconds or more. then 6: COMMUNICATION. The cursor is displayed and you can set each item.26. If a shorter logging interval is set. Position the cursor to the MACHINE NAME field and press the [ALPHABET] key on the operator’s panel to enter alphanumeric characters and symbols. Alphanumeric characters and symbols (+. Setting ETHERNET–0 ETHERNET–2 ETHERNET–3 ETHERNET–4 Ethernet port Built–in Option board Option board Option board FACTOLINK server (personal computer) Personal computer specified with the IP address on page 2/6 of the built–in Ethernet parameter screen Personal computer specified with IP address 1 on page 2/6 of the Ethernet parameter screen Personal computer specified with IP address 2 on page 2/6 of the Ethernet parameter screen Personal computer specified with IP address 3 on page 2/6 of the Ethernet parameter screen D MACHINE NAME Name the machine. (. or the response of the FACTOLINK screen can degrade. D LOGGING INTERVAL Set an interval at which logging data is sent to the host computer. –. 32: MAINTENANCE/SETTING. and )) can be used. 438 .2 Setting Up FACTOLINK (1) Display QUICK screen. &. ]. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 26.

802 803 1 (12) The setting enclosed by parentheses is a recommended value. Communication channel (1: Channel 1) Baud rate (10: 4. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS (3) After setting is complete. the following message appears: TURN OFF POWER After the power is turned off.800 bps 11: 9. 439 .3 Setting NC Parameters Set the following NC parameters: For RS–232C connection: No.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 26. NOTE When soft key [END] is pressed after setting is complete. press soft key [END]. the settings take effect. 801#0 Setting (1) Function Stop bits (0: 1 bit 1: 2 bits) Specify the same value as for the converter (Comm Assist). If the power is turned off without pressing the [END] key.600 bps 12: 19. then on again. 26. the settings are not changed.200 bps) Specify the same value as for the converter (Comm Assist).2.

(You need not set the data when you do not want to use the logging data function.HED EXPRING (ring file extension) ³ .RNG EXPCURRENT (newest data file extension) ³ .Scr as follows.200. The values are listed below: SEPARATOR (separator) ³ .3 LOGGING DATA FUNCTION Set data related to the logging data function in script file Main.DAT 440 .1. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 26. (comma) USERPATTERN (separator between logging data and user data) ³ (Not used) EXPHEAD (header file extension) ³ .0 (2) Use the default values for settings in [Logging Detail] other than RECORDCOUNT.26.) (1) Add the following command: [Logging] Default = Y.

FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS 26. 441 .4 SWITCHING TO FACTOLINK SCREEN (1) Display ALARM screen. (3) Press soft key [FALINK]. (2) Press the rightmost soft key.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 26.

FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 26. production count. total count. lot number.26. you can set ORDER. LOT No. Set the following parameter: PMC parameter keep relay K9#4 = 1 442 . you can disable the function of displaying FACTOLINK screen. scheduled production. part number.5 SELECT FUNCTION (1) Controlling FACTOLINK screen using the program protection key When the program protection key is placed in the protected state. and ID code using the host computer. and ID CODE.. You can use the logging data function to collect information for the order. Set the following parameter: PMC parameter keep relay K9#0 = 1 (2) COUNTER screen On 24: COUNTER screen of QUICK screen.

refer to “FANUC FACTOLINK Script Function Operator’s Manual. A) 00000001. A) 000100. 443 .999999. B) D007 C) 01 C) 01 C) 64 C) 64 D) FFE0F505 00 0000 0000 C) 0E E) 4D30303030372020202020202020202020 B) E703 E) 574F524B30312020202020202020202020 D) FFE0F505 D) FFE0F505 D) FFE0F505 E) 54313449412D30372020 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Data serial number Current time Operation status Required number of parts Number of machined parts Program number Alarm Operator message number Program check mode ROBODRILL operation status Cutting feedrate override Spindle override Operating time (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) Tool number Order Lot number Part number Scheduled production Production count Total production count ID code (Not used) D For details of data A).” D Data B) to E) is hexadecimal. A) 1998/11/11 10:24:53.999999. (FFE0F505 ³ 05F5E0FF) (2) Convert the data to a hexadecimal number as required (05F5E0FF ³ 99999999) D Character string E) is represented in ASCII code (hexadecimal).999999. D Convert data B) as follows: (1) Changes the places of E8 and 03. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS 26. A) 1000001111000010. A) 00000100.6 LOGGING DATA FORMAT A) 00006. A) 00000200.999999. (E803 ³ 03E8) (2) Convert the data to a hexadecimal number as required (03E8 ³ 1000) D Convert data D) as follows: (1) Rearrange the data.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 26.

HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) INTERFACE FUNCTION (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 27 HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) INTERFACE FUNCTION (OPTION) 444 .27.

To switch to the remote operation mode. display CNC screen. When QUICK screen is displayed.2 STARTING AND ENDING THE CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION 27. select REMOTE on the operator’s panel. 8706 to 1 (use of new DNC functions). 20 to 15 (input/output device selection) and bit 1 of NC parameter No. (When the operator’s panel has a full keyboard. set REMOTE MODE to ON on SEQ SELECTION of QUICK screen and select AUTO on the operator’s panel. 27. D Put the operation mode in the remote operation mode. 445 . HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) INTERFACE FUNCTION (OPTION) 27. To start or end the CNC screen display function.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 27.1 OVERVIEW This chapter gives notes on using the CNC screen display function and DNC operation function in a system in which the ROBODRILL is connected to a personal computer using the high–speed serial bus (HSSB) interface. the CNC screen display function cannot be started or ended.) (To call a subprogram) D Set NC parameter No.3 DNC OPERATION USING THE DNC OPERATION MANAGEMENT PACKAGE (To perform scheduled operation) D Set bit 6 of PMC parameter K6 to 1 (the DMMC signal is turned on during remote operation).

28. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 28 CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 446 .

40kW) Center–through pump unit Control box (for center–through) Option Coolant for cleaning inside of the machine (AC 0.1.000min–1 AC SPINDLE MOTOR 3.1 SPECIFICATIONS 28.5kw (10–minute rating) 25µm/10µm C–8 (JIS B 8363 G3/8 internal thread 30 male sheet) Filtering precision of center–through coolant Center–through coolant connection pipe (receptacle for connection at the spindle side) 28.2 Coolant Unit Dimensions (X–axis direction Y– axis direction Z–axis direction) Weight of coolant unit Capacity of coolant tank Configuration 1565 1300 140kg 240L (T14/21iCS:160L) Coolant tank Chip tray External oiling coolant (AC 0.7kw (continuous rating)/5.25kW) With a shower gun 895 795mm (a–T14iC/iCL) 1080 795mm (a–T14iCS) 447 .1. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 28.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 28.1 Spindle Rotational speed Spindle motor 80 to 8000min–1/150 to 15.

CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 28.24 to 0.1.47 MPa (15kgf/cm2) 15L/min (50Hz)/18L/min (60Hz) 25µm/10µm #100 mesh tank partition plate (with pull–up handle) #150 mesh suction filter (mounted on the pump) 25–µ m line filter (with clogging detection function based on the pressure differential) Coolant valve 3–port solenoid valve mounted type Pilot air: 0.5 to 5kgf/ cm2) 448 .49Mpa (2.72 MPa (17.75kW (directly connected) 1.5kgf/cm2) 1.3 Center–through Pump Unit Coolant pump motor Maximum delivery pressure Rated delivery pressure Maximum delivery Final filtering precision Filtering system AC 0.28.

maintenance manual. Create an operator’s manual. Baiton (fluororubber).2 Coolant Unit (1) The coolant unit cannot be used for center–through machining using dry air. (Note that FANUC cannot provide maintenance for coolant unit provided by the customer. See Sections 28.10. and acrylic resin.) 449 . Note that residual chlorine in the water used to dilute the coolant will also cause the same problem. 4. If the unit is used for this type of machining. 28. maintenance drawings. Use a coolant which will not harm these materials. the rotary union may be damaged. and other documents for the coolant unit and attach them to the drilling machine. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 28.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 28. As the pump capacity.1 Selecting a Coolant ** Use the center–through coolant under the following conditions only. set the maximum pressure to up to 2. (3) Use a water–soluble coolant diluted with water at a high rate of dilution (normally 5 to 15 times). (1) The ROBODRILL’s components use polycarbonate. nylon.2. (2) The viscosity of an available water–insoluble coolant must be 16 cSt or less.” and 28. NBR.3. Also prepare a check valve unit and pipes for the machine according to the capacity of the unit.” Prepare the customer’s unit to conform to these sections as closely as possible. “ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT CONTROL. It is advisable to clean the coolant tank and replace the coolant at least once every six months to prevent deterioration due to degraded coolant. the following rules must be observed: 1.9.2.2 NOTES 28. 3. 5.” 28. HNBR. Prepare the following pipe fittings: Coolant unit side Spindle side (already mounted on the machine) A2–9 (JIS B 8363 G3/8 internal thread 30 male sheet) C–8 (JIS B 8363 G3/8 internal thread 30 male sheet) 2. “Appearance and Configuration of the Coolant Unit.5 MPa and the maximum flow rate to up to 20 l/min. “Center–through Coolant Control (interface specifications). (2) When the customer prepares the coolant unit.

28.3 APPEARANCE AND CONFIGURATION OF THE COOLANT UNIT 28.1 (a) Three faces of coolant (a–T14(21)iCe/iCLe) 450 . CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 28.1 Appearance of the Coolant Unit Fig.3.28.3.

1 (b) Three faces of coolant (a–T14/21iCSe) 451 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 28.3. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) Fig.28.

(HI). (LOW). PRESSURE SW.28.3. HIGH–PRESSURE HOSE PRESSURE VALVE FILTER HOUSING FINE FILTER PILOT AIR RELIEF VALVE #150 SUCTION FILTER COOLANT VALVE DIRT INDICATAR LAMP CONTROL UNIT HI–PRE PUMP Fig. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 DEFFERENTIAL SW.28. CONNECTION PORT PRESSURE SW.1 (c) Detail of center–through pump unit 452 .

2 (a) Center–through Pump 1. 3. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 28. The upper limit of the level gage corresponds to 215 l of coolant. when the circuit breaker in the control box is closed. 5. This tank can contain up to 240 l of coolant. Accordingly.3. The temperature is monitored.3.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 28. 4. and the relay terminal for each detection switch. The center–through pump is a Tocoloid pump for coolant which is compatible with water–soluble coolants.28. 2. The pump contains a relief valve and a #150 mesh (equivalent to 100µm) suction filter (with a clogging check gage and air release plug). This strainer requires no maintenance. and level gage (for visual check). (2) Control box 1. 2. The control box contains only a circuit breaker. 2. 453 . The coolant tank has casters. (3) Center–through pump #150 suction filter Air release plug Inlet pipe Clogging check gage Fig. An open mesh strainer (#60 mesh = equivalent to 250 mm) is also mounted at the end of the inlet pipe. The lamp on the front panel indicates whether power is being supplied to the control box. a pull–up hook. contacts for starting the pump and coolant valve. the lamp on the front panel lights. The pump is directly connected to the drive motor via a coupling.2 Names and Functions of the Parts (1) Coolant tank 1. The lower limit of the level gage corresponds to 165 l (minimum required amount).

7 MPa. 2. This plate is not fixed and can be pulled out of the tank simply by lifting the handle. (10)Air tube (pilot air) 454 . 2.5 MPa. This switch detects the pressure difference between the line filter inlet and discharge sides to determine whether the filter has reached the end of its service life. This switch detects an abnormally high pump pressure caused by damage to the pump relief valve or some other abnormality. (6) Pressure switch (minimum pressure detection) [SP102] 1. Periodically check the mesh and remove any chips that have adhered to the net with a brush. 3. The setting pressure is n0. (5) Pressure switch (maximum pressure detection) [SP100] 1. 2. The set pressure is 0. This switch detects a low coolant discharge pressure caused by coolant leakage that may be caused by a loose coupling or an operation error. Periodically check the color ring to determine whether the filter has to be replaced.28. the coolant always returns to the tank. The coolant valve is a 3–port valve which contains a solenoid valve (preumatic). This switch has a color ring for visual confirmation. The set pressure is 2.18 MPa. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (4) #100 mesh partition plate (filtering precision of 150 mm or equivalent) #100 mesh partition Fig.0 to 2. The #100 mesh partition plate separates the chip tray (dirty tank side) from the center–through pump unit (clean tank side). (8) Pressure gage (for checking the discharge pressure) 1. (9) Coolant valve [YV140] 1. The normal range of coolant discharge pressure is between 1.3. 2.0 MPa.2 (b) #100 mesh partition 1. (7) Differential pressure switch (line filter clogging detection) [SP101] 1. 3. 2. While power is not supplied.28. This valve is used to control the direction of the coolant flow.

Always use a genuine FANUC filter. 4. 455 .” (13)High–pressure hose 1. Instead of PT screws. 2. The housing head and shell are connected with a long bolt and nut so that the filter can be replaced easily. The air tube supplies air to the coolant valve. “Line filter. An air release plug is mounted on the housing head and a drain plug for draining the coolant is mounted on the bottom of the shell (housing body).28. The user should order a line filter. (The filter is factory–mounted. A rotary joint supports the swivel joint so that the coolant hose is not twisted by movement along the Z–axis. For the manufacturer’s contact details.2 (c) Swivel Joint 1.) 3. A filter with a nominal filtering precision of 10µm is also available. (12)Line filter 1.7. The housing is sealed with an O ring. see Section 28. No seal tape is used. This hose is capable of withstanding high pressures and is compatible with both water–soluble and water–insoluble coolant.1. The nominal filtering precision of the standard filter is 25µm. (11)Filter housing 1. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 1. high–pressure pipe fittings are used at both ends. 2.3. (14)Swivel joint Swivel joint Adapter High–pressure hose Fig. 2. Note this point when replacing or removing a hose for repair or machine relocation. Filter replacement requires only one adjustable wrench.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 28.

3.3.28.28. Check valve assembly Swivel joint Drain tube Fig. This unit switches between the spindle taper air blow (air) and center–through coolant (liquid).2 (e) Center–through Piping (Machine Side) 456 .28. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (15)Check valve assembly Check valve assembly Fig.2 (d) Check valve assembly 1. Two pairs of check valves are opposed and used in combination.

(3) Before starting disassembly or connection for installation. 28. so as not to damage its casters. Because power to the center–through coolant pump is supplied from the secondary Power Panel unit in the machine body.4. No seal tape is used. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 28.4. the coolant tank cannot be replaced because it fouls the unit on the coolant tank. leave at least 280 mm clearance between the coolant unit and back of the machine (such as a wall). (2) Completely drain the coolant. 28.4 INSTALLATION 28. always check that the circuit breakers of the main drilling unit and coolant unit control box are off and that power is not supplied.3 Piping (1) Connect the high–pressure hose to the inlet on the center–coolant unit. there is a danger of the pump starting when the power to the machine is turned on. (Check that there is no foreign matter around the thread and taper section.28. then move the coolant tank carefully.3 Swivel Joint 457 .1 Notes on Installation (1) Completely drain the coolant.4.2 Installation Area (1) As shown in the floor plan.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 28. then lift the coolant tank up so that the tank is not distorted. If this clearance is not provided.) Swivel joint Adapter High–pressure hose Fig.4.

The connection terminals are provided on terminal board XT5 of the main drilling unit. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (2) Connect the other end of the hose to the adapter on the swivel joint.4.4.28. Signal line connection position : XT4 Power line connection point: XT1 Fig. (3) Connect the air pipe of the coolant valve for the center–through coolant.4 (a) Wiring Connect the air tube of the coolant valve of the center–through coolant to the air blow valve joint.4. 28. Fig.28.4 Wiring (1) Connect each signal line. (2) Connect the power line of the center through coolant pump. Connect a 6–mm tube to the secondary cheese of the air blow regulator.4 (b) Pilot Air Piping 458 . The connection terminal is terminal block XT1 on the main ROBODRILL unit.28.

(If a large amount of air is discharged from the tube.5 Checking Operation After Installation (1) Clamp a center–through tool on the spindle.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 28. which is also used to stop the coolant. (3) A large amount of air should not be discharged from the transparent nylon tube protruding from the cover on the head of the spindle. coolant leakage may occur.) (4) To stop the center–through air purge (M23). 459 .4. (2) Perform center–through air purge (using the M23 command) in MDI mode and check that air issues from the tool tip. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 28. Open the side door of the splash guard and check that air is issued. specify M9.

460 . G01Z–200. Turns air purge off. (These buttons are dedicated to external coolant.F500 G00Z–100. Turns air purge on.5. Select M24 or M09 using a parameter.5 OPERATION 28.2 Manual Operation Specify the above M codes in MDI mode. Turns the center–through coolant on (outputs the coolant). ² Turns the center–through coolant on (provides coolant to the tool). Starts the center–through coolant pump. Use either of M24 or M09. Remarks 28.) 28.1 Command M Codes Use the following M codes: M code M20 M21 M22 M23 M09 M24 Function Stops the center–through coolant pump.5. ² Starts the center–through coolant pump. Turns the center–through coolant off (stops outputting the coolant).5. M09 M02 ² Turns the center–through coolant off (stops providing coolant to the tool).28. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 28.3 Commands in a Program 00060 G80G40G49 G00G91G28Z0. The coolant button on the ROBODRILL operator’s panel cannot be used. M6T6 M21 M22 M3S1000 G90G55Z–150.

turn the width across flat at the top of the aluminum filter case (with the yellow label) using a wrench and remove the filter case. keep the center–through coolant running continuously to check for clogging of the suction filter.2 Cleaning the #150 Suction Filter 1.2 (a) Replacing the filter case 3. Fig. top it up. the gage is in the green zone (unless damaged) because no coolant flows. 461 . Check whether any pipes or cables are damaged.) It may be difficult to check for clogging if the pump is started and stopped with a short cycle time during actual machining. Before replacing the suction filter. 2.6 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE 28. clogging cannot be checked. The following photo **** shows the clogging check gage for the #150 suction filter. clean it with a brush. 3. Check the clogging check gage to determine whether the filter is clogged during pump operation.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 28. If the net is clogged with chips.28. clean or replace the filter. the #150 suction filter in the pump cannot be cleaned or replaced.6. In such a case. When this gage indicates 0.1 Daily Inspection (1) Inspection before operation 1. The suction filter is simple to remove. Draw out the #100 mesh partition plate from the coolant tank and check whether the net is clogged. (Note that while the pump is stopped. If the coolant level is low.6. Thus.05 MPa or more (the needle is to the left of the 12 o’clock position) during coolant pump operation.6. While the center–through coolant unit is operating. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 28. For safety. 4. manually turn the air release plug on this side to release any residual pressure inside the filter. 2. First. 5. 28. turn the center–through circuit breaker in the control box off.

CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 #150 filter element Fig.) 8. When remounting the cleaned filter.28.28. 462 .6. In the filter case you will find the #150 suction filter. Remember to tighten the air release plug.) 7. (The bottom of the filter has an O ring. (The suction filter can easily be removed manually. Remember to turn the circuit breaker in the control box back on. 9.2 (b) #150 filter element 6. be careful not to mount the filter upside down.

Ioosen the box nut Fig. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 28.3 (b) Take filter housing to piece (1) 463 . Turn the box nut on the upper portion of the filter housing using a wrench and remove it.28. Drain Fig. for safety. turn the center–through circuit breaker in the control box off.28. turn the drain plug on the lower portion of the filter housing using a wrench first to remove the residual pressure inside the filter. 1.3 (a) Discharge the coolant of filter housing 2. The line filter is simple to remove. Firmly hold the filter housing to prevent it from falling.3 Replacing the Line Filter (1) First.6.6. Before replacing the line filter.6.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 28.

6. Or. the coolant may leak from the rotary union drain. 5. 28. Remember to turn the circuit breaker in the control box back on. perform a dry run as follows immediately after replacing the filter: 464 .28. Take the filter out of the housing and replace it.) Fig. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Fig. be careful not to damage the O ring or another part. (2) To avoid such problems. This is caused by the filter housing and peripheral pipes containing air: 1. When tightening the screw on the filter housing. 2.28.6. (No orientation is specified for the filter.3 (c) Take filter housing to piece (2) 3.6.28. Remember to tighten the screw of the drain plug on the lower portion of the filter housing. When machining starts using a narrow tool (such as a long drill 3 mm in diameter) without first testing the system.3 (d) Replace the line filter 4. Noise is produced as air escapes.4 Dry Run After Replacement of the Line Filter (1) The center–through coolant may have the following problems immediately after the line filter is replaced. the tool may be broken due to insufficient coolant pressure or flow rate. 6.

To increase the pressure. 3. To decrease the pressure. rotate the pressure adjustment bolt CCW to elongate the spring. Internal structure (VB type) Spring holding plate O ring (Spring Hexagon nut Valve body support nut) Pressure adjusting bolt Spring Valve Cap (Applying pressure to oil (To the pump inlet side) from the pump delivery side) O ring Packing Fig. Clean away any chips sticking to the machine cover and mechanical unit. 28.5 Structure of the Relief Valve 28.5 Adjusting the Relief Valve (1) If the performance of the pump is lowered after prolonged use. Be sure to set the pressure while checking the pressure gage so that the setting pressure does not exceed 2. replacing the tool used for machining. 2. firmly tighten the hexagonal nut of the pressure adjustment bolt.6. 2.6. Mount a center–through tool (tool with a through hole as large as possible) on the spindle and execute M23 (spindle air purge) for several minutes to remove the coolant from within the spindle and clean it. 465 .6 Other Maintenance (1) Perform the following work before relocating the machine or before a long vacation: 1. 3. 2. 1. Execute M23 (spindle air purge) for several minutes to remove foreign matter and coolant from within the pipes and clean them to enable the rotary union to move smoothly. Perform a dry run with the center–through coolant flowing to remove any air from the filter housing and center–through pump.6. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 1.0 MPa. rotate (screw down) the pressure adjustment bolt CW to contract the spring. Upon completion of pressure adjustment. referring to the figure below. Execute M23 to remove the coolant within the through hole.5 mm in diameter with a through hole) on the spindle. clean away any sludge from the surface.28. such as a drill at least 6. Mount a center–through tool (tool with a through hole as large as possible. as well as the fine–grain chips which accumulate in the gap around the collet. adjust the pressure. Also.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 28. 3.

3. The specifications are listed below. CT pump A97L–0201–0859#CTPUMP 1 Actual operating time 10000h 466 .: 03–3425–5633 Product name Manufacturer specification G78–C8–1N G78–F8–1N FANUC order specification Remarks Set of 10 Set of 10 Filtering precision 10µm 25µm CUNO FILTER CARTRIDGE CUNO FILTER CARTRIDGE A98–0005–0145#G78C8–10 A98–0005–0145#G78F8–10 28. When this message is output. however. Filters are available in packs of ten.7. replace each part. The relief pressure has been adjusted. For replacement. 4.1 Line Filter 1. 2. Users in Japan must directly contact the following vendor for further supplies of this filter. Contact: Tokyo CUNO SALES CO. LTD Tel: 03–3425–3351/Fax. contact the FANUC Service Division.7 MAINTENANCE PARTS 28. A line filter with a filtering precision of 10µm is also available.2 Other Maintenance Parts 1.. (The actual operating time in the table indicates the cumulative time for the center–through coolant operation cycles. Center–through coolant pump (single–motor). CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 28. One 25–µm line filter is supplied with the main unit as a spare part. Overseas users should contact their FANUC agent.) Required quantity 1 Life Remarks Part name Specification Rotary union A97L–0201–0861#320327 Actual operating time 10000h Mounted on the upper portion of the spindle motor For replacement. ROBODRILL has a function which tracks the total operating time and outputs an operator message once these parts have reached the end of their service life.7. Contact the following vendor directly. contact the FANUC Service Representative. The parts listed in the following table incur friction that degrades their performance over the long term.28. Mounted on the coolant tank. The service life of this filter is shorter.

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 28. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 2. Part name Specification Required quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting and adjustment Not required Not required Not required Adjusted Not required Not required Not required Adjusted Adjusted Adjusted Pressure switch (high) Differential pressure switch Pressure switch (low) Remarks Suction filter #100 partition Coolant valve Pressure gate High–pressure hose Check valve Swivel joint SP100 SP101 SP102 A97L–0201–0859#150SCF A97L–0201–0859#100PTI A97L–0201–0859#CLTVAL A97L–0201–0859#PRGAUGE A97L–0201–0859#HP–HOSE A290–6078–V893#STD A290–6079–V894#STD A97L–0201–0859#SP100 A97L–0201–0859#SP101 A97L–0201–0859#SP102 #150 suction filter of the pump #100 mesh partition plate YV140 467 . The specifications of other maintenance units related to center–through are listed below.

CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 28.28.8 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF CENTER –THROUGH COOLANT AND COMPRESSED AIR 468 .

8.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 28.1 Coolant Circuit Diagram of Center–through Coolant Unit 400W Fig.8. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 28.28.1 Coolant circuit diagram Detail A (for piping) Coolant unit side adapter Spindle side adapter G 3/8 Outer thread with 30_ Female taper sheet G 3/8 Inner thread with 30_ Male taper sheet 469 .

2 Compressed Air Circuit Diagram 470 .49MPa 0.29MPa Air seal for the rotating union Pilot air for coolant valve Spindle taper hole air blow Fig.8.2 Compressed Air Circuit Diagram Additional control for center–through coolant 0.28.8.28. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 28.

3 Manual Operation Specify each M code listed above in MDI mode. The coolant buttons on the ROBODRILL operator’s panel cannot be used.9 CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT CONTROL 28.9.9. Remarks Use either M24 or M09.F500 G00Z–100.) 28. Turns the air purge on. Select M24 or M09 using a parameter. ² Starts the center–through coolant pump.2 M codes M code M20 M21 M22 M23 M09 M24 Use the following M codes. M09 M02 ² Turns the center–through coolant off (stops output of the coolant). D Air purges the remaining coolant from within tool.1 Overview The following functions are provided: D Clears the coolant from the oil hole at the tip of the tool.9. Turns the center–through coolant on (outputs the coolant). 471 . 28. Turns air purge off. ² center–through coolant on (outputs the coolant).B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 28.9. Turns the center–through coolant off (stops output of the coolant). M6T6 M21 M22 M3S1000 G90G55Z–150. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 28. Function Stops the center–through coolant pump.4 Commands in a Program 00060 G80G40G49 G00G91G28Z0. Starts the center–through coolant pump. G01Z–200. (Air is output from the oil hole at the tip of the tool.) 28. (The buttons are dedicated to external coolant.

472 . 1033. 1032. or remote mode When menu operation is determined When the start button is pressed (c) In the following case. air purge is turned off. (f) When the reset key on the ROBODRILL operator’s panel is pressed. (Only when keep relay K1#7=1 is specified) (g) When air purge is specified.) (e) When an alarm related to the center–through coolant (alarm number: 1031. the pump stops automatically. In this case. spindle rotation. or rigid tapping is specified. the center–through coolant is automatically turned on. (b) When the air purge is specified. In this case. the center–through coolant pump may stop. Upon restart. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 28. (c) If the door is opened during automatic operation. the pump is kept on regardless of whether the above M code commands are specified. (b) In the following cases. the center–through coolant is turned off. air purge is turned off. When the tool moves up in the Z–axis direction during ATC operation. the air is pulse–output. Upon restart. (The CE making specification stops. the pump stops. then specify the command. (f) When the reset key on the ROBODRILL operator’s panel is pressed. air continues to be output regardless of whether the M23 command is specified. (d) When stop by a feed hold is specified during automatic operation. alarm 1034 “Center–through coolant pump not started” is issued. however. When keep relay K3#4=1 is specified. or 1035) occurs. the center–through coolant does not stop. (b) When the M22 command is specified. the center–through coolant is turned off.9. the center–through coolant is turned off. (Only when keep relay K3#5=0 is specified) When one minute elapses after the center–through coolant is turned off (d) When an alarm related to the center–through coolant (alarm number: 1031. MDI. (3) [Air purge] (a) The air purge is turned on by the M23 command and turned off by the M09 command. or 1035) occurs. (2) [Center–through coolant] (a) The center–through coolant is turned on by the M22 command and turned off by the M09 command. 1033. air purge is automatically turned on. M21 or M20 need not be specified in the program. 1032. (Only when keep relay K3#5=0 is specified) When the mode is changed to automatic. (e) The CE making specification stops. air purge is turned off. (c) If the door is opened during automatic operation.28. the center–through coolant is turned off.5 Control (1) [Center–through coolant pump] (a) The center–through coolant pump is started by the M21 command and stopped by the M20 command. (Only when keep relay K1#7=1 is specified) (g) When center–through coolant. (d) When stop by a feed hold is specified during automatic operation. the pump starts automatically. Start the pump. air purge does not stop.

SUCTION FILTER LOADING Cause The viscosity of the coolant is too high. 6000. The coolant leaks due to a piping error or damaged pipe. The line filter has been clogged for more than 100 hours. The operating time of the center–through coolant pump has exceeded 9999 hours. The operating time of the center–through coolant pump has exceeded 3000. The coolant pump is improperly adjusted. The coolant level is low.6 Alarm Operator Messages Number 1031 1032 Message Abnormal center–through coolant pressure (upper limit) Abnormal center–through coolant pressure (lower limit) Clogging of the center–through coolant filter Center–through coolant pump not started Overloading of the center–through coolant motor Lower limit of the coolant Lower limit of the coolant Clogging of the center–through coolant tank filter End of the service life of the rotary union End of the service life of the center–through coolant pump Adjust the center–coolant pressure.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 28. The operating time of the rotary union has exceeded 9999 hours. The suction filter is clogged. M22 is specified when the center–through coolant is not started.9. The center–through coolant motor is overloaded. The coolant level is low. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 28. The line filter is clogged. 1033 1034 1035 1036 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 473 . or 9000 hours. The coolant level is low.

1 0: Displays only operator messages when the coolant is at the lower limit. 1: Displays the operator messages and alarm when the level of the coolant is at the lower limit. 1 0: Turns the center–through coolant off according to the M09 command. 60000 Waiting time until the pump stops after the center–through coolant is turned off 300 Pulse output on time for the air purge 300 Pulse output off time for the air purge 10000 Waiting time until the air seal valve is turned off after the center–through coolant is turned off 2000 Monitoring time for abnormal coolant pressure (upper limit) 1000 Monitoring time for abnormal coolant pressure (lower limit) 100 Filter clogging monitoring time 9999 Monitoring time for service life of the rotary union 9999 Monitoring time for service life of the center–through coolant pump 3000 Monitoring interval for operating time of the center–through coolant pump K4#4 K5#4 T00 T38 T40 T42 T44 T46 C16 C20 C24 D82 474 .9. 1: Turns the center–through coolant off according to the M24 command. 1: Enables manual button control for center through coolant. 0 0: Enables automatic on and off of the center–through coolant pump.7 Parameters (PMC Parameters) Number K3#4 K3#5 K3#6 K4#1 K4#2 K4#3 Default Function 0 0: Controls on and off of the center–through coolant pump. 1: Enables detection of the lower limit of the coolant. 1: The center–through coolant pump is always turned on. 1: Enables center–through coolant control. 1 0: Disables center–through coolant control. 0 0: Disables manual button control for center through coolant. 0 0: Disables the detection of the coolant lower limit.28. 0 0: Disables the detection of a clogged suction filter. 1: Enables the detection of a clogged suction filter. 1: Disables automatic on and off of the center–through coolant pump. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 28.

9. This signal is turned on if the center– through coolant pump overheats.4 X5. This signal is turned off if an abnormal pressure is detected. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 28.1 X5. external interfaces Y3. This signal is turned off if the lower limit is detected. X11.0 to X5. This signal is turned off if an abnormal pressure is detected.2 X5.2 X5. This signal is turned off if the filter is clogged.0 to Y3.0 X5.1 Y3. When this signal is on.7 When this signal is on. When this signal is on.) When the manual button for the center through coolant is disabled (bit 4 of parameter K5 is equal to 1 and bit 2 of parameter K4 is equal to 1). air is output. 475 .7 are unavailable. This signal is accepted when a pulse of 100 ms or longer is input. This signal is accepted when a pulse 100 ms or longer is input.7 cannot be used.9.5 X11. the pump operates. This signal is turned off if the filter is clogged.8 DI/DO Signal name Address Connection terminal XT4–37 XT4–38 XT4–41 XT4–13 XT4–14 XT4–17 XT4–18 XT4–19 XT4–20 XTC1–20 XTC1–23 XTC1–24 Remarks Center–through coolant pump control Center–through coolant valve control Air seal valve control Coolant lower limit detection Abnormal coolant pressure (upper limit) detection Filter clogging detection Abnormal coolant pressure (lower limit) detection Overheating center–through coolant pump Suction Filter clogging detection Center–through coolant pump on/off button Center–through coolant on/off button Air purge on/off button Y3.3 X5.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 28.5 X11. This signal is accepted when a pulse 100 ms or longer is input. coolant is output.9 Restriction D When center–through coolant control is enabled (K5#4=1).7 and X5.6 X11. (These interfaces are dedicated to the center–through coolant.0 Y3. Valid only in manual mode 28.5 to X11.

28.10. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 28.1 Power Supply CTC PUMP=Center though coolant pump 476 .10 ELECTRIC CONTROL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF CENTER THROUGH COOLANT 28.

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

28.10.2
Input/Output –Output
C.T.C CONTROL UNIT=Center though coolant control unit

477

28. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

28.10.3
Input/Output–Input

478

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

29. AI HIGH–PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION/MODELER CONTROL II FUNCTION (OPTION)

29

AI HIGH–PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION/ MODELER CONTROL II FUNCTION (OPTION)

For these functions, refer to the relevant CNC operator’s manuals. Modeler control II function = AI nano contour control function When using the AI high–precision contour control function/modeler control II function, note the following: 1) When specifying a tool change, be sure to turn off the AI high–precision contour control function/modeler control II function. To turn off the AI high–precision contour control function: G05 P0 To turn off the modeler control II function: G05.1 Q0

479

30. HIGH–SPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

30

HIGH–SPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

480

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

30. HIGH–SPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

30.1
OVERVIEW

A skip function that uses a high–speed skip signal (to be connected directly to the CNC not via the PMC) instead of the ordinary skip signal (X4.7) is available. When the high–speed skip signal is used, up to 8 signals can be input. In ordinary skip signal input, the detection delay and variation are from 0 to 2 msec (on the CNC side only). In high–speed skip signal input, however, the detection delay and variation do not exceed 0.1 msec to allow high–precision measurement.

481

30. HIGH–SPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

30.2
ACCELERATION AND SERVO DELAY COMPENSATION (TYPE A/B)

With the skip function, the current position in the NC is stored using the skip signal. However, the current position in the NC includes a servo system delay, so that the current position is shifted by a servo system delay from the position where the skip signal is actually input. This shift amount can be found from the positional deviation held by the servo system and the accumulated pulses due to acceleration/deceleration for feed in the NC. When this shift amount is considered, the need to include a servo system delay in a measurement error is eliminated. This shift amount can be compensated for by one of two types of methods with bit 0 of NC parameter No. 6201 or bit 1 of NC parameter No. 6201. 1) Type A: A value found from a cutting time constant and servo time constant (loop gain) is used as a shift amount. 2) Type B: A positional deviation and accumulated pulses due to acceleration/deceleration when the skip signal is turned on are used as a shift amount.
Tool move direction

High–speed skip signal Pnc Q P

Actual tool stop position

Position where the skip signal is input

Coordinate system origin

Pnc: Position where the skip signal is input and the tool is actually stopped [mm/inch] P: Q: Distance to be measured [mm/inch] Servo system delay [mm/inch]

In the above, P = Pnc – Q is calculated in the NC with bit 0 of NC parameter No. 6201 or bit 1 of NC parameter No. 6201. A shift amount calculation of type A (bit 0 of NC parameter No. 6201 = 1) is made as follows: Q = Fm 1/60 (a Tc/1000 + Ts/1000) Fm: Feedrate [mm/min or inch/min] Tc: Cutting time constant [msec] NC parameter No. 1622: For exponential acceleration/deceleration NC parameter No. 1628: For linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Tc = 0 when bit 7 of NC parameter No. 6200 = 0 Servo time constant [msec] Let G be a loop gain (NC parameter No. 1825) (Unit: 1/sec). Then, Ts = 1000/G = 1 for exponential acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
482

Ts:

a:

= 1/2 for linear

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

30. HIGH–SPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

NOTE When using type A (bit 0 of NC parameter No. 6201 = 1), turn on the skip signal in constant–speed state.

30.3
COMMAND

(Example) G31 Z–200.F10 G31 is valid only in the specified block.

30.4
ADDRESS
F122 #7 HDI7 #6 HDI6 #5 HDI5 #4 HDI4 #3 HDI3 #2 HDI2 #1 HDI1 #0 HDI0

483

30. HIGH–SPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

30.5
PARAMETERS
#7 6200 #6 SRE #5 #4 HSS #3 #2 #1 #0

HSS With the skip function, a high–speed skip signal is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. SRE When a high–speed skip signal is used: 0 : The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (0 ³ 1). 1 : The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (1 ³ 0).
#7 6201 #6 #5 IGX #4 #3 #2 #1 SEB #0 SEA

SEA When the skip function is used and a high–speed skip signal is turned on, acceleration/deceleration and a servo delay are: 0 : Not considered. 1 : Considered and compensated for (type B). SEB When the skip function is used and a high–speed skip signal is turned on, acceleration/deceleration and a servo delay are: 0 : Not considered. 1 : Considered and compensated for (type B). IGX When the high–speed skip function is used, X4.7 is: 0 : Enabled as a skip signal. 1 : Disabled as a skip signal.
#7 1S8 #6 1S7 #5 1S6 #4 1S5 #3 1S4 #2 1S3 #1 1S2 #0 1S1

6202

1S1 to 1S8 Specify which high–speed skip signal to enable for a G31 skip command. The correspondence between the bits and signals is indicated below. The setting of each bit has the following meaning: 0 : Disables the high–speed skip signal corresponding to each bit. 1 : Enables the high–speed skip signal corresponding to each bit. 1S1 1S2 1S3 1S4 1S5 1S6 1S7 1S8 — — — — — — — — HDI0 HDI1 HDI2 HDI3 HDI4 HDI5 HDI6 HDI7

NOTE HDI0 to HDI7 are the high–speed skip signals.

484

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

30. HIGH–SPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

30.6
CONNECTION
XTA1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 HDI0 0V HDI2 0V 0V HDI4 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 0V HDI1 0V HDI3 0V 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 HDI5 0V HDI6 0V HDI7 0V

485

30. HIGH–SPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

30.7
INPUT SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS

[Circuit configuration]
External device Driver CNC LiH/IiL Filter VH/VL Shield Receiver

[Absolute maximum rating] [Input characteristics]
Item High–level input voltage Low–level input voltage High–level input current

Input voltage range Vin: –3.6 to +13.6 V

Symbol VH VL IiH

Specification 3.6 to 11.6 0 to 1.0 0.5max 9.3max

Unit V V mA mA mA ms

Remarks

Vin = 5V Vin = 10V Vin = 0V

Low–level input current Input signal pulse width

IiL

–8.0max 20min

NOTE 1 The + sign of IiH/IiL indicates the direction of flow into the receiver, and the – sign of IiH/IiL indicates the direction of flow from the receiver. 2 A high–speed skip signal is assumed to be 1 when the input voltage is low. A high–speed skip signal is assumed to be 0 when the input voltage is high.

486

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

31. HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

31

HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

487

31. HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

31.1
OVERVIEW

To reduce non–cutting time for machining multiple holes in succession, the drilling cycles provide a coasting distance above point R. A reduced operation time is achieved by rapid traverse overlapping and three–axis (X–/Y–/Z–axis) positioning. The commands used are the same as the conventional commands G73 and G81 through G83. A coasting distance is specified using parameter No. 5150. A rapid traverse overlapping deceleration ratio used in a canned cycle is common to all axes, and is to be specified in parameter No. 5151. When bit 0 (RBDCY) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, coasting operation is performed in either the initial point return mode or the R point return mode.

488

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

31. HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

31.2
CANNED CYCLES
G73 (G98)

High–speed peck–drilling canned cycle (G73)

Coasting end point

G73 (G99)

Coasting distance Point I Passing point I Coasting distance Point R q Point R q Coasting end point

Passing point R

d

d

q

d

q

d

q

q

Point Z

(Command format)
G73 X_Y_Z_R_Q_F_K_
X_Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ K_ : : : : : : Hole position data Distance from point R to hole bottom Distance from initial point to point R Depth of each cut Cutting feedrate Number of repeats

489

31. HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

Drilling/spot drilling canned cycle (G81)
G81 (G98) Coasting distance Coasting end point Passing point I G81 (G99)

Point I

Point I Coasting end point Coasting distance

Point R

Point R Passing point R

Point Z

Point Z

(Command format)
G81 X_Y_Z_R_F_K_
X_Y_ Z_ R_ F_ K_ : : : : : Hole position data Distance from point R to hole bottom Distance from initial point to point R Cutting feedrate Number of repeats

490

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

31. HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

Drilling/counter boring canned cycle (G82)
G82 (G98) G82 (G99)

Coasting distance Point I Coasting end point Passing point I Coasting end point Coasting distance Point R Point R Passing point I Point I

P

Point Z

P

Point Z

(Command format)
G82 X_Y_Z_R_P_F_K_
X_Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ : : : : : : Hole position data Distance from point R to hole bottom Distance from initial point to point R Dwell time at hole bottom Cutting feedrate Number of repeats

491

31. HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

Peck drilling canned cycle (G83)
G83 (G98) Coasting distance Coasting end point G83 (G99)

Point I

Point I

Coasting end point Coasting distance

Passing point I

Point R

Point R Passing point I

q

d

q

d

q

d

q

d

q

q

Point Z

Point Z

(Command format)
G83 X_Y_Z_R_Q_F_K_
X_Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ K_ : : : : : : Hole position data Distance from point R to hole bottom Distance from initial point to point R Depth of each cut Cutting feedrate Number of repeats

The operations below are performed: 1) 2) 3) 4) Rapid traverse to XY–specified position Rapid traverse to point R Cutting feed from point R to point Z Rapid traverse from point Z to coasting end point

31.2.1
Differences from Conventional G73 and G81 through G83 Codes

When bit 0 (RBDCY) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, these codes operate as the high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycles. When bit 0 (RBDCY) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 0, these codes operate as the conventional canned cycles, G73 and G81 to G83.

492

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

31. HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

31.2.2
Retreat Operation

The tool moves in rapid traverse to a coasting end point, which is determined by adding a coasting distance to initial point/point R.

31.2.3
Positioning Operation

Positioning (X–/Y–axis) to the next hole position in the cycle is started by rapid traverse overlapping during retreat operation. At this time, positioning to point R along the Z–axis is also started.

31.2.4
Single–Block Stop

Single–block stop operation is performed at the following points: 1) Position where positioning to the first hole position is completed 2) Point R before drilling the first hole 3) Position (coasting end point) where retreat operation from the bottom of the first hole is completed 4) Point R before drilling the second hole 5) Position (coasting end point) where retreat operation from the bottom of the second hole is completed If a single–block stop operation is performed at 3) or 5), rapid traverse overlapping is not actuated, but the tool moves up to a coasting end point.

31.2.5
Return to Initial Point/Point R

In either the initial point return mode (G98) or the R point return mode (G99), coasting operation is performed.

31.2.6
Cancellation

When G80 or a G code of group 01 (G00 to G03, G60 (when bit 0 (MDL) of parameter No. 5431) is set to 1) is specified, a high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycle is cancelled. At the time of cancellation, the tool is positioned at a coasting end point along the Z–axis.

31.2.7
Rapid Traverse Overlapping

If rapid traverse blocks are specified in succession in a high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycle, rapid traverse overlapping is applied. Parameter No. 5151 is used to specify a rapid traverse overlapping deceleration ratio. To disable rapid traverse overlapping, set 0 in parameter No. 5151. In a high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycle, rapid traverse overlapping is enabled even when the move direction is reversed. Set the parameter, taking influences such as a shock to the machine into consideration.

493

31. HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

31.3
ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS
5104 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 RBDCY

[Data type] Bit RBDCY The high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycles are: 0 : Enabled. 1 : Disabled.
5150

In a high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycle, set a coasting distance. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data]
Increment system
Millimeter input

IS–A
0.01 0.001

IS–B
0.001 0.0001

IS–C
0.0001 0.00001

Unit
mm inch

Inch input

[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
5151

Set a rapid traverse overlapping deceleration ratio to be used between rapid traverse blocks in a high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycle. During the cycle, this setting is applied to all axes. [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 NOTE In a high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycle, rapid traverse overlapping is applied even when bit 4 (RT0) of parameter No. 1601 is set to 0. To disable rapid traverse overlapping, set 0 in this parameter.

494

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

31. HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

31.4
NOTES

1 The high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycles are enabled when the drilling axis is the Z–axis. (Bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101 = 0) 2 Drilling operation is not performed in a block that specifies none of the X–axis, Y–axis, Z–axis, R–axis, and addition axes. 3 Specify a R command in a block that performs drilling operation. A R command, when specified in a block that does not perform drilling operation, is not stored as modal data. (However, a R command specified in a block that specifies K0 is stored as modal data.) 4 Do not specify a G code of group 01 (G00 to G03, G60 (when bit 0 (MDL) of parameter No. 5431) is set to 1) in a block that specifies G81. Otherwise, G81 is cancelled. 5 In the canned cycle mode, tool offset data is ignored. 6 When bit 0 (RBDCY) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, the high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycles are enabled either in the initial point return mode (G98) or in the R point return mode (G99). 7 During a high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycle, rapid traverse overlapping is enabled even when bit 4 (RT0) of parameter No. 1601 is set to 0. A rapid traverse overlapping deceleration ratio is to be set in parameter No. 5151. 8 Before specifying a rapid traverse overlapping deceleration ratio for a high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycle in the parameter, conduct a test run sufficiently to ensure that a slant retreat operation is not performed. Rapid traverse overlapping is applied even when the move direction is reversed. So, consider influences such as a shock to the machine when setting a value in the parameter. To disable rapid traverse overlapping during a cycle, set 0 in parameter No. 5151. 9 The high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycles are enabled in the cycles of G73 and G81 to G83.

495

31. HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

31.5
EXAMPLE OF CYCLE OPERATION

From point R to point Z of the first hole, cutting feed is executed at a specified feedrate value of F. From the hole bottom of the first hole, retreat operation is performed to a coasting end point along the R–axis, which is determined by adding a parameter–set value to point I or point R. During retreat operation, the tool moves along the X–axis, Y–axis, and Z–axis by rapid traverse overlapping. At this time, rapid traverse of interpolation type is performed, and the tool is positioned at the second hole along a straight path. Then, the cutting feed for the second hole is executed at a specified feedrate value of F. During a high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycle, rapid traverse overlapping is enabled even when the move direction is reversed.
F Rapid traverse overlapping Coasting end point Coasting distance

Point I G98

Coasting end point Coasting distance

Point R Workpiece surface G99

Point Z

Point Z

496

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

32. TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION

32

TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION

497

32. TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

32.1
OVERVIEW

If the table is not placed at a particular position, tool change operation is prohibited. This function is used, for example, when the tool interferes with a workpiece or jig at the time turret turning in tool change operation.

498

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

32. TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION

32.2
SPECIFICATION
(0,0) X (500,0)

Table move stroke Y

Tool change prohibition area (0,–380) (500,–380)

g

The maximum stroke along the X–axis is 700 mm for T14/21iCL. The maximum stroke along the X–axis is 300 mm for T14/21iCS.

If the table is placed in the tool change prohibition area (X and Y machine coordinates) in the figure above, tool change operation is prohibited. D An alarm is issued when the TOOL CHANGE button on the operator’s panel is pressed in MDI operation. D An alarm is issued when M06 is specified in automatic operation/MDI operation. D One tool change prohibition area can be specified by specifying an arbitrary table position (X and Y machine coordinates). NOTE If tool change operation and table movement are specified at the same time (Example: G54 X100.Y100.M6 T1), and the table is placed in the tool change prohibition area during turret turning (during tool change operation), tool change operation and table movement gradually stop and an alarm is issued. Create a machining program so that the table is not placed in the tool change prohibition area at tool change time. If the machine stops in the state above, perform turret recovery operation. Turret recovery operation is performed even when the table is placed in the tool change prohibition area. So, ensure that the tool does not interfere with a workpiece and jig.

499

32. TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

32.3
ALARM

Message: 1015 TABLE IS PLACED PROHIBITION AREA.

IN

TOOL

CHANGE

This alarm can be reset by pressing the RESET key on the operator’s panel.

500

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

32. TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION

32.4
PARAMETERS

[NC parameters]
No. 6914 6915 6934 6935 6954 6955 Setting 1 2 Details Axis along which a tool change prohibition area is specified (1: X–axis) Axis along which a tool change prohibition area is specified (2: Y–axis) Maximum X–axis value for tool change prohibition area Maximum Y–axis value for tool change prohibition area Minimum X–axis value for tool change prohibition area Minimum Y–axis value for tool change prohibition area

[PMC parameter keep relay]
No. K2#7 K2#6 Setting 1 1 Details The tool change prohibition function is enabled. Specified area or tool change prohibition area

(Example) To set a tool change prohibition area of 0 to 250 mm along the X–axis and 0 to –190 mm along the Y–axis
6934 6935 6954 6955 250000 99999999(*) –99999999(*) –1900000

NOTE For safety, the area outside the operation area is also specified as a tool change prohibition area.

501

33. MACRO CALL USING G CODE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

33

MACRO CALL USING G CODE

For these functions, refer to the relevant CNC operator’s manuals. When using the Macro Call Using G Code, note the following : • It is not possible to use G code from 100 to 899. These are special G code for conversational automatic programming function (Manual Guide). In case of SUPER C.A.P iM installation, G code for Macro call has no abovelimit.

502

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

34

SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

503

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

34.1
OVERVIEW

This function extends the spindle air blow time when tools are changed. This function is useful for removing chips adhered to the taper shank of the tooling.

504

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

34.2
SEQUENCE
Tool change sequence: 1. In the same manner as the ordinary tool change sequence, the tool rises along the Z–axis, the turret turns, then the tool lowers along the Z–axis until Z = about 98 mm. 2. The spindle air blow starts. The tool lowers along the Z–axis at rapid traverse LOW speed.

3. When the tool has lowered along the Z–axis to a specified position, the tool change sequence stops. The stop takes place with the spindle air blow kept output. If the specified time has elapsed before the tool lowers along the Z–axis to the specified position, operation 4. takes place.

4. Operation returns to the ordinary tool change sequence.

505

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

34.3
PARAMETERS

[NC parameters]
No. 6919 3

This parameter specifies the axis of which operation is to be stopped at the time of spindle air blow. Always set 3 (the Z–axis).
No. 6939 65000 (Standard value)

This parameter specifies the Z–axis stop position at the time of spindle air blow. (Standard value: Z = 65 mm) Data type : 2 bytes Unit of data : 0.001 mm Valid data range : 0 to 100000
No. 6959 –350000

Data related to the Z–axis stop position at the time of spindle air blow. Always set –350000 (–350 mm).

506

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

[PMC parameters (data table)]
No. D 850 D 851 D 852 D 853 D 854 D 855 D 856 D 857 D 858 D 859 D 860 D 861 D 862 D 863 D 864 D 865 D 865 D 865 D 865 D 865 D 865 Spindle air blow extension time for tool number T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 T17 T18 T19 T20 T21

These parameters set the extension time for spindle air blow. (Setting on a tool–by–tool basis) Specifying 0 does not extend the spindle air blow time. (Ordinary tool change sequence) Data type : 1 byte Unit of data : 48 ms Valid data range : –128 to 127 When setting is 1 to 127: Setting × 48 ms When setting is –1 to –128: (256 + setting) × 48 ms Example 1 : When 100 is set: 100 × 48 ms = 4800 ms (4.8 s) Example 2 : When –56 is set: (256 – 56) × 48 ms = 9600 ms (9.6 s)

507

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

(Additional information) The data table display type is factory–set to the word type (displaying D850, D852, D854, and so on). To change the display type to the byte type (displaying D850, D851, D852, and so on), set “TYPE” on the PMC data group setting screen of the PMC screen to 0.

508

B–85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

34.4
NOTE
1. When Z–axis operation stops at the position specified in NC parameter No. 6939, the actually stopped position may vary within 1 mm of the parameter–specified position.

509

35. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01

35

TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION

510

511 .1 OVERVIEW This control function is provided for the touch probe MP11 manufactured by Renishaw plc. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION 35.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 35.

F50 W2 M18 Move to measurement start point Move to measurement start point Turn on touch probe Measurement Turn off touch probe NOTE When specifying M17 (or M18) then M18 (or M17).35. provide an interval of at least 10 seconds between these commands. M18 : Turns off the power to the touch probe. 560 M17 G184 Z7. 659 Z–148. 512 . 186 Y20.2 FUNCTION M17 : Turns on the power to the touch probe. R15. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 35. (Sample program) G00 G90 G54 X4.

6 X4.5 X4.3 CONNECTION (XT4) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Pin No. orange Blue. XT4–07 XT4–08 XT4–11 XT4–12 XT4–09 XT4–28 XT4–25 XT4–27 XT4–21 XT4–27 PE Address X4.0 (0V) (+24B) (0V) Signal Probe status Probe battery Probe error Skip Input common Input common Probe ON/OFF Output common Power supply Power supply Ground line Line color Light blue Purple Green Yellow Pink.7 (+24B) (0V) Y2. gray White Brown Red Black Shield Wire mark XT4–07 XT4–08 XT4–11 XT4–12 XT4–09/+24B XT4–28/0V XT4–25 XT4–27/0V XT4–21/+24B XT4–27/0V PE 513 . TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION 35.4 X4.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 35.

5 X4.35.4 X4.7 Y2.6 X4.0 Signal name 58 : Probe status 59 : Low probe battery 60 : Probe error 46 : Skip 82 : Probe ON/OFF 514 .4 EXTERNAL INTERFACE SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT Address X4. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 35.

TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION 35.5 PARAMETERS [PMC parameter keep relay] No. K17 1 Bit 2 of K17 = 1: Enables control of the touch probe MP11. When 0 is set. an ordinary tool is assumed. [PMC parameter (data table)] No. Data type : One word Unit of data : None Valid data range : 0 to 21 515 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 35. D100 Touch probe tool number This parameter sets the number of the magazine to which the touch probe is attached.

The voltage of the probe battery has lowered. The number of the magazine to which the probe is attached is set in PMC parameter data table D100. Check the probe and receiving sensor orientations.6 ALARMS No. 1041 1042 PROBE SIGNAL ERROR PROBE BATTERY LOW SPINDLE ROTATION IS PROHIBITED 1043 1053 516 . dead battery. The probe or receiving sensor may be defective. A spindle rotation was specified with the probe attached to the spindle. or receiving sensor failure.35. This error may be due to a probe switching problem. Check the wire connections. and external interface settings. cabling. 1040 Message PROBE SYSTEM ERROR PROBE ON/OFF ERROR Description A probe system failure. The probe battery may be dead. and check whether the probe and receiving sensor window are dirty. spindle rotation is not permitted. and external interface settings. An error signal was output from the probe. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 35. There is no response to a probe ON/OFF command. Check the wire connections. cabling. While the probe is attached to the spindle.

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 35. the ROBODRILL operates as follows: D When spindle rotation is specified (by pressing the spindle rotation button on the operator’s panel or specifying M3 or M4). D You can specify tool change. alarm 1053 is indicated.5. D You can specify spindle orientation. 517 . and the spindle does not rotate. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION 35. Set the number of the magazine to which the touch probe is attached in data table D100.7 SPINDLE ROTATION DISABLE FUNCTION When the touch probe is attached to the spindle.) When the currently used magazine number is set in D100 (the touch probe is attached to the spindle). (See Section 35. spindle rotation can be disabled to prevent the touch probe from being damaged. Additional information : This function can be used also when the touch probe control function is not used (bit 1 of K17 = 0).

35. the touch probe is turned off automatically to save the battery of the touch probe. the touch probe is not turned off automatically. 518 .8 AUTOMATIC TURN–OFF OPERATION OF THE TOUCH PROBE When the power to the ROBODRILL is turned on/off. When the power to the ROBODRILL is turned off less than 10 seconds after M17 (or M18) is specified. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 35.

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. MANUAL GUIDE 36 MANUAL GUIDE 519 .

notes. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 36. 520 .1 OVERVIEW This chapter provides an overview of the manual guide. For operation and setting for each function. refer to “FANUC Manual Guide Operator’s Guide for Milling”. and other detailed information.36.

MANUAL GUIDE 36. the alarm/diagnosis window cannot be displayed. the detail input window and OUTPUT NC STATEMENTS window cannot be displayed. set the following parameter: Bit 2 of parameter No. To use the manual guide function. Guidance machining (option) of the manual guide function is unavailable.2 NOTES 1. 521 . When the alarm/diagnosis window is displayed. 3. When the detail input window or OUTPUT NC STATEMENTS window is displayed. 2.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. 5001 = 0: The address used for specifying the compensation number of cutter compensation C is D.

3. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 36.Radius D60 D8 D10 T code 1 2 3 H code 1 2 3 D code 11 12 13 φ8 522 .1 Explanation of Sample Program Y+ Work Size Work Origin : Cube 120(W) × 80(D) × 25(H) : The top and center of work 80mm X+ 120mm Z+ 25mm Process: Order 1 2 3 Process Facing Hole Machining Pocketing Tool Face mill Drill End mill T.36.3 OPERATION OF THE MANUAL GUIDE 36.

Facing 5. Tool Change to T2 6. Pocketing 13. Modal Command 3. Hole Machining 9. Modal Command 11.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. Tool Change to T1 2. Tool Change to T3 10. Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z Point 12. Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z Point 4. Modal Command 7. MANUAL GUIDE Process order of Contour Pocket : NC Program : 1. Process End The Name which is marked [ ] : Soft–key The Name which is marked < > : Hard–key on ROBODRILL Operator’s panel 523 . Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z Point 8.

P] soft–key. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 36. operation mode is no switched to EDIT mode. Operation mode is switched to EDIT mode automatically.2 Switching Over to Manual Guide Screen Display QUICK screen.3. Hit [C.A. MANUAL GUIDE screen is displayed.36. But in program operation. if screen is changed to MANUAL GUIDE screen. 524 .

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. Graphic Window : Tool Path or Anime Graphic is displayed. Inputted data is displayed. Program Window : Editing or operating NC program is displayed. Soft–key : Information is changed according to operation mode. 525 . edit menu. Current speed. Key in Buffer : Comment of Data. MANUAL GUIDE Status Window Graphic Window Program Window Key in Buffer Softkey Status Window : Current position (Absolute). Operating NC Program and Modal data is displayed. operation menu.

000 011=30. Hit [OFFSET] soft–key. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 36. Normally. hit [RETURN] soft–key.000) After set data.000 Y=–150.36.000 002=–110. hit [RETURN] soft–key.3 Data Setting Set Work Coordinates and Offset data. (G54 X=150. If you don’t use the Anime Graphic. Set the data. This data is used for hole size data on Anime Graphic.000 013=5.000) After set data. 526 .000 003=–120.3. Set the data.Tool Radius data of Drill is set to D code. it is not possible to set this data for hole machining tools. (001=–100. OFFSET window is displayed. WORK COORDINATES window is displayed. But in this case. D code is no use on hole machining. Hit [WRK CD] soft–key.000 012=4.

created date and time is stamped. Let’s modify comment. is stored to memory. 527 . Key in Program No.3. MANUAL GUIDE 36. Program Directory is displayed. (2000) Hit [SELECT] soft–key. when you input the NC program number.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. Hit [RETURN] soft–key. Hit <RIGHT CURSOR> Key. When new program is created. Specified Program No. if you cancel to select NC program.4 Selection of NC Program Select NC program. Hit [LIST] soft–key. It is not necessary to input character “O”.

MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Cursor selects word. ((TEST PROGRAM)) (The characters “(” and “)” for comment needs.. Comment is changed.. And when <ABC. Input new comment. When <ABC. 528 . cursor selects one line.) After set data.. cursor moves to comment part.Z> key is hit again.. When <RIGHT CURSOR> Key is hit again. When <LEFT CURSOR> Key is hit twice. hit <ALTER> key.36. soft–key function is switched to normal mode. soft–key function is switched to alphabet mode.Z> key is hit.

5 Creation of NC Program Create NC program. Hit the left side soft–key. MANUAL GUIDE 36. Hit [EDIT] soft–key. if above soft–key does not is displayed.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. (1) Tool Change to T1 529 . If the left side soft–key is hit in state of above soft–key displaying MANUAL GUIDE function finishes and QUICK screen is displayed.3.

When [DETAIL]soft–key is hit.36. setting item of “Next Tool No. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Edit Menu is displayed on soft–key. D=11 LENGTH OFFSET NO. T=1 CUTTER OFFSET NO.” is displayed. hit <INSERT> key. G301 command includes G80 (Cancel of canned cycle). But this item does not use on ROBODRILL. Set data. (TOOL NO. M05 (Spindle stop) and M09 (Coolant stop). G40 (Cancel of cutter compensation). TOOL SET window is displayed. 530 . H=1) After set data. Edited data is stored to memory. Hit [TOOL] soft–key. G49 (Cancel of tool length compensation).

hit <INPUT> key. one line is deleted. If <INPUT key> does not be hit. edited data does not be stored to memory. INITIAL SET window is displayed.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. Data input Window is displayed. MANUAL GUIDE After set data. Put on cursor to on line then hit <ALTER> key. (WORK CO–ORD. If cursor is on to one line and <DELETE> key is hit. If [RETURN] soft–key is hit instead of <INSERT> key after data inputted. this data does not decide and not stored to memory. Set data. If you want to modify the data. (2) Modal Command Hit [INIT] soft–key. W=G54 WORK SHAPE P=NO OUT) 531 .

(ABS/INC A=G90 PLANE SELECTION S=XYPLN INPUT UNIT M=NO OUT) Hit [RETURN] soft–key. Hit <INSERT> key. Set data. then DETAIL SET window is closed.36. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Hit [DETAIL] soft–key. 532 . Hit [MSF] soft–key.

(M CODE M=8) Hit <INSERT> key. Input (M3 S3000. The another way. Set data.. it is possible to store command to memory directly. This operation is as follows. Put on cursor to one line.Z> key.). then hit <INSERT> key. you can input data. Soft–key function is switched to alphabet mode. Next. you have to command spindle rotation (M03 S3000). 533 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. Using MSF code window. then hit <ABC.. MANUAL GUIDE MSF CODE window is displayed.

G=G43 RAPID/CUT G=RAPID END POINT X X=0.36.000 END POINT Z Z=5. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Inputted NC command is stored to memory. Set data. (LENGTH COMP. COMPENSATION window is displayed.000 END POINT Y Y=0.000) 534 . (3) Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z Point Hit [COMP] soft–key.

because already D–code is commanded on Tool Set window. Hit [FACE] soft–key. Facing. is no set. CUTTER COMP. and CUTTER OFFSET NO. Side Cutting. (4) Facing Hit [CYCLE] soft–key. Pocketing) does not use Cutter compensation function. D–code does not command on this window. And you don’t have to command H–code too. But D–code (Tool Radius data) needs for tool path calculation and anime graphic. Because next process (Hole machining. 535 . if you want to cancel (empty) the inputted data on data input window. Hit <CANCEL> –> <INPUT> key. MANUAL GUIDE Hit <INSERT> key.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. Cycle Menu is displayed on soft–key.

H=0. Set data.36. Hit [SQUARE] soft–key.000 FEED RATE F=500 CENTER POINT X=0.000 FINISHING ALW.000 V–LENGTH V=80. (MACH.000 REMOVAL STEP J=5.000 REMOVAL DEPTH B=5. PROCESS P=ROUGH END POINT Z=–5.000) 536 .000 CENTER POINT Y Y=0. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Facing Menu is displayed on soft–key.000 CUTTING WIDTH(%) C=70.000 U–LENGTH U=120. SQUARE FACE window is displayed.

TOOL SET window : (TOOL NO. Cycle Menu is displayed on soft–key. (LENGTH COMP.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. MANUAL GUIDE Hit <INSERT> key. Hit [HOLE] soft–key. D=12 LENGTH OFFSET NO.000) (8) Hole Machining Hit [CYCLE] soft–key. 537 . INITIAL SET window : (WORK CO–ORD. H=2) (6) Modal Command Set data in the same way 2).000 END POINT Y Y=0.000 END POINT Z Z=5. T=2 CUTTER OFFSET NO. G=G43 RAPID/CUT G=RAPID END POINT X X=0. W=G54 WORK SHAPE P=NO OUT) INITIAL SET (DETAIL) window : (ABS/INC A=G90 PLANE SELECTION S=XYPLN INPUT UNIT M=NO OUT) MSF CODE window : (M CODE M=8) MSF CODE window : (M CODE M=3 SPINDLE SPEED S=5000) (7) Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z Point Set data in the same way 3). (5) Tool Change to T2 Set data in the same way 1).

(MACHINE PATTERN G=NO DWL Z POINT Z=–25. Set data. Hit [DRILL] soft–key. 538 . DRILLING CYCLE window is displayed. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Drilling menu is displayed on soft–key.36. Hole Pattern Menu is displayed on soft–key.000 FEED RATE F=500) Hit <INSERT> key.000 R POINT R=2.

SQUARE window is displayed. Set data.000 V–LENGTH V=70.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36.000 U–LENGTH U=110. MANUAL GUIDE Hit [SQUARE] soft–key.000 U–NUMBER I=3 V–NUMBER J=3 PATTERN CONT.000 START POINT Y Y=–35. 539 . (START POINT X X=–55. Q=END) Hit <INSERT> key.

*. 540 . tan. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 It is possible to input expression and calculate (+.–. Calculated data is displayed. then hit <INPUT>key./. sin. Input expression.36. cos. square root and etc) on data input window. Calculated data is set. Hit <INPUT>key again.

541 . Pocket Menu is displayed on soft–key. G=G43 RAPID/CUT G=RAPID END POINT X X=0. INITIAL SET window : (WORK CO–ORD.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. H=3) You have to set D–code for anime graphic in case of Hole Machining yet.000 END POINT Y Y=0. Cycle Menu is displayed on soft–key. Hit [POCKET] soft–key. (10)Modal Command Set data in the same way 2). T=3 CUTTER OFFSET NO. MANUAL GUIDE (9) Tool Change to T3 Set data in the same way 1). W=G54 WORK SHAPE P=NO OUT) INITIAL SET (DETAIL) window : (ABS/INC A=G90 PLANE SELECTION S=XYPLN INPUT UNIT M=NO OUT) MSF CODE window : (M CODE M=8) MSF CODE window : (M CODE M=3 SPINDLE SPEED S=1200) (11)Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z Point Set data in the same way 3). Hit [CONTR] soft–key.000 END POINT Z Z=5. (LENGTH COMP.000) (12)Pocketing Hit [CYCLE] soft–key. TOOL SET window : (TOOL NO. D=13 LENGTH OFFSET NO.

PROCESS P=ROUGH END POINT Z Z=–15. 542 .000 REMOVAL STEP J=5.36. (MACH.000 CUTTING WIDTH(%) C=70. Set data.000 FEED RATE F=250 Z–CUT FEED RATE E=100) Hit <INSERT> key. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 CONTOUR POCKET window is displayed.000 Z FINISH AMOUNT H=0.000 REMOVAL DEPTH B=10.000 SIDE FINISH AMOUNT D=0.

MANUAL GUIDE 1. Set data. 543 .000 START POINT Y Y=–30. (START POINT X X=0. Instructing the start point Display of soft–key is changed to contour menu.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. Hit [START] soft–key.000 START POINT TYPE E=START) Hit <INSERT> key. START POINT window is displayed. Created contour figure is displayed on Graphic window.

000 CENTER POINT Y W=0. Instructing the clockwise arc figure Hit [CW] soft–key. Set data. 544 .36.000) Hit <INSERT> key.000 CENTER POINT X V=0. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 2. (RADIUS E=30. ARC CW window is displayed.

In this case.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. MANUAL GUIDE 3. 545 . when “TANGENT” is commanded. Instructing the tangent line figure This line is tangent to above clockwise arc. LINE window is displayed. hit [TANGNT] soft–key. (DIRECTION B=L–UP) Hit <INSERT> key. then hit [LINE] soft–key. Set data. Cross point is calculated and set automatically.

Instructing the tangent clockwise arc figure Hit [TANGNT]soft–key.36. Set data. when end point of figure block is decided. 546 . (DIRECTION B=R–UP) Hit <INSERT> key.000) Hit <INSERT> key. then hit [CW]soft–key. then hit [LINE]soft–key. LINE window is displayed. Set data. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 4. Contour figure is displayed by full line on Graphic window.000 CENTER POINT X V=–35. Instructing the tangent line figure Hit [TANGNT] soft–key.000 CENTER POINT Y W=0. ARC CW window is displayed. 5. (RADIUS E=15.

7. Instructing the tangent clockwise arc figure Hit [TANGNT] soft–key. MANUAL GUIDE 6.000) Hit <INSERT> key.000 CENTER POINT Y W=0.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. Set data.000 CENTER POINT X V=0. (RADIUS E=30. then hit [LINE]soft–key. LINE window is displayed. ARC CW window is displayed. then hit [CW] soft–key. Instructing the tangent line figure Hit [TANGNT] soft–key. 547 . Set data. (DIRECTION B=R–DOWN) Hit <INSERT> key.

9. then hit [LINE] soft–key. LINE window is displayed.000 CENTER POINT Y W=0. (RADIUS E=15. 548 . Set Data.000 CENTER POINT X V=35. (DIRECTION B=L–DOWN) Hit <INSERT> key. then hit [CW] soft–key.36.000) Hit <INSERT> key. Set data. Instructing the tangent clockwise arc figure Hit [TANGNT] soft–key. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 8. Instructing the tangent line figure Hit [TANGNT] soft–key. ARC CW window is displayed.

END window is displayed. Instructing the tangent clockwise arc figure Hit [TANGNT] soft–key. then hit [CW] soft–key.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. because Island figure will instruct on next process. Instructing the end of figure and instructing the island figure Hit [END] soft–key. (RADIUS E=30. Set data.000 CENTER POINT X V=0.000 END POINT X M=0.000 CENTER POINT Y W=0. Select “CONT”. (CONTINUE P=CONT) 549 . 11. MANUAL GUIDE 10. ARC CW window is displayed.000 END POINT Y N=–30.000) Hit <INSERT> key.

12.000) 550 . START POINT window is displayed.36.000 START POINT Y Y=–10. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Hit <INSERT> key. (START POINT X X=0. Set data. Instructing the start point of island figure Hit [START] soft–key. Z=–5.000 START POINT TYPE E=ISLAND ISLAND Z CO–ORD.

LINE window is displayed. 13. Instructing the line figure Hit [LINE] soft–key. MANUAL GUIDE Hit <INSERT> key.000 END POINT Y N=–10. Set data.000) 551 . (DIRECTION B=LEFT END POINT X M=–15.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36.

(DIRECTION B=UP END POINT X M=–15. 552 . Instructing the line figure Hit [LINE] soft–key.000) Hit <INSERT> key.000 END POINT Y N=10. 14. LINE window is displayed. Set data.36. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Hit <INSERT> key.

(DIRECTION B=DOWN END POINT X M=15.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. LINE window is displayed. Set data. LINE window is displayed.000 END POINT Y N=10.000 END POINT Y N=–10.000) Hit <INSERT> key. 553 . Instructing the line figure Hit [LINE] soft–key. (DIRECTION B=RIGHT END POINT X M=15. MANUAL GUIDE 15. Set data.000) Hit <INSERT> key. 16. Instructing the line figure Hit [LINE] soft–key.

18. Set data.36. 554 . MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 17.000 END POINT Y N=–10. Instructing the line figure Hit [LINE]soft–key.000) Hit <INSERT> key. LINE window is displayed. Instructing the end of figure Hit [END] soft–key. (DIRECTION B=LEFT END POINT X M=0.

(CONTINUE P=END) Hit <INSERT> key. Set data. MSF CODE window is displayed. (M CODE M=30) 555 . MANUAL GUIDE END window is displayed. (13)Process End Hit [MSF] soft–key. Set data.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36.

MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Hit <INSERT>key. 556 .36.

3. Tool path is drawn. hit [END] soft–key. Hit [CHECK] soft–key. MANUAL GUIDE 36. Hit [PARAM] soft–key. Hit [EXEC] soft–key. 557 . Menu of soft–key is changed.6 Program Check (Graphic) Hit <AUTO> key.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. PATH GRAPHIC PARAMETER window is displayed. (AXES = XYZ) After set data. Set data. (PATH GRAPHIC) Menu of Tool path graphic is displayed on soft–key.

It is possible to see the big size of tool path figure. (ANIME GRAPHIC) Hit [ANIME] soft–key. 558 . MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Graphic window is displayed by full–size. if [FUL ON] soft–key is hit. If alarm occurs in drawing. hit <ALARM/STATUS> key and check alarm message.36.

000 Y=–40.000 J=80.000) After set data. soft–key.000 Z=–25.000 BLANK DIMENSION I=120. MANUAL GUIDE Menu for anime graphic is displayed on soft–key. Anime graphic is operated. hit [END] soft–key. Set data. (In case of Full Size OFF) 559 . Hit [EXEC]soft–key.000 K=25. Hit [PARAM] ANIME GRAPHIC PARAMETER window is displayed.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. (BLANK FORM = CUBE BLANK POSITION X=–60.

Menu of soft–key is changed. Hit [LIST] soft–key. 560 .36. 36.3. Graphic function is finished. Hit the right side soft–key. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (In case of Full Size ON) Hit [RETURN] soft–key.7 Convert to NC Format Hit <AUTO> key.

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. (2001) Hit [SELECT] soft–key. soft–key. 561 . MANUAL GUIDE PROGRAM DIRECTORY window is displayed. Hit [CNV NC] Input converted NC program No.

562 . After converted. hit [RETURN] soft–key. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Hit [EXEC] soft–key. when you want to display OUTPUT NC STATEMENTS window. Covert to NC format and Tool path graphic is started. OUTPUT NC STATEMENTS window is displayed.36. if [ON/OFF] soft–key is hit Close the Alarm / Diagnose window (The window which is displayed by <ALARM/STATUS> key).

hit[DECIDE] soft–key.8 Editing Function (Move or Copy of part program) Hit <EDIT> key. Select move or copy area by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key. Menu of soft–key is changed. MANUAL GUIDE 36. After selected. 563 . Put on cursor to start point of move or copy by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key.3. Hit [MOVE] or [COPY] soft–key.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. Hit the right side soft–key.

(Delete of part program) 564 . MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Move the cursor to insert position by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key.36. Move or copy area is inserted to the next line which is put on cursor. Move or Copy is completed. hit [EXEC] soft–key. After moved cursor.

Put on cursor to start point of delete by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key. hit [DECIDE] soft–key. MANUAL GUIDE Hit <EDIT> key. Select the delete area by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key. Hit [DELETE] soft–key. After selected.] 565 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. Hit the right side soft–key. Menu of soft–key is changed.

566 .36. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Check the area which is deleted. then hit [EXEC] soft–key. Selected area is deleted.

hit <INSERT> key.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. It is possible to use <ALTER> key instead of [ALTER] soft–key. Hit the right side soft–key. Hit [ALTER] soft–key. Menu of soft–key is changed. After changed data. Alternation is completed. Data Input Window is displayed. Put on cursor to part program which you want to alter by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key. MANUAL GUIDE (Alteration of part program) Hit <EDIT> key. 567 .

9 Copy and Deleting of NC Program Hit <EDIT> or AUTO> key. Hit [LIST] soft–key. (COPY) Put on cursor to Program number which you want to copy by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key.3. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 36.36. Hit [COPY] soft–key. Menu of soft–key is changed. Hit the right side soft–key. 568 .

(3000) Hit [EXEC] soft–key. Hit [DELETE] soft–key. (DELETE) Put on cursor to Program number which you want to delete by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. MANUAL GUIDE Input new NC program No. Copy of NC program is completed. 569 .

current program number is changed after NC program was deleted. At Auto mode. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Check the NC program No. Selected NC program is deleted. Take care.36. Hit [EXEC] soft–key. At Edit mode. current program number is no changed. which is deleted. 570 .

if you know the NC program number. MANUAL GUIDE 36. 571 .10 Auto and MDI Operation (AUTO OPERATION) Hit <AUTO> key.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36.3. Input NC program number (2000) then hit [O SRH] soft–key. Specified NC program is selected.

MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Hit the right side soft–key then hit [LIST] soft–key.36. if you want to search Program number. if [REWIND] soft–key is hit. Hit <START> button. 572 . Cursor moves to the top of NC program. Put on cursor to Program number by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key. Specified NC program is selected. then hit [SELECT] soft–key.

MDI operation is started. MANUAL GUIDE (MDI OPERATION) Hit <MENU> key. MDI command is cleared. 573 . MDI command is stored to memory. Input command (G91 G28 ZO . After MDI operation finished.) then hit <INSERT> key. Hit <START> button.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36.

3.11 Back Ground Editing It is possible to edit NC Program in operation. NC Program directory window is displayed.36. Hit [BGEDIT] soft–key. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 36. 574 .

hit [RETURN] soft–key. After edited. Program is selected.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. MANUAL GUIDE Put on cursor to Program number or key in Program number (3000). 575 . It is possible to edit NC program like normal mode. then hit [SELECT] soft–key.

MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 36.1 Preparation Set the following NC parameters: Bit 0 of parameter No.36. 9110 = 1 : Enables user window display on the edit screen. Set each data item. Select the [USRWIN] soft key. 9110 = 1 : Enables user window display on the operation screen.3.12. Display the manual guide screen. The CALIBRATION CYCLE – DATA SET window appears.12 Measurement Cycle Function (Option) 36. Bit 1 of parameter No.3. PROBE LENGTH: Length from the gage surface of the spindle taper to the end of the stylus STYLUS BALL DIAMETER FOR X/Y AXIS: Diameter of the ball at the end of the stylus STYLUS BALL OFFSET FOR X/Y AXIS: Amount of compensation for the difference between the stylus center position and the spindle center position MEASURING FEEDRATE OF 1ST (f): Feedrate at which the stylus moves to touch the measurement surface at the first measurement 576 . Select the [EDIT] soft key.

For details.12.2 Creating a Program Before specifying a measurement cycle G code. prepare a ring gage.) After the measurement cycle ends. you need to specify the following two commands: D Command for enabling advanced preview control D Command for turning off the probe (to save the battery in the probe) 577 . MANUAL GUIDE APPROACH DISTANCE OF 1SWT (α): Distance in mm between the stylus and measurement surface after the stylus approaches at the first measurement ESCAPING DISTANCE OF 1ST (β): Distance in mm the stylus retracts after the first measurement (= approach distance at the second measurement) MEASURING OVERLAP DISTANCE (γ): Distance in mm the stylus moves from the measurement surface APPROACH FEEDRATE TO START PT (fa): Feedrate at which movement is made to the measurement start point ESCAPE DISTANCE OF 2ND (ε): Distance in mm the stylus retracts after the second measurement First measurement MeasurementMeasurement surface start point Second measurement Measurement Measurement surface start point fa f α β F γ β ε γ F: Feedrate specified in each measurement menu item The values set in PROBE LENGTH.” 36. To do this.3. refer to “Manual Guide Operator’s Guide for Milling. you need to specify the following three commands: D Command for turning on the probe D Command for moving the probe to the measurement start position D Command for disabling advanced preview control (The skip function G31 must be specified with advanced preview control disabled. and STYLUS BALL OFFSET FOR X/Y AXIS can also be measured using a calibration cycle.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. STYLUS BALL DIAMETER FOR X/Y AXIS.

578 .36. W1. and disabling advanced preview control. S1. Turn on probe G300 W1. Mount probe (tool change) M17 . select the [CYCLE] soft key. Move probe to measurement start position G08 P0 . Then. P3. Select the [MEASUR] soft key. F100. . Measurement cycle G08 P1 . Turn off probe M02 . Disable advanced preview control G180 A1. . Generate commands for turning on the probe. VO D10. The above M codes are used for the touch probe control function provided as a standard function of the ROBODRILL. M3 . Enable advanced preview control M18 . moving the probe to the measurement start position. so check the M codes before using them. End M codes used for turning the probe on and off may vary from the M codes shown in the above program. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 (Sample program) 00002 (MEASUREMENT TEST) G301 T14 . Specify modal information G60 G0 X0 Y0 Z–100. A1.

SYSTEM (W): The measurement position is set in a specified workpiece coordinate system. or Z–axis) to be measured. (Can be omitted) MEASURE POSITION (A): 579 . Select the soft key of the menu item to be used. For example.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. Selecting the rightmost soft key [+] displays the next menu page. let’s select [FACE]. DISTANCE FOR MOVE (D): Distance of movement from the measurement start position to the end face to be measured FEEDRATE FOR MOVE (F): Feedrate of movement at measurement (second) WORK CO–ORD. WORK CO–ORD. Select the workpiece end face (the X–. MANUAL GUIDE The soft key display field shows a measurement menu. Y–. VALUE (V): Set the workpiece coordinate value of the measurement position.

then press the <insert> key.36. 580 . MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Enter data. Add the command for enabling advanced preview control and the command for turning off the probe to complete the program.

the probe retracts over the distance ESCAPE DISTANCE OF 2ND (ε) at the rapid traverse rate.B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. MANUAL GUIDE The measurement cycle for X/Y/Z end face measurement operates as follows: <1> The probe approaches the workpiece from the measurement start point over the distance [DISTANCE FOR MOVE (D) + MEASURING OVERLAP DISTANCE (γ) – stylus radius] at MEASURING FEEDRATE OF 1ST (f).” 581 . it retracts over the distance ESCAPING DISTANCE OF 1ST (β) at the rapid traverse rate. Measurement surface Rapid traverse ε The operation varies depending on the measurement menu item selected. refer to “Manual Guide Operator’s Guide for Milling. Measurement surface Measurement start point f D γ Measurement surface Rapid traverse <2> When the probe has touched the workpiece. β <3> The probe again approaches the workpiece over the distance [ESCAPING DISTANCE OF 1ST (β) + MEASURING OVERLAP DISTANCE (γ)] at FEEDRATE FOR MOVE (F). Measurement surface Rapid traverse β <4> When the probe has touched the workpiece. For details.

MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 The measurement cycle menu items shown below are provided.36. refer to “Manual Guide Operator’s Guide for Milling. For details.” [MEASUREMENT OF X/Y/Z SINGLE SURFACE] Measurement result • Measurement value of the end face (machine coordinate system) • Measurement value of the end face (workpiece coordinate system) [MEASUREMENT OF WEB WIDTH] Measurement results • Center coordinate value of the protrusion along the X–axis (machine coordinate system) • Center coordinate value of the protrusion along the Y–axis (machine coordinate system) • Center coordinate value of the protrusion along the X–axis (workpiece coordinate system) • Center coordinate value of the protrusion along the Y–axis (workpiece coordinate system) • Protrusion width [MEASUREMENT OF GROOVE WIDTH] Measurement results • Center coordinate value of the groove along the X–axis (machine coordinate system) • Center coordinate value of the groove along the Y–axis (machine coordinate system) • Center coordinate value of the groove along the X–axis (workpiece coordinate system) • Center coordinate value of the groove along the Y–axis (workpiece coordinate system) • Groove width 582 .

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. MANUAL GUIDE [MEASUREMENT OF OUTSIDE CIRCLE] Measurement results • X coordinate value of the circle center (machine coordinate system) • Y coordinate value of the circle center (machine coordinate system) • X coordinate value of the circle center (workpiece coordinate system) • Y coordinate value of the circle center (workpiece coordinate system) • Radius of the circle [MEASUREMENT OF INSIDE CIRCLE] Measurement results • X coordinate value of the circle center (machine coordinate system) • Y coordinate value of the circle center (machine coordinate system) • X coordinate value of the circle center (workpiece coordinate system) • Y coordinate value of the circle center (workpiece coordinate system) • Radius of the circle [MEASUREMENT OF OUTSIDE RECTANGULAR] Measurement results • X coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (machine coordinate system) • Y coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (machine coordinate system) • X coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (workpiece coordinate system) • Y coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (workpiece coordinate system) • X–axis length of the rectangle • Y–axis length of the rectangle 583 .

MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 [MEASUREMENT OF INSIDE RECTANGULAR] Measurement results • X coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (machine coordinate system • Y coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (machine coordinate system) • X coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (workpiece coordinate system) • Y coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (workpiece coordinate system) • X–axis length of the rectangle • Y–axis length of the rectangle [MEASUREMENT OF OUTSIDE CORNER] Measurement results • X coordinate value of the corner (machine coordinate system) • Y coordinate value of the corner (machine coordinate system) • X coordinate value of the corner (workpiece coordinate system) • Y coordinate value of the corner (workpiece coordinate system) [MEASUREMENT OF INSIDE CORNER] Measurement results • X coordinate value of the corner (machine coordinate system) • Y coordinate value of the corner (machine coordinate system) • X coordinate value of the corner (workpiece coordinate system) • Y coordinate value of the corner (workpiece coordinate system) 584 .36.

B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36. MANUAL GUIDE [MEASUREMENT OF BOLT–HOLE CIRCLE] Measurement results • X coordinate value of the center of the bolt–hole circle (machine coordinate system) • Y coordinate value of the center of the bolt–hole circle (machine coordinate system) • X coordinate value of the center of the bolt–hole circle (workpiece coordinate system) • Y coordinate value of the center of the bolt–hole circle (workpiece coordinate system) • Radius of the bolt–hole circle [MEASUREMENT OF 4 HOLES CENTER] Measurement results • X coordinate value of the center of the four holes (machine coordinate system) • Y coordinate value of the center of the four holes (machine coordinate system) • X coordinate value of the center of the four holes (workpiece coordinate system) • Y coordinate value of the center of the four holes (workpiece coordinate system) [MEASUREMENT OF WORK PIECE ANGLE] Measurement result • Angle between the workpiece and X–axis [MEASUREMENT OF 2 HOLES ANGLE] Measurement result • Angle between the X–axis and the straight line passing through the two holes 585 .

5 Output of Measurement Results to Custom Macro Variables Data measured by each measurement cycle can be output to custom macro variables.12.4 Drawing Function and NC Statement Conversion Function Measurement cycles (G180 to G192) cannot be used with the drawing function and NC statement conversion function. These G codes are ignored. Select the [USRWIN] soft key. 36. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 36.12. Measurement results can be checked on the measurement result window of the measurement cycle. then select the [RESULT] soft key. copy measurement results to other custom macro variables after a measurement cycle is executed.3. 36. change the operation mode to the automatic (memory) operation mode and press the start button on the operator’s panel. 9200 : Starting number of the custom macro variables to which the measurement results of measurement cycles are to be output Six consecutive custom macro variables starting with the variable having the specified number are used as the custom macro variables dedicated to measurement result output.36. 9200 set to 500) Custom macro variable #500 : Center coordinate protrusion along the coordinate system) : Center coordinate protrusion along the coordinate system) value of the X–axis (machine value of the Y–axis (machine Custom macro variable #501 Custom macro variable #502 Custom macro variable #503 : Center coordinate value of the protrusion along the X–axis (workpiece coordinate system) : Center coordinate value of the protrusion along the Y–axis (workpiece coordinate system) Custom macro variable #504 : Protrusion width When a measurement cycle is executed following the above measurement.3.3 Measurement Cycle Operation In the same way that you execute a machining program. When setting a number. When using more than one measurement cycle within the same program. (Example: When a measurement of protrusion width (MEASUREMENT OF WEB WIDTH) (G181) is made with parameter No.12.3. the previously output measurement results are overwritten. make sure that six consecutive custom macro variables can be acquired by that number. 586 . Set the following NC parameter: Parameter No.

Measurement of protrusion width #602 = #500 . Copy center coordinate value of protrusion along X–axis (workpiece coordinate system) to #604 #605 = #503 . Measurement of X/Y/Z end face #600 = #500 . 9200 is set to 500) Menu X/Y/Z end face (G180) Protrusion width (G181) #500 End face coordinate value (M) Center coordinate value of protrusion along X–axis (M) Center coordinate value of groove along X–axis (M) X coordinate value of circle center (M) X coordinate value of circle center (M) X coordinate value of center of rectangle (M) X coordinate value of center of rectangle (M) #501 End face coordinate value (W) Center coordinate value of protrusion along Y–axis (M) Center coordinate value of groove along Y–axis (M) Y coordinate value of circle center (M) Y coordinate value of circle center (M) Y coordinate value of center of rectangle (M) Y coordinate value of center of rectangle (M) Center coordinate value of protrusion along X–axis (W) Center coordinate value of groove along X–axis (W) X coordinate value of circle center (W) X coordinate value of circle center (W) X coordinate value of center of rectangle (W) X coordinate value of center of rectangle (W) Center coordinate value of protrusion along Y–axis (W) Center coordinate value of groove along Y–axis (W) Y coordinate value of circle center (W) Y coordinate value of circle center (W) Y coordinate value of center of rectangle (W) Y coordinate value of center of rectangle (W) Protrusion width #502 #503 #504 #505 Groove width (G182) Groove width Outside circle (G183) Radius of circle Inside circle (G184) Radius of circle Outside rectangle (G185) Inside rectangle (G186) X–axis length of rectangle Y–axis length of rectangle X–axis length of rectangle Y–axis length of rectangle 587 . Copy center coordinate value of protrusion along X–axis (machine coordinate system) to #602 #603 = #501 . Copy center coordinate value of protrusion along Y–axis (machine coordinate system) to #603 #604 = #502 . Copy center coordinate value of protrusion along Y–axis (workpiece coordinate system) to #605 #605 = #504 . MANUAL GUIDE Example: : G180****** . Copy end face measurement value (workpiece coordinate system) to #601 G181****** . Copy protrusion width to #606 : : (Example: Measurement menu items and measurement results when parameter No. Copy end face measurement value (machine coordinate system) to #600 #601 = #501 .B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS 36.

36. MANUAL GUIDE DETAILED OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01 Menu Outside corner (G187) Inside corner (G188) #500 X coordinate value of corner (M) X coordinate value of corner (M) #501 Y coordinate value of corner (M) Y coordinate value of corner (M) Y coordinate value of center of bolt–hole circle (M) Y coordinate value of center of four holes (M) #502 X coordinate value of corner (W) X coordinate value of corner (W) X coordinate value of center of bolt–hole circle (W) X coordinate value of center of four holes (W) #503 Y coordinate value of corner (W) Y coordinate value of corner (W) Y coordinate value of center of bolt–hole circle (W) Y coordinate value of center of four holes (W) #504 #505 Bolt–hole circle X coordinate (G189) value of center of bolt–hole circle (M) 4 holes (G190) X coordinate value of center of four holes (M) Angle between workpiece and X–axis Angle between X–axis and straight line passing through two holes Radius of bolt– hole circle Workpiece angle (G191) 2–hole angle (G192) (M) : Machine coordinates (W) : Workpiece coordinates 588 .

MAINTENANCE .V.

.

B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 1. DAILY MAINTENANCE 1 DAILY MAINTENANCE 591 .

1 Cleaning Before turning on the power to the machine. replenish the tank with new coolant or supply water to the tank. be sure to check the amount of the coolant in the tank. 1.2 Daily Maintenance (1) 592 . a considerable amount decreases each day because the water in the coolant evaporates. When starting work. DAILY MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 1. clean the machine as follows. If the coolant is water soluble. Remove cut scraps from the grips. soak the cloth with neutral detergent. the keys and gear. Use the cut scrap receiver when pouring additional coolant or water in the tank. D Spray oil (CRC–556 or equivalent) on the top of the table and the telescopic covers. Replenish the tank with the coolant so that the value indicated by the indicator does not exceed H.2 Replenishing the Tank with Coolant The coolant gradually decreases if it is used.1.1. in particular. D Remove cut scraps from the area surrounding the spindle.1. D Wipe the tapered portions of the tool arbors installed in the turret clean. D Wipe the entire operator’s panel with a soft cloth.1. Fig. If possible. An indicator for checking the amount of the coolant is located on the side of the machine next to the pump on the tank.1 DAILY CHECK–UP 1. If the tank is short of the coolant.1.

1. check again whether something is wrong with the machine according to the following check items: D D D D D D Are the telescopic covers damaged? Is there any foreign matter on the table or telescopic covers? Are the tools firmly mounted on the turret? Is the jig firmly secured to the table? Have cut scraps collected inside the machine? Does the coolant tank contain enough coolant? 593 . DAILY MAINTENANCE 1.1.3 Inspecting Cutters Check whether the tools set in the turret correspond correctly to the tool numbers marked on the turret.4 Inspecting Each Section Before turning on the power. Respecify the offset amount and replace the tool that is worn out with a new one as required. 1.B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 1. whether the tools are broken. and whether the tools are entwined with cut scraps.

2. using a brush. turn off the power to the machine for safety.1. (1) Sweep away the cut scraps off the turret and the area surrounding the spindle. Fig. NOTE Remove metal chips and other extraneous materials from the cooling air vents (both intake and exhaust) of the spindle motor to secure air flow. To prevent this.2 WORK AT CLOSING TIME 1. the mechanical section will be damaged because the cut scraps gather in the mechanical section.1 (a) Daily Maintenance (2) 594 .1. Before removing them.2.1 Removing Cut Scraps If cut scraps are left in the machine. DAILY MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 1. however. be sure to remove the cut scraps in the machine everyday at closing time according to the following procedure.

See (10).1 (c) Daily Maintenance (4) (9) Sweep away the cut scraps along the slope of the head groove. Fig. Section 2. (6) Sweep away the cut scraps on the X–axis telescopic cover. (10)If the machine is equipped with the coolant unit.) (4) Sweep away the other cut scraps.1.B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 1.1. (5) Sweep away the cut scraps on the table. 595 .2. (7) Sweep away the cut scraps on the Y–axis telescopic cover to the right and left. IV. sweep away the cut scraps into the cut scrap receiver. DAILY MAINTENANCE (2) Remove the cut scraps from the Z–axis cover and the surrounding area. (Right side of the head of the spindle. Fig.1.1 (b) Daily Maintenance (3) (3) Brush the chips off the turret cum (groove). (8) Remove the cut scraps that have collected under the Y–axis telescopic cover (at the front).2.

596 .1. 1.2 Cleaning After turning off the power.2. the turret mechanical unit may be damaged. DAILY MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 NOTE If the turret cum is left with chips on it.3 Inspecting Each Section Inspect each section of the machine in the same way as for starting work. clean the machine in the same way as for starting work. 1.2.

4 Spindle Run–in (for 15000min–1 Specification) Immediately after a machine is installed. or when a spindle unit component (such as the shaft and motor) has been replaced. #100=#100+1 G4X0.2.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO3 #100=0 N4M3S15000 G4X45.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO5 597 . the spindle must be run in. #100=#100+1 G4X0.B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 1. M5 G4X105. % O1001(SP RUNNING) #100=0 N1M3S7500 G4X30.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO1 #100=0 N2M3S15000 G4X15. #100=#100+1 G4X0. when the spindle has not been rotated for about one week or longer. #100=#100+1 G4X0. #100=#100+1 G4X0. M5 G4X60.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO2 #100=0 N3M3S15000 G4X30. M5 G4X90. M5 G4X75. DAILY MAINTENANCE 1.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO4 #100=0 N5M3S15000 G4X60. M5 G4X90.

or a too high temperature is detected.600 hours in continuous 15.000 min–1 operation. #100=#100+1 G4X0. DAILY MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 #100=0 N6M3S15000 G4X75. If an unusual sound. the life varies with the usage condition. #100=#100+1 G4X0. However.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO7 #100=0 N8M3S15000 G4X105. 598 . M5 G4X45.1. vibration.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO8 N10M3S15000 G4X3600. M5 M02 % The calculated life under the use of the high–speed spindle (15.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO6 #100=0 N7M3S15000 G4X90. M5 G4X15. M5 G4X30. #100=#100+1 G4X0. contact the nearest FANUC technical center.000 min–1) is 12.

When a cable is disconnected. The periodic maintenance of the machine involves removing a fixed cover using a tool. for exchanging a fuse or battery. do not switch on the power with a cable disconnected. When working with that part of the machine which is higher than your eye level. and working with controller doors open. Before starting to work with any Controller cabinet door open. shut off the power at the main circuit breaker. There may remain voltages at components in the Controller cabinet even after the power is shut off at the main circuit breaker. Keep the power to the machine shut off during maintenance. To avoid shock hazards. you may lose balance. be sure to use a step. Such voltages are still dangerous. and an appropriate certification from the organization to which he or she belongs or from an applicable qualified organization. This job is dangerous to ordinary operators. make sure that all removed parts (including every screw) are attached to the locations where they were. Cautions for maintenance parts replacement 599 .B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 2. Before opening an Controller cabinet door. Keep the power to the machine shut off during maintenance. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE 2 PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE Only the maintenance engineer is allowed to carry out periodic maintenance. Be careful not to touch any metal part recklessly. be sure to shut off the power at the main circuit breaker. If you clamber up the machine or get on an object not intended for use as a step (such as chair or desk). The term maintenance engineer here refers to a person who has sufficient knowledge about machinery and electricity to carry out maintenance. When you are finished with maintenance. do not switch on the power to the machine. For work at a high elevation. use a secure scaffold. for example. Any operator is not allowed to carry out periodic maintenance. resulting in an accident.

2. D Replenish the centralized lubrication unit (option) with oil. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 Maintenance parts replacement shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the applicable maintenance manual. D Apply grease to the LM guide block every 1. Be sure to carry out periodic maintenance to maintain safe operation. If a part is attached incorrectly. make sure that all components (including every screw) removed for maintenance purposes are attached to the locations where they were. and the turret gear every 200 hours of operation.000. D Replace the disk springs every 1.000 hours of operation.000 hours of operation. when the remaining oil in the pump is low.000 times of tool exchange. it may damage the machine.) To maintain the normal state of the machine. D Lubricate grease to the turret LM guide every 2000 hours of operation. After parts replacement. carry out the following periodic maintenance: D Apply grease to the gear at the end of the spindle. D Apply grease to the ball screw every 1. 600 .

Straight–type Chuck–type Hose–type 2.B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 2.1. and wipe off an excess of grease.). 1) Remove the X axis telescopic covers. The chuck type cannot be used.1 Greasing (1) X axis ball screw Lubricate grease to the X axis ball screw as described below. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE 2. (Not necessary when concentrated lubrication unit (option) ) 601 . Move the table to the “+” or “–” stroke end of the X axis and remove the cover on the side of the table.1 LUBRICATING EACH SECTION NOTE Use a grease gun with a straight–type greasing rod (10 to 13 in dia. 2) Move the X axis full stroke in the “–” or “+” direction. Thinly apply the grease to the ball screw.

(2) Y axis ball screw Lubricate grease to the Y axis ball screw as described below. and wipe off a excess of grease.2. 1) Remove the Y axis telescopic cover. 602 . NOTE If shavings inside the saddle are left as they are. they may be a cause of failure. NOTE If shavings inside the bed are left as they are. (Not necessary when concentrated lubrication unit (option) ) 3) At this time. clean the inside of the saddle. they may be a cause of failure. clean the inside of the bed. thinly apply a grease to the ball screw. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 3) At this time. 2) Move the Y axis full stroke in the “–” direction.

NOTE If shavings inside the Z–axis roll cover are left as they are. 3) At this time. they may be a cause of failure. clean the inside of the slide cover. 1) Remove Z–axis roll cover. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE (3) Z axis Lubricate grease to the Z axis ball screw as described below. and wipe off an excess of grease. 2) Thinly apply a grease to the ball screw.B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 2. 603 .

PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 (4) X axis LM guides Lubricate grease to the X axis LM guides as described below.2. Saddle Lubricate by grease gun Fig. Table Cover (front) Cover (back) 2) Grease the four LM blocks for the X–axis.(a) ROBODRILL α-T14/21iCe 604 . 1) Remove the covers at the front and back of the table. Wipe off any excess grease. Table Lubricate by grease gun (5) Y axis LM guides Grease the four LM blocks for the Y–axis under the saddle. Wipe off any excess grease.

PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE (b) ROBODRILL α-T14/21iCLe (c) ROBODRILL α-T14/21iCSe 605 .B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 2.

PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 (6) Z axis LM guide Lubricate grease to the Z axis guide as described below. (Not necessary when concentrated lubrication unit (option) ) 606 . lubricate grease to the LM guide by a grease gun. and wipe off an excess of grease. 2) Move the Z axis to the “–” stroke end.2. 1) Remove the cover from the turret support and the cover from the bottom of the spindle head.

2 is recommended). (8) Greasing turret and spindle gears According to the following procedure. apply grease to the turret and spindle gear. if any. 2) Remove the cover at the back of turret and apply grease to the turret gear. 1) Apply grease to the spindle gear. 2) Lubricate grease to the LM guide with a grease gun every 2000 hours of operation (Alvania No.B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 2. Wipe off the extra grease. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE (7) Turret LM guide 1) Remove the TS cover. 607 .

PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 3) Apply grease to the turret cam.2. change tools to rotate the turret at least one round or more for complete lubrication. 4) Upon completion of the application of grease. 608 .

Ltd.0 cc/15 minutes. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE 2.1.K. Remove the telescopic cover and clean them periodically. Mobil Sekiyu K. 0.. Showa Shell Sekiyu K.1.1. Table 2.. The feeding amount of the tank has been adjusted to 1. NOTE 1 The tank has a 1. the turret and spindle gears in (7) in V–2. 609 .1. approx. Before the amount of lubricant in the oil tank reaches a low level. as soon as the power is turned on. Ltd. the ball screws and LM guides of each axis are lubricated automatically and periodically.2 Concentrated lubrication with Intermittent Oiling System If the optional concentrated lubrication with intermittent oiling system is specified for the machine. Nippon Oil Co.2 Recommended Brands of Lubrican Product Mulpus 68 Super Mulpus 68 UNIWAY 68 Mobil Vactra Oil No. 2 Tonna Oil T68 FEBIS K68 Manufacturer Nisseki Mitsubishi Nippon Oil Co.1 must be greased.8 capacity. the oil pump supplies lubricant to the ball screws and LM guides of each axis. Esso Sekiyu K.9 of lublicant (Mulpus 68) (only a little) has already been supplied to the tank for future leakage and feeding tests.B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 2. replenish the oil tank with a lubricant shown in the following table: NOTE Fine metal chips and other materials may accumulate on the saddle and bed. Greasing in 2. (However.) In concentrated lubrication. 2 Before the machine is shipped.K.K.1 is therefore not required for these screws and guides.

2 cc ÃÃÃ ÃÃ Ã ÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ Ã ÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃ 610 B–85014EN/01 .2.6 cc Oiling port Manual handle Terminal unit (with cover) Label Packing MAINTENANCE Motor Mounting hole 3–M6 Label Fig. Earth mark 0.4 cc 0. etc.2.0 cc 0.8 cc 0.1.2 (a) External Diagram and Adjustment of Oil Supply Amount. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE Earth terminal (M3) Ã Ã Ã Discharge port Datum level 1.

1.2 (b) ROBODRILL a–T14/21iCe Fig.2.1.2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE Fig.B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 2.2 (c) ROBODRILL a–T14/21iCLe 611 .

2.1.1. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 Fig.2.2.2 (d) ROBODRILL a–T14/21iCSe Fig.2 (e) Z–axis 612 .

(Standard greasing) 613 .3 Greasing and Oiling Interval Replenish grease and oil at the intervals indicated on the plate on the machine.B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 2.1. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE 2.

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 (With concentrated piping for lubrication) 614 .

B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE (With concentrated oiling system) 615 .

Component to be lubricated GUIDE RAIL (X. Z) SPINDLE DISK SPRINGS TURRET MECHANISM INSIDE SPINDLE BEARING When exchanging Disk springs When overhauling Turret mechanism When exchanging Spindle bearings Timing of application At the time of maintenance FANUC recommends the following grease if the machine is provided with the centralized greasing pipe (option).2. Brand ANTIRUST P. K.K. Brand ALVANIA GREASE NO.1 Recommended Lubricants (Grease and Oil) FANUC recommends the lubricants listed below. transportation. Y. Z) TAPERED PORTION OF THE SPINDLE TABLE SURFACE Timing of application At the time of packing. Z) BALL SCREW (X. Z) Timing of application At the time of maintenance FANUC recommends the following oil for the centralized lubrication pipe (option). LUBER Component to be lubricated GUIDE RAIL (X. Y. 1 ALVANIA GREASE NO. 616 . Y. K.3600 Manufacturer Nisseki Mitsubishi Component to be lubricated GUIDE RAIL (X. 1 LGSP1 KYODO YUSHI SUMICO SUMICO SKF Manufacturer SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K. Y. 3 MOLY HD GREASE Sumiplex PS NO.1000 ANTIRUST P. Y. 1 LUBER FS–2 Manufacturer SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K. Y. Brand Super MULPUS 68 TETOLA OIL 68 Manufacturer Nisseki Mitsubishi SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K. FANUC recommends the rust inhibitors listed below. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 2. Z) BALL SCREW (X.2 SPECIFIED BRANDS OF LUBRICANT 2. Z) Timing of application Replenish when the leavings in the pump becomes scarce. Brand ALVANIA GREASE NO. Component to be lubricated GUIDE RAIL TURRET GEAR SPINDLE NOSE GEAR BALL SCREW (X. 2 MULTEMP LRL NO. and storage.2.

B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 2. protection goggles.3. (2) Noise and vibration check If there is an abnormality in a spindle motor bearing.3 MAINTENANCE OF AC SPINDLE MOTOR 2. or fan protection net may cause the spindle motor to overheat. and cap. Air gun Protection net Rags Spindle motor Spindle head Air gun Air intake openings During cleaning. air intake opening. air intake openings. Then. air intake openings. and fan protection net as much as possible. Follow the procedure below to clean the spindle motor section: 1. 2. Periodically clean them to prevent the motor from overheating. abnormal noise or vibration may be produced. Check the noise and vibration when the spindle motor is running. Use an air gun to remove dirt from the fan. 617 . Semiannuary maintenance (at least once a year) (1) Cleaning (Fan. then turn the power off. wipe off dirt with rags and brushes.1 Periodical Maintenance The table below gives a summary of periodical maintenance. (1) Cleaning Dirt on the fan. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE 2. wear items to protect you from dirt and dust such as mask. and should be adjusted to meet actual operation conditions. 3. Lower the Z–axis to a position around machine coordinate –250 mm in the manual mode with taking care not to make the tool interfere with any item such as the jig mounted on the table. and fan protection net) (2) Noise and vibration check The maintenance period described above is applied to regular operation. Use the LOCK/UNLOCK key to open the front door.

4 REPLACING EXPENDABLE PARTS 2. the fuse has blown.2.4.1 Battery Replacement Method (1) Replacing the CNC memory backup battery (2) Replacing the absolute pulse coder battery Refer to Section 2. “Opening and Closing Doors when the Power Is Off. (2) Release the door lock and open the front door. 2.3 Fluorescent Lamp in the Inside Light Unit Front door The inside light unit is located on the back of the front door as shown in the figure below. (7) Push in and mount a new fluorescent lamp as shown in the view from D with the red button held down. then remove the inside light unit from the holders.2 Fuse If the small window of the fuse unit is white. Fluorescent lamp: FANUC specification A49L–0001–0070#A Cabinet lamp assembly (1) Turn the power off.4 in III. (See Section 5. (4) Slide the cover.9 of the FS16i/18i/160i/180i–MODEL A Maintenance Manual. (6) Turn and pull out the old fluorescent lamp as shown in the view from C with the red button held down. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 2. 618 . then take out the contents of the inside light unit from the glass tube. 2.4. (5) Use a tool having a thin tip to disengage the part for fixing the fluorescent lamp as shown in the view from B.”) (3) Remove the screws from the two holders.4. Disconnect the fuse unit and replace the fuse unit with a new one.

B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 2. (9) Mount the inside light unit on the two holders. The life of a fluorescent lamp is about 10.000 hours. replace it immediately. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE (8) Put the contents of the inside light unit back in the glass tube and mount the cover. When the fluorescent lamp is burned out or begins blinking. 619 . NOTE Carefully replace the fluorescent lamp not to cut yourself with any metal sheet in the inside light unit.

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 Cabinet: A49L–0001–0070#SLCE124 Cover Glass tube Fluorescent tube A49L–0001–0070#A Terminal block Holder Screw Lamp unit Button (color : red) Tool with a thin tip Flurescent tube ARROW B ARROW C Fluorescent tube ARROW D Pay attention to this edge 620 .

In such a case. causing an alarm to be issued to request servo motor origin return. Y-axis. and Z-axis. manual origin return operation is generally referred to as origin restoration.) Origin restoration is based on the marks provided on the X-axis. (See the figure below. the position of the origin will be lost.B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 3. for example. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION 3 SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION When the pulse coder connector of the servo motor is reconnected after disconnection. (Here. servo motor origin return must be performed.) Z–axis X–axis Y–axis 621 .

The following screen appears. then MAINTENANCE/SETTING..3. (1) First. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 Follow the procedure below. Next. select handle mode.” is displayed. turn the machine power off. Then. Press 2. THEN TURN HANDLE ONE OR MORE TURNS ALONG RESTORATION AXIS . This operation can be skipped if it was performed as part of step (1). then back on again. turn the handle through one or more turns along a desired restoration axis (12 mm or more along the each axis). The message “SET HANDLE MODE. (4) Position the cursor to EXEC for the desired restoration axis by using cursor key or . then the INPUT key. 622 .. (2) Display QUICK screen. (3) Select MOTOR ORGN.

(6) Separate the diamond mark from the notch mark by at least 30 mm.B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 3. The following screen appears. according to guidance 1. then press the [EXEC] soft key. 623 . Carefully move the tool along the X– and Y–axes so that the rhombus mark is always between the two circles. according to guidance 2. Z 30 mm ² ³ (7) Turn the handle in the negative (–) direction in handle mode until the diamond mark is aligned with the notch mark. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION (5) Press the [EXEC] soft key. This operation is not required if the two marks are already separated by 30 mm or more.

MODE ON” appears. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 (8) On the displayed screen.3. The message “ORGN REST. 624 . press the [MODE CHANGE] soft key according to guidance 3.

repeat the above procedure. then check that the origin return request alarm for the origin restoration axis has been cleared. Incorrect origin position The rhombus mark is not aligned with the right circle. If the marks are not so aligned. 625 . according to guidance 4. X–axis The rhombus mark is aligned with the left circle. This operation causes a very slight movement along the axis to establish the origin. Z–axis (10)Display the alarm screen by pressing the RESET button. Check that the two diamond marks are precisely aligned with each other after this operation. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION (9) Press the [ORIGIN REST. contact your local FANUC service center.B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 3. The rhombus mark is not aligned with the left circle. The rhombus mark is not aligned with the upper circle. To perform origin restoration for another axis.] soft key. In such a case. Y–axis The rhombus mark is aligned with the upper circle. Correct origin position The rhombus mark is aligned with the right circle. the position of the origin may be displaced.

You can also perform operations according to the instructions displayed on the screen to complete restoration easily. The following screen appears. (1) Display QUICK screen. Follow the procedure below. Press 1. which enables the automatic restoration of the normal state if a tool change operation should be interrupted or upon the issue of an alarm during or after tool change. 626 . then MAINTENANCE/SETTING. you can use this function to restore the system to the normal status in most cases. If a problem related to tool replacement occurs. (2) Select TURRET REST. AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 4 AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION The ROBODRILL features a turret restoration function.4. then the INPUT keys in this order.

The following screen appears. according to guidance 2. If any unusual sound is heard. press the cycle start button. thus disabling any unnecessary operations. Then. the following screen appears. Upon the completion of restoration. To help ensure successful restoration. (The alarm is released.) (4) Clear any alarm by pressing the emergency stop button. according to guidance 3. 627 .B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 4. according to guidance 1. (The only way to stop restoration is to turn off the power. stop the operation immediately. AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION (3) Press the [MODE CHANGE] soft key.) (5) After checking that the program number displayed at the top of the screen is O9040. the mode is fixed after this point. restoration starts.

the lowest side of the turret is not level. then the INPUT key. when restoration is completed. then back on again. the following screen appears.4. When a tool number is entered. If. contact your local FANUC service center. Not level Correct turret indexing Incorrect turret indexing 628 . In such a case. press 3. according to the message. AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 (6) Check and enter the selected tool number. When the tool number located at the bottom of the turret is 3. however. a mechanical problem is involved. (7) Turn the power off. as shown below.

check that the broken pull stud has dropped out of the spindle taper hole. Next. 629 . attach a tool to the turret and perform another turret restoration operation. first perform turret restoration without attaching an arbor. AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION NOTE If the pull stud is broken. the broken pull stud will be left inside the spindle. To enable restoration from the state where the pull stud is broken.B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 4. Then. This prevents an arbor from being clamped to the spindle.

CHECK. If parameter data is erased due to a problem such as the exhausted CNC battery. 630 . PARAMETER RESET.5. AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS Factory–set data for various types of parameters is saved in non–volatile memory. you can save it in non–volatile memory. AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 5 PARAMETER RESET. This is called the parameter registration function. you can use the saved data to simply restore factory–set data. This is called the parameter reset function. After changing parameter data. You can also compare the saved parameter data with the parameter data currently set for the ROBODRILL and list the results. CHECK. This is called the parameter check function.

or [STORE].B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 5. Press soft key [RESTORETION]. PARAMETER RESET. The following screen appears. (2) Select PARAMETER. AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS 5. CHECK.1 BASIC OPERATION (1) Display QUICK screen. 631 . then MAINTENANCE/SETTING. [INSPECTION]. Key in [3] and [INPUT].

CHECK. If you have not registered your data. the following window appears. Perform motor reference position return. then on again. this window does not appear. Press soft key [EXEC]. 632 . PARAMETER RESET. reset operation is complete.) (3) The following window appears. Position the cursor on FACTORY–SET DATA to set factory–set data or on STORED PARAMETER to set the registered data.2 RESETTING PARAMETERS (1) Press the EMG STOP button. AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 5. Position the cursor on data to be reset and press soft key [SELECT]. (5) Check that the parameter settings are the same as the values listed in the data sheet (parameters) supplied with the machine.5. then press soft key [SELECT]. (4) When the following window appears. (The factory–set data is set.A.) (2) If you have registered your data. (“CONVERSATIONAL DATA” is displayed only when the quick conversational programming function incorporates SUPER C. Turn the power off.P iM.

this window does not appear. (4) When the check is complete with different data found. Position the cursor on the FACTORY–SET DATA to compare the current data with the factory–set data or on the STORED PARAMETER to compare it with the registered data.) (3) The following window appears.3 CHECKING PARAMETERS (1) Position the cursor on data to be checked and press soft key [SELECT]. a window as shown below appears: 633 . the following window appears.B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 5. then press soft key [SELECT]. AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS 5. PARAMETER RESET. (2) If you have registered your data. CHECK. (The current data is compared with the factory–set data. If you have not registered your data. Press soft key [EXEC].

634 . registration is complete. PARAMETER RESET. and pitch error data can be registered. 3 If the non–volatile memory becomes faulty or is damaged. write the changes in the data sheet supplied with the machine.4 REGISTERING PARAMETERS (1) The following window appears. PMC parameter. Backing up data such as parameter data using the Handy File or memory card is recommended to prepare for the worst. (2) When the following window appears. After changing parameters. The non–volatile memory is damaged. Press soft key [EXEC].5. the registered data is erased. the screen changes as follows: ³ NOTE 1 Never turn the power off during data registration. CHECK. When registration is complete. 2 NC parameter. AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 5. Setup data such as offset data and machining programs are not registered.

(The operation mode automatically changes to the MDI mode.RIGID TAPPING.) Press the Z AXIS button on the operator’s panel. Rigid tapping return operation is executed. (1) Display QUICK SCREEN. the tap can be pulled out up to a position near point R.B–85014EN/01 MAINTENANCE 6. then MAINTENANCE/SETTING. The following screen appears. (2) Select 4. 635 . RIGID TAPPING RETURN FUNCTION 6 RIGID TAPPING RETURN FUNCTION If a tap bites into the workpiece and the machine stops due to an abnormality such as an operator error or power failure. Key in [4] and [INPUT].

the position of the spindle is lost. 5382). 2 If rigid tapping stops at emergency stop or due to a power failure. 4 The CNC internally executes a return program to perform tapping return operation. the tap is returned by the amount (a). modal information may partly be changed. For this reason. set the amount of return (a) (NC parameter No. For this reason. By this operation. then restarts. when tapping return operation is performed. To restart the operation. the relationship between the spindle and Z–axis positions is not guaranteed. In this case. after return operation. press the Z AXIS button again.6. the operation stops. 636 . the tap may not completely be pulled out from the workpiece. 3 By rigid tapping return operation which stops at emergency stop or due to a power failure. RIGID TAPPING RETURN FUNCTION MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01 NOTE 1 When the Z AXIS button is released during return operation.

APPENDIXES .

.

15m3/min (150 /min) (at atmospheric pressure) 2236 ± 10mm 995mm × 2207mm Approx.0 kw) 200V AC + 10% to –15%.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES A. Z) 48.4 sec.axis travel (Longitudinal movement of table) Y. diameter: 0 to 28mm /50mm 34 to 120mm /80mm 120 to 250mm /40mm] (80mm : in case 3kg tool mass) 200mm 250mm (It’s depended on spec.axis (Cross movement of saddle) Z.002mm 2115mm × 2027mm Approx.8 sec.1 7/24 taper No.) Random shortest path Max. 5 kW (10 min rating)/ 3. FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR 5. 60Hz 1Hz.axis travel (Vertical movement of spindle head) Distance from table surface to spindle edge surface Distance from the front surface of the column to the center line of the spindle Area Load capacity Type Spindle Feedrate Turret Spindle speed range Type of spindle taper hole Rapid traverse feedrate cutting feedrate Tool change system Type of tool shank Type of retension knob Tool storage capacity Maximum tool diameter 630 × 330mm 150kg (unifom load) SPECIFICATIONS α–T14iCSe 300mm 300 + 100mm 330mm 150 to 480mm 400mm 650mm × 400mm 850mm × 410mm α–T14iCe 500mm 400mm α–T14iCLe 700mm 250kg (uniform load) 250kg (uniform load) 80 to 8000min. SPECIFICATIONS A Travel Table SPECIFICATIONS Mechanical section (– : Unavailable) ITEM X. 3–phase. 3 kg/tool (total mass : 22kg) Approx. "10kVA 490kPa (5kgf/cm2) (gage pressure) 0. 2000kg 0. 7 kW (continuous rating) FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL α3/αM8i X. 2100kg Maximum tool length Method of tool selection Maximum tool mass Tool changing time (cut to cut) Motor Spindle drive motor Feed motors Power sources Electrical power supply Compressed air supply Machine size Machine height Floor space Mass of machine with the control section Accuracy (measured in compliance with JIS B 6201) Positioning accuracy Repeatability 639 .000mm/min 1 to 15000mm/min 3–14–mm slots with a space of 125mm Turret type (spindle independent from turret) MAS BT30 MAS P30T. 30 (X. Y. Z : αM8i (2. or Approx.1 (45° ) 14 Distance from taper gage line /max. 2. 50/60Hz "1Hz or 220V AC +10% to –15%.010mm/300mm ±0. 1. 1950kg 1565mm × 2027mm Approx. 2 kg/tool (total mass : 15kg) or Max. Y. 3–phase.

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR 5. 3–phase. 30 (X. 60Hz 1Hz.8 sec. Z : αM8i (2. 3 kg/tool (total mass : 33kg) Approx. Z 3 axes: XYZ and 2 axes: XY.1 7/24 taper No. 7 kW (continuous rating) FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL α3/αM8i X. ZX ITEM Travel X.A.) Interlock input function FANUC Series 18i.1 (45° ) 14 Distance from taper gage line /max. Y.axis travel (Longitudinal movement of table) Y. 2100kg Maximum tool length Method of tool selection Maximum tool mass Tool changing time (cut to cut) Motor Spindle drive motor Feed motors Power sources Electrical power supply Compressed air supply Machine size Machine height Floor space Mass of machine with the control section 640 .15m3/min (150 /min) (at atmospheric pressure) 2236 ± 10mm 995mm × 2207mm Approx. Y.axis (Cross movement of saddle) Z. 5 kW (10 min rating)/ 3. "10kVA 490kPa (5kgf/cm2) (gage pressure) 0.axis travel (Vertical movement of spindle head) Distance from table surface to spindle edge surface Distance from the front surface of the column to the center line of the spindle Table Area Load capacity Type Spindle Feedrate Turret Spindle speed range Type of spindle taper hole Rapid traverse feedrate cutting feedrate Tool change system Type of tool shank Type of retension knob Tool storage capacity Maximum tool diameter SPECIFICATIONS α–T21iCSe 300mm 300 + 100mm 330mm 150 to 480mm 400mm 630 × 330mm 150kg (unifom load) 650mm × 400mm 850mm × 410mm α–T21iCe 500mm 400mm α–T21iCLe 700mm 250kg (uniform load) 250kg (uniform load) 80 to 8000min.4 sec. 50/60Hz "1Hz or 220V AC +10% to –15%. YZ.) Random shortest path Max. 1950kg 1565mm × 2027mm Approx.MB 3 axes: X.000mm/min 1 to 15000mm/min 3–14–mm slots with a space of 125mm Turret type (spindle independent from turret) MAS BT30 MAS P30T. or Approx.0 kw) 200V AC + 10% to –15%. SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 ITEM Safety and maintenance Control system Controlled axes controlled axes Simultaneously controllable axes Splash guard SPECIFICATIONS α–T14iCSe α–T14iCe α–T14iCLe Totally enclosed type (Door is open/closed manually. 3–phase. diameter: 0 to 28mm /50mm 34 to 120mm /80mm 120 to 250mm /40mm] (80mm : in case 3kg tool mass) 200mm 250mm (It’s depended on spec. Z) 48. 2 kg/tool (total mass : 23kg) or Max. 2000kg 2115mm × 2027mm Approx. Y. 1. 2.

010mm/300mm ±0. programmable dimension Absolute/incrementalprogramming Decimal point programming Inch/millimeterselection Play back Programming resolution multiplied by 10 Tape code Interpolation Positioning Linearinterpolation Circular interpolation Buffer register Feed Cutting feedrate Dwell Rapid tapping Handwheel feed Automaticacceleration/deceleration Rapid traverse override Cutting feed override Part program storage and edit Part program storage Part program edit Program number search Sequence number search Address search No.001/0. ZX α–T21iCLe Control section ITEM Programming methods Least input increment Least command increment Max.02mm/0. Z 3 axes: XYZ and 2 axes: XY. 641 .0001in 0.02 in per graduation Provided F0/25/100% 0 – 200% in 10% increment Punch tape of 320m Delete. 001mm ±99999.01/0. insert.5000 min–1 6000min–1) Manual pulse generator 0. specified values. 4″ color LCD Keyboard with membrane switches Current positions.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES A.MB 3 axes: X. YZ. Y.001/0. and links programs. MANUAL GUIDE or SUPER C. compensation data. PiM 10. Provided Solid drawings with shade are displayed.999mm/±9999. or F and 5 digits in inch/min G04 M29 (Max. alter Provided Provided Provided 200 Another program can be edited during machining Provided Copies.001mm/0.) Interlock input function FANUC Series 18i. SPECIFICATIONS ITEM Accuracy (measured in compliance with JIS B 6201) Safety and maintenance Control system Controlled axes controlled axes Simultaneously controllable axes Positioning accuracy Repeatability Splash guard SPECIFICATIONS α–T21iCSe α–T21iCe 0.0001/0. A.1/0. etc.002mm Totally enclosed type (Door is open/closed manually.2mm x 0.01/0. parameters.9999in G90/G91 Provided G20/G21 Provided Provided Automatic recognition of EIA RS–244–B/ISO 840 code G00 G01 G02/G03 (multi–quadrant command is possible) Provided Programming with character F and 4 digits in mm/min. moves. of programs registered Background editing Expanded tape editing Operation and display Conversationalprogramming Operator’s panel Display function MDI function Dynamic graphic display Display section Operation section SPECIFICATIONS 0.

Provided All machining programs in memory can be selected for activation according to input signals. the customers should prepare necessary external devices and cables by themselves. G44/G49 G41. and cables by themselves. Two digits of a miscellaneous function (M code) are output in BCD. G43. Programming with character M and 3 digits. instead. controls. G42/G40 200 Provided Attaches the current tool position to the offset data at a touch of a button.A. Use of this function does not require the customers to prepare external devices and cables by themselves.digit programming with character S and 4 digits 30 to 200% in 10% increment Programming with character T and 2 digits. M85 to M89 Provided Ordinary miscellaneous outputs are not generated. M82 M83/M84 : ON/OFF M80. Provided G28 G27 G29 Provided G92 Provided G54 to G59 Provided G68/G69 Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided M code BCD output External work number search External program number search Directory display of the Floppy Cassette Functions Spindle speed function Spindle speed override Tool function Miscellaneous function Tool compensation Tool length offset Cutter compensation Number of tool offsets Tool length measurement Tool life management Al tool monitor Coordinate system Manual return to reference position Automatic return to reference position Reference position return check Return from reference position Automatic coordinate system setting Coordinate system setting Workpiece coordinate system selection Coordinate system rotation Operation support function Label skip Single block Optional stop Optional block skip Dry run Machine lock 642 . Provided S4. Provided Performs tool life management (tool damage and wear detection) according to programmed commands. the customers should prepare necessary switches. the customers should prepare necessary switches. To use this function. and cables by themselves. To use this function. controls. Provided Up to 15 machining programs can be selected for activation according to input signals. To use this function. SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 ITEM I/O function and devices I/O interface Quick output Auxiliary output On–off output Response waiting output SPECIFICATIONS Reader/punch interface (For FANUC I/O equipment) M81.

1_C/min max 75% or less (normal). 95% max. I/O signal diagnosis. etc. Y axes Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided G73. 60Hz "1Hz. G74. G81–G89/G80 M98/M99 Custom macro B G90 G61/G64 G10 Provided G62/G64 Automatic deceleration at the corner Provided Provided Provided G31 Provided Power is turned off when machining is completed or an alarm occurs. Z : MODEL αM6 Digital AC servo Fully electronic absolute position detector (αseries pulse coder) 643 .axis feed cancel Program stop Program end Feed hold Circuit interpolation radius programming Canned cycle Sub–program Macro program Exact stop check Exact stop check mode Programmable data input Automatic corner override Mechanical error compensation Machine control sub–port function Automation support function Backlash compensation Pitch error compensation Integrated PMC Skip function Automatic power off Safety and maintenance Emergency stop Overtravel Stored stroke check Expanded stored stroke check 2 Self diagnosis Enclosure and installation Enclosure Power supply Room temperature Environmental conditions Servo system Temperature change Relative humidity Vibration Servo motors Servo unit Position detectors SPECIFICATIONS X.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES A. G76. Y. Provided Provided Provided Provided Alarm display.5g) or less FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL α X. (temporary) 5m/S2 (0. Sealed dust–proof type 200 VAC +10% to –15%. 10kVA 0 to 45_C (No freezing) 1. 50/60Hz "1Hz or 220 VAC +10% to –15%. 3–phase. 3–phase. SPECIFICATIONS ITEM Operation support function Mirror image Z.

Cutting agent motor : 0.25 kW/0. 6000min–1 : 3.5 kW (continuous rating) : 240 (a–T14iCS 200 ) : AC. 0.12 m3/min (+120 liters/min) measured under atmospheric pressure Front door only. and red) (green.25 kW AC Cutting agent tank capacity : 100 liters/200 liters Rear placement : Full–close splash guard is required. Length of the primary power cable connected to the breaker in the NC cabinet : 5m Needed for transportation.75 kW : 15 kgf/cm2 Courtesy lamp Chip air blower Color specification Power cord Transportationmaterial High–speed spindle Center–through coolant specification Coolant tank capacity Center–through motor Rated discharge pressure Specification of the two–side restrained spindle (NC5) Maximum speed: 8000min–1 644 . Fluorescent lamp in the splash guard Voltage : 24 VAC Wattage : 24 W For dry cutting The color of the splash guard can be changed as specified by the customer. and alarm.A. SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Mechanical section option ITEM DIN tooling High column Coolant DIN (For Europa) 100/200/300mm (S type 100/200mm) Cutting agent motor : 0.4 kW AC Cutting agent tank capacity : 100 liters/200 liters With cleaning oil gun Front double door (A double door is included as standard for the S type) Automatic right–side door Pneumatic pressure source: Flow rate at an atmospheric pressure SPECIFICATIONS Flood coolant Double splash guard door Automatic splash guard side door Splash guard door automatic opening/ closing Automatic front door Compressed air supply : +0. Maximum speed Motor : 15000min–1/rigid tapping. It is opened or closed according to a programmed command or by pressing a button. and blue) (For general use in Japan and foreign countries) (For CE marks) Indicates machining in progress.7kW (10–minute rating)/1. program end. Simple cover/full cover Lubricator motor : 3 W AC Lubricant oil tank capacity : 1.8 liters Automatic intermittent lubrication for ball screws and LM guides Top cover Centralized intermittent lubrication unit Centralized greasing piping Status indicator lamp Piping for greasing ball screws and LM guide Three–stage (green. yellow. yellow.

SPECIFICATIONS Control section option ITEM Control on one additional axis Control on two additional axes SPECIFICATIONS Maximum number of concurrently controlled axes: 4 Power capacity: +2 KVA Servo motor: FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL b0. Provided. aM3/5000i. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. a2/5000i.5/3000. Provided. SPECIFICATIONS 645 .B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES A. a4/4000i. Provided. a3/3000. Provided. Provided. a1/3000. Provided. a2/3000. a8/3000i NC statement of conventional type Amount equivalent to 1280m of tape (total) Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided Can be selected as required. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. a1/5000i. Provided. Provided. Provided. a2/2000. aM2/5000i. Provided. Provided Provided Operator’s panel with alphabet key Program storage capacity expansion Remote buffer AI High precision contour control Data server (160MB/100BASE–T) Ethernet (100BASE–T) HSSB interface FANUC Handy File Additional I/O FANUC RENSCAN400 Power Failure Backup Software options ITEM 48 workpiece coordinate systems 300 workpiece coordinate systems Helical interpolation Tool offset Interruption type custom macro Scaling Polar coordinate command Small–diameter peck drilling cycle Unidirectionalpositioning Automatic tool length measurement High–speed remote buffer B 400 registerable programs Modeler control II (AI namo contour control) NURBS interpolation Cylindricalinterpolation One–digit F code feed Multistage skip function Figure copy Three–dimensional coordinate conversion Inverse time feed Tool offset memory C Basic FACTOLINK package ROBODRILL Program Manager FAPT LADDER–III Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided.

DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 B DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE 646 .B.

B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES B.1 SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE Fig.B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE B.1 (a) Shape and Dimensions of the Machine (α–T14/21iCe) 647 .

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Fig.1 (b) Shape and Dimensions of the Machine (α–T14/21iCLe) 648 .B.

B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE Fig.1 (c) Shape and Dimensions of the Machine (α–T14/21iCSe) 649 .B.

2 (a) Dimensions of the Table Surface and T Groove (nominal width: 14) (α–T14/21iCe) 650 .B.2 DIMENSIONS OF THE TABLE SURFACE AND T GROOVE (NOMINAL WIDTH: 14) Fig.B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 B.

DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE Table 4–M12 depth24 T–SLOT Fig.B.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES B.2 (b) Dimensions of the Table Surface and T Groove (nominal width: 14) (α–T14/21iCLe) 651 .

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Table 4–M12 depth24 T–SLOT Fig.B.2 (c) Dimensions of the Table Surface and T Groove (nominal width: 14) (α–T14/21iCSe) 652 .

B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES B. tool length reaching area (α–T14iC) Turret body (α–T21iC) Turret body (α–T14iC) Fig. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE B.3 DIMENSIONS OF THE INSIDE OF THE SPLASH GUARD Max.B.3 (a) Internal Dimensions of Splash Guard (α–T14/21iCe) 653 ÃÃÃ Door opening width 550 . tool length reaching area (α–T21iC) Max.

DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Max. tool length reaching area (α–T14iCL) Turret body (α–T21iCL) Turret body (α–T14iCL) Fig.3 (b) Internal Dimensions of Splash Guard (α–T14/21iCLe) 654 ÃÃÃ Door opening width 825 . tool length reaching area (α–T21iCL) Max.B.B.

tool length reaching area (α–T14iCS) Turret body (α–T21iCS) Turret body (α–T14iCS) Door opening width 525 Fig.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES B.B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE Max.3 (c) Internal Dimensions of Splash Guard (α–T14/21iCSe) 655 . tool length reaching area (α–T21iCS) Max.

DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 B.B.B.4 (b) Dimensions of the System Around the Coolant Outlets (α–T14/21iCSe) 656 .4 (a) Dimensions of the System Around the Coolant Outlets (α–T14 (21) iCe/iCLe) Fig.B.4 DIMENSIONS OF THE SYSTEM AROUND THE COOLANT OUTLETS Fig.

DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE B.5 DIMENSIONS OF THE END OF THE SPINDLE Fig.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES B.B.5 Dimensions of the End of the Spindle 657 .

B. Dimensions of mist collector duct mounting sheet metal Sheet metal mounting hole dimensions Fig.6 (A) α – T14 (21) iCe/CLe cut cut 8–burring–M6 (convex on back) NBR rubber section 8–8 dia.B. Dimensions of mist collector duct mounting sheet metal Sheet metal mounting hole dimensions Fig. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 B.6 MIST COLLECTOR MOUNTING HOLE DIMENSIONS cut cut 8–burring–M6 (convex on back) NBR rubber section 8–8 dia. Note) Adhere NBR rubber 70_ t2 to the portion indicated by shading after coating. Note) Adhere NBR rubber 70_ t2 to the portion indicated by shading after coating.B.6 (B) α – T14 (21) iCse 658 .

G code *G00 *G01 01 G02 G03 G04 G05.1 Q1) (Note 7) Modeler control (AI namo contour control) (G05.2 G07. exact stop Modeler control (AI contour control) (G05.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES C.4 G05 G06.1 Q1) High–speed HRV function AI High precision contouring control (G05P10000) (Note 7) NURBS interpolation (Note 7) Cylindricalinter polation (Note 7) Precession control (G08 P1) Group Positioning Linearinterpolation Function 659 . G CODES C G CODES The following G codes are offered.1 G08 00 G09 G10 *G15 17 G16 *G17 *G18 *G19 G20 06 G21 *G22 04 G23 G27 G28 G29 G31 G37 00 Stored stroke check OFF (Note 7) Reference point return check Return to reference point Return from reference point Skip function Automatic tool length measurement (Note 7) Input in mm Stored stroke check ON (Note 7) 02 Polar coordinate command (Note 7) XY plane selection ZX plane selection YZ plane selection Input in inch Exact stop Setting of data Polar coordinate command cancel (Note 7) 01 Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CW (Note 7) Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CCW (Note 7) Dwell.1 00 G05.

1 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G60 G61 G62 *G64 G65 G66 12 *G67 G68 16 *G69 Canceling coordinate system rotation/Canceling 3–dimensional coordinate system conversion (Note 7) 00 Figure copying (Note 7) Cancel of custom macro modal call Coordinate system rotation/3–dimensional coordinate system conversion (Note 7) 00 15 00 14 Machine coordinate system selection Work coordinate system 1 setting Additional workpiece coordinate system selection (Note 7) Work coordinate system 2 setting Work coordinate system 3 setting Work coordinate system 4 setting Work coordinate system 5 setting Work coordinate system 6 setting One direction positioning (Note 7) Exact stop mode Automatic corner Cutting mode Macro call Custom macro modal call Scaling (Note 7) Local coordinate system setting 08 Tool position offset 1/2 reduction (Note 7) Tool length compensation cancel Scaling cancel (Note 7) Tool position offset reduction (Note 7) Tool position offset two-hold extension (Note 7) Tool length compensation – direction Tool position offset extension (Note 7) G72. G CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 G code *G40 G41 G42 G43 Group Function Cutter compensation cancel 07 Cutter compensation left Cutter compensation right Tool length compensation + direction 08 G44 G45 00 G46 G47 00 G48 *G49 *G50 11 G51 G52 00 G53 *G54 G54.C.1 660 .

G CODES G code G73 G74 G76 *G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 Group Peck drilling cycle Counter tapping cycle Fine boring cycle Canned cycle cancel Drilling cycle.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES C. spot boring 09 Function Drilling cycle. counter boring Peck drilling cycle Tapping cycle Boring cycle Boring cycle Back boring cycle Boring cycle 09 G89 *G90 03 *G91 G92 G93 05 *G94 *G98 10 G99 Return to R point in canned cycle Feed per minute Return to initial point in canned cycle 00 Incremental command Programming of absolute zero point Inverse time feed (Note 7) Boring cycle Absolute command 661 .

4 A number of G codes can be specified in the same block.C. When more than one G code of the same group is specified. (For G02 and G03. 2 G codes of group 00 are not modal. For G20 and G21. However G codes in group 01 is not affected by any of the canned cycle G codes. For G68 and G69.) 662 . G CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 NOTE 1 G codes marked * are initial G codes in turning power on. only three–dimensional coordinate conversion and three–dimensional coordinate conversion cancel are optional. 3 If a G code not listed in the table of G codes is inputted. 6 G code is displayed by each group number. 010) is displayed. an alarm (No. only clockwise and counterclockwise helical interpolation are optional. the canned cycle is automatically cancelled and the G80 condition is entered. the G code specified later is effective. or G code for an option not specified in the NC is commanded. There are only effective in the block in which they are specified. 7 Option. the G code before turning power off remains. 5 If any G code in group 01 is specified in a canned cycle mode.

SRH] ³ Offset Data ³ [INPUT] Setting No.SRH] ³ [EOB] and [Z] ³ [INPUT] [(OPRT)] ³ [ " ] ³ [READ] ³ [EXEC] POS _ SYSTEM (Parameter) Offset Data input from MDI Parameter f MDI or emergency stop _ MDI Offset value Setting data Inputting PMC parameters (for the counter and data table) Inputting PMC parameters (for the timer and keep relay) Tool length measurement f f f Setting MDI mode or emergency stop MDI mode or emergency stop MANUAL SYSTEM (PMC) SYSTEM (PMC) Current position ³ Offset f Data input from External I/O Parameter f EDIT or emergency stop Emergency stop SYSTEM (PARAM) SYSTEM (PMC) PMC parameter f [I/O]³(CHANNEL) “1” [INPUT] ³ (DEVICE) [FDCAS] ³ (FUNCTION) [READ] ³ (DATA KIND) [PARAM] ³ (FILE NO.SRH]³ DATA³ [INPUT] ³ PWE=0³ [RESET] Offset No. Offset No. [(OPRT)] [TIME:0] ³ [EXEC] [(OPRT)] [PART:0] ³ [EXEC] [2] and [5] (manipulated on the IPL screen) ³ select [5]. Parameter No.SRH] ³ Data ³ [INPUT] [PMCPRM]³ [COUNTER] or [DATA] ³ Data ³ [INPUT] [PMCPRM] ³ [TIMER] or [KEEPRL] ³ Data ³ [INPUT] [POS] (Displaying relative coordinates)³[Z]³[CAN] ³ [OFFSET] ³ Place a tool to the specified position. ³ [NO. ³ [NO.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES D.) file number ³ [EXEC] [(OPRT)] ³ [ " ] ³ [READ] ³ [EXEC] Data input from External I/O Offset value Program input f f EDIT EDIT PROG [(OPRT)] ³ [ " ] ³ [READ] ³ [EXEC] 663 .³ [NO. OPERATION D Classification Clear Reset OPERATION Function Memory all clear Parameters and offset value Clearing stored program Run time Number of parts OT alarm Program protect key Setting PWE-1 Mode Power ON Power ON Power ON _ _ Power ON Function button _ _ _ Current position Operation [RESET] + [DELETE] [RESET] [2] and [5] (manipulated on the IPL screen) ³ select [3]. ³ [NO.

search Sequence No.D. ³ [O.SRH] Search Program No. ³ [NO. ³ [NO.SRH] [LIBRARY] [O] ³ –9999 ³ [DELET] [O] ³ Program No. search Address word search Address search Offset No. OPERATION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Classification Output to External I/O Function Parameter Offset value All program One program Program protect key Setting PWE-1 Mode EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT MEMORY or EDIT AUTO EDIT EDIT _ _ Function button SYSTEM (PARAM) OFFSET PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG OFFSET SYSTEM (Diagno sis) SYSTEM (PARAM) PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG Operation [(OPRT)] ³ [ " ] ³ [PUNCH] ³ [EXEC] [(OPRT)] ³ [ " ] ³ [PUNCH]³ [EXEC] [O]³ –9999 ³ [ " ] ³ [PUNCH] ³ [EXEC] [O]³ Program No. Search ³ N ³ Sequence No. ³ [DELET] EOB ³ [DELET] Search the word to be Deleted ³ [DELET] Search the word to be Altered ³ Address ³ Data ³ [ALTER] Search the word before the place in the program ³ Address ³ Data ³ [INSRT] [(OPRT)] ³ [ " ] ³ [READ] ³ [EXEC] Insertion of a word f EDIT PROG Collation Collation in memory with tape EDIT PROG 664 . ³ [ " ] ³ [PUNCH] ³ [EXEC] [O] ³ Program No. Diagnosis Parameter No. ³ [DELET] [N] ³ Sequence No. ³ [ N.SRH] Searching DATA³[ SRH ± ] or [ SRH °] Searching Address ³ [ SRH ± ] or [ SRH °] Offset No. ³ [NO. Program editing Displaying the capacity of memory used Deletion of all programs Deletion of a program Deletion of several blocks Deletion of a block Deletion of a word Alteration of a word f f f f f f _ EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT Parameter No.SRH] Program No.SRH] Diagnosis No.

then 31: SEQ SELECTION. ³ [X] [Y] or [Z] ³ [INSERT] ³ (NC data) [INSERT] ³ [EOB] ³ [INSERT] Tool change Coolant Flood coolant Changing tools Applying coolant Applying flood coolant MDI Power ON Power ON _ _ _ [TOOL CHANG] [CLNT] Display QUICK screen. MANUAL PROG Start the machine. then 31: SEQ SELECTIOM. ³ Select [ON]. f EDIT EDIT Play back NC data input EDIT. ³ Select INTERNAL LIGHT using [°] or [±]. INTERNAL LIGHT Turning on the light in the machine Power ON _ 665 . ³ Select TEACHING IN using [°] or [±]. ³ [ " ] ³ [F DELETE] ³ [EXEC] Searching a file for its beginning ³ [O] ³ Program No.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES D. ³ Select [ON]. ³ [ " ] ³ [F SRH] ³ [EXEC] [N] ³ File No. OPERATION Classification Input from or output to the Handy File Function Program input All programs output One program output File search Deletion of file Collation of program Program protect key f Setting PWE-1 Mode EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT Function button PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG Operation [N] ³ File No. Display QUICK screen. ³ [(OPRT)] ³ [ " ] ³ [READ] ³ [EXEC] Display QUICK screen. ³ Select Flood coolant using [°] or [±]. ³ [ " ] ³ [READ]] ³[EXEC] [O] ³ –9999 ³ [ " ] ³ [READ] ³ [EXEC] [O] ³ Program No. ³ Select [ON]. ³ [ " ] ³ [READ] ³ [EXEC] [N] ³ File No. then 31: SEQ SELECTIOM.

f: MDI mode × : Other mode × (Note) Cutter compensation × × Storing called subprogram number 666 . the one effective before cutting off the power is effective. T. (For G20 and G21. When turning power on f f f f × × × Initial G codes. S and T codes Tool length f f × f × × × f : MDI mode Other modes depend on parameter “RS43”. The status is cancelled or the movement is interrupted.) Zero × × Zero × × × × When reset f f f f f: MDI mode × : Other mode f × f F S.E. M Repetition specification (K) Coordinate Action in operation Work coordinate value Movement Dwell Issuance of M. STATUS LIST APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 E Setting data Other data STATUS LIST : : Item Offset value Data set by the MDI setting operation Parameter Programs in memory Contents in the buffer storage Display of sequence number One shot G code Modal G code The status is not changed or the movement is continued.

667 . STATUS LIST Item Output signals for indication of LEDs ALM NOT READY BUF REFERENCE POINT RETURN COMPLETION LED S and T codes M code M. Execution cannot be started from the middle of the subprogram. execution returns to the head of the program.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES E. MB) Servo ready signal When turning power on Extinguishes if there is no cause for the alarm × Extinguishes × × × × f ON When reset Extinguishes if there is no cause for the alarm × (Lights in emergency stop) f: MDI mode × : Other mode f (× : Emergency stop) f × × f f ON (When other than servo alarm) × × ON (When other than servo alarm) × × CYCLE TART LED FEED HOLD LED NOTE When a reset is performed during execution of a subprogram. S and T strobe strobe signals Spindle revolution signal (S analogue signal) NC ready signal (MA.

ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 F ERROR CODES 668 .F.

Correct the program or tape. then turn it on. Alternatively. Or. two or more decimal points “.) formation area.”. Alternatively. an address that is not related to the specified G code was entered in the block in which the G code is specified. Or. (1) P/S Alarm Remedy Remarks Confirm the contents of the set parameter. ERROR CODES F. a G code corresponding to an unavailable option was specified. (Decimal point “. 006 ILLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVE SIGN The sign “–” was input with an address which cannot use the sign “–”. Ex. 003 TOO MANY DIGITS Data exceeding the maximum number of digits was input.” input error) 009 For example. Valid when system NC parameter (No. (Sign “–” input error) 007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT The decimal point “. Confirm which options are available. Correct the program.” were input. the unusable address is P. X 10. Correct the program or tape. 004 ADDRESS NOT FOUND A numeral or the sign “–” was input without an address at the beginning of the block. ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT IMPROPER G–CODE An invalid G code was specified. Correct the program. 002 TV PARITY ALARM The number of characters in a block is odd. 001 TH PARITY ALARM Character with incorrect parity was input. Turn off the power. 0000#0) is 1. Unusable address was input in significant in. two or more “–” signs were input. this alarm occurs.” was input with an address which cannot use the decimal point “. Correct the program. if “G00P100” is commanded.(In this case.1 ERROR CODE DISPLAYED ON LCD Message Number Contents 000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER Parameter which requires the power supply to be disconnected once was set.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F.5 Data Address 010 669 . Modify the program. 005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS The address was not followed by data but was followed by the next address or EOB code. Correct the program.

F. 014 CAN NOT COMMAND G95 A synchronous feed is specified without the option for threading/synchronousfeed. or I. and K (distance from a start point to the center) are not specified. XZ. specify two axes XY. XY. the difference of the distance between the start point and the center of an arc and that between the end point and the center of the arc exceeded the value specified in parameter No. 3410. or YZ plane which are not parallel. an axis was not cel the G43 or G44 code when an axis to specified in the block in which G43 or G44 was be compensated is changed. modify the offset amount. J. R (arc radius). Alternatively. Correct the program. G19) was commanded in circular interpolation. For plane selection. Select a correct offset number. 021 ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS COMMANDED An axis not included in the plane specification (G17. Correct the program. Adjust the setting for NC parameter No. 020 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS In circular interpolation (G02 or G03). Correct the program. or YZ plane 022 NO CIRCLE RADIUS For circular interpolation. Specify the G49 code to canIn tool length compensation C. G18. Correct the program. Or. Or. feedrate command was inappropriate. XZ. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 011 NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED Feedrate was not commanded during cutting feed. 028 029 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset value selected by H code is too large. 025 CANNOT COMMAND F0 IN G02/G03 (M series) F0 (rapid traverse) was specified for one–digit F code feed in circular interpolation. 027 Specify the G43 or G44 code with an axis for which the tool length has been compensated. Remedy Remarks 015 TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED Attempt was made to shift a number of axis which exceeded the number of simultaneously controlled axis. Correct the program. NO AXES COMMANDED IN G43/G44 (M series) ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT Two or more axes which are parallel one another were specified in the plane selection. Correct the program. 3410. specified. Correct the program. 670 . an attempt was made to compensate the other axis without canceling the offset in tool length compensation C.

the value of P to specify the offset number is too large. G19) was program. Specify a correct offset number. Correct the program. 037 The plane must be changed in the offset cancel mode (G40 enabled). Correct the program. Starting or canceling cutter compensation C can be specified together with linear movement. 033 NO SOLUTION AT CRC The coordinates of an intersection cannot be calculated in cutter compensation C. the number specified by a P code for the additional workpiece coordinate system is too large. Two or more blocks are consecutively specified in which functions such as the auxiliary function and dwell functions are performed without movement in the cutter compensation mode.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. 041 INTERFERENCE IN CRC Overcutting will occur in cutter compensation C. Correct the program. 034 Cutter compensation C cannot be specified in a block immediately before or after a block in which circular cutting (G02 or Startup or cancel was going to be performed in G03) is specified. CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN CRC INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR Overcutting may occur in cutter compensation C because the arc start point or end point coincide with the arc center. Correct the program. NO CIRC ALLOWED IN ST–UP /EXT BLK CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 (M series) Skip turning (G31) is specified in the cutter compensation C mode. Remedy Remarks 036 038 671 . Or. Otherwise. Correct the program. G18. Correct the program. Add a linear cutting G02 or G03 mode in cutter compensation C. Correct the A compensation plane (G17. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 030 ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset number specified by D/H code for the cutter compensation or the tool length offset is too large. 031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10 In the offset amount program input (G10). P was not commanded. command (G01). 032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 The offset value set by programmable data input (G10) or written by a system variable is too large. Correct the program. switched in cutter compensation C.

045 ADDRESS Q NOT FOUND (G73/G83) (M series) In G73 or G83 for specifying a canned cycle. Modify the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. 1022. and Zp are omitted are not specified in parameter No. 050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD BLK (M series) Optional–angle chamfering or corner rounding is specified in a threading block. Correct the program. Q (depth of cut for each cutting feed) is not specified or Q0 is specified. Yp. G45) are not nested. 048 BASIC 3 AXIS NOT FOUND At the startup of three–dimensional tool compensation or three–dimensional coordinate conversion. ter compensation mode. 3rd. 047 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT At the startup of three–dimensional tool compensation or three–dimensional coordinate conversion. or P4 is specified for the 2nd. the three basic axes used when Xp. Correct the program. 049 ILLEGAL OPERATION (G68/G69) (M series) The commands for three–dimensional coordinate conversion (G68. 046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN COMMAND A code other than P2. Correct the program. Remedy Remarks 044 672 . ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 042 The tool offset command cannot be issued in the cutter compensation mode. Specify the tool offset command after The tool offset command was issued in the cut. G44. two or more axes are specified in the same direction (basic and parallel axes).F. G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED IN CRC (M series) G27–G30 NOT ALLOWED IN FIXED CYC (M series) One of G27–G29 was commanded in caned cycle mode. G69) and tool length compensation (G43. P3. Correct the program. or 4th reference position return command.canceling the offset. Correct the program.

chamfering or corner R block. Correct the program. 058 END POINT NOT FOUND (M series) In an optional–angle chamfering or corner rounding block. 060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND Sequence number to be searched was not found. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 051 The value specified for chamfering or rounding a corner was larger than the value specified for movement. Correct the program. Check the address data or the program number and correctly input them. If it is incorrect. enter a correct number.G02 or G03. 053 TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS (M series) For optional–angle chamfering or corner rounding. Remedy Remarks 052 673 . a value other than R or C was specified following a comma (. the specified direction of specified in the block next to the optional movement was incorrect. then perform registration again. Improper movement or the move distance was Alternatively. Rearrange memory or delete any unnecessary programs. an axis which was not in the selected plane was specified. 055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR (M series) In an optional–angle chamfering or corner rounding block. Correct the program. Check the program number and modify it. 071 DATA NOT FOUND The address data to be searched was not found. Otherwise.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. the program with the specified number was not found in the program number search. the specified travel distance is less than the amount of chamfering or corner rounding. MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR (M series) CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER CHF/CNR (M series) The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01. Or. Check the sequence number.). the number of a program being edited in background processing was searched for. 059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND The program was not found in the external program number selection. Correct the program. 070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY The memory area is insufficient. Correct the program.

Remedy Remarks 076 080 674 . 077 SUB PROGRAM NESTING ERROR The subprogram was called in five times. suring the tool length and position speci. Otherwise. An attempt was made to register a program 3202 to 0. 081 OFFSET NUMBER NOT FOUND IN G37 Automatic tool length measurement (G37) was specified with specifying no H code for the automatic tool length measurement function. Automatic tool–length measurement can be used for the Z–axis only in the ROBODRILL α–T14iB. 078 NUMBER NOT FOUND The program number or the sequence number specified by address P in the block with M98. Correct the program. Check that the switch is connected correctly. Correct the program. Check the program number or sequence number and modify it. PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ASSERTED (M series) In the automatic tool length measurement function (G37).Parameter No. Change the program number or delete the registered program. PROTECT ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED P was not specified in the block with M98. Otherwise. the number of a program being edited in background processing was called.signal ZAE. Alternatively. set bit 0 or 4 of NC parameter No. Then. a program nal I/O device. stored in memory does not agree with that read from an external I/O device.F. correct the X1004 program. 6254. 079 Check both the contents of memory and those of the program read from the exterIn memory or program collation. The sequence number specified by a GOTO statement was not found. G65 or G66. 074 ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER The program number is other than 1–9999. M99. Correct the program. automatic tool length measurement was specified for the X– or Y–axis. Check the position of the switch for mea. the measurement position reach signal is not turned on within the area specified for parameter 6254 (value e). ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of registered programs exceeded 200 or 400 (option). Correct the program. bit 2 of fied by the program. 073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN USE Attempt was made to register a same program number as an already registered program number. whose number was protected. or G66 was not found. Delete unnecessary registered programs. 075 Change the program number.

0101. (Additional axes with dogs) After moving the target axis for motor reference position return by about 12 mm in the handle mode.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F.If measurement is ment for the Z–axis with the absolute pro.specified for the X– An axis other than the Z–axis was specified in gramming method. parity reader. No. and additional axes without dogs)Separate the start point far enough from the reference position. BUFFER OVERFLOW REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE Motor reference position return was performed without rotating the motor of each axis through one or more turns. When inputting/outputting/via/reader/puncher nected or the printed circuit board may be 0112. device. Also check how the external I/O although the read terminate command is spe. tively. 0020. COMMUNICATION ERROR Relativeparameters When channel is common.device is controlled according to each NC cified. No. Alterna080 is issued. 0113 interface. Y–. 0000. Remedy Remarks 085 086 087 090 091 Press the RESET on the operator’s panel. Y–. The I/O device or printed circuit board may be faulty. then on again. No. 0100 When parameter I/O is 0. increase the rapid traverse rate for motor reference position return. (Automatic tool–length measurement function) ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IN G37 Check parameter. input was not stopped even after 10 I/O control signal. alarm No. characters were read. Check that the values in the When entering data in the memory by using parameters match the settings of the tape Reader / Puncher interface. 0103 Check whether the power to the I/O de. an overrun. output devices is off. and perform motor reference position return. the ready signal (DR) of the input/ faulty. (X–. 092 675 . 0102. then perform motor reference position return. manual tion return. turn the power off. 0001. No. and Z– axes. The number of bits of input data or setting of baud rate or specification No. No. or Y–axis. (X–. then perform manual reference posiIn the automatic operation halt state. Check whether the parameter values agree with the settings for the external I/O When reading via reader/puncher interface. No. No. Alternatively. Correct the program. 0111. incremental programming was used.When parameter I/O DR SIGNAL OFF vice is on. No. REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE AXES NOT ON THE REFERENCE POINT The reference point return check (G27) found that the specified axis did not return to the reference point. No. The cable may not be con. and additional axes without dogs) The start point of motor reference position return is too close to the reference position or the speed is too slow.is 1. (Additional axes with dogs) Correct the program. of I/O unit is incorrect. automatic tool–length measurement. or framing error was generated. 083 Specify automatic tool–length measure. reference position return cannot be performed. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 082 H–CODE NOT ALLOWED IN G37 H code and automatic tool length measurement (G37) were specified in the same block for the automatic tool length measurement function. Check the tape reader and the tape. and Z–axes. No.

When the operator’s panel has a full keyboard. press the <RESET> key on the machine operator’s panel. Or. 1. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE Write enable parameter was set to “1” (1=valid). press <PROG> and <RESET> simultaneously. 2. Correct the program. Remedy Remarks Set PWE to 1. was specified. Modify the program such that the absolute value becomes less than 8 digits. define the variable number in adA number not defined as a variable number vance. 3. exceeded the allowable range. Check the program for the equation and The calculation result of the macro instruction result. 112 116 676 . DIVIDED BY ZERO Division by zero was specified. 114 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO Incorrect format outside of <equation> 115 Check the variable number and modify it. Correct the program.F. 101 PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY The power supply was turned off while rewriting the contents of the memory in program edit. Correct the program. Check the common variable and change to an assignable variable number. (Including tan 90°) 113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in custom macro was commanded. Press a soft key to display the following (FULL mode): HALF ALTER DELETE . Correct the program. The memory area must be cleared. ILLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBER WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE A variable for which a value cannot be substituted was specified at the left side of the equation. then press an alphanumeric character key on the machine operator’s panel. 110 DATA OVERFLOW The absolute value of the fixed decimal point display data exceeded the allowable range. 109 FORMAT ERROR IN G08 A value other than 0 or 1 was specified for P following G08 or no value was specified. Display the CNC screen. 111 CALCULATED DATA OVERFLOW The allowable range is – 1047 –1047. then press the RESET key. While holding down the soft key between [HALF] and [ALTER].

Correct the program. ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE NUMBER ILLEGAL ARGUMENT ADDRESS An address which is not allowed in <Argument Specification> is used. 122 FOUR FOLD MACRO MODAL–CALL The macro modal call was doubly specified. Or. 125 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO Incorrect format outside of <equation>. A value from one to three was specified in n of Correct the program. Correct the program.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. MACRO STATEMENT IN SAME BLOCK Specify the macro command uniquely. Correct the addresses used in the custom macro instructions. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 118 PARENTHESIS NESTING ERROR The multiplicity of parentheses exceeded five times. A software error occurred. tion in the branch command was not 0 – 9999. Correct the program. 131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL ALARM MESSAGES Five or more external alarms were issued. 126 The nesting level of the DO loop must be three or less. PMC sequence error. 132 ALARM NUMBER NOT FOUND There was no corresponding alarm number when the issued alarm was to be cleared. 128 Check the jump destination number specified in the custom macro instruction. NC commands and macro commands are mixed in the same block. or a value other than 0 to 9 was specified as a digit of the BIN argument. the sequence number was not found. ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER NC. 119 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT A negative value was specified for the SQRT (square root) or BCD (binary–coded decimal) argument. Contact the nearest FANUC Technical Center. Contact the nearest FANUC Technical Center. Remedy Remarks 127 129 677 . A macro control command is used during DNC operation. the DO n instruction.Correct the program. 123 CAN NOT USE MACRO COMMAND IN DNC Correct the program. 124 MISSING END STATEMENT DO and END statements are not paired correctly. Correct the program. The sequence number of the branch destina. Correct the program.

1713. ter compensation mode.fy cutter compensation. NATE INTERPOLATION The conditions for starting or canceling polar coordinate interpolation are incorrect. gram was not set in tool life management. then TOOL GROUP SETTING. (Setting error in parameter No. Modify the program. Correct the program. coordinate value and circular radius exceeded the maximum command value when scaling was scaling executed.tool group. 1714 Deceleration (MDR) and the judgement angle 1% x MDR (1% step ) x 100% ( θp) of auto corner override are out of range. Modify the program. 1711. 144 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED The coordinate rotation plane differs from arc or tool offset C plane. The respective planes should be same. and set the The tool group specified in the machining pro. 150 ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP NUMBER The specified tool group number exceeded the maximum number. Q2. Remedy Remarks 142 149 678 . Scaling cannot be performed by this multiple. 1710. 141 G51 cannot be commanded. Specify scaling on (G51) first. then speciG51 (Scaling ON) was commanded in the cut. Modify the program. ALARM MSG Subclass data was erroneous in the external alarm message and external operator message. 5460 or 5461) Correct the program or parameter setting. Modify the scaling multiple.1 or G13. P1 or P2 was specified as the life count type in the extended tool life management.1 is specified in mode other than G40. Contact the nearest FANUC Technical Center. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 133 ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. 2°x θp x 178°. CAN NOT COMMAND G51 IN CRC ILLEGAL SCALE RATE (M series) The scaling multiple was specified as a value other than 1 – 999999. Reduce the scaling multiple. TOOL GROUP NUMBER NOT FOUND The tool group number (P) must be 128 or P=1–128 less. PMC sequence error. 145 ILLEGAL CONDITIONS IN POLAR COORDI.1) G12. 146 IMPROPER G CODE An illegal G code was specified in the polar coordinate interpolation mode. 2) Plane selection is incorrect. A scaling factor is obtained by multiplying the specified integer by 1/1000. 1712. ILLEGAL SETTING DATA FORMAT ERROR IN GIOL3 A code other than Q1. 148 Reset the parameters such that the range Related parameters: becomes: Nos. TOOL FIFE. 143 SCALED MOTION DATA OVERFLOW Move distance. 151 Display QUICK screen.F.

the H99 group is specified. if necessary. 6800 The specified number of tools in the group ex.1 was specified again in a subprogram which performed rotational copy specified by G72. or D99 code was specified. 175 ILLEGAL G107 COMMAND A condition for starting or canceling cylindrical interpolation is invalid. ILLEGAL T–CODE IN M06 P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND The P and L commands were not specified at the top of the program which set the tool group. Execute the program which sets tool groups again. The No. the alarm is ignored. 161 G72. Correct the program.1 rotation–axis–name radius–of–cylinder”. 6 of parameter No. 6800 is set to 1. Specify the condition in format “G07. specify the fied with the M06 code in the block did not cor. When bit nored. NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE GROUP Check the tool number specified in the T Related parameter: code and the specified tool group. 158 ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA Too large life period 159 TOOL DATA SETTING INCOMPLETE The power was turned off while the setting program was being executed. No. Remedy Remarks 153 155 156 679 . Correct the program. the T code speci. 154 The H99 and D99 codes can only be specified for a tool number for which a tool When a tool group was not specified. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 152 Check the specified number of tools in Related parameter: each group. 6800 In the machining program. ceeded the maximum value. The maximum value that can be set is 4300 minutes or 65535 times.1. 157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS The number of tool groups to be specified exceeded the maximum value. a T code was not specified in a block where it was required. Related parameter: No.Depending on the conditions.2 was specified again in a subprogram which performed rotational copy specified by G72. Correct it.1 NESTING ERROR Code G72. Correct the program. Correct the number of tool groups.maximum number of tools is 16 per group. NO SPACE FOR TOOL ENTRY T–CODE NOT FOUND In registration of tool life data.parameter so that the tool number is igrespond to the tool group being used.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. 6800 Specify the P and L commands at the top of the program.2. 160 G72.1 NESTING ERROR (M series) Code G72.

cal interpolation mode. (NO. Check that Nos. 178 G05 COMMANDED IN G41/G42 MODE Code G05 was specified in the G41/G42 mode. Correct the program. Correct the program. (See the setting of parameter No. G74. the external unit is connected correctly. or a spindle speed was not specified. Correct the program. an incorrect axis specification is found. G codes for selecting a coordinate system (G53 and G54 to G59) Correct the program. 0133. including the codes specifying the rapid traverse cycle) 2. 0134. G78. 7501. POSITION LSI OVERFLOW Correct the program. 177 CHECK SUM ERROR (G05 MODE) A checksum error occurred. G76. If the alarm is not reset by turning the power off In rigid tapping. a feedrate was not specified. G codes for setting a coordinate system (G52 and G92) 3. G codes for positioning (such as G28.F. 202 Turn off the power. 0135. 201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN RIGID TAP In rigid tapping. Axis specification P is beyond the permissible range. G73. 179 PARAM. too many pulses were distrib.Related parameters tings of the external I/O unit. or if an error occurs when rigid tapping is specified again. 7510 exceeds the maximum number. contact the uted to the spindle. 0132 Nos. macro. 3770. 190 200 680 . 180 COMMUNICATION ERROR (REMOTE BUF) Check that the parameters match the set.) 199 Check the arithmetic operation and control commands specified by the custom An undefined reserved macro word was used. the specified spindle speed was out of range. nearest FANUC Technical Center. 0100. then turn it on. 7510 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT In constant surface speed control. Correct the program.1. 0000. 7510) SETTING ERROR The number of controlled axes set by parameter No. 0020. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 176 IMPROPER G–CODE IN G107 The following G codes cannot be specified in the cylindrical interpolation mode: Remedy Remarks An invalid G code was specified in the cylindri. Modify the parameter setting. Remote buffer line alarm 0131. and G81 to G89. 0001. MACRO WORD UNDEFINED ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND In rigid tapping.and on.

CAN NOT COMAND M198/M199 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT On a plane including an additional axis. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 203 PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID TAPPING In rigid tapping. Specify “M29 Sxxxx . Specify “M29 Sxxxx .” in succession. Only when the X–Y plane (G17) is specified. 222 DNC OP.” immediately before the G84 and G74 codes. The M198 code was executed in DNC operation. codes were specified was executed. Reference position return is necessary Related parameter before cycle start. movement along an axis (including tool change) was specified between the rigid M code and the G84 or G74 code. scheduled operation. the rigid M29 or S code was specified in an incorrect position. 205 Turn off the power.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F.0 If the alarm is not reset by turning the Although the rigid M code was specified in rigid power off and on. 224 RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT Reference position return has not been performed before the automatic operation starts. optional–angle chamfering/corner rounding is specified. then turn it on. 204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION In rigid tapping. when the block in which the G84 and G74 contact the nearest FANUC Technical Center. Correct the prgoram. Remedy Remarks 206 212 681 . G61. 207 RIGID DATA MISMATCH The specified distance was too short or too long in rigid tapping. the rigid mode DI signal did not go on when rigid tapping is specified again. RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE (M series) Switching a plane was specified in the rigid mode.–EDIT Input and output are executed at a time in the background edition. 210 A program which is executed while being input from the floppy disk cannot call a The M198 and M099 codes were executed in subprogram. or if an error occurs tapping.1005#0 Perform correct operation. NOT ALLOWED IN BG.” and “G84 Z–xx Fxxxx . Correct the prgoram. Correct the program. No.

After termination of MDI operation. 4) Axis number was not specified for the axis–type parameter. 242 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G02. “G10 L50 . S The start point or end point is located beyond 100 turns from the point at which the involute curve begins. perform background editing.F. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 OR L50 The programmable parameter input.. J.2 An incorrect value is specified in involute interpolation. 239 682 . J.2/G03. Modify the program. 3) Axis number is too large. or R is not specified. K. Check the program for format. by another function. Correct the program. 6) An attempt was made to set bit 4 of param eter No. 233 Stop the function using the RS–232C interface. Parameter data Axis number (1 to 4) Parameter number Canceling parameter input mode Remedy Remarks G11. 3210 when they were protected by a password. S The specified start point or end point is within the base circle. DEVICE BUSY BP/S ALARM While punching was being performed with the function for controlling external I/O units . 3204 (NE9) to 0 or change the val ue of parameter No. 241 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02.. Command format: G10 L50 . Perform background editing after punch– out operation is completed. 240 BP/S ALARM Background editing was performed during MDI operation. Parameter input mode N·· R·· . The faulty Mother board is anothThe RS–232C interface has been being used er possible cause.2/G03. 5) Axis number was specified for a non–axis– type parameter. S 0 was specified in I. 232 TOO MANY HELICAL AXIS COMMANDS Three or more axes (two or more axes in the normal direction control mode) were specified as helical axes in helical interpolation.background editing was performed. or R.2 In involute interpolation. N·· P·· R·· .” had the following format errors: 1) Address N or R was not entered. K. 2) A parameter number which does not exist was entered. Modify the program. I. the end point.

7) The machine lock or Z–axis lock was specified for Z–axis movement while the tool was being changed. 4. 246 Check the program number.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. 2) Issue the tool change command only when the tool is positioned at a Z coordinate smaller than that of the machine zero point. Specify ISO. Check the values set in parameter Nos. When an encrypted program was read. 2) The tool change command was issued when the tool had a Z coordinate greater than that of the machine zero point. 251 ATC ERROR The following errors occurred when the tool change command was issued. 3) The current tool number is set to 0. 6) The tool change command and reference position return command cannot be specified at the same time. 1) Specify a value from one to ten with address T.Related diagnostic sage No. Moving the Z–axis cannot be specified together with the tool change command. tempt was made to register the program. Remedy Remarks 247 683 . 7) Do not lock the Z–axis while the tool is being changed.5) Be sure to issue the commands for canceling the tool length compensation (G49) and for canceling the canned cycle mode (G80) before specifying the tool change command. 1) An invalid T code was used to specify the tool number. 4) The tool change command was issued in tool length compensation mode (G43 or G44).3222 and 3223. 7810. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 243 OVER TOLERANCE OF END POINT The end point is not on the involute curve passing the start point and is beyond the range specified in parameter No. the punch code is EIA. 5) The tool change command was issued in the canned cycle mode (G73 to G89). The cause is indicated in diagnosis mes. (See parameter Nos. Modify the program. an at. 530 Correct the program and parameters. 250 Z AXIS WRONG COMMAND (ATC) An attempt was made to specify moving the Z– axis simultaneously with a simultaneous positioning command when the tool change operation was specified. 3) Specify a tool number in parameter No. 3222 and 3223. data No. 6) The tool change command was issued in a block in which the reference position return command (G27 to G29) was specified.) ENCODE PROGRAM NUMBER ERROR ILLEGAL CODE USED FOR OUTPUT When an encrypted program is output. but its number was beyond the protection range. 5610. 530.

D Action to be taken → The alarm can be reset by pressing the RESET key on the operator’s panel. Number 252 Contents The following errors were detected in spindle operation at tool change. D Action to be taken → Perform turret recovery. 7810. Correct the program so that a correct T code (1 to 10) is used. When A97 is 1: The tool change command was issued in the tool length compensation mode (G43. D Action to be taken → Perform turret recovery by specifying it in the recovery menu on the quick operation screen. tool length compensation (G49) and the canned cycle mode (G80) are issued before the tool change command is issued. D Action to be taken → Specify a tool number in parameter No. Correct the program so that the command for canceling cutter compensation (G40). 531. 2 to 7) It is likely that the parameter setting is incorrect or that the internal processing is improper. G44) or the cannedcycle mode (G73 to G89). When A95 is 1: The tool was changed when it was positioned at a Z–coordinate greater than that of the machine zero point. 1) Excessive error in magazine indexing 2) ATC and spindle positioning sequence error 3) LSI overflow 4) Excessive drift 5) Excessive error with the spindle moving 6) Excessive error with the spindle at a rest 7) Excessive spindle distribution Remedy The cause is indicated in diagnosis message No. When A96 is 1: The current tool number is set to 0. Contact your nearest FANUC Technical Center. 1) It is likely that the tool is too heavy or that tool weight is unbalanced excessively. When A43 is 1: An invalid T code is issued in M06 TVV. Check the diagnosis message and contact the FANUC service center nearby. Check the weight of the tool. D Action to be taken → The alarm can be reset by pressing the RESET key on the operator’s panel.F. When A98 is 1: The Z–axis was locked while the tool was beingchanged. Remarks 684 . D Action to be taken → A malfunction occurred in the internal signal processing. The G49 and G80 codes can be specified in the block in which the tool change command is specified. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Diagnostic data related to alarms concerning tool change Diagnostic data number 530 #7 #6 #5 A99 #4 A98 #3 A97 #2 A96 #1 A95 #0 A43 When A99 is 1: A99 is not for the user.

When No. 580 is 1: An excessive error occurred when the spindle is at a halt. contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby. D Action to be taken → The internal processing was found incorrect. D Action to be taken → The error occurred because the load was too great during magazine indexing. Contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby. D Action to be taken → The internal processing was found incorrect. 585 is 1: An excessive error occurred in magazine indexing. D Action to be taken → The internal processing was found incorrect. If there is no excessive condition. D Action to be taken → The internal processing was found incorrect. When No. Check on the tool weight and whether the tool weight is balanced. 583 is 1: An LSI overflow occurred. Contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby. 582 is 1: The drift amount was excessive. When No. When No. When No. Contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby. Contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. 581 is 1: An excessive error occurred when the spindle is moving. Contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby. Contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby. Message Number Contents 253 G05 IS NOT AVAILABLE Binary–input operation with a high–speed remote buffer (G05) or high–speed cycle machining (G05) was specified in the look–ahead control mode. 502 is 1: An excessive spindle distribution was detected. When No. D Action to be taken → The internal processing was found incorrect. Specify G08 P0 . ERROR CODES Diagnosis data related to alarm concerning tool change Diagnostic data number 531 #7 #6 585 #5 584 #4 583 #3 582 #2 581 #1 580 #0 502 When No. to cancel the look– ahead control mode. Remedy Remarks 685 . D Action to be taken → The internal processing was found incorrect. 584 is 1: An ATC & spindle positioning sequence error occurred.

but on the key input line on the background editing screen. a program being executed in the foreground stops.F. Pressing <RESET> is not necessary. NOTE Background editing alarms are indicated not on the ordinary alarm screen.is not necessary. attempt was made to delete it background editing. These alarms can be released by pressing the <Cancel> key. or it cannot be deleted in back. See the note below. ing cannot be selected in background Pressing <RESET> The program selected in foreground editing editing. 686 . Remedy Remarks The program selected in foreground edit. Never use the <RESET> key to cancel alarms in background editing.See the note below. was also selected in background editing. 140 BP/S alarm Correct the program. or an ground editing. Otherwise. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 (2) Background editing (BP/S alarm) Message Number Contents ??? BP/S alarm The BP/S alarms are issued with the same numbers (070 to 074 and other numbers) as those for the P/S alarms which are issued in normal program editing.

when delivered. ERROR CODES (3) Alarms related to the absolute pulse coder (APC) Message Number Contents 300 APC alarm: nth–axis origin return Motor reference position return is required for n axis. Remedy Remarks n–axis APC missing pulse error 306 307 308 Check the battery. axis is installed. If the alarm is still on. APC ALARM: n AXIS ZRN IMPOSSIBL 309 687 . cable or servo interface module may be faulty. contact the nearest FANUC Technical Center. 301 APC alarm: nth–axis communication n–axis APC communication error 302 APC alarm: nth–axis over time n–axis APC time–out error 303 APC alarm: nth–axis framing n–axis APC framing error 304 APC alarm: nth–axis parity n–axis APC parity error 305 APC alarm: nth–axis pulse error The pulse coder. Turn the power off. If an alarm is issued for the fourth axis. and perform reference position reposition return without rotating the motor turn. Check whether the servo motor cable is APC alarm: nth–axis battery low 2 connected. This alarm occurs in a case such as when a motor signal cable is disconnected. then turn the power off. APC alarm: nth–axis battery voltage 0 Rotate the motor through one or more turns. This alarm also ocAlso check whether the servo motor curs when the cable The voltage of the n–axis APC battery has cable is connected. then turn it on again. contact the nearest FANUC Technical Center. If an alarm is issued for Replace the pulse coder battery. Perform motor reference position return for the specified axis. through one or more turns. power–off). The n axis APC battery voltage reached the If alarm No. battery replacement level (including a case of take action for alarm No. of the Z–axis motor once dropped to the level at which data cannot has been removed be held. 307. check that the motor for the additional axis is installed. then on An attempt was made to perform reference again.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. cable or servo interface module may be faulty. check that the motor The n axis APC battery voltage reaches the for the additional battery replacement level. If the alarm is still on. 307 occurs simultaneously. then turn it on again. Turn the power off. The pulse coder. APC alarm: nth–axis battery low 1 the additional axis.

361 n AXIS : ABNORMAL PHASE DATA (INT) A phase data error occurred in the built–in pulse coder. 367 n AXIS : COUNT MISS (INT) A count error occurred in the built–in pulse coder. When PHA is 1: Error in the serial pulse coder or the feedback cable 688 . 369 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. 362 n AXIS : ABNORMAL REV. consult our. 365 n AXIS : BROKEN LED (INT) An LED error occurred in the built–in pulse coder. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 (4) Alarms related to the serial pulse coder (SPC) No.F. service department. 366 n AXIS : PULSE MISS (INT) A pulse error occurred in the built–in pulse coder. When BLA is 1: The voltage of the battery is too low. 368 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ERROR (INT) Communication data from the built–in pulse coder cannot be received. When power off then on and the error occures again. Message Description 360 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CHECKSUM (INT) A checksum error occurred in the built–in pulse coder. 363 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CLOCK (INT) A clock error occurred in the built–in pulse coder. Remedy Diagnostic data concerning alarms related to the serial pulse coder Diagnostic data number 202 #7 #6 CSA #5 BLA #4 PHA #3 RCA #2 BZA #1 CKA #0 SPH When CSA is 1: Error of the serial pulse coder D Action to be taken → Replace the pulse coder. D Action to be taken → Replace the pulse coder battery for the servo motor. ERROR (INT) A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communication data being received from the built–in pulse coder. 364 n AXIS : SOFT PHASE ALARM (INT) The digital servo software detected invalid data in the built–in pulse coder.DATA (INT) A rotation speed count error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.

feedback cable. Contact your nearest FANUC Technical Center. 689 . When CRC is 1: The pulse coder. check NC parameters to see if any parameter modification has been made inappropriately. Turn the power off. feedback cable. An invalid servo parameter alarm (No. also check that the additional–axis motor is mounted. After turning the power off. no alarm has occurred for that bit. Contact your nearest FANUC Technical Center. no alarm has occurred for that bit. then turn it on again. When CKA is 1: Serial pulse coder error D Action to be taken → The pulse coder needs to be replaced with a new one.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. Diagnostic data number 203 #7 DTE #6 CRC #5 STB #4 PRM #3 #2 #1 #0 When DTE is 1: Transmission error in the serial pulse coder. When RCA is 1: Serial pulse coder error D Action to be taken → Replace the pulse coder. D Action to be taken → By selecting [QUICK]Screen. When PRM is 1: An invalid parameter alarm occurred. then on again. check whether the additional axis motor has been mounted. When an additional axis is used. or feedback When STB is 1: reception circuit is abnormal. When any of the above bits is 0. D Action to be taken → Check that the cable is connected to the motor properly. This alarm also occurs if the Z–axis motor or motor cable is disconnected at delivery of the machine. For an additional axis. or NC axis board. When BZA is 1: Power was supplied to the serial pulse coder for the first time. This alarm also occurs when the Z–axis motor or the cable of the motor is removed when the machine is delivered. then [3:PARAMETER]. This alarm also occurs when the cable is removed at installation of an additional axis. ERROR CODES D Action to be taken → Replace the cable or pulse coder. perform motor reference position return for the axis for which the alarm occurred. When SPH is 1: Error in the serial pulse coder or feedback cable D Action to be taken → The cable or pulse coder needs to be replaced with a new one. 417) is also indicated. [32:MAINTENANCE/SETTING]. When diagnostic data bit is 0. D Action to be taken → Replace the pulse coder. This alarm also occurs if the cable is disconnected at installation of an additional axis. or the alarm has already been reset.

404 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS VRDY ON Although the n–axis ready signal (MCON) went off. Z. [32:MAINTENANCE/SETTING]. workpiece.F. FAULT) Position control system error. or an additional axis). By selecting [QUICK]Screen. D Check that no chips have collected around the moving axis. 403 SERVO ALARM: CARD/SOFT MISMATCH The combination of the axis control card and servo software is incorrect. Alternatively. (Reference position return error) 409 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS TORQUE ALM An abnormal load was detected. check NC parameters to see if any parameter modification has been made inappropriately. See the troubleshooting procedure. when the power is turned on. and so forth has occurred because of an error such as a program error. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 (5) Sevo alarm Message Number Contents 401 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS VRDY OFF The servo amplifier ready signal (DRDY) for the n–axis went off. Y. There is a possibility that reference position return is not performed correctly due to an NC internal error or servo system error. the servo amplifier ready signal (DRDY) does not go off. The servo software or monitor software is not installed in flash memory. (V ready on) 405 SERVO ALARM: (ZERO POINT RETURN Perform motor reference position return operation. jig. Remedy Remarks 690 . 402 SERVO ALARM: SV CARD NOT EXIST The axis control card is not provided. Contact the FANUC technical center useing your locality. D Check that the machine is not operating under conditions or a load that exceeds the capacity of the machine D Check whether collision with the tool. the DRDY is on although the MCON is off (n: X. then [3:PARAMETER].

Z. (Excess travel). 2.Check the weight of the load to be placed Related parameters: on the table. or 4. 2024 (the number of position feedback pulses per motor rotation) is set to an incorrect value. Y. No. 3. 1820 Related parameters: Nos. Y. 2024. or an additional axis). 1829. 2085 (flexible gear feed rate) are not specified. or an additional axis). Y. (Excess error) than 100 kg”. 1023. “permissible mass of workpiece” to “more Z. (LSI overflow) The parameter is probably set incorrectly. 3) Parameter No. 6) Parameter No. Alternatively. The maximum load capacity No. such as 0 or less. 2020 (type of motor) is set to a value which is out of range. [32:MAINTENANCE/SETTING]. discrete integers are specified. 5) Parameters No. 415 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – EXCESS SHIFT An attempt was made to specify a speed exceeding 511875 detection units/sec for the n– axis (n: X. 2000 to 2098 Related parameter: No. 2023 (the number of speed feedback pulses per motor rotation) is set to an incorrect value. 2020. 417 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – PARAMETER By selecting [QUICK]Screen. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 410 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – EXCESS ER. Related parameters: No. Z. or an inappropriately. 111 or –111. No. No. No. 2084. Y. CMR is probably set incorrectly. 1800 to 1852. (Digital servo system error) 1) Parameter No. No. 2023. No. 1832 ROR of the table is 200 kg. Z. 2) Parameter No. 1828 Remedy Remarks 411 691 . change the setting of the setting when the machine stopped (n: X. Nos. 4) Parameter No. then [3:PARAMEINCORRECT TER]. Y. check NC parameters to see if any This alarm is issued when the parameters are parameter modification has been made set as follows for the n–axis (n: X. or an additional axis). or an additional axis). 2085 Related parameter: No. No. such as 0 or less. (Excess error) 413 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS – LSI OVERFLOW The value of the n–axis error register exceeded ± 231 (n: X. 2022 (direction of the motor rotation) is not set to a correct value. 1023 (servo axis number) is not set to 1. additional axis).B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. 2084 and No. If the load weights Position deviation along the n–axis exceeded 100 kg or more. 2022. Z. SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – EXCESS ERROR Position deviation along the n–axis exceeded the setting during machine operation (n: X.

2078. If the alarm is still activated. then turn it on again.F. MOTOR OVERHEAT A servo motor overheat occurred. 432 n AXIS : CNV. OVERLOAD PSM: Overheat occurred. 433 n AXIS : CNV. No. LOW VOLT DC LINK SVM: The DC link voltage has dropped. Remedy Remarks 430 692 . 438 n AXIS : INV. 434 n AXIS : INV. OVERCURRENT POWER PSM: Overcurrent flowed into the input circuit. 435 n AXIS : INV. [32:MAIN.parameter modification has been made cessive during dual position feedback. Turn the power off. LOW VOLT CONTROL SVM: The control power supply voltage has dropped. LOW VOLT DC LINK PSM: The DC link voltage has dropped. The difference between the errors in the semi– TER]. LOW VOLT CONTROL PSM: Phase missing occurred in the input voltage. contact the nearest FANUC Terminal Center. check NC parameters to see if any closed loop and closed loop has become ex.No. ABNORMAL CURRENT SVM: The motor current is too high. 2078 and 2079. Check inappropriately. 2079. SERVO ALARM: n AXIS EXCESS ER (D) n AXIS : SV. 431 n AXIS : CNV. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 421 By selecting [QUICK]Screen.Related parameters: TENANCE/SETTING]. 437 n AXIS : CNV. the values of the dual position conversion coefficients in parameters No. then [3:PARAME. 436 n AXIS : SOFTTHERMAL (OVC) The digital servo software detected the soft thermal state (OVC).

type. 442 n AXIS : CNV. 445 n AXIS : SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM The digital servo software detected a broken wire in the pulse coder. 2013) is incorrect. OVERVOLT POWER PSM: The DC link voltage is too high. If the alarm persists even after the power is turned off then back on. Remedy Remarks 456 – 693 . contact the The monitor detected a signal error in the a nearest FANUC Terminal Center. CHARGE FAILURE PSM: The spare discharge circuit of the DC link is abnormal. 2004. 446 n AXIS : HARD DISCONNECT ALARM A broken wire in the built–in pulse coder was detected by hardware. different current control interval settings are made. IPM ALARM SVM: IPM (intelligent power module) detected an alarm. 443 n AXIS : CNV. and bit 0 of No. 441 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CURRENT OFFSET The digital servo software detected an abnormality in the motor current detection circuit. the fifth axis and sixth axis. and so on).B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. Turn off the power then back on. contact FANUC Technical Center. 449 n AXIS : INV. the first axis and second axis. then turn it on again. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 439 n AXIS : CNV. COOLING FAN FAILURE SVM: The internal stirring fan failed. n AXIS : SPC SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM ILLEGAL CURRENT LOOP The current control interval setting (No. bit 0 of No. and so on for providing the set current control interval are not met. 2003. If the alarm is still activated. The required number of slaves. 1023) in this order (for example. 453 Turn the power off. COOLING FAN FAILURE PSM: The internal stirring fan failed. pulse coder for the n axis. 444 n AXIS : INV. connection method. Possible problems are as follows: – For two servo axes having successive odd and even servo axis numbers (set in parameter No.

nearest FANUC Terminal Center. 460 n AXIS : FSSB DISCONNECT FSSB communication was disconnected suddenly. 461 n AXIS : ILLEGAL AMP INTERFACE The axes of the 2–axis amplifier were assigned to the fast type interface. 2) The power to the amplifier was turned off suddenly. ILLEGAL HI HRV (250US) CURRENT LOOP ERROR The current control interval setting and the actual current control interval do not match. then turn it on again. The possible causes are as follows: 1) The FSSB communication cable was disconnected or broken. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 457 Turn the power off. the servo system could not receive correct data. 459 HI HRV SETTING ERROR When two servo axes have successive odd and even servo axis numbers (set in parameter No. Check the servo amplifier specifications. 463 n AXIS : SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED Because of an FSSB communication error. contact the When the current control interval was 250 us. 464 n AXIS : WRITE ID DATA FAILED An attempt was made to write maintenance information on the amplifier maintenance screen. 1023) in this order (for example.F. 3) A low–voltage alarm was issued by the amplifier. Remedy Remarks 458 694 . the fifth axis and sixth axis. high–speed HRV control can be performed for the servo amplifier of one axis but cannot be performed for the servo amplifier of the other axis. a setting that uses high–speed HRV was made. 462 n AXIS : SEND CNC DATA FAILED Because of an FSSB communication error. the first axis and second axis. If the alarm is still activated. and so on). a slave could not receive correct data. but it failed.

Remedy Remarks 466 471 695 . the positional deviation in stopped state exceeded the default. Alternatively. n AXIS:SPC SOFT DISCONNECT (MNT) n AXIS:ILLEGAL RAM (MNT) The monitor detected a signal error in the a pulse coder. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 465 Turn the power off. 467 n AXIS : ILLEGAL SETTING OF AXIS The servo function for the following has not been enabled when an axis occupying a single DSP (corresponding to two ordinary axes) is specified on the axis setting screen.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. n AXIS : READ ID DATA FAILED n AXIS : MOTOR/AMP COMBINATION The maximum current rating for the amplifier does not match that for the motor. but high–speed HRV cannot be used for the amplifier of that axis. 474 n AXIS:EXCESS ERROR (STOP:MNT) When the safety door was open. Replace the sists even after the power is turned off axis control card. 475 n AXIS:EXCESS ERROR (MOVE:MNT) When the safety door was open. take noise prevention measures for the feedback cable. contact FANUC Technical Center. then back on. then turn it on again. If the alarm is still activated. 473 n AXIS:SOFT PHASE ALARM(INT/MNT) The monitor detected a data missing error in the velocity feedback signal for the n axis. 2004 = 1) 468 HI HRV SETTING ERROR(AMP) Use of high–speed HRV is specified for a controlled axis. the positional deviation during movement exceeded the default. contact the At power–up. Replace the a pulse coder. amplifier initial ID information nearest FANUC Terminal Center. If the alarm perA monitor RAM error occurred. could not be read. Replace the a pulse coder. High–speed current loop (bit 0 of parameter No. 470 Turn off the power (turn off the circuit breaker) then back on.

the machine position is not within the safety area. The axis number is set automatically. contact the When the safety door was open. 481 n AXIS:SAFETY PARAM ERROR (MNT) A safety parameter error occurred.(MNT) When the safety door is open. 482 n AXIS:AXIS NUMBER NOT SET (MNT) No axis number is set for the servo amplifier. additional axes = 700 deg/ min). then turn it on again. a specified nearest FANUC Terminal Center. then turn off the power (also turn off the circuit breaker). Remedy Remarks 477 696 . 480 n AXIS:ILLEGAL SAFETY MODE (MNT) Although the release of the door lock was not specified. reset the bit to 0. D The check result of the monitor safety function and the check result of the servo or CNC safety function did not match. D The monitor safety function was not executed. n AXIS:ILLEGAL SPEED CMD. D An abnormality occurred during the monitor CPU test. feedrate exceeded the safety feedrate (X. If the alarm is still activated. The alarm may be issued as a result of a modification to the servo amplifier configuration. Y. Z = 2000 mm/min. 479 ILLEGAL SAFETY DI (MNT) There is an inconsistency in safety input signals monitored by two programs. 483 MONITOR SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR The monitor safety function became abnormal.F. 478 n AXIS:ILLEGAL AXIS DATA (MNT) An abnormality occurred during axis data transfer. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 476 Turn the power off. the door lock was released. perform axis number setting operation for the servo amplifier (set bit 4 of parameter No. 2212 for the axis in question to 1. (MNT) n AXIS:ILLEGAL MACHINE POS. In such a case. Turn off the power (and also turn off the circuit breaker).

D An abnormality occurred during the servo RAM check. n AXIS:SERVO SAFETY FUNCTION ERR D The servo safety function was not executed. 491 LOCAL BUS TEST ERROR An abnormality occurred during the local bus test. 490 CNC SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR The CNC safety function became abnormal. D An abnormality occurred during the servo CPU test. 487 ILLEGAL SAFETY MODE (CNC) Although the release of the door lock was not specified. D The check result of the servo safety function and the check result of the monitor safety function did not match. D An abnormality occurred during the CNC RAM check. 697 . If the alarm is still activated. D An abnormality occurred during the CPU test of the CPU. contact the The servo safety function became abnormal. then turn it on again. D The MCC interruption test was not performed when the CNC was turned on.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. safety function was not Remedy Remarks D The check result of the CNC safety function and the check result of the monitor or spindle safety function did not match. 488 SAFE TEST OVER TIME MCC interruption test could not be executed normally. the door lock was released. 489 SAFETY PARAM ERROR (CNC) A safety parameter error occurred. D The CNC executed. 486 ILLEGAL SAFETY DI (CNC) There is an inconsistency in safety input signals monitored by two programs. The mother board may be faulty. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 484 Turn the power off. nearest FANUC Terminal Center.

(CNC) When the safety door was open. 498 n AXIS:AXIS NUMBER NOT SET (CNC) No axis number is set for the servo amplifier. test. 495 n AXIS:ILLEGAL MACHINE POS.F. 497 n AXIS:SAFETY PARAM TRANS ERROR An abnormality occurred during safety parameter transfer. Turn off the power (and also turn off the circuit breaker). contact the An abnormality occurred during the F–BUS nearest FANUC Terminal Center. 496 n AXIS:ILLEGAL AXIS DATA (CNC) An abnormality occurred during axis data transfer. The alarm may be issued as a result of a modification to the servo amplifier configuration. reset the bit to 0. additional axes = 700 deg/ min). perform axis number setting operation for the servo amplifier (set bit 4 of parameter No. a specified feedrate exceeded the safety feedrate (X. Z = 2000 mm/min. Y. In such a case. Remedy Remarks 494 698 . 2212 for the axis in question to 1.(CNC) When the safety door is open. The axis number is set automatically. then turn off the power (also turn off the circuit breaker). The mother board or option board may be faulty. F–BUS TEST ERROR n AXIS:ILLEGAL SPEED CMD. If the alarm is still activated. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 492 Turn the power off. then turn it on again. the machine position is not within the safety area.

200 (servo alarm No. #2 (DCA) : A regenerative discharge circuit alarm is being generated in servo amp. 400 is being generated): #7 (ALD) 0 : Motor overheating 1 : Amplifier overheating When FBAL equal 1 in diagnostic data No. 416 is being generated): ALD 1 1 0 #7 204 #6 OFS #5 MCC EXP 0 1 0 #4 LDA Alarm details Built–in pulse coder disconnection (hardware) Separately installed pulse coder disconnection (hardware) Pulse coder is not connected due to software. #7 ALD #6 #5 #4 EXP #3 #2 #1 #0 201 When OVL equal 1 in diagnostic data No. The LED indicates that serial pulse coder C is defective A feedback pulse error has occured because the feedback cable is defective. 201 shows the details) #6 (LV) : A low voltage alarm is being generated in servo amp. #3 (HVA) : An overvoltage alarm is being generated in servo amp. #5 (OVC) : A overcurrent alarm is being generated inside of digital servo. A magnetic contactor contact in the servo amplifier has welded.200 (servo alarm No. #1 (FBA) : A disconnection alarm is being generated. No. #4 (HCA) : An abnormal current alarm is being generated in servo amp.204) as shown below. #6 LV #5 OVC #4 HCA #3 HVA #2 DCA #1 FBA #0 OFA 200 #7 (OVL) : An overload alarm is being generated. (No. ERROR CODES D Details of servo alarm #7 OVL The details of servo alarm are displayed in the diagnosis display (No. #3 PMS #2 #1 #0 #6 (OFS) #5 (MCC) #4 (LDA) #3 (PMS) : : : : A current conversion error has occured in the digital servo. #0 (OFA) : An overflow alarm is being generated inside of digital servo. 201 and No. 200.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. 699 .

Related parameters: Nos. the values set in NC paaxis was exceeded. Hardware OT was exceeded at the negative side of the n–axis. OVER TRAVEL : +n Stroke limit I at the negative side of the n–axis was exceeded. 1323. and grounding of the motor winding. DC LINK OVER CURRENT (1) Check the inter–phase short–circuit and grounding of the power line. 1320. 1327 Remedy Remarks 501 507 510 (7) Servo alarms Message Number Contents 600 n AXIS: INV. 1326. signal lines. OVER TRAVEL : +n OVER TRAVEL: +n The pre–travel stroke check detected that a block end point is within the inhibited stroke area on the positive side of the N axis. 503 OVER TRAVEL : –n Stroke limit II was exceeded at the negative side of the n–axis. Remedy Remarks The DC link current of the servo amplifier is too (2) Check the inter–phase short–circuit high. “DETAILS OF OPERATIONS. Correct the program. rameter Nos. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 (6) Over–travel alarms Message Number Contents 500 See “Releasing overtravel (OT)” in Part III.” The stroke limit I at the positive side of the n– In automatic turret recovery and turret adjustment mode. 1322. set bit 5 of NC parameter No. 1326 and 1327 are used as OVER TRAVEL : –n the stroke limit values.Related parameter: al axis.” and check the side of the n–axis. When the hard OT is not OVER TRAVEL : –n used. 700 . “DETAILS OF OPERATIONS. 511 OVER TRAVEL: –n The pre–travel stroke check detected that a block end point is within the inhibited stroke area on the negative side of the N axis. 3004 to 1. Alternatively. 1321.F. see the description Bit 5 of No. (3) Replace the servo amplifier. 1310. 502 OVER TRAVEL : +n Stroke limit II at the positive side of the n–axis was exceeded. 506 Check the operating area of the addition. 1300. 3004 Hardware OT was exceeded at the positive of the additional axis control in III.

Remedy Remarks (1) Check the motor use condition. (1) Replace the communication cable. (1) Check the motor use condition. (1) Replace the fan. (1) Replace the external cooling fan. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 601 n AXIS: INV. 606 n AXIS: CNV. spindle speed fluctuation. 704 For heavy cutting. (1) Check the power supply voltage (8) Overheat alarms Message Number Contents 700 OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT The CNC overheats. (2) Check the ambient temperature of the amplifier. (3) Check the chiller unit. SINGLE PHASE FAILURE Phase missing occurred in the input power supply. (2) Check the ambient temperature of the amplifier. 701 OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR The fan motor of the CNC is stopped. (4) Replace the servo amplifier. IPM ALARM(OH) The intelligent power module (IPM) of the servo amplifier detected an overheat alarm. OVERHEAT The servo amplifier is overheated. COMMUNICATION ERROR Communication between the servo amplifier and power supply is abnormal. Remedy Remarks 701 . (2) Replace the servo amplifier.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. and replace it. (3) Check the chiller unit. (4) Replace the servo amplifier. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE The heat sink cooling fan of the servo amplifier is faulty. 603 n AXIS: INV. The The spindle overheated during detection of spindle amplifier can also be considered to be faulty. ease the cutting conditions. 602 n AXIS: INV. (2) Replace the servo amplifier. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE The external heat sink cooling fan of the power supply is faulty. Check whether the tool is dull. OVERHEAT: SPINDLE Check the CNC fan motor located on the rear side of the LCD. 604 n AXIS: AMP. 607 n AXIS: CNV.

[32:MAINTE. then check whether the cables connected to the spindle control unit are attached properly and whether the setting pins of the spindle control unit are set correctly. After checking. 3) The spindle amplifier printed circuit board is faulty. If the alarm is still issued after the power (circuit breaker) is turned on and off. 2) The power to the NC was turned on when an alarm other than SU–02 or AL–24 was indicated on the LED indicator of the spindle amplifier. a position TER]. a position error during rigid tapping exceeded a predetermined value. 3) Others (such as incorrect hardware combination) For details. then [3:PARAME. then check whether the cables connected to the spindle control unit are attached properly and whether the setting pins of the spindle control unit are set correctly. The possible causes of the error are as follows: 1) The optical fiber cable is connected poorly. turn on the power again to check whether the alarm is released. 749 S–SPINDLE LSI ERROR A serial communication error occurred while system activation was in progress after power– on. or broken. 2) The mother board is faulty. 409. to make an NC parameter check error during rigid tapping exceeded a predeter. If the alarm is still issued after the power (circuit breaker) is turned on and off.Related parameters: NANCE/SETTING]. Turn off the power (turn off the circuit breaker).F.3700 to 4999 While spindle rotation was stopped. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 (9) Spindle alarms Message Number Contents 740 Select [QUICK]Screen. or the power to the spindle amplifier is off. disconnected. 750 SPINDLE SERIAL LINK START FAULT When a system with a serial spindle is turned on. or spindle control mode (The alarm is raised when the spindle control unit does not respond normally to the change command issued by the NC. 752 FIRST SPINDLE MODE CHANGE FAULT The following are not yet completed under control of the serial spindle: D Spindle positioning D Changing the mode to rigid tapping mode. Remedy Remarks 741 702 . been made inappropriately. contact the FANUC technical center serving your locality. this alarm is issued if the spindle amplifier cannot be activated normally. contact the FANUC technical center serving your locality. tool change mode.) Turn off the power (turn off the circuit breaker). turn on the power again to check whether the alarm is released. The main possible causes of this problem are as follows: 1) The optical fiber cable is connected poorly. 742 RIGID TAP ALARM: LSI OVERFLOW An LSI overflow occurred on the spindle side during rigid tapping. After checking.to see if any parameter modification has mined limit. RIGID TAP ALARM: EXCESS ERROR RIGID TAP ALARM: EXCESS ERROR While the spindle was rotating. see internal diagnostic data No.

If the alarm still exists after the power is turned off then on. contact the In the spindle. When SHE = 1:An error was detected in the serial communication module in the NC. Check whether the tool is Nos. ease the cutting Related parameters: conditions. then [3:PARAMETER]. 4341. check NC parameters to see if any parameter modification has been made inappropriately. the safety function became ab. 703 . SPINDLE–1 ABNORMAL TORQUE ALM Turn the power off. the speed determined by the CNC software and the speed determined by the spindle software did not match. 4247. 4248. make settings on the spindle amplifier side properly. By selecting [QUICK]Screen. Abnormal spindle motor load has been de. the spindle motor speed exceeded 200 rpm. D An abnormality occurred during safety parameter transfer. If the alarm is still activated. then turn it on again. Alternatively. no alarm is being raised. SPINDLE–1 SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR BUS ERROR In the spindle. The alarm may be issued as a result of a modification to the spindle amplifier configuration. D The spindle safety function was not executed. normal. 4249. [32:MAINtected. When all bits are 0. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 754 In case of heavy cutting. D Action to be taken → See the list of spindle amplifier alarms. D Action to be taken → Turn the power off then on. 4250.dull. Remedy Remarks 755 756 Details of diagnostic data Diagnostic data number 409 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 SPE #2 S2E #1 S1E #0 SHE When SPE = 1: The serial spindle parameter does not satisfy the spindle amplifier activation condition. In such a case. an abnormality was detected on the spindle. it is necessary to replace the mother board. the spindle amplifier connection status and the spindle amplifier hardware setting do not match. When S1E = 1: In spindle activation.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. 757 L–BUS ERROR When the safety door was open. TENANCE/SETTING]. D Action to be taken → Check the parameters related to spindle control.nearest FANUC Terminal Center.

replace the SRAM module or mother board.When contacting the FANUC technical center. A RAM parity error occurred in the RAM mod. replace the system alarm screen. SRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0) Turn off the circuit breaker. Clear the memory. 920 SERVO ALARM (1–4 AXIS) Servo alarm. er–off button on the operator’s panel cannot be used. the powRe–install the indicated software. est FANUC Technical Center. If the alarm is still raised. report all the data displayed on the ule for part program storage (byte 0 to 1). SRAM module or mother board.F. Remedy Remarks 910 911 704 . Replace the axis control card. contact the nearROM parity error. 912 to 919 DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0) DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 1) DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 2) DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 3) DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 4) DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 5) DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 6) DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 7) RAM parity error in the DRAM module (BYTE 0 to 7) Replace the DRAM module. Alternatively. Clear the memory. ROM PARITY SRAM PARITY : (BYTE 1) A RAM parity error occurred in the RAM module for part program storage (byte 0 to 1). When a system alarm is issued. or a RAM parity error occurred in the axis control card. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 (10) System alarms Message Number Contents 900 Turn the power off. A watchdog alarm condition occurred. Alternatively. then turn it on again.

The motherboard may be faulty. system alarm screen. The mother board or CPU card may be faulty. The motherboard may be faulty. er–off button on the operator’s panel canReplace the axis control card. Remedy Remarks 926 930 705 . not be used. 976 L–BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the local bus. Turn off the circuit breaker. Replace the SRAM module.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. 950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM PCxxx YYYYYYYYYYYYYY An error occurred in the PMC. curred. contact the nearServo alarm. Replace the axis control card. 975 BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the motherboard. report all the data displayed on the FSSB alarm. For details.est FANUC Technical Center. The motherboard may be faulty. The motherboard or option board may be faulty. or a RAM parity error occurred in the When a system alarm is issued. the powaxis control card. 974 F–BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the FANUC bus. see the list of PMC alarms. FSSB ALARM When contacting the FANUC technical center. 972 NMI OCCURRED IN OTHER MODULE A NMI was generated on a board other than the mother board. then turn it on again. 973 NON MASK INTERRUPT An NMI whose cause is unknown occurred. A watchdog alarm condition oc. 951 PMC WATCH DOG ALARM Error occured in the PMC (Watch dog alarm). An option board may be faulty. If the alarm is still raised. 935 SRAM ECC ERROR An error occurred in RAM for part program storage. SERVO ALARM (5–8 AXIS) CPU INTERRUPT CPU error (abnormal interrupt). ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 921 Turn the power off.

and the machine alarm cannot be reset. Check whether the emergency stop button is pressed. investigate the reason. then release the button. Releasing the emergency stop button automatically eliminates the machine alarm. an error occurred in the external equipment. check whether an alarm is raised while the external equipment is connected. There is something wrong in a limit switch to Replace the limit switch for splash guard detect whether the automatic door is open. An alarm related to the power failure backup D The connector panel or the I/O module on the connector panel is faulty. 1004 DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SW IS DEFECTIVE Replace the defective limit switch and make necessary adjustment.) 1001 FUSE IS BLOWN A fuse on the connector panel printed circuit board has blown. During use of the external emergency stop signal for the external interface. X5. If the alarm cannot be eliminated after the connection status is checked when no external equipment is connected. [32:MAINTENANCE/SETTING]Screen. switch is replaced. module was detected. it is likely that the internal circuit is defective. nal indicating an open door state are both on. and the emergency stop signal input was off. After checking the circuit. When no error occurs in the external equipment.Technicall Center nearby. The power failure backup module is not installed. door interlock and adjust it. Contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby. contact the nearest FANUC technical center. Remedy Remarks Using the control unit in the external equipment.INTERFACE.6: For checking open state X5. [5:EXT. check the status of external equipment connection. If the emergency stop button was not pressed. FUNCTIONS. replace the fuses. contact the FANUC A signal indicating a closed door state and sig. D Parameter setting error (The I/O module on the connector panel is disabled. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 (11) Machine alarms Message Number Contents 1000 POWER FAILURE BACKUP MODULE ALM The possible causes are as follows: D The power failure backup module is faulty. but is enabled by the parameter. Select [QUICK]Screen. D The cable for connecting the power failure backup module is connected incorrectly or broken. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL ON The emergency stop signal input from external eqipment was off.F.7: For checking closed state 706 . There is something wrong in a limit switch of If the alarm occurs again after the limit splash guard door interlock. 1003 EMERGENCY STOP The emergency stop button was pressed. 1002 EXT. If the emergency stop button is pressed. Eliminating the alarm raised in the external equipment automatically eliminates the machine alarm. then EXTERNAL EMG STOP.

(Normally the door is opened/ T20=4000 closed in 2 to 3. even when no tool is mounted on the spindle) 1006 SPINDLE HAS NO TOOL The tool arbor fell free. This may be caused by incorrect setting of the door open/close operation time or misadjustment of the door open/close mechanism (the air pressure. A spindle load value greater than or equal to the rated value cannot be detected during drilling. Rotate the spindle with a tool mounted on X6. The The tool damage detection function (AI moni.1: For checking the spindle.). Excessive load may be applied during machining. the operation time from the specification of door open/close operation until operation is completed exceeds the setting. Check whether the automatic door can Standard timer be opened/closed completely within four value seconds. The spindle can be rotated only while a tool is mounted. AUTO DOOR TOTAL TIME OVER The automatic door open/close mechanism is abnormal. both of the switch contacts are opened. the <RESET> key. When the automatic door open/ close option is provided. TCZ=X6. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 1005 PROGRAM ERROR (NO TOOL) The spindle rotation command was issued while no tool is mounted on the spindle. This alarm can be released by pressing the <RESET> key. This alarm is generated when: The current spindle load exceeds a specified damage level value during drilling. area When the tool change area detection switch is TCZ 0 1 activated by the dog in the tool change area. 1008 1009 TCZ LIMIT SW IS DEFECTIVE Check the operation of the tool change area detection switch by moving lits lever. The tool change area detection switch may be The switch status is as follows under the defective. tool clamping Remedy Remarks If no tool is attached to the spindle. and the proximity switch). attach a tool to the spindle. normal status: The tool change area has been detected durOut of the ing an operation other than tool change or turIn the tool tool exchange exchange ret recovery.0 TOOL BREAKAGE WAS DETECTED Replace or check the cutter. 1010 707 . The rigid tapping (M29) was performed during This alarm can be released by pressing spindle positioning (M19).5 seconds.) Check the timer setting in a PMC parameter. (If the system settings are such that no alarm is issued. contact the FANUC technical center. Correct the program.alarm can be reset using the reset key on tor function) detected a failure.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. the air damper of the flow control valve. the operator’s panel. When tool damage is detected. (The switch contacts has area opened. If the alarm is still issued after the above items are checked. 1007 PROGRAM ERROR (M19) Spindle positioning cannot be specified during rigid tapping. an automatic return to the Z–axis reference point occurs. allowing the tool to come off momentarily. or check the spindle load damage level value. Check the machining conditions.

ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 1011 ALL TOOL IN SAME GROUP ARE USED Replace the tools. Check the command. The position switch is used to monitor the interference area. IN THE TOOL CHANGE AREA The Z–axis stopped in the tool change area (+area). release the key. Alternatively. 1016 MAIN CONTACTOR IS WELDING Although the emergency stop state of the ROBODRILL has been cancelled. K2#6 The NC parameters for specifying a pro. 1014 APC ALARM Refer to the operation manual for the An alarm exclusive Kawata Tech pallet changer. for Kawata Tech palAn alarm related to the Kawata Tech pallet let changer. The spindle key on the operator’s panel is ON The operator’s panel is considered to be continuously for 5 seconds or more. Perform turret recovery operation.F. If the bit can be set to 1 and 0 by pressing and releasing the emergency stop button. 6915. faulty. 6914. 6955 Press and release the emergency stop button. No. TOOL CHANGE INHIBIT AREA A tool exchange command was issued when the table was in an area where it might interfere with the pallet changer cables. 708 . No. changer occurred. replace the main contactor.K2#7 hibition area are as follows: X–axis: No. No. 6935. respectively. No. Remedy Remarks 1012 1015 If you are holding down the spindle key. Clear the tool information on the tool life management screen The tool life management function detected under the quick operation screen.4 is set to 1 and 0. 1013 AI TOOL MONITOR DATA ERROR The programmed data rewrite function (AI tool monitor function) detected an out–of–range or invalid command error. 1017 SPINDLE KEY IS DEFECTIVE Refer to the operation manual for the Keep relay Kawata Tech pallet changer. 6954 Y–axis: No. the main contactor fails to turn on despite the lapse of a preset interval. that the operating life of all tools in the same group expired. the main contactor fails to turn off even though the ROBODRILL has entered the emergency stop state. while checking whether X8. 6934.

The cables for the tool exchange area detec.” A relay for the safety circuit is abnormal.3 = 1 1021 “KA5 RELAY IS DEFECTIVE.3 = 0. the tool has been Out of the detected as being outside the tool change In the tool tool exchange exchange area. the tool change area dog TCZ 0 1 is worn. value Check the timer setting in a PMC parame. Alternatively. 1019 “SPINDLE IS DEFECTIVE” In the emergency stop state (with the spindle stopped). switch operate normally. the dog or parameter setting may D Check that the tool exchange area be incorrect. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 1018 TCZ SWITCH IS WELDING Related parameters: The tool exchange area detection switch may D Check the parameter values for the No.4) are in the following state.0 D The TCZ switch has been closed (indicating that the tool is outside the tool change area) while the position switch is outside D Make sure that the two contacts of the the specified range. or Y0.0 = 1 and X7. The CNC or spindle is considered to be Standard timer faulty. contact the FANUC technical center serving your locality.) TCZ=X6.D Check the cables.0 = 0 and X7.6) and servo ready relay monitor (X7. in the turret recovery mode.6958 Alternatively. No. ignore this alarm. area area (The tool change area detection switch have closed. When the servo contactor control (Y0.4 = 1 Contact the FANUC technical center.4 = 0. the spindle rotated at a speed higher than the specified value. turn on the power again.” A relay for the safety circuit is abnormal. the spindle stop state could not be detected. position switch with the data sheet. After turning the circuit breaker off then on. an alarm is issued 200 ms later: Y0.6938 have malfunctioned. incorrectly. Or. When the servo ready (Y0.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. receive the inputs listed below. If the alarm is still issued. even though was still within the area. or Y0.T58 = 4000 ter. tool exchange area detection switch work at 15 " 2 mm on the Z–axis. Remedy Remarks 1020 “KA4 RELAY IS DEFECTIVE.6 = 0 and X7. When a spindle–related alarm has been issued or when the spindle is coasting. 709 . D During tool change. the switch should tion. Please consult to FANUC service representative. tion switch may be defective or connected Replace them if necessary.3) are in the following state.0) and MCC off–relay monitor (X7. an alarm is issued 200 ms later: Y0.6 = 1 and X7. Under the The alarm occurs under the following condinormal condition.

X9. A relay for controlling the emergency stop is defective. (Emergency stop) Please consult to FANUC service representative.0) and FSSB I/O MCC off relay monitor (X7.5=1 1024 “KA8 RELAY IS DEFECTIVE.4=0 X8.” Disassemble the spindle clamp/unclamp Counter mechanism. This alarm is issued when the number of expansions/contractions of the spring for clamping the arbor to the spindle has exceeded the setting.6) are in the following state. OIL LEVEL IS LOWER THAN LIMIT.5 = 0 and X7. and check and replace the No. “CLAMP SPRINGS LIFE OVER. or X7.5=0 X7. for example. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 1022 BREAK RELAY IS DEFECT.0 = 0 and X7. When the guard lock relay monitor (X7. pulling the handle or leaning against the door.6 = 1. No.2=0 Y0. 001 The useful life of the spring for the arbor clamp coned disc spring for clamping the arbor. Add oil.5) and FSSB I/O guard lock relay monitor (X7.7 = 0 1026 “DOOR CAN NOT UNLOCK. The oil level in the centralized lubricant tank is low. When servo ready SA and relay contact point input are following status. The number Contact the FANUC Technical Center.7) are in the following state.5=0 X9.7 = 1. the door lock cannot be released.7: Detection of low oil level Keep relay K12#5 NOTE 1) Remedy Remarks 1023 1027 1028 710 .0 = 1 and X7. or X7.” Pressure may be applied to the front door.” A relay for the safety circuit is abnormal.5=1 BREAK RELAY IS DEFECT. door lock.6 = 0 1025 “KA9 RELAY IS DEFECTIVE. When releasing the fied. 002 of the spindle has been reached. preventing the pin of the lock mechanism Although the release of the door lock is speci.5 = 1 and X7. alarm occurs after 500msec X8. an alarm is issued 500 ms later: X7. of times tools are changed is counted. be careful not to exert force to the door by. (Z AXIS) A relay for controlling the Z–axis brake is defective. an alarm is issued 8 ms later: X7.2=1 or X7. When emergency stop input and relay contact point input are following status.from being removed. alarm occures after 200msec Y0.F.” A relay for the safety circuit is abnormal.4=1 or X9. When the MCC (X7.

ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 1029 KAA3 RELAY IS DEFECTIVE The relay for the automatic side door is abnormal.X5.COOLANT PUMP 1 M22 is specified before the center–through 2 pump starts.2: Detection of If the alarm is still issued after the filter clogged state is replaced. 4 Check whether there is any leakage from the pump. check whether there is a switch problem or faulty wiring. 1 2 Add coolant. check whether there is a switch problem or faulty cabling. Remedy Remarks 1 2 3 Check the coolant viscosity.T. and take ap. upper pressure limit Adjust the pressure of the center– through pump.5) and KAA3 relay monitor signal (X4. The relay KAA3 is considered to be faulty. Alternatively. This alarm is issued 500 msec after the automatic side door operation enable signal (Y0. loaded. or the cable is considered to be connected incorrectly or broken. the parameter for enabling automatic side door control is set for a machine that has no automatic side door. X5. The coolant pump is not adjusted properly. PRESSURE ALM (LOWER) The coolant level is low. Replace the line filter. 4 1 2 1033 FILTER LOADING (C.COOLANT MOTOR OVERHEAT Check the following items. 1035 C. Add coolant.0: Detection of If the alarm is still issued after coolant lower limit is added. check whether there is a switch problem or faulty wiring. 2 Check whether the set pressure is too high.5 = 1 and X4.T.COOL.COOL.T. X5.T. COOLANT LOWER LIMIT The coolant level is low. If the alarm is still issued after the above actions are applied.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. If the vis.4: Detection of propriate action: overload The center–through coolant motor is over. 1032 C. 3 Check whether the suction filter is clogged and whether there is any leakage from the suction pipe. 5 If the pump leaks. There is a program error. PRESSURE ALM (UPPER) The coolant viscosity is too high.0 = 0 1031 C. 1036 711 .0 = 1 or Y0.5 = 0 and X4.X5.COOLANT) The line filter has been clogged for more than 100 hours. 1 2 1034 NOT READY C. There is coolant leakage due to the use of the 3 wrong piping or damage to the piping. The pump has malfunctioned. change the coolant. check whether there is a NOTE 1) switch problem or faulty wiring.T.1 Check whether idling is performed. If the above alarm is still issued after the above actions are applied. Specify M21 before the block containing M22. and repair any lower pressure limit loose or damaged joints if any.3: Detection of Check the piping.0) are set as follows: Y0. Replace it. Correct the program. X5.1: Detection of cosity is too high. replace the pump.

PROBE SYSTEM ERROR The probe system is defective. “DUST CATCHER ALARM. 1045 1046 PROBE IS MOUNTING A tool change or spindle rotation was specified with a cable connected to the scanning probe manufactured by RENISHAW.7: Alarm Remedy Remarks 1038 1040 Check the probe and receiving sensor orientations.dirty. and check whether the probe and receiving sensor window are There is no response to a probe ON/OFF com. program or when operation stopped. Refer to the manual on the dust collector. This error may be due to a probe switchmand. or receiving sensor failure. An operation that rotates the spindle is prohibited.F.” The start button must be pressed only Keep relay when needed. PROBE SIGNAL ERROR An error signal was output from the probe. The start button (X21.gram and offset data. dead battery. cabling. PROBE ERROR The scanning probe manufactured by RENISHAW does not operate normally. 1041 PROBE ON/OFF ERROR Check the wire connections. For details. Check the various settings of the NC proThe stylus on the scanning probe manufac. K17#1 The probe or receiving sensor may be defective. 712 . X5.” An alarm is issued in the dust collector. 1044 OVER TRAVEL (STYLUS) Check the setting of the working probe. and Keep relay external interface settings. ing problem. cabling. fied value (standard: 30 s). 1042 1043 PROBE BATTERY LOW The voltage of the probe battery has lowered. Replace the battery. refer to the manual of the scanning probe. K17#1 The probe battery may be dead. 1039 “CYCLE START SIGNAL IS DEFECTIVE. and Keep relay external interface settings.6) K6#5 The start button was pressed at the end of a may be faulty.caused the time–out alarm. Check the wire connections. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 1037 TIME OVER (M CODE) Check the peripheral equipment corresponding to the M code command that The M code operation time exceeds the speci. tured by RENISHAW is bent excessively.

M61. If an alarm cannot be released.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. 1049 INTERNAL FAN STOP (PWR SUPPLY) The cooling fan inside the power supply stopped. M63. Turn off the circuit breaker. 1051 OVERHEAT (POWER SUPPLY) The power supply is overheated. 1053 SPINDLE ROTATION IS PROHIBITED While the probe is attached to the spindle. 1052 OVERHEAT (SERVO AMP. ter data table D100.) The servo amplifier is overheated. A spindle rotation was specified with the probe The number of the magazine to which the probe is attached is set in PMC parameattached to the spindle. Remedy Remarks NOTE 1 These alarms are detected in the following cases: D When the power is turned on (when the servo system is activated) D When machining ends (when any of the following codes is specified: M00. M30. Replace the fan.) The fan installed on the top of the servo amplifier case stopped. M60. 1048 EXTERNAL FAN STOP (SERVO AMP. spindle rotation is not permitted. M62. M64. 1050 EXTERNAL FAN STOP (PWR SUPPLY) The fan for cooling the power supply heat sink stopped. M01 (when the M01 stop button on the operator’s panel is ON). M02. and halt operation for a while. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 1047 INTERNAL FAN STOP (SERVO AMP. and M65) 713 . contact the FANUC technical center.) The fan for cooling the servo amplifier heat sink stopped.

UNAPPLI. Copy (random) Point group The offset data corresponding to the specified D code is 0 or less. A tool of unusable type is specified. Because the approach amount is too large. SELLING COM. 714 . ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 (12) Alarms related to the conversational programming function A) SUPER C.A.Side machining ing chamfering.P iM: Alarms other than alarms in contouring (number: 3175) Message INPUT VALUE IS ERRONEOUS COPIED DOUBLE DEFINITION ERROR IN COPY TOTAL WORK COORD. the Side machining corner cannot be rounded. Pocket cutting During machining such as tapering of a side face. Input data is not correct. the travel distance per cut is 0. Related menu All menus Copy The total number of copies is incorrect. side faces intersect. Facing The tool interferes with the opposite face. Side machining the cutting allowance at the bottom became insufficient because of the too large taper angle. TOOL ANGLE IS SMALL OFFSET VALUE IS 0 DIA. machining is impossible. This is because the taper angle is too large. only X or Y is specified. Pocket cutting Because of the cutting width. No chamfering tool angle is set in the tool file. Copy (random) The number of inputs is insufficient for the total number of copies. TOOL WAS SETTED DATA IS LACKING OFFSET VALUE IS UNDER 0 INTERFERE WITH WORK (RING) CHAMF. Although all/group copy is specified. interference with an Side machining opposite side occurs.F. TOOL EXCEDS Z POINT CHAMF. the workpiece coordinate All menus system is used for each menu. Drilling Although both X and Y must be specified. All menus Side machining Pocket cutting TAPER ANGLE IS TOO BIG APPROACH AMOUNT IS BIG CUT WAIDTH IS TOO SMALL TOOL IS TOO BIG T–CODE IS NOT CORRECT CHAMF. TAPER IS INSUFFICIENT Explanation Necessary data is not input. Pocket cutting When tapering was performed with reference to the top surface. Because of the too large cutter diameter. The offset data corresponding to the specified D code is 0. the tapering tool Side machining angle is smaller than the taper angle.00001 Pocket cutting or less. Side machining Pocket cutting Because the cutter diameter is larger than the corner radius. IS BIGGER THAN R. so there is no Side machining bottom. In internal side face machining.TOOL ANGLE IS LACK. Side machining Pocket cutting The T code is blank or invalid. Ring machining The chamfering tool interferes with the bottom plane (Z point) dur. An already set copy was set again.

No diameter compensation number is input. Explanation The cutting allowance is 0. 3191.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. the start point and end point of the tool path are not closed. LACKING FIN. 3191 3190. D–CODE NO. SPINDLE SPEED UNABLE TO EXECUTE TOOL TRACE CLOSE TO OUTER AND ISLAND TOOL IS TOO SMALL UNABLEBI–DIRECTIONAL CUTTING TO T. LACKING CHM. 3191. 3191 3190. LACKING CHM. The spindle speed is not input. 3191. No length compensation number is input. 3191. TOOL ID NO. 3192 3190. No length compensation number is input. 3191. The valid cutting width is 0. 3191. 3192 Message LACKING BOTTOM REMOV LACKING Z POINT LACKING SIDE REMOVE LACKING RGH. The loci of the pocket outside wall and island outside wall interfere. The tool ID number is not input. LT SIDE FINSH LACKING RGH. The spindle speed is not input. H–CODE NO. 3190. D–CODE NO. There is a conflict in mesh search. 3191. The coordinates of the Z point are not input. 3192 3190. LACKING CHM. 3191. LACKING RGH. 3191. 3191. No cutter compensation data is set. 3191. 3191. 3192 3190. Bi–directional cutting can be performed only for simple shapes with no island. No diameter compensation number is input. ISLAND GT 6 EFFICTIVE CUTTING WIDTH IS 0 TOOL OFF SET MEASUREMENT IS 0 BOTTOM REMOV. LACKING RGH. The tool ID number is not input. 3191. D–CODE NO. SIDE REMOV. 3192 3190. H–CODE NO. The cutting allowance is 0.A.P iM: Alarms in contouring Alarm No. 3192 3190. No length compensation number is input. ERROR CODES B) SUPER C. 3192 3190. 3192 3190. 3192 3191 3191 3191 3191 3191 3190. 3192 3190. 3191 INCORRECT OFFSET DIRECTION Pocket outside wall Pocket island 3191 3191 INCORRECT CUTTING DIRECTION INCORRECT END OF ISLAND 715 . LACKING FIN. 3192 3190. The spindle speed is not input. 3191. 3191. No diameter compensation number is input. There is no input data for pocket island continuation. 3192 3190.SPINDLE SPEED LACKING CHM. 3192 3190. 3191. In machining of an outside wall. The cutting allowance of the side face is smaller than the finishing allowance. 3192 3190. TOOL ID NO. SPINDLE SPEED LACKING FIN. 3192 3190. 3192 3190. The tool ID number is not input. 3191. There is no input data for inquiry item CUTTING DIRECTION. There is no input data for inquiry item OFFSET DIRECTION. H–CODE NO. TOOL ID NO. The cutting allowance of the bottom is smaller than the finishing allowance. LT BOTTOM FIN. Up to six islands are permitted. LACKING FIN. 3192 3190.

Confirm the approach data. Confirm the radius of corner R.F. 3005 APPROACH AMOUNT IS BIG. Confirm the chamfer amount of corner C. 3007 CHAMFER AMOUNT IS BIG. at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to it. Confirm the block data related to chamfer tool. at which is occurred the alarm. Explanation Necessary data is not entered. Confirm the tool. The angle at which the chamfering tool is placed is not specified. Confirm the tool. 3002 OFFSET VALUE IS UNDER 0. and enter the correct data after confirming it. at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to it. 3003 INTERFERE WITH WORK (RING) 3004 TOOL IS TOO BIG. Confirm the block data of the contour shape. Confirm the block data related to chamfer tool. TOOL ANGLE IS LACK 3014 MEMORY IS NOT SUFFICIENT 3015 INCORRECT MACHINING FIGURE 3016 INCORRECT CUT CONDITIONS 716 . The tool interferes with the opposite edge because the length of approach is too long. Confirm the D code. Divide the entered contour figure block or machining area. Corner R machining can not be performed because the cutter diameter is larger than corner R. at which is occurred the alarm and select the tool of smaller radius than the last time. Display the block data of pop–up window. The offset data corresponding to the specified D code is 0 or less. 3006 CORNER RADIUS (R) IS BIG. The chamfering tool interferes with the bottom surface (Z point) in chamfering. Corner C interferes with the opposite one because the chamfer amount is too large. 3008 DIA. at which is occurred the alarm and select the tool of smaller radius than the last time. 3012 CHAMF. TOOL EXCEDS A POINT 3013 CHAMF. The tool path can not create because the memory for the calculation is over the limitation. Confirm the block data related to the cutting condition. at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to the chamfer. at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to the approach. Confirm the tool. Or entered data is invalid. IS BIGGER THAN R. The tool path can not create because the data of cutting condition is not correct. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 C) Manual Guide Alarm No. at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to the radius. 3001 Message INPUT VALUE IS ERRONEOUS. at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to it. The tool interferes with the opposite surface. Machining is impossible because the cutter diameter is too large. at which is occurred the alarm and select the tool of smaller radius than the last time. at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to the offset table. at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to it. Corner R interferes with the opposite one because the radius of corner R is too large. The tool path can not create because the contour shape is not correct.

K SETTING DATA ERROR. Enter data. Enter data. Enter data.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. 3022 D–CODE IS NOT SPECIFIED 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3111 3113 3117 3118 SETTING DATA ERROR. R 717 . No input item is entered for argument address A. No input item is entered for argument address H. 3017 Message INCORRECT START POINT Explanation The machining can not be performed because the cutting start point positions at the outer machining field. No input item is entered for argument address E. J SETTING DATA ERROR. Confirm the block data related to the cutting condition and contour shape. ADD. ADD. Enter data. at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to it. ADD. Enter data. ERROR CODES Alarm No. Enter data. Enter data. ADD. Enter data. specify D code by using Tool Setting menu. No input item is entered for argument address R. Q SETTING DATA ERROR. Enter data. ADD. M SETTING DATA ERROR. The cutting start point can not be calculated because the data is not correct. Enter data. ADD. B SETTING DATA ERROR. No input item is entered for argument address C. No input item is entered for argument address D. E SETTING DATA ERROR. D SETTING DATA ERROR. No input item is entered for argument address F. No input item is entered for argument address I. No input item is entered for argument address J. H SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. ADD. ADD. 3018 START POING NOT OBTAINED 3019 NUMBER OF CUTS OVER LIMIT 3020 INTERFERES MACHINING FIG. ADD. Enter data. Before the block at which is occurred the alarm. D code is not specified. ADD. ADD. No input item is entered for argument address Q. Check the machining figure and machining condition data of the block that caused the alarm. Confirm the block data related to the cutting condition and contour shape. at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to it. A SETTING DATA ERROR. then reenter correct values. Enter data. F SETTING DATA ERROR. No input item is entered for argument address B. No input item is entered for argument address M. ADD. No input item is entered for argument address K. The tool interferes with the machining shape. Confirm the block data related to the cutting condition and contour shape. Enter data. at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to it. I SETTING DATA ERROR. C SETTING DATA ERROR. The maximum allowable number of cuts was exceeded.

The probe length is null or not greater than 0. ADD. Enter correct data. The X–axis compensation amount at the stylus position is null. Enter data. Enter correct data. No input item is entered for argument address X. ADD. S SETTING DATA ERROR. No input item is entered for argument address V. W SETTING DATA ERROR. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address W. The feedrate (f) in the first measurement is null or not greater than 0. The approach feedrate (fa) at measurement is null or not greater than 0. The stylus ball diameter along the Y–axis is null or not greater than 0. The stylus ball diameter along the X–axis is null or not greater than 0. X SETTING DATA ERROR. Enter data. Enter correct data. Enter correct data. U SETTING DATA ERROR. Y SETTING DATA ERROR.F. The first measurement distance (a) is null or not greater than 0. Enter correct data. ADD. Y 3133 3134 3135 ERROR:STYLUS BALL OFS X ERROR:STYLUS BALL OFS. T SETTING DATA ERROR. Enter data. Enter correct data. Enter data. Enter data. Enter correct data. ADD. Y ERROR:MEASURING 1ST FEED 3136 3137 3138 ERROR:MEASURING 1ST DIST ERROR:MEASURING 2ND DIST ERROR:MEASURING OVERLAP 3139 ERROR:FEED FOR APPROACH 3140 ERROR:ESCAPE OFFSET 718 . ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Alarm No. 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126 3130 3131 Message SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. Enter data. Enter data. Enter correct data. ADD. No input item is entered for argument address T. 3132 ERROR:STYLUS BALL DIAM. V SETTING DATA ERROR. Return amount (e) after the second contact is null or not greater than 0. ADD. ADD. No input item is entered for argument address U. No input item is entered for argument address Z. X Explanation No input item is entered for argument address S. No input item is entered for argument address Y. Z ERROR:PROBE LENGTH ERROR:STYLUS BALL DIAM. Enter correct data. The second measurement value (b) is null or not greater than 0. Enter data. Enter data. The overrun amount (g) at measurement is null or not greater than 0. The Y–axis compensation amount at the stylus position is null.

The G31 skip signal went ON before the measurement start point was reached. (The skip signal was turned ON at the measurement start position. Even when the overrun amount has been reached. NO OPTION 719 . 12050. 12050 IS UNDEF. Check the setting. 3141 Message CHECK SENSOR SIGNAL Explanation The G31 skip signal was already ON before measurement. Check the touch probe wire connections and so forth. 9150. (Standard value: 19) There is no measurement cycle option.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. NO. the signal was not turned ON. ERROR CODES Alarm No. Check the touch probe wire connections and so forth. Check the setting. 3147 3148 3149 PARAM. 9150 IS UNDEFINED PARAM NO. (Standard value: 800) 0 is set in parameter No. Check whether the power to the touch probe is on. Add the option.) Check the touch probe wire connections and so forth. 3142 NO TOUCH 3143 PROBE TOUCHED WHILE APPR. 0 is set in parameter No. Check the measurement program to see if there is probe contact during approach.

(AI high precision contour control) 5006 TOO MANY WORD IN ONE BLOCK The number of words specified in a block exceeded 26. 1422) or the feedrate in dry run (parameter No. 5015 NO ROTATION AXIS The specified rotation axis does not exist for tool axis direction handle feed. 1422)is 0. (High–precision contour control) 5014 TRACE DATA NOT FOUND Transfer cannot be performed because no trace data exists. (High–precision contour control) 5010 END OF RECORD The end of record (%) was specified. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 (13) Program errors (P/S alarms 5000 and up) Message Number Contents 5000 ILLEGAL COMMAND CODE The specified code was incorrect in the high–precision contour control mode. I/O is incorrect. (High–precision contour control) 5012 G05 P10000 ILLEGAL START UP (HPCC) Function category: High–precision contour control Alarm details: G05 P10000 has been specified in a mode from which the system cannot enter HPCC mode. (High–precision contour control) 5009 PARAMETER ZERO (DRY RUN) The maximum feedrate (parameter No. 1410) is 0. the machine moved beyond the limit. 5016 ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF M CODE M codes which belonged to the same group were specified in a block.an M code which must be specified without other M codes in the block was specified in a block with other M codes. Alternatively.F. 720 . (High–precision contour control) 5003 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (HPCC) There is an invalid parameter. (High–precision contour control) 5013 HPCC: CRC OFS REMAIN AT CANCEL G05P0 has been specified in G41/G42 mode or with offset remaining. modify the program. (High–precision contour control) 5004 HPCC NOT READY The RISC board is not operable. 5011 PARAMETER ZERO(CUT MAX) The maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No. (High–precision contour control) 5007 TOO LARGE DISTANCE In the HPCC mode.

3).3/G03.3 There is a format error in the exponential interpolation command (G02. 5059 RADIUS IS OUT OF RANGE A radius exceeding nine digits has been specified for circular interpolation with the center of the arc specified with I.3). Address I. A value that makes exponential interpolation impossible is specified.) 5064 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT (IS–B. 5050 ILL–COMMAND IN CHOPPING MODE A command for switching the major axis has been specified for circular threading. J. The axis set in parameter No. Parameter No. and K are 0 in a G68 command block. Alternatively. 5641 (linear axis setting) is not set. 5060 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN G02.3/G03. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 5043 TOO MANY G68 NESTING Three–dimensional coordinate conversion G68 has been specified three or more times. 3. 721 .3/G03. 5641 is not a linear axis. 0 is set in address I. 5062 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G02. or K is missing from a G68 command block (missing coordinate rotation option). The linear axis and rotation axis cannot be controlled by the CNC. IS–C) Circular interpolation has been specified on a plane consisting of axes having different increment systems. 5068 G31 FORMAT ERROR One of the following errors is found in the continuous high–speed skip command: 1. 5044 G68 FORMAT ERROR A G68 command block contains a format error. R is missing from a G68 command block.3/G03. J. (For example.3/G03. Correct the program. 2. The axis set in parameter No. 5067 G05 PO COMMANDED IN G68/G51 MODE (HPCC) High–precision contour control mode cannot be canceled during G51 (scaling) or G68 (coordinate system rotation).3 An illegal value is specified in the exponential interpolation command (G02. Parameter No. More than one movement axis is specified. 5642 is not a rotation axis. or K is not specified. or K.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. J.3 There is a parameter setting error. I.) 5061 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02. (More than the value set in parameter No. 5642 (rotation axis setting) is not set. J. This alarm is issued in the following cases: 1. a negative value is specified in In. and K. 2. a command for setting the length of the major axis to 0 has been specified for circular threading. J. I. 1010 is set. The movement axis is not specified.

In NURBS interpolation mode. Other program errors 5116 SPL : ERROR There is a program error in a block under look–ahead control. 5115 SPL : ERROR There is an error in the specification of the rank. 5112 G08 CAN NOT BE COMMANDED (G05. 5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATION ERROR The same address has been specified two or more times in a single block. Monotone increasing of knots is not observed.1 Q1) At the time of restart after manual intervention. Alternatively. The number of axes exceeds the limits.1 Q1). an illegal G code is modal.1 G1) Look–ahead control (G08) is specified in modeller control mode (G5. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 5073 NO DECIMAL POINT No decimal point has been specified for an address requiring a decimal point. The knot specification has an error. 722 . two or more G codes in the same group have been specified in a single block. a mode that cannot be used together is specified. 5110 NOT STOP POSITION (G05.1) Simple high–precision contour control (G05.1 Q1). 5111 IMPROPER MODEL G–CODE (G05. No knot is specified. the coordinates at which the manual intervention occurred have not been restored.1) was specified in MDI mode. 5082 DATA SERVER ERROR This alarm is detailed on the data server message screen. NURBS interpolation was restarted. 5114 NOT STOP POSITION (G05. 5117 SPL : ERROR The first control point of NURBS is incorrect.1 Q1) is specified.1 G1) When modeller control mode (G5. 5118 SPL : ERROR After manual intervention with manual absolute mode set to on.1 G1) An illegal G code is specified in modeller control mode (G5.F. 5113 CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI MODE (G05.

B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. the start point is set to the center. Q < 0 is specified. this alarm is issued for the following causes: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 5123 L=0 is specified. 5134 FSSB : OPEN READY TIME OUT Initialization did not place FSSB in the open ready state. conical interpolation is specified. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 5122 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SPIRAL There is a specification error in spiral interpolation or conical interpolation. C is specified. When difference in radius > 0. R/. OVER TOLERANCE OF END POINT The difference between the specified end point position and the calculated end point position exceeds the permissible range (parameter No. Although there is no helical interpolation option. R/. Although no height axis is specified. or connection to an amplifier or between modules may be incorrect. height increment is specified. or the end point is set to the center. The optical fiber cable may be faulty. the number of amplifiers recognized by FSSB is not enough. 5136 FSSB : NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL In comparison with the number of controlled axes. 5137 FSSB : CONFIGURATION ERROR FSSB detected a configuration error. Q=0 is specified. 5138 FSSB : AXIS SETTING NOT COMPLETE In automatic setting mode. Height increment 0 is specified. 3471). Q > 0 is specified. Check the optical fiber cable and connection. When there are two height axes. axis setting has not been made yet. Specifically. 5135 FSSB : ERROR MODE FSSB has entered error mode. 723 . height increment is specified. 5139 FSSB : ERROR Servo initialization did not terminate normally. 5124 CAN NOT COMMAND SPIRAL Spiral interpolation or conical interpolation was specified in the following modes: 1) 2) 3) Scaling Programmable mirror image Polar coordinate interpolation In cutter compensation C mode. When difference in radius < 0. Three axes or more are specified as the height axes.

Check the memory card.) 724 .) Supplement: Automatic setting sets bit 2 of parameter No. but FSSB was not opened. Check for the available space on the memory card. 5197 FSSB : OPEN TIME OUT The CNC permitted FSSB to open. 5008 is followed. Also check whether the memory card was removed during data transfer. 5220 REFERENCE POINT ADJUSTMENT MODE A parameter for automatically setting the reference position is set (bit 2 of parameter No. 1422 or 1432). 1770 or 1771). Perform automatic setting. 5222 SRAM CORRECTABLE ERROR An SRAM correctable error cannot be removed.) 5214 SCREEN COPY : DATA TRANSFER ERROR Data transfer to a memory card failed.F. 5198 FSSB : ID DATA NOT READ Temporary assignment failed. Correct the parameter. so amplifier initial ID information could not be read. (Check whether the card is write–protected or defective. 5219 CAN NOT RETURN You cannot perform manual intervention and restoration during three–dimensional coordinate conversion. 1819 to 0. (The setting of bit 4 of parameter No. 5213 SCREEN COPY : COMMUNICATION ERROR The memory card cannot be used. Set the parameter correctly. 5196 ILLEGAL OPERATION (HPCC) Detachment was performed during high–precision contour control. then perform manual reference position return. Action: Replace the SRAM module. Check whether 4 is set as the I/O channel. When detachment is performed during high–precision contour control. (Position the machine to the reference position manually. 1819 = 1). Cause: A problem occurred in memory during memory initialization. this alarm is issued after the currently executed block terminates. 5199 FINE TORQUE SENSING PARAMETER There is an error in a parameter related to the fine torque sensing function. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 5157 PARAMETER ZERO (AICC) Zero is set in the parameter for the maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No. 5257 G41/G42 NOT ALLOWED IN MDI MODE G41/G42 (cutter compensation C) was specified in MDI mode. Zero is set in the parameter for the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter No. 5212 SCREEN COPY : PARAMETER ERROR There is a parameter setting error. D An invalid axis number is set for a target axis. D The storage interval is invalid.

the machine will malfunction.1Q2 is illegal. Alternatively. 5402 SPL:ILLEGAL AXIS MOVING A movement was made along an axis that was not a spline interpolation axis. set all tool offset data again. This is posted to the operator.1 or the following block. 5302 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G68 MODE Setting of a coordinate system was specified in the coordinate system rotation mode. ERROR CODES Message Number Contents 5300 SET ALL OFFSET DATAS AGAIN When the setting for enabling or disabling the inch/metric automatic conversion function of tool offset data (bit 0 of parameter No. 1. 2. 5400 SPL:ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND There is an axis specification error in spline interpolation or smooth interpolation. 5411 NURBS:ILLEGAL ORDER The number of steps is specified incorrectly.1 is specified. when spline interpolation with the X– and Y–axes set as two spline axes is performed in the three–dimensional tool compensation mode in which the three components of the offset vector include the X–. G06.1 must not be specified. 5306 MODE CHANGE ERROR In one–touch macro call. internal data exceeds the permissible range: 1) Improvement in rotation axis feedrate 5311 FSSB:ILLEGAL CONNECTION FSSB connection is invalid. the axis specified in G5. If the machine is used without setting data again. and Z–axes. 1023) are assigned to amplifiers connected to different FSSB systems. 5006) has been changed. 5307 INTERNAL DATA OVER FLOW In the following function. When this alarm is issued. In case of smooth interpolation. causing this alarm. Y–. 5413 NURBS:ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND An axis not specified with controlled points is specified in the first block. a movement along the Z–axis occurs. a block not relating to NURBS interpolation is specified. two FSSBs use different current control intervals. 5401 SPL:ILLEGAL COMMAND In a G code mode in which G06. this alarm is issued. 725 .B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. This alarm issued when the system does not satisfy the requirements for high–speed HRV control. When an axis that is not a spline axis is specified in the spline interpolation mode. all tool offset data must be set again. in NURBS interpolation mode. mode switching at the start time is not performed correctly. For example. 5412 NURBS:NO KNOT COMMAND No knot is specified. This alarm is issued when axes with adjacent odd and even servo axis numbers (parameter No. The spline axis refers to an axis specified in the block containing G06. and the pulse module used is connected to a different FSSB system.

the axis parallel to the hole machining axis is also specified simultaneously. when there is a parallel axis. In the interference check evade function of cutter compensation. 5415 NURBS:ILLEGAL CANCEL Although NURBS interpolation is not completed yet. 5440 ILLEGAL DRILLING AXIS SELECTED The hole machining axis specified for the hole machining canned cycle is illegal. 5416 NURBS:ILLEGAL MODE A mode that cannot be used with NURBS interpolation mode is specified in NURBS interpolation mode. 5447 CRC:DANGEROUS AVOIDANCE The interference check evade function of cutter compensation determines that an evade operation will lead to danger. 2) The time for decelerating the feedrate to 0 exceeds the maximum value. 5446 CRC:NO AVOIDANCE Because there is no interference evade vector.F. The cause is one of the following: 1) The ratio of the deceleration to the acceleration is lower than the limit. 5455 ILLEGAL ACC. 5425 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset number is illegal. the NURBS interpolation mode is turned off. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 5414 NURBS:ILLEGAL KNOT The number of blocks containing knots only is insufficient. 5418 NURBS:ILLEGAL KNOT VALUE Knots do not increase in monotone. PARAMETER There is an error in permissible acceleration parameters for optimum torque acceleration/deceleration. Alternatively. 5417 NURBS:ILLEGAL MULTI–KNOT As many knots as the number of steps are not specified at the start and end points. a further interference occurs for an already created interference evade vector. the interference check evade function of cutter compensation cannot evade interference. 5448 CRC:INTERFERENCE TO AVD. 726 . The Z point of the hole machining axis is not specified in the block specifying a canned cycle G code.

2. Replace the feedback cable.2 SPINDLE AMPLIFIER F. Check load status. Check the motor insulation status. Replace the magnetic contactor for switching. Check the ladder program. Replace the feedback cable.) Improve the heat sink cooling status. check whether spindle synchronization was specified when spindle motor could not be turned. Replace the feedback cable. 4082. ERROR CODES F. Check and correct the parameter. Check and correct the cutting conditions to decrease the load. Correct parameter No. Replace the spindle amplifier. Replace the spindle amplifier control PC board. 04 06 INPUT POWER SUPPLY OPEN PHASE AND POWER MOTOR THERMAL DETECTION DISCONNECTED OVERSPEED Check the state of power input to the power supply.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. (For example. Check the power supply selection. Check for a sequence error. Check the parameter specific to each motor model. If the cooling fan stops. 07 7109 9009 7111 9011 7112 9012 09 MAIN CIRCUIT OVERLOAD/IPM OVERLOAD DC LINK OVERVOLTAGE 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 11 12 DC LINK OVERCURRENT/IPM ALARM 7115 9015 7116 9016 7118 9018 7119 9019 15 SPEED RANGE SWITCHING AND SPINDLE SWITCHING ALARM SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT PROGRAM DATA ERROR IN SUM–CHECK PHASE U CURRENT DETECTOR CIRCUIT EXCESSIVE OFFSET 1 2 16 18 19 Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuit board. Check the motor insulation status. Replace the power supply. Replace the spindle amplifier. replace it. Replace the spindle amplifier.1 Alarms CNC screen display 7101 9001 SPM indication 01 Description Action MOTOR OVERHEAT 1 2 3 4 7102 9002 02 EXCESSIVE VELOCITY ERROR 1 2 7103 9003 7104 9004 7106 9006 7107 9007 03 DC LINK FUSE BLOWN 1 2 Check the ambient temperature and load status (cutting condition and acceleration/deceleration frequency). 1 2 1 2 Check and correct the parameter. 727 .

7140 9040 7141 9041 40 41 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT Cs SIGNAL DETECT POSITION CORDER ONE–ROTATION 1 SIGNAL DETECTION ERROR 2 3 728 . Replace the power supply. 2 Check the shield status of the cable. Replace the feedback cable.F. Replace the position coder. Correct the parameter setting. Replace the cable. position error. and the parameter for position detector mounting direction setting. 4001#4) 1 2 Place the CNC–to–spindle cable away from the power cable. 3 Replace the cable. Replace the communication cable. Correct the parameter setting. Check and correct the parameter. Check and correct the parameters. 1 Check and correct the gear ratio. Replace the feedback cable. 2 Re–adjust the preamplifier. 1 Adjust the one–rotation signal in the preamplifier. 7126 26 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT C–VELO DETECT POSITION CODER SIGNAL DISCONNECTED SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT C–POS DETECT SHORT–PERIOD OVERLOAD PSM MAIN CIRCUIT OVER CURRENT 1 2 1 2 7127 9027 7128 7129 9029 7130 9030 7131 9031 7132 9032 7133 9033 7134 9034 7135 9035 7136 9036 27 28 29 30 1 Replace the cable. 31 SPEED DETECTION SIGNAL Check and correct the load status. Check and correct the sequence. Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuit board. Re–adjust the preamplifier. Replace the position coder. Check and correct the load status. 1 2 Replace the power supply. DISCONNECTED AND MOTOR LOCK ALARM SERIAL COMMUNICATION LSI INTERNAL RAM ERROR DC LINK PRE–CHARGE FAILURE PARAMETER DATA OUT OF SPECIFICATION SPN_n_ : EX SETTING GEAR RATIO ERROR COUNTER OVERFLOW Replace the spindle amplifier contrCheck and correct the load status. Check the reactor specifications. (No. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 CNC screen display 7120 9020 7121 9021 7124 9024 SPM indication 20 21 24 Description Action PHASE V CURRENT DETECTOR CIRCUIT EXCESSIVE OFFSET WRONG SETTING IN ROTATIONAL DIRECTION OF POSITION SENSOR SERIAL TRANSFER DATA ERROR Replace the spindle amplifier.ol PC board. 32 33 34 35 36 2 7137 9037 7139 37 39 SPEED DETECTOR PARAMETER ERROR SPN_n_ : 1–ROT Cs SIGNAL ERROR Modify the speed detector parameter setting.

729 . 59 62 66 PSM COOLING FAN STOPPED OVER RANGE IN MOTOR SPEED COMMAND SPM/SPM TRANSMISSION DATA ERROR (EGB MODE) Replace the cooling fan inside the power supply. 43 44 46 SPN_n_ : DISCON. Check and correct the connection. 7151 9051 7152 9052 51 1 2 1 2 1 2 Check and correct the power supply voltage. 52 ITP SIGNAL ERROR I 7153 9053 53 ITP SIGNAL ERROR II 7154 9054 7155 9055 7156 9056 7157 9057 7158 9058 7159 9059 7162 9062 7166 9066 54 55 OVERLOAD CURRENT ALARM POWER LINE STATE ERROR AT SPINDLE OR SPEED RANGE SWITCHING CONTROL CIRCUIT COOLING FAN STOPPED EXCESSIVE CONVERTER DECELERATION POWER PSM MAIN CIRCUIT OVERLOAD Review the load state. Check and correct the sequence. ERROR CODES CNC screen display 7142 9042 7143 9043 7144 9044 7146 9046 SPM indication 42 Description Action POSITION CORDER ONE–ROTATION 1 SIGNAL NOT DETECTED 2 Replace the feedback cable. MODE SPN_n_ : CONTROL CIRCUIT(AD) ERROR Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuit board. Replace the spindle interface printed circuit board in the CNC. Replace the cable. 4021. 1 2 Replace the magnetic contactor. 56 57 58 Replace the cooling fan inside the spindle amplifier. POSITION CORDER ONE–ROTATION 1 SIGNAL DETECTION ERROR 2 DURING THREAD CUTTING 3 POSITION CORDER SIGNAL ERROR 1 2 7147 9047 7149 9049 7150 9050 47 49 50 SPN_n_ : HIGH CONV. DIF. Replace the position detector. PC FOR DIF.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. Replace the feedback cable. Replace the power supply. Replace the feedback cable. Check and correct the gear ratio and position gain settings. Replace the position coder. Replace the position coder. Check and correct the parameters. SPEED EXCESSIVE SPEED COMMAND COMPUTED VALUE DURING THE SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF THE SPINDLE DC LINK UNDER VOLTAGE Check whether the calculated differential rate exceeds the maximum motor speed. 4056 to 4059) 1 2 Replace the cable. Replace the magnetic contactor. SP. Check and correct the parameter. (No. 1 2 Check the cooling state of the power supply. Replace the spindle amplifier control PC board. Reduce the acceleration/deceleration duty cycle. Replace the spindle amplifier control PC board. Replace the spindle interface printed circuit board in the CNC.

Replace the spindle amplifier. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 CNC screen display 7169 9069 7170 9070 7171 9071 7172 9072 7173 9073 SPM indication 69 70 71 72 73 Description Action SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (SAFETY SPEED EXCEEDED) SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (AXIS DATA ERROR) SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (SAFETY PARAMETER ERROR) SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (MOTOR SPEED DECISION MISMATCH) SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR MOTOR DISCONNECTED Check the parameter. Adjust the sensor. Check and correct the parameter.F. Adjust the sensor. Turn off the power then turn on the power. Turn off the power then turn on the power. Check and correct the parameter. 7174 9074 7175 9075 7176 9072 7177 9072 7178 9072 7179 9079 7181 9081 74 75 76 77 78 79 81 HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC TEST ERROR 1 (CPU) HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC TEST ERROR 2 (CPU) SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (CPU TEST ERROR) SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (AXIS NUMBER DECISION MISMATCH) SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (SAFETY PARAMETER DECISION MISMATCH) HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC TEST ERROR 3 (INITIAL CHECK) ONE–ROTATION SIGNAL DETECTION ERROR IN SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR MOTOR ONE–ROTATION SIGNAL IN SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR MOTOR NOT DETECTED SIGNAL ERROR IN SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR MOTOR SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR EXTERNAL FEEDBACK DISCONNECTED Replace the spindle amplifier control PC board. Adjust the sensor. Turn off the power then turn on the power. Replace the feedback cable. Replace the feedback cable. Check the shield processing. Check the shield processing. Replace the feedback cable. Check and correct the connection. Adjust the sensor. Adjust the sensor. Adjust the sensor. Replace the spindle amplifier control PC board. Check and correct the connection. Turn off the power then turn on the power. Replace the feedback cable. Check the spindle amplifier setting. 1 2 3 4 Replace the feedback cable. Replace the spindle amplifier control PC board. Replace the feedback cable. 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 Check and correct the parameter. 7182 9082 7183 9083 7184 9084 82 83 84 7185 9085 85 ONE–ROTATION SIGNAL DETECTION ERROR IN SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR EXTERNAL FEEDBACK 730 .

1 Replace the communication cable between the CNC and spindle amplifier. 88 97 98 b0 Replace the external cooling fan of the spindle amplifier. 1 Replace the communication cable between the CNC and spindle amplifier. 2 Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuit board. 1 Replace the communication cable between the CNC and spindle amplifier.LOW VOLT CONTROL SPN_n_ : CONV. 2 Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuit board. 3 Replace the power supply unit. 1 Replace the communication cable between the amplifier modules. 7187 9087 7188 9088 7197 9097 7198 9098 9110 87 1 2 Replace the feedback cable. Replace the power supply control printed circuit board. Replace the cooling fan. Check the alarm indication of the spindle amplifier. 3 Replace the spindle interface printed circuit board on the CNC side. Check the alarm indication of the power supply. Adjust the sensor. 2 Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuit board. 1 Check the regenerative resistor connection. 2 Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuit board or power supply control printed circuit board.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F.COOLING FAN FAILURE SPN_n_ : COMMUNICATION DATA ERROR 9113 9120 b3 c0 9121 c1 SPN_n_ : COMMUNICATION DATA ERROR 9122 c2 SPN_n_ : COMMUNICATION DATA ERROR 731 . 3 Replace the spindle interface printed circuit board on the CNC side.EXDISCHARGE POW. 2 Check the selected motor. ERROR CODES CNC screen display 7186 9086 SPM indication 86 Description Action ONE–ROTATION SIGNAL IN SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR EXTERNAL FEEDBACK NOT DETECTED SIGNAL ERROR IN SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR EXTERNAL FEEDBACK SPN_n_ : COOLING RADIFAN FAILURE SPN_n_ : OTHER SPINDLE ALARM SPN_n_ : OTHER CONVERTER ALARM SPN_n_ : AMP COMMUNICATION ERROR 1 2 Replace the feedback cable. 3 Replace the spindle interface printed circuit board on the CNC side. SPN_n_ : CONV. Adjust the sensor. 9111 9112 b1 b2 SPN_n_ : CONV.

spindle synchronization. In this case. pay attention to the parameter setting regarding the use of the MRDY signal (bit 0 of parameter No. 4001 = 1) is not made. In this case. A command for controlling a servo mode (such as rigid Check the sequence tapping and spindle positioning) is input. the error LED (yellow) of the indicator on the spindle amplifier is turned on. 02 When the spindle motor is equipped with a high–resolu. Before entercontour control. the motor is not activated.Check the parameter setting of the output switch tion is not set. but another During execution of the C–axis control command. but another mode (Cs not specify another operation mode. signal (bit 2 of parameter No.do not specify another operation mode. the motor is not activated. 0) must be set for the speed detector. bit 4 of parameter 4018) for use of the Cs contour control function by the a sensor (bit 4 of parameter No. Check the error number displayed on the amplifier indicator.) Indication 01 Although neither *ESP (emergency stop signal. 4001 = 1) or setting (bit 5 of parameter 4001. pulse coder (bit 5 of parameter No. Before ention) is specified. the motor is not activated. Although setting for use of a high–resolution magnetic Check the setting of the parameter. but SFR (forward rotation command)/SRV (reverse rotation command) is not input. Description of error Action Check the *ESP and MRDY sequence. but other than 123 λ/rev is set. cancel the servo mode. tion magnetic pulse coder (CS sensor). A Cs contour control command is input. tering another mode. SFR (forward rotation signal)/SRF (reverse rotation signal)/ORCM (orientation command) is input. but ORCM (orientation command) is input. cancel the Cs contour control command. mode (servo mode. and an error number is displayed. spindle synchronization.2 List of Error Codes If a parameter is set incorrectly or the sequence is incorrect.Check the setting of the parameter. In this case. 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 732 . function. 4018 = 1) is not made.2. but a low–speed winding is selected (RCH control function and the power line state check sig= 1). but SFR (forward Check the sequence rotation command)/SRV (reverse rotation command) is not input. A Cs contour control command is input. A command for a servo mode (such as rigid tapping and During execution of the servo mode command. there are two types of signals including the PMC signal and PSM contact signal(*2)) nor MRDY (machine ready signal) is input. Although parameter setting for use of the position coder Check the setting of the parameter. 1 and 0 of parameter 4011) 1. A spindle synchronization control command is input. but Check the sequence SFR (forward rotation command)/SRV (reverse rotation command) is not input. a Cs control command is input. 4011 = 0. (For MRDY. 4001). The option parameter of the output switch control func. or orienta. (bit 2. nal (RCH). or orientation) ing another mode. the (bit 2 of parameter 4001) servo mode (rigid tapping and spindle positioning) or spindle synchronization is specified. 128 λ/rev (bits 2. do spindle synchronization) is input. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 F. 0. and 0 of parameter No.F. is specified. The option parameter of the orientation function is not Check the parameter setting of the orientation set. and take an action according to the table below.

1. the shortest No. 2. 4000 = 1) is set for using the Check the parameter setting and the input signal. The parameters (bit 6 of No. speed detector is incorrect. or spindle synchronization) is specified. ERROR CODES Indication 12 Description of error Action A spindle synchronization command is input. but DEFMD (differential mode command. To execute an absolute position command sequentially. do no switch to contour control. servo not specify another operation mode. Before entermode. An orientation command is input. No. ting for use of the Cs contour control function by the α (bit 4 of parameter 4018) sensor (bit 4 of parameter No. Indicates that the AC voltage charging is completed. 4018 = 0. Check INCMD (incremental command). 0 of No. Indication NOT READY READY LED display — 0 Description Indicates that the motor is not ready for being driven.Check the setting of the parameter. but indicates normal operation modes. another type of orientation. 29 The table below does not indicate alarm states. Use tion. or spindle synchronization) another mode. 4323 0 0) are set for using the shortest time orienta. 0 of No. do not specify another operation mode. cancel the orientation command. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 24 25 Although spindle amplifier SPM Type4 is not used. 0. The parameter setting (bits 2. or orientation) is command. A command for orientation based on the magnetic sen.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. servo mode. 4018 = 1) is made. ing another mode. 733 . cancel the orientation command. 4011) for the Check the setting of the parameter. but another During execution of the spindle synchronization mode (Cs contour control. but another mode (Cs contour control. The SFT and SRV signals are both input at the same Specify one of the commands. The parameter (bit 5 of No. set for not using a position sensor (for not exercising position control). and the motor is ready for being driven. but orientation based on the position coder is specified. When continuous indexing is performed in orientation based on the position coder. be sure to perform absolute position command orientation first. do sor is input. 0) is Check the parameter setting and the input signal. cancel the spindle synchronization command. 1. is specified. but a Cs contour control command is input.During execution of the orientation command. set. Before switching to another mode. No pertinent speed detector exists. 4000 = 0) is set for not using Check the parameter setting and the differential the differential speed control. mode command) is input. time. an incremental operation (INCMD = 1) is first performed. 0. 4002 = 0. 4320 through With the ai series spindle amplifier. The parameter (bit 5 of No. differential speed control function. servo mode. The parameter (bits 3.time orientation function cannot be used. Before entering another mode. but another mode (Cs While orientation is specified. specified. then an absolute position command (INCMD = 0) is input.

(3) Replace the power supply. Type LED indication Description The power supply module is not ready for driving a motor. (1) Replace the internal cooling fan. They correspond to the normal operating statuses of the unit. (2) Check the inter–module cables for short–circuits. (3) Replace the power supply. (3) Replace the power supply. (1) Check the power supply voltage (including momentary power failures). NOT READY READY 734 . (1) Check the input power supply (200 V). (2) Contamination by dust (3) Check the operation condition. (2) Replace the power supply. (1) Check the DC link cabling (for short–circuits).3 POWER SUPPLY MODULE CNC screen display 437 7130 9030 443 7159 9059 431 7158 9058 433 7151 9051 442 7133 9033 432 7104 9004 439 7111 9011 606 7188 9088 607 7197 9097 Alarm indication 1 Description Action OVERCURRENT INPUT (1) Check the power supply voltage. (1) Replace the external cooling fan. The following indications are not alarms. 2 INTERNAL COOLING FAN STOPPED OVERHEAT 3 (1) The cooling fan is faulty. (2) Check the operation condition. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 F.F. (2) Check the DC link cabling (for short–circuits). The power supply module has charged its DC voltage section and is now ready for driving a motor. 4 DC LINK SECTION UNDERVOLTAGE 5 CHARGE ERROR 6 CONTROL POWER SUPPLY UNDERVOLTAGE DC LINK SECTION OVERVOLTAGE 7 A EXTERNAL COOLING FAN STOPPED POWER SUPPLY MISSING PHASE E (1) Check the power supply voltage. (1) Excessive regenerative power (insufficient PSM capability) (2) Check the DC link and input power supply cabling.

(3) Replace the servo amplifier. (3) Replace the servo amplifier. (2) Replace the servo amplifier. 604 P 600 600 600 449 449 449 603 603 603 438 438 438 8 9 A 8. (2) Check the inter–phase short–circuit and grounding of the motor winding. A. Check the ambient temperature of the amplifier. ERROR CODES F. (4) Replace the servo amplifier. 9. (1) Replace the communication cables. 735 . (2) Replace the servo amplifier. (1) Check the inter–phase short–circuit and grounding of the power line. (5) Replace the servo motor. (3) Check the inter–phase short–circuit and grounding of the motor winding. Check the chiller unit. (3) Replace the servo amplifier. A. and ID. (2) Replace the inter–module cables. (2) Check the inter–phase short–circuit and grounding of the motor winding. (2) Replace the servo amplifier. (1) Check 24 V control power output from the power supply. (1) (2) (3) (4) Check the motor use condition. (2) Check whether the short bar for the DC link is screwed tightly. 9. Check the chiller unit.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. (1) Check the settings of the motor ID No. Replace the servo amplifier. 8. b C d (1) Check the inter–phase short–circuit and grounding of the power line.4 SERVO AMPLIFIER MODULE CNC screen display 444 Alarm indication 1 Description Action INTERNAL COOLING FAN STOPPED CONTROL POWER SUPPLY UNDERVOLTAGE DC LINK SECTION UNDERVOLTAGE (1) Replace the fan. (1) (2) (3) (4) Check the motor use condition. Check the ambient temperature of the amplifier. (1) Check the input power supply voltage. (3) Replace the servo amplifier. Replace the servo amplifier. 434 2 435 5 602 6 OVERHEAT 601 F HEAT SINK COOLING FAN STOPPED COMMUNICATION ERROR BETWEEN AMPLIFIER MODULES ABNORMAL L–AXIS DC LINK CURRENT ABNORMAL M–AXIS DC LINK CURRENT ABNORMAL N–AXIS DC LINK CURRENT L–AXIS IPM ALARM M–AXIS IPM ALARM N–AXIS IPM ALARM L–AXIS IPM ALARM (OH) M–AXIS IPM ALARM (OH) N–AXIS IPM ALARM (OH) ABNORMAL L–AXIS MOTOR CURRENT ABNORMAL M–AXIS MOTOR CURRENT ABNORMAL N–AXIS MOTOR CURRENT (1) Replace the fan. (2) Check the inter–phase short–circuit and grounding of the power line.

NOT READY READY 736 . DC power has been charged and it is ready for driving a motor. They correspond to the normal operating statuses of the unit. Type LED indication Description The servo amplifier module is not ready for driving a motor.F. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 The following indications are not alarms.

1) Reduce the ladder program.PMC SRAM PMC must be initialized. ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER ER03 PROGRAM SIZE ERROR (OPTION) ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH By using FAPT LADDER–III. 1) Re–input the ladder program. board.) Replace the master printed circuit board. (CLEAR PMC SRAM) 1) While holding down both of the keys With a change in the PMC type. The initialization of the memory used to store the ladder program failed.The ladder program is invalid. for exam“2” and “5”. the retention–type memory of the CNC. ER07 NO OPTION(LADDER STEP) ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH ER09 PMC LABEL CHECK ERRORPLEASE TURN ON POWER AGAIN WITH PUSH ’O’&’Z’. Set the parameter again.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. the system was exit from editing by using the [<<] key. CLEAR from the ROBOMACHINE IPL menu. id. forcibly switched to the CNC screen with a function key. An unsupported function is used in the ladder program. Execute 7. ERROR CODES F. correct PMC type (SB7). Contact FANUC to reconfigure the PMC The PMC management software is invalmanagement software. The ladder program is too large. 2) Replace the backup battery. Contact FANUC to reconfigure the PMC The PMC management software is not management software. 2) Replace the master printed circuit board. turn on the power to the ple. loaded correctly. The CNC parameter is not set correctly. 3) Replace the master printed circuit board. The ladder program is too large. an interrupt command was generated. convert the The setting of the type in the ladder proladder program to a one for use with the gram differs from the actual type. While the ladder program was being read. 1) Contact FANUC. 1) Reduce the ladder program.5 LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) (1) Alarm messages (PMC) Alarm number ER01 PROGRAM DATA ERROR Faulty location/corrective action Contents 1) Re–input the ladder program. ER10 OPTION AREA NOTHING (xxxx) ER12 OPTION AREA ERROR(xxxx) ER14 OPTION AREA VERSION ERROR (xxxx) ER16 RAM CHECK ERROR (PROGRAM RAM) ER17 PROGRAM PARITY ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR BY I/O ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR Display the Ladder edit screen again and During Ladder editing.(The editions of BASIC and OPTION do not match. Re–input the ladder program. 737 .(The series of BASIC and OPTION do not match.) Contact FANUC to reconfigure the PMC The PMC management software is invalmanagement software. id. The ladder program is invalid. The parity of the ladder program is inval2) Replace the master printed circuit id.

2) Replace the master printed circuit board. id. screen with a function key. and Power Mate is not connected. in communication with an I/O device. Reduce the amount of output data in The amount of output data in I/O Link group xx. Display the message data edit screen During message data editing. the power must be turned off and then back on. 3) Replace that device in group xx in which the PMC control module is installed.(The each group to 128 bytes or less. ment software failed. PRM IS OUT OF RANGE ER32 NO I/O DEVICE ER33 I/O LINK ERROR ER34 I/O LINK ERROR (xx) ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT DATA IN GROUP (xx) ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA IN GROUP (xx) ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT DATA OVER (xx) ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT DATA OVER (xx) 738 . allocation of any group after group xx on the input side is nullified. on before the CNC was turned on. Replace the master printed circuit board. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Alarm number ER20 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA ERROR ER21 MESSAGE DATA ERROR Faulty location/corrective action Contents Display the symbol/comment edit screen During symbol/comment editing. The excess data is nullified. with a function key. range. 2) Replace the master printed circuit board. The excess data is nullified. an error occurred leading to a device in group xx. group xx exceeds the limit (33 bytes). ER22 PROGRAM NOTHING ER23 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER ER25 SOFTWARE VERSION ERROR (PMCAOPT) ER26 PMC CONTROL MODULE ERROR(PMCAOPT) Contact FANUC to reconfigure the PMC The PMC management software is invalmanagement software. 1) Check that the I/O device is on. With a change in the PMC type. Modify the ladder program. DIFU. The LSI of the I/O Link is defective. or DIFD.) 1) Contact FANUC to reconfigure the The initialization of the PMC managePMC management software. The ladder program is empty.) ER27 LADDER FUNC. group xx exceeds the limit (33 bytes). Modify the total amount of output data in The I/O Link I/O area is insufficient. 2) Check that the I/O device was turned on before the CNC. the again and exit from editing by using the system was forcibly switched to the CNC [<<] key. 1) Check the connection of the cable In a slave in group xx. An I/O device such as the I/O Link. Change the An out–of–range parameter number is parameter number of the function specified with function instruction TMR. 1) Re–input the ladder program. CTR.F.) Modify the total amount of input data in The I/O Link I/O area is insufficient. con2) Check that the I/O device was turned nection unit. the system again and exit from editing by using the was forcibly switched to the CNC screen [<<] key. instruction to a value within the valid TMRB. Reduce the amount of input data in The amount of input data in I/O Link group xx. for example. allocation of any group after group xx on the output side is nullified. 3) Check the connection of the cable. Turn the CNC off and then back on.(The edition of PMCAOPT does not match.(The each group to 128 bytes or less.

group does not match the number of I/O 2) Check the power supply of the I/O units actually connected.The setting of the PMC system paramerameter.) Modify the ladder program so that the For a subprogram call with the function subprogram nesting level is eight or less. WN07 LADDER SP ERROR (STACK) 739 . address of the operator’s panel for for Series 0. (CH1: Primary board. correct PMC type. EXIN. WINDW.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. Contents The I/O Link–II setting is illegal. CH2: Secondary board) Set I/O Link–II again. instruction CALL or CALLU. convert the The setting of the type in the ladder proladder program to a one for use with the gram differs from the actual type. CH2: Secondary board) The I/O Link–II mode setting is illegal. the nesting level is too deep (exceeds 8). 1) Check that the Ladder program is free from problems and then restart the Ladder program (by pressing the RUN key). address of the operator’s panel ter. the Ladder program of the PMC–SA3/SA5 was transferred.Function instructions such as WINDR. (CH1: Primary board. is invalid. 2) Turn the CNC off and then back on. ER97 I/O LINK (CHxyyGROUP) 1) Check the cabling of the I/O units of Assignment of the I/O modules of the yy the yy group. CH2: Secondary board) The I/O Link–II station number setting is illegal. Set I/O Link–II again. and DISPB may not be executed normally. (CH1: Primary board. Series 0.ERROR (CHx) Faulty location/corrective action Set I/O Link–II again. WN05 PMC TYPE NO CONVERSION By using FAPT LADDER–III. 3) Check the parameter setting for the I/O link assignment data selection function. units. ERROR CODES Alarm number ER40 I/O LINK–II SETTING ERROR (CHx) ER41 I/O LINK–II MODE ERROR (CHx) ER42 I/O LINK–II STATION NO. (Example: For the PMC–SB5. WN02 OPERATE ADDRESS ERROR WN03 ABORT NC–WINDOW/EXIN Modify the setting of the PMC system pa. The Ladder program was stopped during communication between the CNC and PMC.

contact FANUC to report the status (displayed message. and bb are internal error codes. 5) Power failure of Master or Slave device on I/O Link 6) Short circuit of DO terminal on I/O device 7) The motherboard is faulty. bb and cc are internal error codes. Power Mate. etc. when the error occurs.aa board. 2) If the error recurs even after the replacement.) is faulty. 3) Cabling is faulty. etc. 3) Check the cable specifications. occurrence frequency. when the error occurs.If this alarm is generated. 1) Check that the I/O allocation data matches the actual I/O device connection. etc. operation. master printed circuit board.). etc.aa.F. contact FANUC to report the status (displayed message. 2) A cable is not connected securely. PC061 FL–R xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy board. operation. system configuration. occurrence frequency. 740 . cable. and yyyyyyyyy are internal error codes. A communication error occurred in the I/O LINK. occurrence frequency. 2) If the error recurs even after the replacement.xxxxxxxx board. system configuration. operation. PC070 SUB65 CALL (STACK) Check the correspondence between the CALL/CALLU and SPE instructions. when the error occurs. A stack error occurred in Ladder function instruction CALL/CALLU. 4) I/O equipment (I/O unit. the base is not connected. PC062 FL–Wa 2) If the error recurs even after the rexxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy placement. system configuration. PC050 I/O LINK(CH1) aa:bb aa:bb PC050 IOLINK CH1 aaaa–bbbb:cccc PC060 FBUS xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy 1) Replace the master printed circuit A bus error occurred in the PMC. contact FANUC to report the status (displayed message. etc.) and the above internal error codes. ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 (2) System alarm messages Alarm number PC004 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy PC006 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy PC009 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy PC010 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy PC012 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy PC030 RAM PARITY aa:bb Faulty location/corrective action Contents 1) Replace the master printed circuit A CPU error occurred in the PMC. 1) Replace the master printed circuit A RAM parity error occurred in the PMC. probable causes include the following: 1) Although the base expansion is assigned when the I/O Unit A is used.). 2) Check that the cable is connected properly. 4) Replace the I/O device interface module.

PC097 PARITY ERR (LADDER) PC098 PARITY ERR (DRAM) 741 . operation. and so on) and the LED status on each board. 1) Replace the master printed circuit An error occurred in a RAM check. ERROR CODES Alarm number PC080 SYS EMG xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy PC081 FL EMG xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy Faulty location/corrective action Contents Report to FANUC the conditions in which A system alarm was caused by other softthis error occurred (display message. time at which the error occurred.). error frequency. when the error occurs. system configuration. system configuration. ware. operation. occurrence frequency. 2) If the error recurs even after the replacement.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. contact FANUC to report the status (displayed message. board. etc.

ERROR CODES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 (3) Alarm messages (For EDIT 1) Error message PROGRAM NOTHING ERASE ERROR F–ROM WRITE ERROR 13 F–ROM WRITE ERROR 28 WRITE ERROR F–ROM WRITE ERROR 12 F–ROM WRITE ERROR 29 READ ERROR ANOTHER USED F–ROM WRITE ERROR 9 F–ROM WRITE ERROR 36 F–ROM WRITE ERROR 10 F–ROM WRITE ERROR 37 I/O OPEN ERROR nn Flash ROM is used by other than PMC. Remedy) With LIST. nn = 22: Communication cannot be performed correctly. Remedy) Check whether channel setting. nn = 20: RS–232C connection is incorrect. check that “NOT USE” is indicated for RS–232C. I/O WRITE ERROR nn I/O READ ERROR nn DATA ERROR PROGRAM DATA ERROR WRITE PROTECT FILE NOT FOUND 742 . Remedy) Check whether the cable is broken. Replacement is required. but the data was illegal. nn = 6: The RS–232C option is not found. and other settings are correct. nn = –1: RS–232C is used by other than PMC. baud rate. Remedy) Check whether the cable is broken. On the online setting screen (see Section 8.F. check the file name or file number. nn = 22: Communication cannot be performed correctly. Ask FANUC Service Representative for replacement. nn = 20: RS–232C connection is incorrect. The CNC is not placed in the emergency stop state. and other settings are correct. nn = 20: RS–232C connection is incorrect.5. Flash ROM is abnormal. Remedy) Check whether channel setting. Contents and solution There is no program on flash ROM. baud rate.1 in III). Remedy) Set the protect switch of the memory card to OFF. Remedy) Check whether RS–232C is used by other than PMC. Remedy) Check the cable and setting (speed). and other settings are correct. Illegal data was read. connection. The specified file number or file name is not found. Remedy) Check whether channel setting. An attempt was made to output data. baud rate. Remedy) Check the alarm on the alarm screen. connection. connection. The memory card is protected.

check the file name or file number. nn = 114: The specified file is not found. Remedy) Set the protect switch of the memory card to OFF. Data differs between the device and PMC.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES F. Remedy) With LIST. nn = 32: The battery for the memory card is too weak. nn = 115: The specified file is protected. enter Y. Remedy) Format the memory card. Remedy) Replace the memory card battery. enter N. nn = 105: The memory card is unformatted. Replace the memory card with an S–RAM card. COMPARE ERR XXXXXX=AA : BB CONT? (Y/N) 743 . press the INPUT key. Remedy) Check whether a memory card is installed. Remedy) Check the file attribute. otherwise. Then. nn = 102: There is not enough free space on the memory card. nn = 31: The memory card cannot be written to. XXXXXX: Address aa: Data on the PMC bb: Data on the device Remedy) To continue operation. nn = 135: The memory card is unformatted. Remedy) Delete files to create free space. ERROR CODES Error message I/O WRITE ERROR nn I/O READ ERROR nn I/O COMPARE ERROR nn I/O DELETE ERROR nn I/O LIST ERROR nn I/O FORMAT ERROR nn Contents and solution nn = 30: No memory card is installed.

G. DIAGNOS MESSAGES 744 . DIAGNOS MESSAGES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 G OPERATOR MESSAGES. OPERATOR MESSAGES.

TIME OVER (M100–M109) Check the external device.1 OPERATOR MESSAGES Message Number Contents 2000 COOLANT MOTOR OVERHEAT The thermal relay for the coolant motor on the relay and interface PCB was tripped. If the coolant tank is short of coolant. dilute it down to a solution suitable for the workpiece to be machined. Since there is a difference between the rated output (W) of the motor and the current value (A) during normal operation. OPEN. Turning on the power again automatically eliminates the alarm. The alarm is also raised when the rated current of the motor is high during use of the FANUC standard coolant unit.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES G. When using concentrated coolant. INTERthe corresponding operation completion sig. clean the inside of the tank. When cuttings or similar materials accumulate on the bottom of the coolant tank.FACE). Check the level gage in the coolant unit. Use a coolant with the lowest possible viscosity. Also check the value of the current used to start the motor.) When the motor rotates rapidly and overheats because of insufficient coolant. 2002 AIR PRESSURE LOW Check the pressure regulating valve and X6. but the external device did not send OUTPUT of quick screen EXT. DIAGNOS MESSAGES G. 2003 745 . Check the air hose connection. This alarm may also be raised when the load to the coolant motor increases because the viscosity of the coolant is high. Alternatively. Turn off the coolant unit and wait a while until the coolant motor has cooled off. and the current of the motor increases. Close the splash guard door. replenish the coolant.4: Low air presair supply source of the regulator. or if an unusual sound is heard while it is running. excessive load is applied to the motor.2 A max. raising the alarm. check the permissible current range for the coolant control MCC. When a unit other than the FANUC standard coolant unit is used. change the input monitoring period for the A command between M100 and M109 was operation completion signal (M CODE specified.4:Overload Remedy Remarks 2001 THE DOOR OF THE SPLASH GUARD IS Close the front door. the rated current of the motor must be correct when the motor is used. A current greater than the specified current flows through the MCC (magnetic conductor) that controls the coolant motor. nal within the predetermined period. OPERATOR MESSAGES. (The coolant motor overheated. Turn off the power to release the tripped thermal relay in the coolant control MCC. The front door is not locked. sure The air supply pressure for the regulator is low.8 A X 20. then use a motor whose rated current is in the specified range. Permissible current range for the MCC for the coolant motor: 2. The thermal relay is then activated. If the motor is not running. the inside of the motor requires cleaning. Check whether the coolant motor is running. Normal setting: 1. or the motor must be replaced. or and when the motor does not move because the inside of the motor is clogged with cuttings.

Remedy Remarks 2005 2006 The external transformer is overheated. However.G. Even when the electromagnetic lock switch is set to LOCK. TURN OFF THE POWER Adjustment parameters were set. Turn off the power. Set to 0 at the time of overheat. the message thus output does not represent a failure. fied number of times.e.nical center. When the external transformer is overheated. intra–machine cleaning coolant output are turned off.arbor. X6.) This alarm is raised when the number of times the disc spring for clamping the arbor to the spindle opens and closes exceeds the specified value after the number of times tools are changed is counted. fore being completely closed. Programmed operation is disabled.5: Overheat detection. (i. Contact the nearest FANUC techment.. the message is displayed if The electromagnetic lock switch at the top of the front door is stopped immediately bethe front door is unlocked by the release key. OPERATOR MESSAGES. 2007 OVERHEAT (EXTERNAL TRANSFORMER) Stop operation until the external transformer is cooled. DISK SPRING LIFE OVER The spindle clamp/unclamp mechanism must be disassembled to inspect and The disc spring for the arbor clamp of the replace the disc spring for clamping the spindle was detected as requiring replace. 746 . spindle rotation. DIAGNOS MESSAGES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 2004 DOOR LOCK IS RELEASED BY FORCE Set the electromagnetic lock switch to LOCK by using the release key. coolant output. the disc spring was used the speci.

set automatic mode. set manuCYCLE Y START al mode. Check the oil level gage in the coolant unit. DIAGNOS MESSAGES Message Number Contents 2008 THE FLOOD COOLANT MOTOR THERMAL RELAY ON THE POWER PANEL PCB OPERATED (FLOOD COOLANT MOTOR OVERHEAT) The thermal relay for the flood coolant motor on the relay and interface PCB was tripped. Use the coolant whose viscosity is as low as possible. Reset the production count.5:Overload Remedy Remarks 2009 SPINDLE SHOULD BE TURNED BEFORE Before restarting the program. excessive load is applied to the motor. If the coolant tank is short of the coolant. the inside of the motor requires cleaning.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES G. replenish the coolant. If there is sufficient oil. This alarm may also be raised because the viscosity of the coolant is high when the load to the coolant motor increases.6 A max. then use a motor whose rated current is in the specified range. and press the cycle After the spindle rotation was stopped be. raising the alarm. and turn the spindle. OPERATOR MESSAGES. Add oil. (The flood coolant motor overheated. check the X9. check the permissible current range for the flood coolant control MCC. the rated current of the motor must be correct when the motor is used.start button. or the motor must be replaced. The thermal relay is then activated. A current greater than the specified current flows through the MCC (magnetic conductor) that controls the flood coolant motor. dilute it down to a sulution suitable for the workpiece to be machined.1 A X 20. OIL’S LEVEL IS LOWER THAN LIMIT There is little central lubricant oil left. When cuttings or similar materials accumulate on the bottom of the coolant tank. cause program operation was halted. The alarm is also raised when the rated current of the motor is high during use of the FANUC standard flood coolant unit. Then. Turning on the power again automatically eliminates the alarm. clean the inside of the tank. 2015 PRODUCTION IS COMPLETED The PRODUCTION COUNT has reached or exceeded the PLANNED PRODUCTION COUNT specified on the PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT FUNCTION screen (a QUICK screen). or if an unusual is heard while it is running. Permissible current range for the MCC for the coolant motor: 2. Also check the value of the current used to start the motor. Turn off the coolant unit and wait a while until the coolant motor has cooled off. Before using concentrated coolant. or when the motor does not move because the inside of the motor is clogged with cuttings.) When the motor rotates rapidly and overheats because of insufficient coolant. When a unit other than the FANUC standard flood coolant unit is used. program operation was restarted without restarting the spindle rotation. Keep relay K12#5 Wait until the cutter has returned to the reference position. 2010 2013 EXECUTING TOOL ESCAPE The tool breakage detection subfunction of the AI tooL monitor function was activated.7: Detection of cable connection for oil level detection or low oil level the setting of PMC parameter K12#5. The cutter is automatically returned to the reference position along the Z–axis. Since there is a difference between the rated output (W) of the motor and the current value (A) during normal operation. 747 . If the motor is not running. Check whether the flood coolant motor is running. Turn off the power to release the tripped thermal relay in the flood coolant control MCC. Normal setting: 2. and the current of the motor increases.

Replace the center–through coolant pump.manufactured by erator’s panel. Replace the line filter. 2025 PRESS B PALLET SET UP WHEN READY Machining is completed. 2019 ROTALY UNION LIFE OVER The operation time of the rotary union has exceeded 9999 hours. TANK) The line filter is clogged. Kawata Tec machining is restarted. 2020 C. X5. or 9000 hours. 6000 hours. 2018 FILTER LOADING (C. 2021 ADJUST C.T.COOLANT PRESSURF The operation time of the center–through coolant pump has reached 3000 hours. Replace the rotary union. Add coolant. 748 . X5.COOL.G.COOLANT PUMP LIFE OVER The operation time of the center–through coolant pump has exceeded 9999 hours.T. DIAGNOS MESSAGES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Message Number Contents 2017 COOLANT LOWER LIMIT The coolant level is low. 2024 PRESS A PALLET SET UP WHEN READY Machining is completed.0: Lower limit of coolant level Keep relay K3#6 X5. then press With pallet changer the setup button on the pallet changer op.5: Filter clogged state Set workpieces in each pallet. OPERATOR MESSAGES. Replace the suction filter.2: Filter clogged state Remedy Remarks Adjust the pressure of the center– through coolant. After pallets are changed. 2022 SUCTION FILTER LOADING The suction filter of the center through coolant pump is clogged.T.

axis movement is inhibited. indicated by selecting QUICK screen. program operation is disabled. In the production management function on QUICK screen. 5: EXT. Keep relay K3#2 is set to 1. Because program operation is halted by operation such as door open operation. Because the thermal relay for the coolant motor for cleaning the inside of the machine trips. Message INTERLOCK: n–AXIS (COSTOM PMC) Detailed Axis movement is inhibited by the custom PMC. axis movement is inhibited. and the spindle speed is below the specified speed. Because the door is not locked. so program operation is currently stopped. the movement on the additional axis is inhibited. Because the stop button is pressed on the operator’s panel.2 DIAGNOS MESSAGES Namber 0001 0005 0006 0011 0012 0013 0014 0016 0017 0018 0019 0020 0021 INTERLOCK:Z–AXIS (TOOL CHANGE AREA) INTERLOCK: ALL AXES (DOOR OPEND) INTERLOCK: ALL AXES (PROGRAM STOP) INTERLOCK: ALL AXES (SPINDLE SPEED CHECK) INTERLOCK: ALL AXES (EXTERNAL SIGNAL) Because the Z–axis is in the tool change area. INTERLOCK: n–AXIS (PALLET CHNGER) INTERLOCK: m–AXIS (m–AXIS UNCLAMP UNFINISHED) INTERLOCK: n–AXIS (m–AXIS CLAMP UNFINISHED) Because the additional axis is not yet clamped. Because a signal from a peripheral device is OFF. program operation is disabled. Because the power OFF button has been pressed on the operator’s panel. axis movement is inhibited. axis movement is inhibited. Because the door is open. axis movement is inhibited. is specified. (When m = 4) Axis movement is inhibited by the pallet changer. INTERFACE.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES G. Because the spindle rotation/stop button is pressed on the operator’s panel. the following condition is detected. 32: MAINTENANCE/SETTING. OPERATOR MESSAGES. Because the thermal relay for the coolant motor trips. 0022 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 INTERLOCK: ALL AXES (POWER OFF) HOLD (SPINDLE STOP BUTTON) HOLD (DOOR OPEND) HOLD (FLOOD COOLANT MOTER OVERHEAT) HOLD (FEED HOLD BUTTON) HOLD (COOLANT MOTER OVERHEAT) HOLD (M00. axis movement is inhibited. program operation is disabled. so program operation is currently stopped: Scheduled production quantity x production quantity Keep relay K7#5 is set to 1. Keep relay K14#5 is set to 1. M01. then FUNCTION SELECTION. Keep relay K3#3 is set to 1. Because program operation is halted. axis movement is inhibited. program operation is disabled. The use of all–axis interlock. program operation is disabled. M00 or M01 is specified. (When m = 4) Because the additional axis is not yet unclamped. STOP) HOLD (PRODUCTION COMPRETED) 749 . DIAGNOS MESSAGES G.

indicated by selecting QUICK screen. Keep relay K14#7 is set to 1. program operation is disabled. Because manual mode is set. then FUNCTION SELECTION.G. Because the signal from the dust collector is OFF. 0038 HOLD (EXTERNAL SIGNAL) 0039 0040 HOLD (CUSTOM PMC) HOLD (M100–M109) 0041 0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0050 0051 0052 HOLD (MANUAL OPERATION MODE) HOLD (POWER OFF) HOLD (DUST CATCHER) HOLD (SIDE DOOR OPENED) HOLD (ADJUSTABLE MODE) HOLD (AIR PRESSURE LOW) HOLD (EXTERNAL TRANSFORMER OVERHEAT) RESET (EXTERNAL SIGNAL) RESET (CUSTOM PMC) RESET (HOST COMPUTER) 0060 EMERGENCY STOP (OPERATOR’S PANEL) EMERGENCY STOP (EXTERNAL SIGNAL) 0061 0062 EMERGENCY STOP (CUSTOM PMC) 750 . INTERFACE. 5: EXT. the system is in the emergency stop state. The use of the external emergency stop function. Because a signal from a peripheral device is ON. Because a signal from a peripheral device is OFF. Because the power OFF button has been pressed on the operator’s panel. The custom PMC outputs the reset command. Keep relay K3#1 is set to 1. 32: MAINTENANCE/SETTING. program operation is disabled. According to the command from the custom PMC. Because the side door is not locked. Because the air pressure supplied to the regulator is low. 5: EXT. reset operation is being performed. program operation is disabled. INTERFACE. is the FIN type. Because a signal from a peripheral device is OFF. Keep relay K3#1 is set to 1. According to the command from the host computer. 32: MAINTENANCE/SETTING. The use of external feed hold. the emergency stop state has been entered. Keep relay K14#6 is set to 1. program operation is disabled. indicated by selecting QUICK screen. is specified. then M CODE OUTPUT. Program operation is inhibited by the custom PMC. 5: EXT. indicated by selecting QUICK screen. 32: MAINTENANCE/SETTING. Keep relay K11#0 is set to 1. reset operation is being performed. Because a command from M100 to M109 was specified and the completion signal was not input within the defined time. Programmed operation is disabled. The system is in the emergency stop state because the emergency stop button has been pressed on the operator’s panel. program operation is disabled. The external transformer is overheated. The system is now in turret adjustment mode. The output type. program operation is disabled. DIAGNOS MESSAGES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Namber 0037 Message HOLD (HOST COMPUTER) Detailed Program operation is currently stopped by a command from the host computer. OPERATOR MESSAGES. program operation is currently stopped. INTERFACE. then FUNCTION SELECTION. is specified.

program operation cannot be started. The Z–axis lock function is activated. the system is in the emergency stop state. The machine lock function is activated. Keep relay K1#0 is set to 0. Because the m–th axis (additional axis) is clamped. Keep relay K12#3 is set to 0. SERVO OFF: m–AXIS ATC ALARM (****) START SIGNAL ON MIRROR IMAGE ON: n–AXIS FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% MACHINE LOCK ON The feedrate override is set to 0%. Because the operation ready signal is not input. the system is in the emergency stop state. proUP MODULE) gram operation cannot be started. Because of a power failure. Because the door is not locked.Because the power failure backup module is not ready. On 31: SEQ SELECTION selected from QUICK screen. According to the command from the pallet changer. (Drill monitor function) 0064 0065 0066 0067 0068 0080 0081 0083 EMERGENCY STOP (PALLET CHANGER) EMERGENCY STOP (SPINDLE ALARM) EMERGENCY STOP (AUTO. the system is in the emergency stop state. the system is in the emergency stop state. program operation cannot be started. Keep relay K2#1 is set to 1. The mirror image function for the n–th axis is activated. Because of abnormality in the automatic door. so the system is in the emergency stop state. The signal line of the m–th axis (additional axis) is not connected. Because the servo system is not ready. the Z–axis is set for machine lock. On 31: SEQ SELECTION selected from QUICK screen. so the m–th axis is in the detach state (axis disconnection). (When m = 4) An ATC alarm is issued. 0119 Z–AXIS LOCK ON 751 . so the start disable state has been entered. program operation cannot be started. the axis is in the servo off state (excitation OFF). DIAGNOS MESSAGES Namber 0063 Message EMERGENCY STOP (TOOL UNCLAMP) Detailed No tool is attached to the spindle. the emergency stop state has been entered. START–LOCK (AUTOMATIC POWER OFF) DETACHED: m–AXIS Because the automatic power cut–off function is operating. A command to inhibit start was issued from the host PC. all axes are set for machine lock.DOOR SWITCH IS DEFECTIVE) EMERGENCY STOP (UNREADY) EMERGENCY STOP (POWER FAILURE BACKUP MODULE) START–LOCK (DOOR OPENED) START–LOCK (SERVO UNREADY) START–LOCK (HOST COMPUTER) 0084 0085 0090 0091 0092 0093 0100 0105 0110 0111 0115 0116 0117 0118 START–LOCK (POWER FAILURE BACK.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES G. This message appears for about one second when the start of operation is specified in automatic or MDI mode. **** indicates the cause of the alarm. Because an alarm is issued in the spindle. The jog override is set to 0%. OPERATOR MESSAGES.

(OPERATOR’S PANEL) TOOL CHANGE OF MODE IS PROHIBITED. IS PROHIBITED (SPECIAL TOOL) 752 . A spindle override is specified by the custom PMC or the like. Because a special tool (specified in D100) is attached to the spindle. OPERATOR MESSAGES. Keep relay K8#2 is set to 1. Bit 1 of PMC parameter K14 is set. IS PROHIBITED (CUSTOM PMC) SPINDLE ROT. and the use of the operator’s panel of the ROBODRILL is inhibited by the custom PMC. 0121 0122 0123 START COMMAND WAS IGNORED. On 31: SEQ SELECTION selected from QUICK screen. A cutting feed override is specified by the custom PMC or the like. 0124 0125 0126 0140 0141 0142 THE OPERATOR’S PANEL IS UNAVAILABLE. THE CUTTING OVERRIDE SWITCH IS UNAVAILABLE. SPINDLE ROT. Because the automatic side door is open. (For the full–keypad type operator’s panel) The custom PMC is programmed so that the start button is disabled. the item for disabling mode switching is set to ON. DIAGNOS MESSAGES APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Namber 0120 Message IN REMOTE OPERATION Detailed Remote operation mode is selected. spindle rotation is disabled. spindle rotation is disabled. On 31: SEQ SELECTION selected from QUICK screen. Bit 1 of PMC parameter K14 is set. (For the standard type operator’s panel) The remote operation button on the operator’s panel is on. (For the CE specification only) Keep relay K16#0 is set to 1. IS PROHIBITED (SIDE DOOR OPENED) SPINDLE ROT. remote mode is set to ON. Spindle rotation is disabled by the custom PMC (SO9.G. A CHANGE OF MODE IS PROHIBITED.6). THE SPINDLE OVERRIDE BUTTON IS UNAVAILABLE.

PMC PARAMETERS H [Timer] No. M82 output duration Wait time until automatic door lock is released For spindle speed zero detection For adjustment of rigid tapping mode setting Spindle activation completed in rigid tap mode For monitoring the switch of tool exchange area. Wait time until coolant for cleaning the inside of the machine stops automatically Wait time until spindle air purge stops Wait time until alarm output 2 (for buzzer) stops 272 1000 4000 120 144 104 48 0 48 96 200 296 296 10000 5000 3000 1000 30000 0 0 Wait time from door lock until operation starts Start button ON time from automatic door closure until operation starts Automatic door total time For checking automatic door close M81. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 PMC PARAMETERS Address T 00 T 02 T 04 T 06 T 08 T 10 T 12 T 14 T 16 T 18 T 20 T 22 T 24 T 26 T 28 T 30 T 32 T 34 T 36 T 38 T 40 T 42 T 44 T 46 T 48 T 50 T 52 T 54 Default 60000 60000 300000 300000 Function Standby time until the center–through coolant pump stops automatically.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES H. For checking automatic door close Center–through coolant air purge pulse output ON time Time during which air blow pulse output is OFF Air seal valve OFF delay Monitoring time for abnormal coolant pressure (upper limit) Monitoring time for abnormal low coolant pressure (lower limit) Delay from issue of a servo alarm until the spindle stops M code monitoring time (Reserved) Spindle restart check before operation 753 .

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Address T 56 T 58 T 60 T 62 T 64 T 66 T 68 T 70 T 72 T 74 T 76 T 78 T 80 T 82 T 84 T 86 T 88 T 90 T 92 T 94 T 96 T 98 Default 800 4000 5000 480 2000 5000 32 60000 5000 248 48 1000 2000 2000 104 744 736 3000 5000 Spindle restart check For spindle abnormality detection (only for the CE marking specification) Wait time until power is turned off automatically For external reset adjustment Wait time until the FACTOLINK screen is called automatically Time for monitoring low air pressure condition Tool unclamp state monitoring delay time Spindle air purge restart wait time Spindle air purge execution time at restart Spindle load monitor start delay after decrease in the feedrate For judging the spindle load warning level For monitoring attained spindle speed Door lock operation monitoring time Wait time from a single–block stop until the door is unlocked. Alarm 1006 ignore time after tool change completion Blinking ON time for state indication and so forth Blinking OFF time for state indication and so forth Wait time until remote operation is canceled forcibly Wait time until power–off is specified by remote operation Function 754 .H. PMC PARAMETERS APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 [Timer] No.

Preset value of monitoring time for clogged–filter alarm **** 10 Current number of spindle axis override stages Preset value for the time allowed before the internal light goes off automatically. PMC PARAMETERS [Counter] No.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES H. **** 20 Current value for conical disc spring lifetime ( 10000) Preset number of spindle axis override stages **** 9999 Current value for conical disc spring lifetime ( 1) Preset lifetime of conical disc spring Address C 00 Default 9999 Function Preset lifetime of conical disc spring 755 . 1 C 02 C 04 2 C 06 C 08 3 C 10 C 12 4 C 14 C 16 5 C 18 C 20 6 C 22 C 24 7 C 26 C 28 8 C 30 C 32 9 C 34 C 36 10 C 38 C 40 11 C 42 C 44 12 C 46 C 48 13 C 50 C 52 14 C 54 C 56 15 C 58 C 60 16 C 62 0 (Not used) 0 0 (Not used) (Not used) 0 0 (Not used) (Not used) 0 0 (Not used) (Not used) 0 0 (Not used) (Not used) 0 0 (Not used) (Not used) 0 0 Current value for DI/DO test (Not used) 0 120 (Not used) Preset value for DI/DO test 0 0 (Not used) (Not used) **** 0 Current value of the center–through coolant pump operation time (Not used) **** 9999 Current value of the rotary union operation time Preset value of the center–through coolant pump operation time **** 9999 Current value of monitoring time for clogged–filter alarm Preset value of the rotary union operation time **** 100 Current value for the time allowed before the internal light goes off automatically.

H. PMC PARAMETERS APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 [Counter] No. 17 C 66 C 68 18 C 70 C 72 19 C 74 C 76 20 C 78 **** Current number of feedrate deceleration stages 0 10 Current value for external equipment control Preset number of feedrate deceleration stages 0 3 (Not used) Preset value for external equipment control 0 0 (Not used) (Not used) Address C 64 Default 0 (Not used) Function 756 .

7 f K 1.1 0 1 K 0.4 0 1 K 1.7 f 0 1 757 .5 0 1 K 0.4 0 1 K 0.3 0 1 K 0. Y and Z axis Does not OFF Flood coolant at emergency stop OFF flood coolant at emergency stop Tool weight 3kg Tool weight 2kg Disables the alarm/diagnostic window automatic display function. Enables the alarm/diagnostic window automatic display function. Pressing the reset key does not stop the spindle or coolant Pressing the reset key stops the spindle and coolant K 1.0 Setting f f f f f f 0 1 K 0.3 0 1 K 1.2 0 1 K 1. Allows the edit button to display DATA I/O. pressing the menu operation button does not switch between screens.6 Function Uses the high-speed interface for M/S/T/B code processing Uses the standard interface for M/S/T/B code processing Does not allow the edit button to display DATA I/O.6 0 1 K 1. When QUICK screen or COORDINATES/OFFSET screen is being displayed.5 0 1 K 1. PMC PARAMETERS [Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default) Keep relay K 0.1 f f f f f f 0 1 0 1 0 1 Does not restart the coolant after changing the tool Restarts the coolant after changing the tool Outputs an alarm at tool unclamp Does not output an alarm at tool unclamp Executes an even parity check Executes an odd parity check The spindle does not stop when the all–axis interlock signal is off The spindle stops when the all–axis interlock signal is off Turret release is disabled if the program is in the protected state Turret release is enabled if the program is in the protected state The override values are initialized when power is turned on The override values are not initialized when power is turned on The tool life expiration advance notice value is set by cycle quantity or time The tool life expiration advance notice value is set by percent When QUICK screen or COORDINATES/OFFSET screen is being displayed.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES H. Automatic setting of work coordinate screen is X and Y axis Automatic setting of work coordinate screen is X. pressing the menu operation button switches between screens.2 0 1 K 0. K 0.0 f K 1.

and Z-axes in the fourth-axis unclamp state Disables movement along the X-. 3. 5 of external interface. Extends the output duration of the spindle taper air blow. Disables the detection of the lower coolant limit. PMC PARAMETERS APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 [Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default) Keep relay K 2. 3. Use the position switch signal 1.5 0 1 K 3.7 0 1 K 3. Enables the detection of the upper coolant limit.6 0 1 K 2. Y-.1 (Note) K 3. Energy saving control is exercised for spindle air purge operation. A tool exchange enabled area is set up using the position switch A tool exchange disabled area is set up using the position switch The tool exchange disabled area setting function is disabled.0 f K 3. 758 .1 f Setting 0 1 0 1 K 2. Y-.3 0 1 K 3.0 f K 2. Keeps the center–through coolant pump ON at all times.4 0 1 K 2. 2. 4. Enables the interface for the automatic laser measurement test.H. The tool exchange disabled area setting function is enabled.5 0 1 K 2. Disables the interface for the automatic laser measurement test.6 0 1 K 3. or Z-axes in the fourth-axis unclamp state Performs ON/OFF control of the center–through coolant pump. Use the position switch signal 1. Disables automatic control of the center–through coolant pump.3 f f f f f 0 1 K 2.2 K 2. 4.7 0 1 M63 does not turn on the machine status output (with Kawata Tech APC) M63 turns on the machine status output (with Kawata Tech APC) Does not extend the output duration of the spindle taper air blow. 7 of external interface.4 f f f f 0 1 K 3. Does not use the fourth-axis clamp/unclamp command Uses the fourth-axis clamp/unclamp command Enables movement along the X-. Enables automatic control of the center–through coolant pump. The preview control OFF parameter is set. The preview control ON parameter is set. Function Neither operator message 2005 nor 2010 is treated as alarm Both operator messages 2005 and 2010 are treated as alarm Does not deactivate the fourth axis in the clamp state Deactivates the fourth axis in the clamp state NOTE Be sure to set 0.2 f f f 0 1 0 1 0 1 K 3. 2. Spindle air purge operation is turned on at all times.

Setting Function 759 . no operator message is displayed.4 f f f f 0 1 K 4.3 K 5.4 0 1 K 5. When production is completed. When the coolant oil level becomes low. cycle termination occurs and an alarm is displayed.1 f f f 0 1 K 4.6 0 1 K 4. Outputs the parity check signal to contact a Outputs the parity check signal to contact b When production is completed. Enables center–through coolant control. Center–through coolant air purge is turned off by M24. Monitors the M code operation time. (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) Disables the control of the manual button for the center through coolant. an operator message is displayed.2 0 1 K 4. Disables the detection of the clogging of the suction filter.3 0 1 K 4.1 K 5.7 (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) Disables center–through coolant control.5 K 5.0 K 4. Enables the detection of the clogging of the suction filter. When the coolant oil level becomes low.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES H. a message is just displayed. Enables the control of the manual button for the center through coolant. PMC PARAMETERS [Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default) Keep relay K 4.5 0 1 K 4.2 K 5. Does not monitor the M code operation time.7 0 1 K 5.0 K 5.6 K 5. Center–through coolant air purge is turned off by M09.

Outputs the auto mode signal in a mode other than manual mode Outputs the auto mode signal in AUTO mode Does not light the feed hold lamp in the operation stop state Lights the feed hold lamp in the operation stop state Enables the external door control signal in a mode other than AUTO mode Always enables the external door control signal The remote mode is set for remote operation. Stops alarm output 2 automatically.3 0 1 K 7. Does not turn on the DMMC signal at remote operation. Specifies M06 in TOOL CHANGE selected from MENU OPERATION.6 f f 0 1 K 7. Does not stop operation upon the completion of machining by M91 or M92 Disables the stop operation by M91 or M92 upon the completion of machining Does not cancel the screen saver when the door is opened.H. 760 . Does not restart coolant/air blow at a restart of operation. Disables the side automatic door adjustment function Enables the side automatic door adjustment function NOTE Be sure to set 0.2 0 1 K 6. Turns the M83 output OFF at the end of a cycle. The remote mode is set for direct operation. Cancels the screen saver when the door is opened.6 0 1 K 6.1 0 1 K 6.5 f f f f f f f f f 0 1 K 6.7 (Note) 0 1 Function Displays a message when the door is opened by M00 Does not display a message when the door is opened by M00 Displays an operator message when the door is opened Does not display an operator message when the door is opened Does not stop alarm output 2 automatically. Does not automatically stop coolant for cleaning the inside of the machine.4 0 1 K 6.4 0 1 K 7. Enables the cycle start signal check function.0 0 1 K 7.7 0 1 K 7. Does not specify M06 in TOOL CHANGE selected from MENU OPERATION. Disables the cycle start signal check function. Automatically stops coolant for cleaning the inside of the machine. PMC PARAMETERS APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 [Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default) Keep relay K 6.2 0 1 K 7. Does not turn the M83 output OFF at the end of a cycle. Turns on the DMMC signal at remote operation.1 0 1 K 7.5 0 1 K 7. Restarts coolant/air blow at a restart of operation.0 Setting f f f f f 0 1 K 6.3 0 1 K 6.

4 f f f 0 1 K 8.5 0 1 K 8. Turns machine state output 3 ON when the message transfer flashing light turn–on command is issued.3 0 1 K 8. Enables the tool change button on the operator’s panel.0 Setting f f f f 0 1 K 8. The flashing light is turned on when a flashing light turn–on command is specified with message transfer.1 f 0 1 K 9.” (K9#6=1) K 9. Does not turn machine state output 3 ON when the message transfer flashing light turn–on command is issued.2 0 1 K 8. The flashing light blinks when a flashing light turn–on command is specified with message transfer. Disables the tool change button on the operator’s panel.3 (Note 3) 1 K 9. Does not display the order. ON the block skip signal on the external signal.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES H. PMC PARAMETERS [Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default) Keep relay K 8. Turns off warning-level or breakage-level detection output upon a reset Turns off warning-level or breakage-level detection output upon a reset or when the tool is changed Enables a warning level and destruction level to be detected and output when the AI tool monitor function is used. ON the block skip function on the operator’s panel screen setting. Uses feed by single–digit F code. lot number. 6757 and 6758.7 f 0 1 K 9.0 f 0 1 Function The internal light is turned on or off according to the setting on the screen. Displays FACTOLINK and the screen when the program protection key is “protection.2 (Note 3) 1 K 9. Turns machine state output 2 when the message transfer flashing light turn– on command is issued.1 0 1 K 8. regardless of whether the AI tool monitor function is used. Enables a warning level and destruction level to be detected and output. Enables activation of the single block function from the machine operator’s panel Enables activation of the single block function by the input of an external signal Enables activation of the dry run function from the machine operator’s panel Enables activation of the dry run function by the input of an external signal Does not use feed by single–digit F code.4 f f 0 1 K 9. The internal light is turned on or off according to an external signal. The logging data operation time is determined from NC parameters Nos. 761 . lot number. and ID code on COUNTER screen.” (K9#6=1) Does not display FACTOLINK and the screen when the program protection key is “protection. 6751 and 6752. Does not turn machine state output 2 ON when the message transfer flashing light turn–on command is issued. Displays the order. and ID code on COUNTER screen.6 0 1 K 8.5 0 1 f 0 f 0 The logging data operation time is determined from NC parameters Nos.

[Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default) Keep relay K 10. Enables the automatic door open/close button in the manual mode only. spindle orientation is disabled.2 and K9.4 0 1 K 11. PMC PARAMETERS APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 [Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default) Keep relay K 9.H.3 are equal to 1. The door is unlocked at single–block operation stop time.7 Function Does not switch the screen display to the FACTOLINK screen even when you press an alphanumeric key. (Reservation) Lamp checking function OFF Lamp checking function ON For FACTOLINK For FACTOLINK Disables the hard copy function. (Reservation) (Reservation) The door is not unlocked with M00/M01. machine state output 1 turns ON. Disables spindle rotation when the door is unlocked. Enables spindle rotation when the door is unlocked.5 K 11. The door is unlocked with M00/M01. Function 762 .1 0 1 K 11.3 0 1 K 10. regardless of the operation mode. spindle orientation is enabled.6 Setting f 0 1 K 9.7 f 0 1 (For adjustment) Makes turret adjustment mode invalid.3 are equal to 0 or when K9. When a special tool is mounted. Makes turret adjustment mode valid.6 K 10. NOTE When K9.2 0 1 K 11.2 and K9. Enables the hard copy function.7 K 11.3 f f 0 1 K 11.0 f f f 0 1 K 11. Switches the screen display to the FACTOLINK screen when you press an alphanumeric key.4 0 1 K 10. When a special tool is mounted.2 f f f 0 1 K 10. The door is not unlocked at single–block operation stop time.6 K 11.1 K 10.0 Setting f 0 1 K 10. Enables the automatic door open/close button.5 K 10.

The door will be unlocked when M02 or M30 is executed. (Reservation) K 13.2 f 0 1 The automatic door is closed when the start button is released.6 K 13.5 0 1 Sets the oil level signal to normal open Sets the oil level signal to normal close The door will not be unlocked when M02 or M30 is executed (only for the CE marking specification). PMC PARAMETERS [Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default) Keep relay K 12. Turns on the start button and automatic operation in–progress signal while the automatic door is being opened and closed.7 f 0 1 K 13.1 K 12. K 12.4 f f Uses the detach function and overtravel function for the fourth and fifth axes Does not use the detach function and overtravel function for the fourth and fifth axes (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) Setting 0 1 Function The air pressure drop signal is normally open.7 (Reservation) (Reservation) (For adjustment) 763 .1 f 0 1 Does not turn on the start button and automatic operation in–progress signal while the automatic door is being opened and closed. Door lock control A Door lock control B (Reservation) K 12.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES H. The automatic door is closed when the start button is pressed.0 f K 12.4 K 13.5 K 13. The air pressure drop signal is normally closed.3 f 0 1 K 12.6 0 1 K 12.0 K 13.3 K 13.2 K 12. K 13.

5 f f f 0 1 K 14.3 f K 14.1 K 15. Disables custom PMC editing. The custom PMC function does not control spindle and cutting feed overrides. Does not allow the custom PMC function to control the coolant for cleaning the inside of the machine. Turns on SI8.3 K 15.0 in the MEM mode. the M01 stop button is also disabled.2 K 15.4 K 15.6 K 15. Does not execute axis interlock control using the custom PLC function Executes axis interlock control using the custom PLC function Does not execute emergency stop control using the custom PLC function Executes emergency stop control using the custom PLC function Does not execute feed hold control using the custom PLC function Executes feed hold control using the custom PLC function (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) Function K 14. The custom PMC function controls spindle and cutting feed overrides.6 0 1 K 14. the M01 stop button is enabled.2 f 0 1 Does not use the custom PLC function Uses the custom PLC function Disables the operator’s panel disable function. the door open/close button is also disabled.5 K 15.4 f 0 1 0 1 0 1 Enables custom PMC editing. Enables the operator’s panel disable function.2 f K 14. Uses the additional axis clamp control signal as standard. While the operator’s panel is in the disabled state.7 0 1 K 15.H. PMC PARAMETERS APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 [Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default) Keep relay K 14.7 f f f 0 1 K 16. While the operator’s panel is in the disabled state. Assigns the additional axis clamp control signal with the custom PMC function.0 in the MEM mode/remote mode. (For CE mark specifications only) While the operator’s panel is in the disabled state. Turns on SI8.1 0 1 K 14.0 Setting f f 0 1 K 14.0 K 15. While the operator’s panel is in the disabled state.0 0 1 K 16. (For CE mark specifications only) 764 . Allows the custom PMC function to control the coolant for cleaning the inside of the machine. the door open/close button is enabled.1 0 1 K 16.

While the operator’s panel is disabled. spindle rotation and coolant supply are canceled.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES H.3 Setting f 0 1 K 16.6 K 16.7 (System–reserved) (System–reserved) Function While the operator’s panel is disabled. PMC PARAMETERS [Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default) Keep relay K 16.5 K 16. 765 . spindle rotation and coolant supply are not canceled.4 K 16.

0 K 19.2 0 1 K 17.3 K 17.4 K 18.1 K 18. Enables the thermal displacement compensation function.4 K 19.0 K 17.H.7 K 19.2 K 18.3 K 19.0 K 18.2 K 19.3 K 18.6 K 17. Function 766 . PMC PARAMETERS APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 [Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default) Keep relay K 17.7 K 18.7 (Reservation) (Reservation) (Reservation) (Reservation) (Factory–adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Reservation) (Reservation) (Reservation) Setting (Reservation) Disables the thermal displacement compensation function.1 K 19.1 f f 0 1 K 17.6 K 18.5 K 17. Renishaw’s touch probe is controlled. Renishaw’s touch probe is not controlled.6 K 19.5 K 18.5 K 19.4 K 17.

2 K 22.4 K 21.7 f 0 1 K 21. At remote mode key switching on the operator’s panel.7 K 22.1 K 21. When MDI mode is selected by remote operation.2 K 21. operation is not stopped.0 K 22.3 0 1 K 20.1 K 22.6 K 22. PMC PARAMETERS [Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default) Keep relay K 20. The remote operator’s panel is of the full keypad type. 767 .5 K 21. In remote operation.5 K 22. Function The remote operator’s panel is of the standard type.3 K 22. When MDI mode is selected by remote operation.4 0 1 K 20. In remote operation.3 K 21.0 Setting f f 0 1 K 20.1 0 1 K 20. operations on the standard selection screen are not disabled. In remote operation.7 K 23. operations on the standard selection screen are disabled.5 K 20. the screen display is not changed to the menu operation screen. the screen switch and display keys on the operator’s panel can be used. program editing and data setting are not permitted.0 In remote operation.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES H. Spindle override from the PC is specified with an override value. In remote operation. the screen switch and display keys on the operator’s panel cannot be used.6 K 21.0 K 21. In remote operation. program editing and data setting are permitted.4 K 22. At remote mode key switching on the operator’s panel.6 f 0 1 K 20. Spindle override from the PC is specified as the number of stages. the screen display is changed to the menu operation screen. operation is stopped.2 f f f 0 1 K 20.

5 K 23.H.4 K 23.6 K 23.7 Setting Function 768 .3 K 23. PMC PARAMETERS APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 [Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default) Keep relay K 23.1 K 23.2 K 23.

6171X when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected Values of NC parameter No. 1621X and No. 6171Y when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected 155 165 173 179 183 185 187 189 191 193 195 0 3000 96 Override of feed deceleration stage 0 Override of feed deceleration stage 1 Override of feed deceleration stage 2 Override of feed deceleration stage 3 Override of feed deceleration stage 4 Override of feed deceleration stage 5 Override of feed deceleration stage 6 Override of feed deceleration stage 7 Override of feed deceleration stage 8 Override of feed deceleration stage 9 Override of feed deceleration stage 10 Magazine number for which no alarm is issued at tool unclamp time. PMC PARAMETERS [Data table] (A circle indicates the default) Address D0 D2 D4 D6 D8 D 10 D 12 D 14 D 16 D 18 D 20 D 22 D 24 D 26 D 28 D 30 D 32 D 34 D 36 D 38 D 40 D 42 D 44 D 46 D 48 D 50 D 52 D 54 D 56 D 58 D 60 **** **** **** **** **** **** Values of NC parameter No. 1620X and No. 6191X when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Values of NC parameter No. 6171Y when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Values of NC parameter No.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES H. 1620Y and No. 1620Y and No. Interval for monitoring center through coolant pump operation time Used for additional axis reference position return adjustment Default 11 130 **** 11 0 **** 0 0 Function Number of feed deceleration stages in the warning level Constant for calculating the warning level Constant for calculating the breakage level Constant for calculating the breakage level Constant for calculating the breakage level No-load level (For adjustment) (For adjustment) 769 . 1621Y and No. 6191Y when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Values of NC parameter No. 1620X and No. 6171X when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Values of NC parameter No.

6171Z when a tool weight of 2 kg is selected Values of NC parameter No. 6172X when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6191X when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected Values of NC parameter No. 6172X when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6191Z when a tool weight of 3 kg is selected Values of NC parameter No. 6172Z when a tool weight of 2 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. 1620Z and No. 6192Y when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected Values of NC parameter No. 6172Y when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6192Z when a tool weight of 2 kg is selected 770 . 1620Z and No. 6192Z when a tool weight of 3 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6192Y when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6191Z when a tool weight of 2 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6171Z when a tool weight of 3 kg is selected Values of NC parameter No. 6172Y when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. 1621X and No. 6191Y when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected Value of NC parameter No. 1621Z and No.H. 1621Z and No. 6192X when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6172Z when a tool weight of 3 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. PMC PARAMETERS APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 [Data table] (A circle indicates the default) Address D 62 D 64 D 66 D 68 D 70 D 72 D 74 D 76 D 78 D 80 D 82 D 84 D 86 D 88 D 90 D 92 D 94 D 96 D 98 D 100 D 850 D 851 D 852 D 853 D 854 D 855 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Magazine number of special tool T1 spindle taper air blow extension time T2 spindle taper air blow extension time T3 spindle taper air blow extension time T4 spindle taper air blow extension time T5 spindle taper air blow extension time T6 spindle taper air blow extension time Default **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** Function Values of NC parameter No. 6192X when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected Value of NC parameter No. 1621Y and No.

B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES H. PMC PARAMETERS [Data table] (A circle indicates the default) Address D 856 D 857 D 858 D 859 D 860 D 861 D 862 D 863 D 864 D 865 D 866 D 867 D 868 D 869 D 870 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Function T7 spindle taper air blow extension time T8 spindle taper air blow extension time T9 spindle taper air blow extension time T10 spindle taper air blow extension time T11 spindle taper air blow extension time T12 spindle taper air blow extension time T13 spindle taper air blow extension time T14 spindle taper air blow extension time T15 spindle taper air blow extension time T16 spindle taper air blow extension time T17 spindle taper air blow extension time T18 spindle taper air blow extension time T19 spindle taper air blow extension time T20 spindle taper air blow extension time T21 spindle taper air blow extension time 771 .

Card standard PCMCIA (personal Computer Memory Card International Association) PC Card standard Release 2.02 2. Card configuration PCMCIA TYPE I to TYPE II 3. Card operation mode PC–ATA specification 4.1. Flash ATA card which Fanuc has checked the operations Manufacturer Product Name Memory Capacity 8MB 15MB 30MB 45MB 16MB 32MB 48MB 12MB 20MB 40MB 4MB 8MB 16MB 20MB 32MB 40MB Under volume production Power supply voltage Discontinued (C) HITACHI HB286008A3 HB286015A3 HB286030A3 HB286045A3 HB289016A4 HB289032A4 HB289048A4 (C) MATSUSHITA BN–012AB BN–020AB BN–040AB (C) SanDisk SDP3B–4 SDP3B–8 SDP3B–16 SDP3B–20 SDP3B–32 SDP3B–40 772 . RECOMMENDED ATA CARD APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 I RECOMMENDED ATA CARD 1.3V type (automatic change) 5.I. Power supply voltage 5V type or 5V/3. PCMCIA PC Card ATA Release 1.

B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES I.3V type card.3 V. 773 . RECOMMENDED ATA CARD NOTE 1 Recommended for data input/output. 4 It’s impossible to use 3. the cards above can be physically inserted into the memory card slot. and can be used with T14iA. 2 Fanuc canot guarantee Flash ATA card except aboe cards. T14iB. T14iB. Operation for other applications is not guaranteed. and T14iC only. Be careful when handling the cards above. but the memory card or CNC control unit is electrically destroyed when the power is turned on. 3 The cards above support automatic switching between 5 V and 3. and T14iC. With models other than T14iA.

774 . EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION This chapter describes the specifications of the embedded Ethernet function for Series 16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B.J.

3 With FS21i–B. The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slot to the left of the front LCD for temporary communication. 4 In the description of the PCMCIA Ethernet card given here. Do not use the PCMCIA Ethernet card for routine communication. be careful not to damage the card by hitting the card with an object. the card cannot be used for the embedded Ethernet function. 775 . the card is assumed to be installed in the Series 16i/18i/21i–B. When the PCMCIA Ethernet card is installed in the Series 160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET AND PCMCIA ETHERNET The embedded Ethernet function can be used by selecting one of two types of devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. This means that some part of the card is projected.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. the built–in Ethernet port cannot be used. NOTE 1 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card for temporary communication only. remove the card immediately to prevent the card from being damaged. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION J. The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slot to the left of the front LCD for temporary communication. 2 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slot to the left of the LCD. After using the PCMCIA Ethernet card. When using the PCMCIA Ethernet card.

data such as work instructions can be displayed on the CNC screen. D NC data transfer Logging Machine state information can be automatically sent to the personal computer. For details. C.2.2 FOCAS1/Ethernet Function The FOCAS1/Ethernet function allows a personal computer to remotely control and monitor the CNC. The following NC data can be transferred by operations on the personal computer: D Data related to control axes/spindles H Absolute position 776 NC data transfer .2 LIST OF FUNCTIONS With the embedded Ethernet function.1 FACTOLINK Function With the FACTOLINK function. and NC data can be transferred by operations on the NC.J. For details. The FOCAS1/Ethernet function can transfer a wider range of NC data than the DNC1/Ethernet function. NOTE The FACTOLINK function is usable with the control software for the built–in Ethernet function series 656A and edition 02 and later. refer to “FANUC FACTOLINK Script Function Operator’s Manual (B–75054EN)”.2. Screen display Data such as work instructions created using a personal computer can be displayed on the NC screen by operations on the NC. the following functions can be operated: S FACTOLINK function S FOCAS1/Ethernet function S DNC1/Ethernet function S FTP file transfer function J. J. The following NC data can be transferred by operations on the NC: D NC program D NC file data H Parameter H Ladder program H C language executor execution form H Macro executor execution form H NC system file D PMC data H Addresses T. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. refer to “FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/Ethernet CNC/PMC Data Window Library Description”. K.

K. D H Extended nonvolatile data Remote operation From the personal computer. A. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION D D D D D D D D D D D D D H Relative position H Machine position H Remaining travel amount H Actual speed NC program Part program storage directory information NC data file H Parameter H Tool offset value H Custom macro variable H Workpiece origin offset H Setting data H P code macro variable H Pitch error compensation Tool life management data History data H Operation history data H Alarm history data Servo–/spindle–related data Data related to waveform diagnosis Modal data Diagnosis data A/D conversion data Alarm information NC system identification information PMC data H Addresses G. F. DNC operation cannot be performed. R. Y. T. 777 .B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. X. C. the following operations can be performed: D NC program selection D NC program deletion D External reset NOTE With the FOCAS1/Ethernet function of the built–in Ethernet function.

D NC data transfer Remote operation From the personal computer. A.J. 778 .3 DNC1/Ethernet Function The DNC1/Ethernet function allows a personal computer to remotely control and monitor the CNC. F. K. T. the following operations can be performed: D NC program selection D NC program deletion D External reset NOTE With the DNC1/Ethernet function of the built–in Ethernet function. Y. C. X. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. For details.2. R. refer to “FANUC Personal Computer FA System Windows NT Version Operator’s Manual (B–75044EN)”. DNC operation cannot be performed. The DNC1/Ethernet function provides software libraries in a simpler function call format when compared with the FOCAS1/Ethernet function. The following NC data can be transferred by operations on the personal computer: D NC program D Part program storage directory information D NC file data H Parameter H Tool offset value H Custom macro variable D Alarm information D NC system identification information D PMC data H Addresses G.

EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Differences between the FOCAS1/Ethernet function and DNC1/Ethernet function Compared with the FOCAS1/Ethernet function. NOTE The FTP file transfer function is usable with the control software for the built–in Ethernet function series 656A and edition 02 and later. the DNC1/Ethernet function provides software libraries in a simpler function call format for frequently used functions. The function can read and punch NC programs and various types of NC data.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. NC data transfer [Personal computer ´ Part program storage] The following NC data can be transferred by operations on the NC: D NC program D NC file data H Parameter H Tool offset value H Workpiece origin offset H Pitch error compensation H M code group (Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is–B only) D History data H Operation history data 779 .2. J.4 FTP File Transfer Function The FTP file transfer function transfers files with FTP.

EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J.5 Functional Differences between the Embedded Ethernet Function and the Ethernet Function Based on the Option Board The table below indicates the differences between the embedded Ethernet function and the Ethernet function based on the option board. Embedded Ethernet FOCAS1/Ethernet function CNC screen display function DNC operation Data server function FACTOLINK function Available Not available Not available Not available (NOTE 1) Available Option board Available Available Available Available Available 780 .2.J.

resulting in a decrease in performance of processing such as CNC screen display processing. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION NOTE 1 The built–in Ethernet function includes the FTP file transfer function. 781 . So.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. So. when automatic operation is being performed or many controlled axes are involved. and communication based on the built–in Ethernet function can affect the processing of the CNC. communication based on the built–in Ethernet function can decrease the performance of such processing. the built–in Ethernet function has higher priority over CNC screen display processing. and macro executor processing (excluding execution macros). 2 Compared with the option board. Embedded Ethernet Number of clients that can be connected simultaneously 5 clients maximum Ethernet board 10 clients maximum 10 units maximum Fast Ethernet board 20 clients maximum 20 units maximum Number of personal 1 unit computers that can be connected simultaneously (recom–mended) 3 Communications using the built–in Ethernet function is processed by the CPU of the CNC. This function is equivalent to the NC data transfer function in the FTP mode of the data server function of the option board. 4 Note that when the built–in Ethernet function is connected to an intranet that handles large volumes of broadcast data. communication may become slower. the processing of broadcast data can take a longer time. On the contrary. the built–in Ethernet function allows a smaller number of FOCAS1/Ethernet clients to be connected simultaneously. The built–in Ethernet function has lower priority than axis–by–axis processing such as automatic operation processing and manual operation. for example. This means that the operation state of the CNC can affect the performance of communication based on the built–in Ethernet function. C language executor processing (excluding high–level tasks).

1 Notes on using the FACTOLINK function for the first time CAUTION When using the built–in Ethernet function for the first time.3 SETTING THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION This section describes the setting of the parameters for the embedded Ethernet function for the Series 16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. the optional function corresponding to a CNC used is required.1 Parameter Setting of the FACTOLINK Function This subsection describes the settings required to operate the FACTOLINK function when the embedded Ethernet function for the Series 16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B is used.3.1. Note that if an incorrect IP address is set. NOTE 1 When the FACTOLINK function is used. Series 16i–TB A02B–0281–S708 Series 16i–MB A02B–0282–S708 Series 18i–TB A02B–0283–S708 Series 18i–MB A02B–0284–S708 Series 21i–TB A02B–0285–S708 Series 21i–MB A02B–0286–S708 2 With the FACTOLINK function. 782 . for example.3. consulting with your network manager. J.J. only one FACTOLINK server can be connected to one CNC. make various settings including IP address setting carefully and conduct a communication test sufficiently. the entire network can suffer from a communication error. J.

The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed. set the parameters for operating the FACTOLINK function. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 6 By using the MDI keys and soft keys.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. NOTE The parameters for the built–in Ethernet port and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other. enter and update data. the parameters for the embedded Ethernet port can be set. When no option board is installed.2 FACTOLINK parameter setting screen Display On the Ethernet parameter setting screen.3. 4 Press the [ETHPRM] soft key. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 5 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key. By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key. 783 . The Ethernet parameter setting screen appears. no information is displayed. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION J. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device.1. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set.

the data is displayed.J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 7 Switch the screen display with the page keys If data is already registered. PAGE PAGE . 784 .

(Example of specification format: “192.3. (Example of specification format: “192.168.255.3 Parameters Parameters 0802 The NC parameters related to the FACTOLINK function are described below. For details. Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK Description Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.0”) Specify the IP address of the router.255.168. Communicationchannel [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 21: Select the embedded Ethernet. A specified port number must match “ocsnc” of the services file of the personal computer. PORT NUMBER J. 785 .1.168. 0 : Logging is not performed. (Example of specification format: “192.1.254”) ROUTER IP ADDRESS FACTOLINK setting items Set the items related to the host computer with which the FACTOLINK server operates. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Display item and setting items Display item related to the embedded Ethernet function Embedded Ethernet TCP/IP setting items The item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed.Specify this item when the network contains a router.1. (Example of specification format: “255.100”) Specify a port number to be used with the FACTOLINK function. #7 0810 #6 #5 MONO #4 TIME #3 #2 #1 #0 BGS [Data type] Bit BGS When the FACTOLINK screen is not displayed: 1 : Logging is performed in the background. Item IP ADDRESS Description Specify the IP address of a personal computer to be accessed by the FACTOLINK function.1”) Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.1. refer to “FANUC FACTOLINK Script Function Operator’s Manual (B–75054EN)”. The valid input range is 5001 to 65535. Item MAC ADDRESS Description Embedded Ethernet MAC address Set the TCP/IP–related items of the embedded Ethernet.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J.

1. 786 . 0811 Type of logging [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0. MONO When the FACTOLINK screen is displayed: 1 : Two–tone monochrome display is used. 0814 Trigger PMC address for logging [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 65535 Set a PMC address that serves as a trigger for specifying logging data. 0 : “Wed Nov 12 00:00:00” format is used. If 0 is set. 20. 0 : Color display is used. 21 0 : D address area 1 : R address area 10 : Fixed data only 20 : D address area + fixed data 21 : R address area + fixed data 0812 PMC address for logging data [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 65535 Set a start PMC address for storing logging data. 0815 Logging data transmission interval [Data type] Double–word [Unit of data] Seconds [Valid data range] 0 to 4294967295 Set a time interval used for transmitting logging data (fixed data only). EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 TIME For time display: 1 : “97/11/12 00:00” format is used. 0813 Data length of logging data [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Number of bytes [Valid data range] 0 to 65535 Set the data length of logging data. logging data is transmitted at connection time only.J. 10.

B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 0820 0821 0822 0823 0824 0825 0826 0827 0828 Machine name posted to the host computer (1st byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (2nd byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (3rd byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (4th byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (5th byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (6th byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (7th byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (8th byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (9th byte) [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 32 to 126 Set a machine name that is unique to each CNC and is required for the host computer to identify each CNC. 0 : The screen display switches to the alarm screen. 787 . Use ASCII codes in decimal for alphanumeric characters and blanks to set a machine name. #7 NPA #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3111 [Data type] Bit NPA When an alarm is issued while the FACTOLINK screen is displayed: 1 : The screen display does not switch to the alarm screen.

1.4 Using the FACTOLINK function on a small network An example of minimum setting required to operate the FACTOLINK function on a small network is provided below.1.168. 788 . “Microsoft TCP/IP property” of the personal computer (Windows NT) is used for setting. 78 ’N’ 67 ’C’ 50 ’2’ The Ethernet parameter screen is used for setting.1 255.0 None 192. 10BASE–T or 100BASE–TX CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1 CNC 1 IP address Subnet mask Router IP address IP address Port number NC parameter No. D On personal computer 1.1.168.0 None 9000/TCP 9001/TCP 9002/TCP Refer to “FANUC FACTOLINK Script Function Operator’s Manual (B–75054EN)”.100 9000 21 67 ’C’ 78 ’N’ 67 ’C’ 49 ’1’ PC 1 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway ocsnc ocscomm ocsapplication CNC 2 192.255. 820 NC parameter No. 823 192.0.100 9000 21 67 ’C’ The parameter screen is used for setting.3.J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. 192.168. 822 NC parameter No. 802 NC parameter No.255.1. D On CNC 1 and CNC 2.255.168.0 None 192.255. the server of the FACTOLINK function operates.255. In this example.168.1.255. the client of the FACTOLINK function operates.100 255. one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through FACTOLINK. 821 NC parameter No.2 255.

for example. J. Note that if an incorrect IP address is set.3.2 Parameter Setting of the FOCAS1/Ethernet Function This subsection describes the settings required to operate the FOCAS1/Ethernet function (or DNC1/Ethernet function) when the embedded Ethernet function for the Series 16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B is used.1 Notes on using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function for the first time CAUTION When using the built–in Ethernet function for the first time. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION J. 2 If multiple application software products or multiple personal computers access the CNC simultaneously.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J.3. resulting in decreased communication speed and degraded CNC screen display processing. NOTE 1 The FOCAS1/Ethernet function allows up to five FOCAS1/Ethernet clients to be connected to one CNC. the entire network can suffer from a communication error. 789 .5 Configuring a large network When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network. consult with your network manager to set an IP address. make various settings including IP address setting carefully and conduct a communication test sufficiently. J. the communication load on the CNC can increase. consulting with your network manager.1.2. subnet mask.3. and router IP address.

790 . set the parameters for operating the FOCAS1/Ethernet function. the parameters for the embedded Ethernet port can be set.J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device.3. enter and update data. The Ethernet parameter setting screen appears. 4 Press the [ETHPRM] soft key.2. 5 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key. When no option board is installed. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 7 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE PAGE . The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed. NOTE The parameters for the built–in Ethernet port and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other. 6 By using the MDI keys and soft keys.2 FOCAS1/Ethernet parameter setting screen Display On the Ethernet parameter setting screen. no information is displayed. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set.

B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. the data is displayed. 791 . EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION If data is already registered.

1. The valid input range is 5001 to 65535. Item MAC ADDRESS Description Embedded Ethernet MAC address Embedded Ethernet TCP/IP setting items Set the TCP/IP–related items of the embedded Ethernet. Example)100: Broadcast data is transmitted at intervals of one second [1000 ms] (= 100 10). Specify this item when the network contains a router. Set 0 when using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function or when transmitting no UDP broadcast data.168.1. This means that a value less than 100 ms cannot be specified. For details. (Example of specification format: “192. Specify this item when using the DNC1/Ethernet function.168. The unit is 10 ms. The valid input range is 10 to 65535. When using a port number for the DNC1/Ethernet function.J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Display item and setting items Display item related to the embedded Ethernet function The item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed. refer to “FANUC Personal Computer FA System Windows NT Version Operator’s Manual (B–75044EN)”.0”) Specify the IP address of the router.255. refer to “FANUC Personal Computer FA System Windows NT Version Operator’s Manual (B–75044EN)”. Specify this item when using the DNC1/Ethernet function. The valid input range is 5001 to 65535.255. Specify a UDP port number for transmitting UDP broadcast data. (Example of specification format: “255. Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK Description Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet. Specify a time interval at which UDP broadcast data specified above with a UDP port number is transmitted. Item PORT NUMBER (TCP) Description Specify a port number to be used with the FOCAS1/ Ethernet function.1”) Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.254”) ROUTER IP ADDRESS FOCAS1/Ethernet setting items Set the items related to the FOCAS1/Ethernet function. PORT NUMBER (UDP) TIME INTERVAL (NOTE 1) 792 . Set 0 when using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function or when transmitting no UDP broadcast data. (Example of specification format: “192.

255. and the performance of the network can be adversely affected.1.0 Router IP address: None TCP port number: 8193 UDP port number: 0 Time interval: 0 793 .B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. 2 The parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are set to the following default values before shipment: IP address: 192.255.1 Subnet mask: 255. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION NOTE 1 When a small value is set for the item of time interval.168. communication load increases.

0 None 192. the client of the FOCAS1/Ethernet function operates.255.168.1.3 Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network An example of minimum setting required to operate the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network is provided below.168.1 255.1 8193 192.101 255.2 8193 The arguments of the data window library function cnc_allclibhndl3 are used for setting. PC 1 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway CNC 1 NC IP address NC TCP port number CNC 2 NC IP address NC TCP port number 192.255. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. 794 . D On CNC 1 and CNC 2.1.255. one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through FOCAS1/Ethernet.0 None 8193 0 0 The Ethernet parameter screen is used for setting.J.3.168.255.1. the server of the FOCAS1/Ethernet function operates.168. 10BASE–T or 100BASE–TX CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1 CNC 1 IP address Subnet mask Router IP address TCP port number UDP port number Time interval 192.1.2 255.255.2.0 None 8193 0 0 CNC 2 192.168. In this example.255. “Microsoft TCP/IP property” of the personal computer (Windows 95/98/NT/2000) is used for setting. D On personal computer 1.1.

255.255.255. one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through DNC1/Ethernet.1 8193 Machine No.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J.168. 1 192.2 255.1. the server of the DNC1/Ethernet function operates.4 Using the DNC1/Ethernet function on a small network An example of minimum setting required to operate the DNC1/Ethernet function on a small network is provided below.2 8193 “Microsoft TCP/IP property” of the personal computer (Windows NT) is used for setting. 192.168.2. the client of the DNC1/Ethernet function operates. D On personal computer 1.1.255.1.168.1. Refer to “FANUC Personal Computer FA System Windows NT Version Operator’s Manual”.255. In this example.3.1 255.255. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION J. 2 192.168.101 255. D On CNC 1 and CNC 2.0 None 8192/udp Machine No.0 None 8193 8192 100 The Ethernet parameter screen is used for setting.1. 795 .168.0 None 8193 8192 100 PC 1 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway FANUC_C4_SERVER CNC 1 NC IP address NC TCP port number CNC 2 NC IP address NC TCP port number CNC 2 192. 10BASE–T or 100BASE–TX CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1 CNC 1 IP address Subnet mask Router IP address TCP port number UDP port number Time interval 192.

3.3.5 Configuring a large network When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. NOTE With the FTP file transfer function.3 Parameter Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function This subsection describes the settings required to operate the FTP file transfer function when the embedded Ethernet function for the Series 16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B is used. subnet mask. only one FTP session can be established with one CNC. and router IP address.3. 796 . J.1 Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time CAUTION When using the built–in Ethernet function for the first time. for example. make various settings including IP address setting carefully and conduct a communication test sufficiently.2. the entire network can suffer from a communication error. J. consulting with your network manager. consult with your network manager to set an IP address. Note that if an incorrect IP address is set.3.J.

3. set the parameters for operating the FTP file transfer function.3. The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION J.2 FTP file transfer parameter setting screen Display On the Ethernet parameter setting screen. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. enter and update data. 4 Press the [ETHPRM] soft key. When no option board is installed. 5 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. NOTE The parameters for the built–in Ethernet port and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key. 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. The Ethernet parameter setting screen appears.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. the parameters for the embedded Ethernet port can be set. 6 By using the MDI keys and soft keys. 797 . the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. no information is displayed.

J. the data is displayed. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 7 Switch the screen display with the page keys If data is already registered. PAGE PAGE . 798 .

) Specify a password for the user name specified above. Settings for up to three host computers can be made.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. Item PORT NUMBER Description Specify a port number to be used with the FTP file transfer function.255. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Display item and setting items Display item related to the embedded Ethernet function The item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed.255.168.) IP ADDRESS USERNAME PASSWORD LOGIN DIR 799 . An FTP session is used. (Up to 127 characters can be specified. Specify the IP address of the host computer.168. (Up to 31 characters can be specified. Item MAC ADDRESS Description Embedded Ethernet MAC address Embedded Ethernet TCP/IP setting items Set the TCP/IP–related items of the embedded Ethernet. so that “21” is to be specified usually. Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK Description Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.254”) ROUTER IP ADDRESS FTP file transfer setting items Make settings related to the FTP file transfer function. Specify this item when the network contains a router. (Example of specification format: “192. (Example of specification format: “255. Be sure to set a password.1.) Specify a work directory to be used when logging in to the host computer. (Example of specification format: “192.1.168.1”) Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network. (Up to 31 characters can be specified.0”) Specify the IP address of the router.150”) Specify a user name to be used for logging in to the host computer with FTP. (Example of specification format: “192.1.

931 to No. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. pressing the [CHAR–1] soft key enters “!”.J.3 Parameters Parameters 0020 The NC parameters related to the FTP file transfer function are described below. When a number other than 0 is set in each of these parameters. 2) Special character (No. [CHAR–1] to [CHAR–5] are displayed in the input soft keys for special characters. 931. 1) Special character (No. 4) Special character (No.3. 5) [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 32 to 126 NC parameters No.3. 800 . I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 9: Select the embedded Ethernet as the input/output device. 0931 0932 0933 0934 0935 Special character (No. Example) When 33 is set in parameter No. 3) Special character (No. 935 enable soft keys to substitute for characters unavailable with the MDI keys.

255.0 None FANUC FANUC Default CNC 2 192. 801 .0 None 21 192. (Windows NT 4.1.168. one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through the FTP file transfer function.255.0 Workstation is used as the OS for the personal computer. “User manager” of the personal computer (Windows NT) is used for setting.1.1. the FTP client operates as the FTP file transfer function.168.168.1. D On CNC 1 and CNC 2.1.150 FANUC FANUC None 9 PC 1 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway User name Password Login DIR 192.255.1 255.3.255. D On personal computer 1.150 FANUC FANUC None 9 The parameter screen is used for setting. 20 192. 10BASE–T or 100BASE–TX CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1 CNC 1 IP address Subnet mask Router IP address Connection host Port number 1 IP address User name Password Login DIR NC parameter No. “Internet service manager” of the personal computer (Windows NT) is used for setting.4 Using the FTP file transfer function on a small network An example of minimum setting required to operate the FTP file transfer function on a small network is provided below. the FTP server function operates. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION J.2 255.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. The Ethernet parameter screen is used for setting.0 None 21 192.255.255.3. “Microsoft TCP/IP property” of the personal computer (Windows NT) is used for setting.168.) In this example.150 255.168.

J. 4 Type data with MDI keys.168.3. When deleting character data already set. consult with your network manager to set an IP address. subnet mask. Basic method of data input The basic method of data input is described below. 2 Display the Ethernet parameter screen. 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 802 .1 as IP address data (a) Move the cursor to the item of IP address. enter SP (space).4 Communication Parameter Input Method This subsection describes the method of parameter input when the embedded Ethernet function for the Series 16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B is used.3. 3 Move the cursor to a desired input item with cursor keys. and router IP address.J. using an example of IP address input. NOTE When deleting numeric data already set. enter 0.5 Configuring a large network When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network.1. Example) Setting 192.3. 5 Press the [INPUT] soft key or the function key INPUT Procedure to enter the data. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J.

B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. (c) Press the [INPUT] soft key or the function key INPUT to enter the data. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION (b) Type 192.168. This stores the parameter in the nonvolatile memory of the CNC. NOTE To make the new parameter settings effective.1 with the MDI keys. or select the [RESET] soft key on the maintenance screen of the embedded Ethernet.1. turn the power off then back on. 803 .

EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Method of lowercase character input The method of entering lowercase characters when specifying a user name. When the [UNLOCK] soft key is displayed. password. The soft key display changes from [UNLOCK] to [LOCK]. For lowercase character input.J. 5 Then. Move the cursor to a desired input item with cursor keys. Display the Ethernet parameter screen. and login DIR is described below. Procedure 1 2 3 4 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 804 . uppercase characters are actually entered through MDI keys. press the MDI keys A through Z. press the [LOCK] soft key. 6 To enter uppercase characters. press the [UNLOCK] soft key. All of these characters are entered as lowercase characters.

2 Display the Ethernet parameter screen. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Method of entering a long character string The method of entering a character string longer than 32 characters for specifying a login DIR is described below. 805 . the processing for setting the character string “/NCDATA/NCPROGRAM/LINE001/GROUP002” is described. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. The cursor position and soft key display change as shown below. 4 Press the [STRING] soft key.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. As an example. 3 Move the cursor to LOGIN DIR with cursor keys.

type the remaining character string “02” with the MDI keys. then press the [INPUT] soft key. the same result can be obtained. but the character string is divided into “/NCDATA/NCPROGRAM” and “/LINE001/GROUP002” for two input operations. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 5 Type “/NCDATA/NCPROGRAM/LINE001/GROUP0” with the MDI keys. 6 Next. 32 characters. [Tip] If the maximum number of characters specifiable at one time. 806 . is not used. that is. then press the [INPUT] soft key. for example.J.

move the cursor to “/” prefixed to “LINE001” then type “/FACTORY0010” with the MDI keys. 10 Upon completion of character string input.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J.CH] soft key. This operation returns the cursor position and soft key display to the state of step 1. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 7 To insert “/FACTORY0010” between “NCPROGRAM” and “/LINE001”. then press the [DEL. then type a desired character with the MDI key. Finally. This operation deletes a character on which the cursor is placed one at a time. 8 To delete a character. 807 . and stores the set data in the nonvolatile memory of the CNC. press the [INSERT] soft key. move the cursor to the character to be overwritten. Finally. This operation overwrites a character on which the cursor is placed. press the [INPUT] soft key. press the [RETURN] soft key. move the cursor to the character to be deleted. 9 To overwrite a character.

“Parameters”. set the ASCII code of the character in a parameter from parameters No.3. 3 Move the cursor to LOGIN DIR with cursor keys. 2 Display the Ethernet parameter screen. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Method of entering special characters The method of entering special characters such as “\” unavailable with the MDI keys is described below. $. As an example. 808 . To enter a character other than these characters.3. 931 through No. 935.3. NOTE Those characters unavailable with the MDI keys that are used frequently such as :. For details. then press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. and _ can be entered using soft keys. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode.J. the procedure for setting the character string “PROG$” is described. \. see Subsection 17. 4 Type “PROG” with the MDI keys.

6 Press the [INPUT] soft key. 809 . EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 5 Press the [$] soft key.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J.

The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed. When no option board is installed. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Screen operation is required to switch between these two types of devices. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. 810 . 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. no information is displayed. 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 4 Press the [ETHPRM] soft key. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards.4 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES Procedure There are two types of embedded Ethernet devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card.J. The Ethernet parameter setting screen appears.

The screen for switching between the embedded Ethernet port and the PCMCIA Ethernet card appears. NOTE Information about the switched device is stored in the nonvolatile memory. 811 . 6 Press the [PCMCIA] soft key. So. A confirmation message appears. the previously selected device can be used directly. Press the [EXEC] soft key to switch the device. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 5 Press the [SWITCH] soft key.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. when you turn on the power next time.

1 FACTOLINK Function Display This section describes the operation required of each embedded Ethernet function. The screen shown below is a sample FACTOLINK screen. 812 .J. The FACTOLINK screen appears. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. 3 Press the [FALINK] soft key.5.5 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS J. 2 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. The operation of the FACTOLINK function is described below. Procedure 1 Press the function key MESSAGE .

The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. 4 When you press the [EMBEDD] soft key. a list of the files held on the host computer specified with the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed. The host file list screen appears.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. PROG 2 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 813 . If the usable embedded Ethernet function device is the PCMCIA card. When you press the [PCMCIA] soft key. a list of the files held on the host computer specified with the embedded Ethernet port is displayed.5.2.2 FTP File Transfer Function The operation of the FTP file transfer function is described below. When no option board is installed. J.5. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed. 3 Press the [HOST] soft key. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION J. the [PCMCIA] soft key is displayed instead of the [EMBEDD] soft key. no information is displayed. The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. 1 Press the function key .1 Host file list display Procedure A list of the files held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer is displayed. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed.

hiragana. 6 Press the [UPDATE] soft key to update the screen display.J. the screen display can be switched using the page keys PAGE PAGE . EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 NOTE 1 File names including kanji. the number of displayed programs may differ between the host file list screen above and the host file list (detail) screen described below. 814 . The host file list (detail) screen appears. or katanana characters are not displayed correctly. 2 Depending on the FTP server software. 7 Press the [SWITCH] soft key. 5 When a list of files is larger than one page.

This soft key is displayed only when 9 is set as the input/output device number of the CNC. and information displayed may vary according to the specification of the FTP server used with the host computer. This operation deletes a file held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer. This soft key is displayed only when 9 is set as the input/output device number of the CNC. This operation updates information displayed. This operation reads a file held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer to the CNC part program storage. The number of files registered in the directory (folder) of the host computer currently connected is displayed. and the CNC is placed in the EDIT mode. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION NOTE The host file list (detail) screen shown above is an example of screen display. D DELETE D READ D PUNCH 815 . This operation updates screen information so that a file specified by its file number is placed at the start of the list. and the CNC is placed in the EDIT mode. Display items D Number of registered program files D Currently connected host List of operations D SWITCH D UPDATE D STOP D SEARCH This operation switches between normal display and detail display.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. The number of the host currently connected is displayed. This operation outputs a file held in the CNC part program storage to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer. This operation stops [SEARCH] operation.

with the MDI keys. 3 When a host file to be deleted includes a kanji. when deleting a host file from the host file list (detail) screen by specifying its file number. 3 Type the file number or file name of a file to be deleted. 1 Display the host file list screen. 2 Press the [DELETE] soft key. “DELETED” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. 2 The information displayed at the right end of the host file list (detail) screen is recognized as a file name. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. or katakaka character. J.5. check that a file name is displayed at the right end of the screen.5. before specifying the file number. only a file displayed on the host file list screen can be deleted. 5 During deletion. 1 Display the host file list screen. 816 . switch from the host file list (detail) screen to the host file list screen then specify its file number for deletion.2 Host file search Procedure When a list of the files held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer is displayed. 5 During search. [Input format] <file–number> 4 Press the [EXEC] soft key. [Input format] <file–number> or <file–name> 4 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 2 Press the [SEARCH] soft key. 3 Type the file number of a file to be displayed at the start of the list with the MDI keys.2. “SEARCH” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen.3 Host file deletion Procedure A file held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be deleted.2. a file can be placed at the start of the list by specifying its file number. hiragana.J. So. NOTE 1 When a file number is used for deletion.

EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION J. 817 . 3201 is set to 1. with the MDI keys. For the host file list screen Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J.DAT. [Example of use] When a file with the file name O0001.DAT. however. 4 Type the file number or file name of an NC program to be input. NOTE When a file is input from this screen to the part program storage. the O number described in the file is input.2. all NC programs in the part program storge are automatically deleted before NC program input. 6 During input. “INPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen.5. [Input format] <file–number> or <file–name> 5 Press the [EXEC] soft key. the NC program in the part program storage is overwritten when bit 2 of parameter No. 2 If an NC program is input when bit 0 of parameter No. CAUTION 1 If the part program storage holds an NC program that has the same O number as that of an NC program to be input. 3 Press the [READ] soft key. 2 Display the host file list screen. enter O001. that the O number input to the part program storage depends on the O number described in the file named O0001.DAT held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer is to be input to the part program storage.4 NC program input A file (NC program) held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be read to the part program storage. Note. 3201 is set to 1.

6 During output. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. with the MDI keys. all NC programs in the part program storge are automatically deleted before NC program input.J. the NC program in the part program storage is overwritten when bit 2 of parameter No. [Input format] <O–number> 9 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8 PROG . CAUTION 1 If the part program storage holds an NC program that has the same O number as that of an NC program to be input. The program screen appears. 3201 is set to 1. [Input format] <O–number> 5 Press the [EXEC] soft key. Display the host file list screen. Press the [PRGRM] soft key.2. 818 .5. J. “INPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. Type the O number of an NC program to be input. Press the [PUNCH] soft key. with the MDI keys. 3201 is set to 1. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 For the program screen Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.5 NC program output A file (NC program) held in the part program storage can be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer. 2 If an NC program is input when bit 0 of parameter No. For the host file list screen Procedure 1 2 3 4 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. Type the O number of an NC program to be output. Press the [READ] soft key. NOTE The valid O number of a file to be input to the part program storage is Oxxxx (with xxxx representing a number) only. “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. 10 During input. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.

Press the [PUNCH] soft key. Type the O number of an NC program to be output. 10 During output. 1) NC parameter 2) Tool offset value 3) Custom macro variable 4) Workpiece origin offset 5) Pitch error compensation 6) M code group 7) Operation history data 819 .6 Input/output of various types of data With the FTP file transfer function.2.5. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8 PROG . “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. For the program screen Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. NOTE A file name to be output to the hard disk built into the host computer is Oxxxx at all times. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. The program screen appears. This subsection describes the input/output method.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. J. NOTE A file name to be output to the hard disk built into the host computer is Oxxxx at all times. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. enter O0001. with the MDI keys. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION [Example of use] When an NC program (O0001) held in the part program storage is to be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer. the types of data listed below can be input/output. [Input format] <O–number> 9 Press the [EXEC] soft key. Press the [PRGRM] soft key.

The file (NC parameter) held in the CNC memory can be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer. Press the [PARAM] soft key. Press the [PUNCH] soft key. restrictions The fixed file name PRAMETER is used. 820 . File name File format. Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Parameter input The file (NC parameter) held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be input to the CNC memory. During input. “UTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.J. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. restrictions Parameter output The fixed file name PRAMETER is used. Press the [READ] soft key. Press the [EXEC] soft key. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SYSTEM . Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. Press the [EXEC] soft key. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. During output. The parameter screen appears. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [PARAM] soft key. File name File format. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SYSTEM . “INPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. The parameter screen appears.

Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. restrictions The fixed file name TOOLOFS is used. “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OFFSET SETTING . Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [PUNCH] soft key. 821 . The tool compensation screen appears. During input. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. Press the [OFFSET] soft key.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. Press the [EXEC] soft key. File name File format. Press the [READ] soft key. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Tool offset value input The file (tool offset value) held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be input to the CNC memory. During output. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OFFSET SETTING . The tool compensation screen appears. restrictions The fixed file name TOOLOFS is used. Press the [EXEC] soft key. “INPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. Tool offset value output The file (tool offset value) held in the CNC memory can be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer. Press the [OFFSET] soft key. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. File name File format.

Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. 7 Press the [READ] soft key. File name File format. 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Workpiece origin offset output The file (workpiece origin offset) held in the CNC memory can be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer. 7 Press the [PUNCH] soft key. 6 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press the [COOR–SYS] soft key. 9 During output. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Workpiece origin offset input The file (workpiece origin offset) held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be input to the CNC memory. File name File format. The workpiece coordinate system setting screen appears. 5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. 5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The workpiece coordinate system setting screen appears. 6 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. 2 Press the function key OFFSET SETTING . 2 Press the function key OFFSET SETTING . Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. restrictions The fixed file name WORKOFS is used. 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. 822 .J. 8 Press the [EXEC] soft key. “INPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. 9 During input. 4 Press the [COOR–SYS] soft key. 8 Press the [EXEC] soft key. restrictions The fixed file name WORKOFS is used.

Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. restrictions The fixed file name PITCH is used. The pitch error setting screen appears. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [EXEC] soft key. restrictions The fixed file name PITCH is used. “INPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. Press the [PITCH] soft key. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Pitch error compensation input The file (pitch error compensation) held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be input to the CNC memory. Press the [EXEC] soft key. Press the [PITCH] soft key. Pitch error compensation output The file (pitch error compensation) held in the CNC memory can be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The pitch error setting screen appears. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SYSTEM . During input. Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. Press the [READ] soft key. File name File format. 823 .B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. Press the [PUNCH] soft key. “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. File name File format. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. During output. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SYSTEM . Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.

M code group output The file (M code group) held in the CNC memory can be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer. 9 During output. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 7 Press the [PUNCH] soft key. Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. restrictions The fixed file name M–CODE is used. File name File format. 4 Press the [M CODE] soft key. 6 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 7 Press the [READ] soft key. The M code group setting screen appears. 824 . The M code group setting screen appears. 4 Press the [M CODE] soft key. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. “INPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. 8 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 9 During input. 6 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. 8 Press the [EXEC] soft key.J. File name File format. 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. restrictions The fixed file name M–CODE is used. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 M code group input The file (M code group) held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be input to the CNC memory. 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.

“INPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. The operation history screen appears. 8 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 6 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 7 Press the [READ] soft key. Operation history data output The file (operation history data) held in the CNC memory can be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer. restrictions The fixed file name HISTORY is used. 9 During input. Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 6 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 9 During output. restrictions The fixed file name HISTORY is used. File name File format. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. 825 . 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. 7 Press the [PUNCH] soft key. “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. 4 Press the [OPRT–HISTORY] soft key. 4 Press the [OPRT–HISTORY] soft key. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Operation history data input The file (operation history data) held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be input to the CNC memory. File name File format. Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC. 8 Press the [EXEC] soft key.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. The operation history screen appears.

When no option board is installed. the [PCMCIA] soft key is displayed instead of the [EMBEDD] soft key.5.2. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. a list of the connection host computers specified with the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.7 Checking and changing of the connection host Procedure The host computer to which the FTP file transfer function attempts to make a connection as the current communication destination can be checked. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. If the usable embedded Ethernet function device is the PCMCIA card.J. 826 . 3 Press the [CNCT–HOST] soft key. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed. When you press the [PCMCIA] soft key. 4 When you press the [EMBEDD] soft key. PROG 2 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. a list of the connection host computers specified with the embedded Ethernet port is displayed. The connection host change screen appears. 1 Press the function key . no information is displayed.

5 The connected host can be changed by pressing the [CON–1]. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION NOTE The title of the host computer that is the current communication destination of the data server board is displayed in reverse video. login DIR List of operations D CON–1 D CON–2 D CON–3 This operation changes the connected host to host 1.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. or [CON–3] soft key. IP address. This operation changes the connected host to host 3. This operation changes the connected host to host 2. user name. Display items D Port number. Those values that are set on the Ethernet parameter setting screen are displayed. 827 . [CON–2].

no information is displayed. The Ethernet log screen appears. Procedure 1 Press the function key MESSAGE . The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. When no option board is installed. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.6 EMBEDDED ETHERNET ERROR MESSAGE SCREEN Display If an error occurs with each function of the embedded Ethernet function. The error message screen does not differ between the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. 828 . The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. 4 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key or the [PCMCIA] soft key. the error message screen for the embedded Ethernet function can be displayed. the error message screen for the embedded Ethernet function displays an error message.J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. 2 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 3 Press the [ETHLOG] soft key. The same screen is shared.

The format of date and time data is ddhhmmss where dd represents a day. the date and time data of the occurrence of the error is displayed. Configuration The embedded Ethernet log screen consists of the screens below. mm represents minutes. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 5 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE PAGE . and ss represents seconds. (1) EMB_ETH MASTER CTRL LOG screen (2 screens) Log screen used to set the parameters of the embedded Ethernet function and display error messages at the time of embedded Ethernet initialization (2) EMB_ETH FOCAS1/ETHER LOG screen (2 screens) Log screen used to display error messages related to the FOCAS1/Ethernet function (DNC1/Ethernet function) (3) EMB_ETH PMC LOG screen (2 screens) Log screen used to display error messages related to the PMC online monitor functions such as FAPT LADDER–III (4) EMB_ETH FACTOLINK LOG screen (2 screens) Log screen used to display error messages related to the FACTOLINK function (5) EMB_ETH FTP TRANSFER LOG screen (2 screens) Log screen used to display error messages related to the FTP file transfer function 829 .B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. To the right of an error message. hh represents hours. [Tip] The latest error message is displayed at the top of the screen.

EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. Procedure 1 Press the function key SYSTEM . The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. 4 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key or the [PCMCIA] soft key. The Ethernet maintenance screen appears.J. the maintenance screen for the embedded Ethernet function can be displayed. 5 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE PAGE . The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards.7 EMBEDDED ETHERNET MAINTENANCE SCREEN Display With the embedded Ethernet function. The maintenance screen does not differ between the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. 3 Press the [ETHMNT] soft key. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed. When no option board is installed. 830 . 2 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. no information is displayed. The maintenance screen enables operations to be checked when the embedded Ethernet function operates abnormally. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. a dedicated maintenance screen is available. The same screen is shared.

IP address Error (IP–address) The specified IP address is incorrect. and the results are displayed. Check the entered IP address. then press the [PING] soft key. 831 . Communication is performed three times with the specified communication destination. Enter the IP address of a communication destination through MDI keys. Messages displayed: Reply from IP–address This message indicates that a response was received from the specified communication destination and that the specified communication destination exists on the network. Request Timed out IP–address This message indicates that no response was received from the specified communication destination and that the specified communication destination does not exist on the network. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 6 The screen below is used to check the state of the communication cable and whether a communication destination exists.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. Check if the power to the communication destination equipment is turned on. Check also the parameter settings and network installation for errors.

and the other for an error detection count for reception. 832 .J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 7 The screen below is used to check the communication state of the embedded Ethernet function and the error detection count of the Ethernet controller. The screen consists of two pages: one page for an error detection count for transmission. By pressing the [CLEAR] soft key. Use this key to reset communication based on the embedded Ethernet function. By pressing the [RESET] soft key. the current communication device can be initialized and communication can be performed from the initial state. the error detection counters for transmission and reception can be cleared to 0.

EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 8 The screen below is used to check the state of each task of the embedded Ethernet function.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. #2 X C D W UDP X E D W Meaning Ethernet controller being initialized Data being processed(NOTE) Waiting for data processing(NOTE) Waiting for parameter setting Parameters being set Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initialization Being activated Waiting for connection from the personal computer Connection being processed FOCAS1/Ethernet execution disabled Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initialization Waiting for connection from the personal computer Data being processed(NOTE) Waiting for data processing(NOTE) Not executed yet. Being activated Data being processed(NOTE) Waiting for data processing(NOTE) 833 . Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initialization. Symbol MASTER CTRL E D W P S FOCAS1 #0 X E C O N FOCAS1 #1.

EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 Symbol PMC X D W FTP X D W FACTOLINK X D W Meaning Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initialization Data being processed(NOTE) Waiting for data processing(NOTE) Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initialization Data being processed(NOTE) Waiting for data processing(NOTE) Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initialization Data being processed(NOTE) Waiting for data processing(NOTE) NOTE A state change occurs between the states “Data being processed” and “Waiting for data processing” even when communication is not performed actually.J. 834 . 9 Information about the interface between the FTP file transfer function and CNC is displayed.

This counter is initialized to 0 at power–on.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. Indicates internal buffer management information when the FTP file transfer function is used. TOTAL SIZE READ POINTERWRITE POINTER 835 . then is incremented each time a certain condition is satisfied. Indicates the total number of bytes transferred when one NC program is transferred using the FTP file transfer function. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION Item EMPTY COUNTER Description Indicates a buffer empty count during NC program transfer from the FTP file transfer function to the CNC.

J. (The special tool varies from one vendor to another. the resistance between the backbone shield and central conductor is about 25 ohms (when terminating resistors are attached). a straight cable is used for connection between the hub and communication device.2 Check Items Related to Connection with a Backbone This subsection can be ignored when a network is built only with a hub to which the embedded Ethernet is connected. 4) Is the length of the backbone cable 500 m or less? 5) Does the cable (transceiver cable) connecting a hub to a transceiver satisfy the specified length? 836 .8.8.1 Check Items Related to Connection with the HUB This section describes troubleshooting and check items associated with the embedded Ethernet function. Usually.8 TROUBLESHOOTING J. 3) Are terminating resistors attached? S A terminating resistor (50 ohms) needs to be attached to each end of the backbone cable. S A special tool may be required for transceiver installation. Install cables away from noise sources. do not install a transceiver again.) 2) Are transceivers installed at correct intervals? S Transceivers need to be spaced from each other by 2. For details. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. (The backbone cable can be damaged. The general check items are listed below. refer to the relevant manual of each vendor. consult with vendors specialized in this area. 3) Is the power to the hub turned on? 4) The PCMCIA Ethernet card is used only with 10BASE–T.5 m.5 m or more. 6) Is the LED (for link display) of the connected hub turned on? (Some hubs are not provided with a link LED. Is a hub for 10BASE–T used when the PCMCIA Ethernet card is used? 5) Is the link LED turned on when the embedded Ethernet port is used? The link LED is not turned on when the hub is not connected or the power to the hub is not turned on. When a 10BASE–5 backbone is used 1) Are transceivers connected to the backbone cable correctly? S If the transceivers are connected correctly.) The LED is not turned on when the hub is not connected with the embedded Ethernet or the power to the CNC is not turned on.) S At a location where a transceiver was once installed. For network installation. J. 1) Is an STP cable used for connection between the hub and embedded Ethernet? 2) Is the STP cable connected correctly? In general. It is recommended that transceivers be installed at intervals of an integral multiple of 2. installation locations are marked on a backbone cable.

When a PCMCIA Ethernet card is selected and inserted. 2) Is the length of the backbone cable (total length of the cables) 185 m or less? 3) Are terminating resistors attached? S A terminating resistor (50 ohms) needs to be attached to each end of the backbone cable. 3) Is a correct router IP address set when communication via a router is performed? 837 . 2) Is a correct subnet mask set? S The subnet mask setting must match the subnet mask setting on the communication destination device. and can be checked on the parameter setting screen. However. S A unique MAC address is assigned to each PCMCIA Ethernet card.5 m or more? S The minimum allowable span between nodes (devices) is 0. the maximum allowable length of a transceiver cable is 50 m. 3) Is a correct subnet mask set? S The subnet mask setting must match the subnet mask setting on the communication destination device.3 Checking the Setting of Each Parameter This subsection describes how to check the minimum settings required for communication. 2) Is a correct IP address set? S Check if an IP address already specified for another device is set. MAC address display is provided.5 m. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION S Usually. 4) Is a correct router IP address set when communication via a router is performed? Checking the settings on the personal computer side 1) Is a correct IP address set? S Check if an IP address already specified for another device is set. the maximum allowable length of some thin cables may be less than 50 m. J.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J.8. Check the specification of the cable. When a 10BASE–2 backbone is used 1) Is the length of one cable 0. Checking the settings on the embedded Ethernet side 1) Is the MAC address of the embedded Ethernet displayed? S The MAC address of a embedded Ethernet port is set for each CNC.

then enter “ping NC–IP–address”. The example below supposes that the IP address of the CNC is 192. the cause is considered to be a hardware connection error and/or software setting error. 1) When a response is received (normal) 838 . Checking from the personal computer side An example where a personal computer (OS: Windows NT 4. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 J. The ping command is used to check communication. Check the hardware connection and software settings.7.4 Checking Communication This subsection describes how to check the state of communication between the CNC and personal computer. If no response is received from the remote device. Method of checking: Open the command prompt.8. “EMBEDDED ETHERNET MAINTENANCE SCREEN”. Checking from the embedded Ethernet side See Item 6 of Section J. Checking the connection status and settings If communication with the CNC is not satisfactory or fails from time to time.1.1. A normal connection has been established if a response is received.168.0) is used is described below. check the communication link by using the method described below.J.

ping packets are transmitted. Checking the influence of noise The method of checking communication errors caused by noise is described below. The ping command is used for this checking as well. The –t option of the ping command is used. the cause is considered to be a hardware connection error and/or software setting error. Until the Ctrl and C keys are pressed simultaneously. Check the hardware connection and software settings. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 2) When no response is received (error) If no response is received from the CNC.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. 839 .

Influence of noise from peripheral equipment (device) 1) Turn on the power to the machine with the embedded Ethernet function for which a noise influence check is to be made. 2) Press the emergency stop button of the machine to turn off servo/spindle amplifier activation. 2. 2) Count the number of lost packets. Influence of noise from the installed machine 1) Next. and ensure that communication is enabled. In general. If this number is greater than the number of Item 1 above. and insulate the machine from the communication backbone. Action: Locate the noise source and recheck the cabling to eliminate the influence of noise. 3) Count the number of lost packets (to which no response is returned). then issue a ping command from the personal computer. 840 . release the emergency stop state of the machine to turn on servo/spindle amplifier activation. the grounding of the machine or the grounding of the communication destination is defective. there is probably an influence of noise from peripheral equipment. Action: Check the grounding of the machine and the communication destination. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 1. then issue another ping command from the personal computer.J. the cause is considered to be noise generated by the machine itself. If lost packets occur in this state.

J. Hardware replacement is needed. D UDP INTERVAL TIME (???) IS INVALID: The setting (???) of the time interval for UDP transmission is incorrect. D ROUTER IP ADDRESS (???) IS INVALID: The setting (???) of the IP address of the router is incorrect. So. Correct the TCP port number. D TCP PORT NUMBER (???) IS INVALID: The setting (???) of the TCP port number is incorrect.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. display the log screen and check the error message to identify the cause of the error. Correct the subnet mask.9. 841 . D Embedded LANC SelfTest Error [???]: An error was detected when the LAN controller of the embedded Ethernet was initialized. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION J. check the display times of error messages. Correct the IP address.2 EMB_ETH FOCAS1/ETHER LOG Screen D TCP PORT NUMBER (???) IS INVALID: The setting (???) of the TCP port number is incorrect.1 EMB_ETH MASTER CTRL LOG Screen D OWN IP ADDRESS IS NOTHING: The IP address of the local node is not set. Correct the TCP port number. D SUBNET MASK IS NOTHING: The subnet mask of the local node is not set. Correct the clock of the CNC. D UDP PORT NUMBER (???) IS INVALID: The setting (???) of the UDP port number is incorrect. D Illegal Power–on Date or Time: The current time setting of the CNC is incorrect. Correct the time interval. Set a correct subnet mask. Correct the subnet mask and IP address of the local node. The error code is [???]. If an error occurs. The major error messages are described below. Correct the IP address of the router. This section describes error messages displayed on the log screen. Set an IP address correctly. Multiple error messages may be displayed for an error. the log screen of the embedded Ethernet function displays an error message.9 ERROR MESSAGES If an error occurs with the embedded Ethernet function. D OWN IP ADDRESS (???) IS INVALID: The setting (???) of the IP address of the local node is incorrect. Correct the UDP port number. D SUBNET MASK (???) IS INVALID: The setting (???) of the subnet mask of the local node is incorrect. D Illegal Broadcast IP ADDRESS: The broadcast address for UDP transmission is incorrect. J.9.

EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 D ALL TASKS (C1) ARE BUSY: The FOCAS1/Ethernet function or DNC1/Ethernet function is already engaged in communication with five applications. D Err ALREADY CONNECTED: An additional request is made for connection with a port already connected. when the embedded Ethernet is reset. Check the setting of the IP address. J.9.4 EMB_ETH FACTOLINK LOG Screen D FACTOLINK#1 IP ADDRESS (???) IS INVALID: The setting of the IP address (???) of the FACTOLINK server is incorrect. J. D (???) is not found: The host computer with which an attempt is made to perform FTP communication cannot be found on the network. Check if the power to the host computer is turned on and if the host computer is connected to the network correctly. 842 . Check the setting of the program number. This error message is output.9. Check the settings of the port number and IP address. The error code is [???]. If the cable is disconnected before communication is completed. D Err recv ( ) [???]: An error occurred during data reception. Check the user name and password. for example. when the embedded Ethernet is reset before communication is closed.J. for example. D Err accept ( ) [???]: An error occurred when a connection request from the personal computer is being awaited. The IP address of the host computer to be connected with is indicated by (???). The embedded Ethernet needs to be reset. The error code is [???]. Terminate unnecessary communication applications on the personal computer. This error message is output. D FACTOLINK#1 PORT NUMBER (???) IS INVALID: The port number (???) of the FACTOLINK server is incorrect.3 EMB_ETH FTP TRANSFER LOG Screen D Login User is invalid: The setting of the user name or password is incorrect. D Parameters are invalid: The port number and IP address of the host computer set on the parameter setting screen are incorrect. the embedded Ethernet may need to be reset and initialized.

xxx. 843 . For Ethernet–based communication.xxx. the TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) protocol is generally used.xxx. and only the host address of each communication device is unique on the network.) If a network supports no more than 255 communication devices.xxx xxx.10 GLOSSARY FOR ETHERNET TCP/IP This section briefly describes Ethernet–related terms. and class C.xxx Host address section xxx. the TCP/IP protocol is a generic term that represents the protocols installed in the transport layer and network layer. Networks are classified into three classes by group size: class A.xxx. A protocol is a set of rules used to ensure smooth communication between communication devices connected via a transmission line. an address referred to as an IP address (INET address) is used to identify a specified communication device among the communication devices connected via Ethernet. An IP address is four octets (bytes) long. class C is generally used.xxx.xxx.xxx Class A Class B Class C 0 to 127 128 to 191 192 to 223 (A hatched portion indicates the section of each address. Hierarchy Application layer Transport layer Network layer Data link layer Protocols such as ARP and RARP MAC layer Physical layer Hardware such as cables and devices Protocol/network service User services such as FTP Protocols such as TCP and UDP Protocols such as IP and ICMP In general. Usually. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION J. The IP addresses of all communication devices on one network have the same network address.xxx xxx. class B.xxx. The TCP/IP protocol is a part of the hierarchical structure consisting of the protocols and services indicated below. and the host address of the communication device. The descriptions below provide minimum information only. refer to relevant publications available on the market.xxx. an IP address is represented by four 8–bit (octet or byte) fields separated by a period from each other.xxx. Each octet can have a value from 0 to 255.xxx xxx.B–85014EN/01 APPENDIXES J. for communication using TCP/IP.xxx. So. For further information.xxx. IP address (INET address) With TCP/IP.xxx.xxx xxx. each communication device connected to Ethernet must have a unique IP address assigned. First octet value Network address section xxx. An IP address consists of the address of the network to which the communication device is connected.

IP addresses are internationally managed systematically.0. In Japan. specify 255. specify 255. Port numbers from 0 to about 8000 are called well–known port numbers and assigned to standard applications (such as Telnet and FTP). assign port numbers other than the well–known port numbers.0. the following network addresses can be used without formal registration: 1 address (10) for class A. For a network of class C.168. 16 addresses (172.jp/index–j.0.255. a formal IP address can be obtained from Japan Network Information Center (JPNIC).255. For a network of class B.J. So.16 to 172. visit the home page of JPNIC (URL:http://www. This means that before an IP address can be used. For a local network.nic. specify 255. If the network used by a user is a local network closed within the user’s environment (not connected to an outside network).255.0. When using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function and DNC1/Ethernet function. Subnet mask (mask address) Mask address for indicating the network address section of an IP address. unique IP addresses may be set freely under the control and responsibility of the user. and 256 addresses (192.0.ad.168. The assignment of port numbers is described in Assigned Numbers [RFC1340]. Transmitting a message to all nodes in the same segment Device or application that requests a service Device or application that provides a service MAC address (Ethernet address) Port number Broadcast Client Server 844 . the IP address must be obtained formally from the international organization.255) for class C. A unique address obtained from an international organization is used so that no address duplication occurs among Ethernet control board suppliers. The port number is a 16–bit integer used to associate the transport layer (TCP or UDP) of TCP/IP and a process of the application layer. and is used to identify each communication device on the MAC layer (lower part of the data link layer). EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION APPENDIXES B–85014EN/01 An IP address with its network address and host address all set to 0 or 255 is unusable.html) where the document for application released by JPNIC is available.0. For a network of class A. A MAC address is assigned to the Ethernet control board of each communication device. it is recommended that IP addresses with these network addresses be used for a local network. For the method of application.31) for class B.0 to 192.

471 Commands with M Codes. 493 Canned Cycles. 93 Alarm. 633 Checking Program Nos. 411 Command M Codes. 117 Automatic Power Supply Shut–Off. 132 Checking the Setting of Each Parameter. 473 Alarms. 836 Checking and changing of the connection host. 19 Battery Replacement Method. 22 Auto and MDI Operation. 516. 372 Additional Parameters. 189 Alarm Messages and Releasing Method. 483 Command Format. 192 [B] Back Ground Editing. 500 Alarm Message. 448 Changing OFFSET Data. 459 Checking Parameters. 450 Arrangement of the Letter Keys. 518 Automatic Turret Restoration. in Memory. 838 Checking Installation Requirements. 376 Calling a Program in Memory. 489 Center–through Coolant (Option). 178 Common to CNC Screen and Quick Screen. 468 Cleaning. 189 CNC Screen Switching. 46 Calculating the Flexible Feed Gear (Detection Multiply DMR). 596 Cleaning the #150 Suction Filter. 460 Commands in a Program. 465 Adjusting Thermal Displacement Compensation. 802 . 837 Cheek Items Related to Connection with the HUB. 365 “Tool Change” Key. 494 Address. 396 Additional Axis Control (Option). 626 Axis Movement. 132 Cancellation. 471 Center–through Pump Unit. 149 Changing Workpiece Coordinate System Data. 208 [C] Cabling and Phase Matching. 450 Appearance of the Coolant Unit. 161 Browse Mode and Edit Mode. 479 AI Tool Monitor. 446 Center–through Coolant Control. 727 Animated Simulation. 398 Additional Axis Cable for the Index Table (Japan and Export St. 355 AI High–Precision Contour Control Function/Modeler Control II Function (Option). 154 Check Items Related to Connection with a Backbone. 631 Basic Operations. 826 Checking Communication. 592. 358 Automatic Running [CNC Operation].B–85014EN/01 Index [Symbols] Basic Operation. 162 Automatic Tool Length Measurement. 574 i–1 Common to Screens. 37 Checking Operation After Installation. 483 Adjusting the Relief Valve. 152 Changing Parameters. 354 Adjustment Procedure. 415 Alarm Operator Messages. 88. 160 Automatic Operation Screen. 836 Circuit Diagram of Center –through Coolant and Compressed Air. 618 Blower Control Function (Option). 460. 571 Automatic Door. 482 Additional Axis Cable for the Index Table. 20 Command. 409 Automatic Turn–off Operation of the Touch Probe. 461 CNC Screen. 269 Appearance and Configuration of the Coolant Unit. 191 Communication Parameter Input Method. 284 Air Supply Shutoff Method. 179 [A] Acceleration and Servo Delay Compensation (Type A/B).

472 Controller Rack. 789. 32 Coolant (Option). 46 Connection. 476 Electric Power Supply Shutoff Method. 560 Coolant. 812 i–2 [D] Daily Check–up. 646 Dimensions of the System around the Coolant Outlets. 213 Descriptions of Screen Displays. 469 Coolant Supply. 132 Deleting the Program. 841 EMB_ETH FTP TRANSFER Log Screen. 485. 100 Detailed Specifications. 749 Diagnose/Alarm Screen. 656 Dimensions of the Table Surface and T Groove (nominal width: 14). 475 Diagnos Messages. 360 Coolant Circuit Diagram of Center–through Coolant Unit. 828 Embedded Ethernet Function. 412 Compressed Air Circuit Diagram. 156 Cutting Condition File. 568 Copy and Move (by Line). 217 Custom Macro Variables. 118 Creating a Machining Program. 361 Coordinate/Tool Compensation. 224 Convert to NC Format. 592 Daily Inspection. 145 Displaying Parameters. 796. 106 Copy and Deleting of NC Program. 775 Embedded Ethernet Error Message Screen. 842 EMB_ETH FOCAS1/Ether Log Screen. 94 EMB_ETH FACTOLINK Log Screen. 335. 609 Configuring a large network. 526 Default File. 12 Conversational Programming Function. 841 Embedded Ethernet and PCMCIA Ethernet. 470 Concentrated lubrication with Intermittent Oiling System. 492 Dimensions of the End of the Spindle. 778 Drawing Function and NC Statement Conversion Function. 99 Control. 802 Confirming the Current Status and Clearing. 577 Creation of NC Program. 657 Dimensions of the Inside of the Splash Guard. Operator. 461 Daily Maintenance. 339. 220 Deleting a Program. 126 Differences from Conventional G73 and G81 through G83 Codes. 128 Creating a program. 445 DNC1/Ethernet Function. 397 Constitution of Quick Screen. 449 Coolant Unit (Option). 347. 396. 295 Connecting the Compressed Air Supply. 128 Editing Function. 529 Cursor Jump. 146 DNC Operation Using the DNC Operation Management Package. 81 Coolant Unit. 653 Dimensions of the Machine. 278 Deleting a Line. 239 Creating a Program. 127. 341. 563 Editing Function of QUICK EDITOR. 464 [E] Editing a Program. 197 DI/DO. 586 Dry Run After Replacement of the Line Filter.Index B–85014EN/01 Compensation Method by Using Automatic Tool Length Measurement. 842 EMB_ETH MASTER CTRL Log Screen. 216 Counter. 774 Embedded Ethernet Maintenance Screen. 191 Diagnosis/Alarm. 212 Electric Control Circuit Diagram of Center Through Coolant. 830 Embedded Ethernet Operations. 513 Connectors. 51 Connecting the Power Supply. and Diagnostic Messages. 276 Data I/O Screen. 283 . 591 Data I/O. 188 Displaying and Changing Parameters. 229. 447. 650 Displaying Alarm. 429 Details of the Related Parameters. 110 Data Setting.

206 Features of QUICK EDITOR. 307 Input/Output–Input. 302 External Interface Signal Assignment.B–85014EN/01 Index Emergency Stop. 819 Input/Output Parameters for External Devices. 416 Fluorescent Lamp in the Inside Light Unit. 433 FACTOLINK parameter setting screen. 596 Installation. 779. 486 Input/output of various types of data. 659 Glossary for Ethernet. 783 Features. 593. 732 . 103 Explanation of Sample Program. 457 Installation Area. 843 Greasing. 444 High–Speed Skip Function (Option). 209 Input Signal Specifications. 613 i–3 Level Adjusting. 56 Line Filter. 776. 812 FACTOLINK Functions. 780 Fuse. 22 Entering Alphabetic Characters and Symbols. 174 Flowchart. 618 [J] Jigs. 669 Error Codes. 841 Example of Cycle Operation. 370 [F] FACTOLINK Function. 219 Entering a Macro Statement. 70. 797 Function. 353 Entering a Comment. 195 Input/Output Signals. 209 Error code displayed on LCD. 42. 58 Internal connection diagram. 390 Input Function of QUICK EDITOR. 601 Greasing and Oiling Interval. 457 Installing Leveling Bolts and Blocks. 377 [H] High–Speed Positioning and Drilling Canned Cycle Functions. 333 Enabling the Z–axis Thermal Displacement Compensation Function. 514 External Power Supply. 813 FTP file transfer parameter setting screen. 74 Index Table Function (Option). 496 Explanation of Each Screen. 816 [I] If The Safety Door Is Unlocked During Operation. 668 Error Messages. 816 Host file list display. 354 Host file deletion. 31 [G] G Codes. 512 Functional Differences between the Embedded Ethernet Function and the Ethernet Function Based on the Option Board. 334 Grid Shift. 478 Input/Output–Output. 618 FOCAS1/Ethernet Function. 206 Feedrate Override Dial (FEEDRATE OVERRIDE). 593 Inspecting Each Section. 43 Installing the Coolant Unit. 522 External Interface Function. 813 Host file search. 790 FTP File Transfer Function. 487 High–Speed Serial Bus (HSSB) Interface Function (Option). 4 Features and Notes of QUICK EDITOR. 737 List of Error Codes. 776 FOCAS1/Ethernet parameter setting screen. 220 Inspecting Cutters. 335 Internal Light (Option). 480 History of the Amounts of Estimated Thermal Displacements. 466 [L] List of Alarms (PMC). 218 Entering Alphabetic Characters. 477 Inserting a Line.

586 Measures When an Error Occurs During Tool Change. 158 Manual Running Execution During Automatic Running. 14 Optimal Process Editing Algorithm. 129 i–4 [O] Opening and Closing the Automatic Door (Option). 471 Manual Operation of the Spindle. 54 Mounting Jigs and Workpieces. 340. 522 Operator Message. 663 Operation of the Manual Guide. 421 Maintenance of AC Spindle Motor. 336. 175 Ordering information. 425 . 601 Mounting a Z–Axis Motor at Machine Installation. 443 Logging Data Function. 440 Lubricating Each Section. 375 Outline of the Function. 460. 449. 182 Miscellaneous Function (M Function). 350 Other Maintenance. 789 Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time. 346. 776 Locking the Safety Door. 413 Memory Running (MEM). 466 Maintence/Setting. 211 Other Related Parameters (Standard Setting). 502 Macro Program. 465 Other Maintenance Parts. 617 Maintenance Parts. 173 MDI Running. 124 Manual Guide. 364 Machining Program Check. 104 MENU OPERATION Key–triggered Screen Switching. 182 Method Using the Spindle Key (Manual) on the Operator’s Panel. 466 Other Operations. 103 Method Using the M Code. 818 NC Statement Output Function. 10 Machine Cleaning Coolant Control (Optional). 251 Macro Call Using G Code. 180 Measuring Limit. 745 Operator Messages. 576 Measurement Cycle Operation. 509 Notes. 782 Notes on using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function for the first time. 258 Optional Block Skip. 159 Manual Running [CNC Operation]. 253 Optimal Process Editing Function (Manual Alteration). 495. 71 Operating Positions. 460. 102 Menu Screen. 174 Machine. 78 [N] Names and Functions of the Parts. 521 Notes on Installation. Diagnos Messages. 79 Mounting Tools. 519 Manual Operation. 57. 146 NC program input. 471 M01 Stop (OPT STOP).Index B–85014EN/01 List of Functions. 134 Mist Collector Mounting Hole Dimensions. 796 [M] M codes. 65 Operation. 453 NC Parameter. 163 Measurement Cycle Function (Option). 72 Logging Data Format. 744 Operator’s Panel. 167 Memory Running Operation. 261 Machining Program Optimization. 274 Note. 817 NC program output. 168 Menu Operation. 75 Opening/Closing the Splash–Guard Door. 457 Notes on using the FACTOLINK function for the first time. 224. 658 Modifying a Program. 366 Opening and Closing the Door when the Power is Off. 255 Optimal Process Editing Function (Automatic Alteration). 173 MDI Command Execution During Automatic Running. 190 Operator Messages.

493 Rapid Traverse Rate Override (TRVRS LOW. 632 Restarting Automatic Running.P iM). 796 Parameters. and Registration Functions. 635 Rotation of the Spindle. 734 Pre–Tool File. 73 Retreat Operation. 234. 576 Preparation Before Transportation. 9 Periodical Maintenance. 346. 474 Parameters and Macro Variables. 493 Power Shutoff Methods. Check. 77 [S] .B–85014EN/01 Index Output of Measurement Results to Custom Macro Variables. TRVRS 25%. 92 Power Supply. 294 Programming. 306 Outside dimensions. 282 Preparation. 431 Relay Module. 340. 475 Restrictions on the Operation of the Machine with the Safety Door Open. 337. 594 Removing the Eyebolts for Lifting the Machine. 173 Restriction. 506. 789 Parameter Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function. 557 Program Creation. 634 Registering the Program. 501. 294 Registering Parameters. 182 [P] Packing. 457 Playback. 599. 175 Rating.P iM). 347. 341 Relay Terminal Block Module B. 91 Restarting Automatic Running After Feed Hold or Stop. 44 Removing the Packing Plate. 45 Replacing Expendable Parts.A. 753 Positioning Operation. 378 Removing Cut Scraps. 782 Parameter Setting of the FOCAS1/Ethernet Function. 115 Parameter Reset. 62 Pallet Setting Screen (Option). 618 Replacing the Line Filter. 133 [Q] Quick Conversational Programming (Super C. 592 Resetting Parameters. 39 Preparing Programs [CNC Operation]. 82 Procedure for Displaying QUICK EDITOR Screen. TRVRS 100%).A. 204 QUICK EDITOR Screen. 335 Relay Terminal Block Module. 504. 493 Return to Initial Point/Point R. 207 Quick Screen. 586 Output Signal Check Function. 772 Recommended Lubricants (Grease and Oil). 476 Power Supply Module. 493 Rigid Tapping Cycle (Function M29). 193 Releasing the Tool Trapping State. 191 [R] Rapid Traverse Overlapping. 414 Part Names. 341. 617 Pin allocation. 215 Related Parameters (Standard Settings). 97. 520 Overview (Super C. 207 Program Check (Graphic). 463 Replen